B0700be F PDF

inv_foxboro_brand_reg.
ai®
I/A Series® System

FoxDraw™ Software
B0700BE
Rev F
February 29, 2012
Invensys, Foxboro, AIM*API, FoxAPI, FoxDraw, FoxView, I/A Series, the Invensys logo and INTERSPEC are
trademarks of Invensys plc, its subsidiaries, and affiliates.
All other brand names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyright 2004-2012 Invensys Systems, Inc.

All rights reserved
SOFTWARE LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION

Before using the Invensys Systems, Inc. supplied software supported by this documentation, you
should read and understand the following information concerning copyrighted software.
1. The license provisions in the software license for your system govern your obligations
and usage rights to the software described in this documentation. If any portion of
those license provisions is violated, Invensys Systems, Inc. will no longer provide you
with support services and assumes no further responsibilities for your system or its
operation.
2. All software issued by Invensys Systems, Inc. and copies of the software that you are
specifically permitted to make, are protected in accordance with Federal copyright
laws. It is illegal to make copies of any software media provided to you by
Invensys Systems, Inc. for any purpose other than those purposes mentioned in the
software license.
Contents
Figures.................................................................................................................................. xxi
Tables.................................................................................................................................. xxv
Preface................................................................................................................................ xxxi
Audience ............................................................................................................................... xxxi
Revision Information ............................................................................................................ xxxi
Reference Documents .......................................................................................................... xxxii
1. FoxDraw Software Overview ............................................................................................. 1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 1
What is a Display? ................................................................................................................ 1
The FoxDraw Window ........................................................................................................ 1
Display Creation .................................................................................................................. 3
Copying a Library Object ................................................................................................ 3
Copying Objects Composed of Primitive Objects ............................................................ 4
Object Configuration ........................................................................................................... 4
Object Configuration Menu ............................................................................................ 4
Integration with IACC ......................................................................................................... 4
Display References ............................................................................................................... 6
Display Templates ................................................................................................................ 6
Synchronizing Displays and IACC ....................................................................................... 7
Synchronizing Changes Done Within Display Files ........................................................ 7
Synchronizing Changes Within IACC ............................................................................. 7
Displays .................................................................................................................................... 8
Display Properties ................................................................................................................ 8
Base Displays ........................................................................................................................ 8
Overlay Displays .................................................................................................................. 8
FoxDraw File Types ........................................................................................................... 10
Display File Conversion ................................................................................................ 10
Display Library Directories ................................................................................................. 12
Foxboro Display Library - Root Directory ..................................................................... 12
Location of Foxboro Display Elements .......................................................................... 12
User Display Library - Root Directory ........................................................................... 13
Default File Locations ........................................................................................................ 14
Data Directories ............................................................................................................ 14
Display Library Directories ............................................................................................ 14
Base Display Directory ....................................................................................................... 14
Example 1 ..................................................................................................................... 14
Example 2 ..................................................................................................................... 15
AutoCAD .dxf File Conversion .......................................................................................... 15
iii
B0700BE – Rev F Contents
AutoCAD Versions ........................................................................................................ 15

AutoCAD Format ......................................................................................................... 15
Filename Limitations ..................................................................................................... 15
Bugs and Anomalies ...................................................................................................... 15
Objects .................................................................................................................................... 16
Graphic Attributes .............................................................................................................. 16
Modifying an Object’s Graphic Attributes ..................................................................... 16
When No Object is Selected .......................................................................................... 16
Overriding an Object’s Graphic Attributes .................................................................... 16
Exposing an Object’s Graphic Attributes through Alias Names ..................................... 16
Dynamics ........................................................................................................................... 17
Conversions ................................................................................................................... 17
Conventions .................................................................................................................. 17
Connecting a Dynamic to the Process ........................................................................... 17
Exposing Dynamics ....................................................................................................... 17
Object Movement .............................................................................................................. 18
Display Conventions .......................................................................................................... 18
Custom Shortcut Menus .................................................................................................... 19
FoxDraw Color Definition Files ......................................................................................... 19
Comment Object ............................................................................................................... 20
Rules ............................................................................................................................. 20
Bitmaps in FoxDraw .......................................................................................................... 20
FoxDraw Bitmap Capability .......................................................................................... 20
Library Objects ................................................................................................................... 21
Components of a Library Object ................................................................................... 21
Aliases ............................................................................................................................ 21
Linked Objects Versus Copied Objects .............................................................................. 22
Linked Objects .............................................................................................................. 22
Copied Objects .............................................................................................................. 22
Library Objects Linked to Other Library Objects .......................................................... 22
Faceplates ........................................................................................................................... 23
Invensys/Foxboro Supplied Faceplates ........................................................................... 23
User-Built Faceplates ..................................................................................................... 23
Trends ................................................................................................................................ 24
Trend Configuration ..................................................................................................... 25
Trend Area Presentation ................................................................................................ 26
Examples of Trends ....................................................................................................... 28
Group Trends ................................................................................................................ 30
X/Y Plots ............................................................................................................................ 31
Configurable Items ........................................................................................................ 31
Example X/Y Plot .......................................................................................................... 31
X/Y Plot Appearance ..................................................................................................... 33
Read and Write File Operations .................................................................................... 34
Data Used by X/Y Plots ................................................................................................. 35
X/Y Plot Data Collection ............................................................................................... 36
X/Y Plot Data Files ............................................................................................................. 36
About X/Y Plot Data Files ............................................................................................. 36
Example of an X/Y Plot Data File .................................................................................. 37
iv
Contents B0700BE – Rev F
X/Y Plot Data File Keywords ......................................................................................... 38

Object Data Files ............................................................................................................... 38
Object Data File for X/Y Plots ....................................................................................... 38
Example Object Data File .............................................................................................. 39
Object Data File Format ................................................................................................ 41
Profile Plots ........................................................................................................................ 44
Profile Plot Pens ............................................................................................................ 45
Data Updates ................................................................................................................. 46
Profile Plot Data ............................................................................................................ 46
Installation Notes .................................................................................................................... 48
Foxboro Trends ............................................................................................................. 48
Accessing I/A Series Data ........................................................................................................ 49
Object Manager Variables .................................................................................................. 50
Object Manager Variable Types ......................................................................................... 50
Naming Limitations ...................................................................................................... 51
Bit Extensions to Variables ............................................................................................ 51
Momentary Timed Contacts ......................................................................................... 51
Files Required by FoxDraw ..................................................................................................... 52
Invensys/Foxboro Supplied Templates ........................................................................... 52
FoxDraw Data Directories ............................................................................................. 54
Default Configuration Database .................................................................................... 54
FoxDraw Settings .......................................................................................................... 54
2. Drawing and Editing ....................................................................................................... 55

Viewing Objects ...................................................................................................................... 55
FoxDraw Drawing Area ...................................................................................................... 55
Screen Co-ordinates ....................................................................................................... 55
Displayable Area ................................................................................................................. 55
Scratchpad Area ............................................................................................................. 56
Scroll Bars ..................................................................................................................... 56
Zoom Commands .............................................................................................................. 56
Height-to-Width Ratio .................................................................................................. 56
Grids .................................................................................................................................. 58
Palettes .................................................................................................................................... 58
Creating Palettes ............................................................................................................ 58
Copying an Object from an External Palette .................................................................. 59
Recognized Palettes ............................................................................................................ 59
Enabling Support of an External Palette ........................................................................ 59
Palette Name Appearance in the Tree Control ................................................................... 60
Copied Objects Verses Linked Objects ............................................................................... 60
Linked Library Objects .................................................................................................. 60
Copied Objects .............................................................................................................. 60
How FoxDraw Copies a Palette .......................................................................................... 60
Behind the Scenes .......................................................................................................... 60
The Copy Operation in Detail ...................................................................................... 60
Links Palettes with Red Objects ......................................................................................... 61
v
High, Medium, or Low Resolution Objects ....................................................................... 62

Palette Building Tips .......................................................................................................... 62
Editing .................................................................................................................................... 63
Undo Buffer ....................................................................................................................... 63
Clipboard ........................................................................................................................... 63
User Options ...................................................................................................................... 63
Drawing an Object .................................................................................................................. 64
FoxDraw Objects ............................................................................................................... 64
Reference Points ................................................................................................................. 64
FoxDraw Versus FoxView ............................................................................................. 64
Point Modes ....................................................................................................................... 64
FoxDraw Fonts .................................................................................................................. 65
Hershey Fonts .................................................................................................................... 65
Filled and Unfilled Objects ................................................................................................ 66
Object Detectability ........................................................................................................... 67
Making an Object Undetectable .................................................................................... 67
Restoring Detectability .................................................................................................. 67
Object Visibility ................................................................................................................. 67
Object Edge ....................................................................................................................... 68
Edge Style ...................................................................................................................... 68
Edge Width ................................................................................................................... 68
Edge Color .................................................................................................................... 68
Object Movement .............................................................................................................. 68
Default Movement ........................................................................................................ 68
Changing Movement Speed .......................................................................................... 68
Object Alignment ............................................................................................................... 69
Object Flipping .................................................................................................................. 69
Object Rotation ................................................................................................................. 70
Rules ............................................................................................................................. 70
Object Scaling .................................................................................................................... 71
Object Layout .................................................................................................................... 71
Object Snapping ................................................................................................................ 71
Point Mode’s Effect on Snapping .................................................................................. 71
Toolbars Command ........................................................................................................... 72
Order Commands .............................................................................................................. 72
Ordering Objects by Selection ....................................................................................... 72
About Arcs ......................................................................................................................... 72
Pie Arcs ......................................................................................................................... 72
Sector Arcs ..................................................................................................................... 73
3-Point Sector Arcs ........................................................................................................ 73
3. Object Configuration ...................................................................................................... 75

Object Attributes .................................................................................................................... 75
Display Building Tips ........................................................................................................ 76
Eliminate Edges ............................................................................................................. 76
Use Polygons Instead of Rectangles ............................................................................... 76
Use Polygons Instead of Circles or Arcs ......................................................................... 76
vi
Use Bitmaps Economically ............................................................................................ 76

Use Linked Library Objects instead of Reusing Symbols ............................................... 76
Isolate Dynamic Update Areas ....................................................................................... 76
Working with Objects ........................................................................................................ 76
Object Selection ............................................................................................................ 76
Precision Movement ........................................................................................................... 77
Object Focus ...................................................................................................................... 77
Moving the Focus .......................................................................................................... 78
Reference Mode ................................................................................................................. 78
Rotating and Scaling an Object ..................................................................................... 78
Operator Actions ..................................................................................................................... 78
Exposing Operator Actions ................................................................................................. 79
Select Actions ..................................................................................................................... 79
Move Actions ..................................................................................................................... 80
Set Text Contents Action ................................................................................................... 80
List of Operator Actions ..................................................................................................... 81
Open Display ................................................................................................................ 81
Open Overlay ................................................................................................................ 81
Close Display/Overlay ................................................................................................... 81
Display Commands ....................................................................................................... 81
Set Text Contents .......................................................................................................... 82
Relative Pick .................................................................................................................. 82
Unpicking an Object .......................................................................................................... 82
Momentary Contact ........................................................................................................... 82
Ramp ................................................................................................................................. 83
Connect Variable ............................................................................................................... 83
Move Horizontal/Vertical .................................................................................................. 83
Dynamic Attributes ................................................................................................................. 84
Dynamics ........................................................................................................................... 84
Conversions ................................................................................................................... 84
Conventions .................................................................................................................. 84
Connecting a Dynamic to the Process ........................................................................... 84
Exposing and Resolving Dynamics ................................................................................ 84
Display Conventions .......................................................................................................... 85
Table of Dynamics ............................................................................................................. 86
Dynamic Element Modification ......................................................................................... 86
Text Substitution ........................................................................................................... 87
Range Selection .................................................................................................................. 87
Obtaining Values from the Control Processor (CP) ....................................................... 87
Obtaining Values from the Local Database .................................................................... 88
Dynamics with Minimum/Maximum Values ..................................................................... 88
Color Dynamics ................................................................................................................. 88
Blink Dynamic ................................................................................................................... 88
Multiple Blink Rates ...................................................................................................... 89
Move Dynamics ................................................................................................................. 89
Move Horizontal Dynamic and Move Vertical Dynamic ................................................... 89
Move Path Dynamics ......................................................................................................... 90
Move Path Percent Dynamic .............................................................................................. 90
vii
Move Path Point Dynamic ................................................................................................. 91

Scale Dynamics .................................................................................................................. 91
Fill Level Dynamic ............................................................................................................. 92
Visibility Dynamic ............................................................................................................. 92
Filled Dynamic ................................................................................................................... 93
Fill Color Dynamic ............................................................................................................ 93
Fill Pattern Dynamic .......................................................................................................... 93
Edge Style Dynamic ........................................................................................................... 94
Edge Width Dynamic ........................................................................................................ 94
Edge Color Dynamic .......................................................................................................... 94
Text Contents Dynamic ..................................................................................................... 94
Text Color Dynamic .......................................................................................................... 95
Text Height Dynamic ........................................................................................................ 95
Radius Dynamic ................................................................................................................. 95
Arc Length Dynamic .......................................................................................................... 95
Rotate Dynamic ................................................................................................................. 96
Aliases ..................................................................................................................................... 96
Alias Syntax ........................................................................................................................ 96
Exposing and Resolving Aliases .......................................................................................... 98
Required and Optional Configurations ......................................................................... 98
Exposing Text Aliases .................................................................................................... 98
Resolving Text Aliases ................................................................................................... 98
Exposing Graphic Attributes via Aliases ......................................................................... 99
Resolving Graphic Attributes via Aliases ........................................................................ 99
Exposing Ranges via Aliases ......................................................................................... 100
Resolving Range Aliases ............................................................................................... 100
Data Formats ........................................................................................................................ 100
Numeric Format .......................................................................................................... 100
Automatic Format ....................................................................................................... 100
Integer (####) Format ................................................................................................. 101
Fixed Decimal Point (####.##) Format ....................................................................... 101
Exponential (###.###E###) Format ............................................................................ 101
Hexadecimal Format ................................................................................................... 102
Binary Format ............................................................................................................. 102
Bit Extensions .................................................................................................................. 102
Syntax .......................................................................................................................... 102
Dollar Sign Substitution .............................................................................................. 102
Bit Extensions for Trend Connections .............................................................................. 103
Examples .......................................................................................................................... 104
Bit Extensions for Operator Actions ................................................................................. 104
Bit State Table .................................................................................................................. 104
Bit Acronyms ................................................................................................................... 105
General Bit Acronyms ...................................................................................................... 105
Conversions .......................................................................................................................... 110
Continuous Conversion ................................................................................................... 110
Limits (High/Low Scale or Range) ............................................................................... 110
Reversing Direction ..................................................................................................... 110
viii
Discrete Conversion ......................................................................................................... 111

Bit State Conversion ......................................................................................................... 111
States ........................................................................................................................... 111
Threshold Conversion ...................................................................................................... 111
Numeric/Text Conversion ............................................................................................... 112
Numeric Types ............................................................................................................ 112
Text Types .................................................................................................................. 112
Read File Conversion ....................................................................................................... 112
Using a State Table to Display Text ................................................................................. 113
Using a State Table to Display Color ............................................................................... 114
Configuration Examples ........................................................................................................ 114
Creating a Tank with a Fill Level Connection .................................................................. 114
Creating a Numeric Text Update Field ............................................................................ 115
Creating a Rotating Needle .............................................................................................. 115
Creating a Ramp Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 116
Creating and Changing Text ............................................................................................ 117
Creating a T-Bar (Scale Dynamic) .................................................................................... 117
Simulating 3-D Animation (Scale Dynamic) .................................................................... 118
Creating a Relative Pick .................................................................................................... 119
Threshold Conversion Example ....................................................................................... 119
GEdit .................................................................................................................................... 120
Files Required for GEdit .................................................................................................. 120
Log File ....................................................................................................................... 120
Running GEdit ................................................................................................................ 121
Syntax .......................................................................................................................... 121
Parameters ................................................................................................................... 121
Syntax of the g_edit_fd.cfg File and Add Script File ......................................................... 122
Coordinate Systems .......................................................................................................... 123
GEdit Commands ............................................................................................................ 124
Table of GEdit Commands for Plots and Trends ........................................................ 124
Trend and Plot Configuration Commands .................................................................. 126
Trend Configuration Commands ................................................................................ 126
Plot Configuration Commands ................................................................................... 127
Plot and Trend Creation Commands .......................................................................... 128
Other GEdit Features ....................................................................................................... 128
Update Extents (UPDATEEXT) Command ............................................................... 128
Clean Display (CLEANDISP) Command ................................................................... 130
4. Window and Dialog Boxes ............................................................................................ 131

Parts of the FoxDraw Window .............................................................................................. 131
The FoxDraw Window .................................................................................................... 131
FoxDraw Title bar ............................................................................................................ 132
Menu Bar ......................................................................................................................... 132
File Menu .................................................................................................................... 132
Edit Menu ................................................................................................................... 133
View Menu .................................................................................................................. 136
Draw Menu ................................................................................................................. 138
ix
Object Menu ............................................................................................................... 141

Tools Menu ................................................................................................................. 143
Layout Menu ............................................................................................................... 144
Options Menu ............................................................................................................. 145
Help Menu .................................................................................................................. 146
Toolbars ........................................................................................................................... 147
Standard Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 147
Draw Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 152
Layout Toolbar ............................................................................................................ 154
Rotate Toolbar ............................................................................................................ 155
Floating Toolbars ........................................................................................................ 156
Displayable Area ............................................................................................................... 157
Scratchpad Area ........................................................................................................... 157
Scroll Bars ................................................................................................................... 157
Status Bar ......................................................................................................................... 157
ToolTips .......................................................................................................................... 157
Pop-Up Menu .................................................................................................................. 158
Tip of the Day Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 158
Working with Files ................................................................................................................ 159
New Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 159
Type Selection ............................................................................................................. 159
Template Selection ...................................................................................................... 159
Open Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 161
Save As Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 161
Display Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 162
Display Properties Dialog Box - General Tab .............................................................. 163
Display Properties Dialog Box - History Tab ............................................................... 164
Display Properties Dialog Box - OM Data Tab ........................................................... 165
Display Properties Dialog Box - Script Tab ................................................................. 166
Display Properties Dialog Box - Menu Tab ................................................................. 167
Display Properties Dialog Box - Overlay Tab .............................................................. 170
Display Properties Dialog Box - Statistics Tab ............................................................. 171
View Settings ........................................................................................................................ 172
Grid Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 172
Grid Dialog Box - Grid Settings Tab ........................................................................... 172
Grid Dialog Box - Grid Files Tab ................................................................................ 173
Working with Graphics and Text .......................................................................................... 174
Edit Text Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 174
Set Default Attributes Dialog Box and Set Selection Attributes Dialog Box ...................... 175
Set Default/Selection Attributes Dialog Box - Fill Tab ..................................................... 176
Set Default/Selection Attributes Dialog Box - Edge Tab ................................................... 176
Set Default/Selection Attributes Dialog Box - Text Tab ................................................... 177
Font Style Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 177
Linking Library Objects ........................................................................................................ 178
Link from Library Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 178
Link Faceplate/Trend Dialog Box .................................................................................... 178
Select Block Type Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 178
x
Select Faceplate Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 178

Select Palette Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 179
Palette Browser Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 180
Configuring Library Objects ................................................................................................. 181
Configure Objects Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 181
Configure Objects Dialog Box - General Tab ................................................................... 183
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Update Tab ................................................................... 184
Add Dynamic Update Dialog Box ............................................................................... 185
Continuous Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 185
Discrete State Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 188
Bit State Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 189
Configure Object Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 190
Threshold State Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 191
Bit Selection Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 192
Numeric/Text Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 194
Read File Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 195
Add Convention Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 197
Edit Convention Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 197
Edge Width Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 198
Rotate Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 198
Compound Block Browser .......................................................................................... 198
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Action Tab ..................................................................... 199
Add Operator Action Dialog Box ................................................................................ 200
Open Display Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 200
Open Overlay Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 202
Open Overlay More Attributes Dialog Box ................................................................. 204
Close Display/Overlay Dialog Box .............................................................................. 207
Display Command Builder Dialog Box ....................................................................... 209
Relative Pick Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 210
Momentary Contact Dialog Box ................................................................................. 211
Ramp Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 212
Connect Variable Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 213
Move Horizontal Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 214
Move Vertical Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 215
Numeric/Text Entry Dialog Box ................................................................................. 217
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Menu Tab ...................................................................... 219
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Exp. Graphics Tab ......................................................... 224
Edit Graphic Attribute Dialog Box .............................................................................. 224
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Aliases Tab ..................................................................... 225
Edit Text Alias dialog box ............................................................................................ 226
Configure Library Objects Dialog Box - Ranges Tab ........................................................ 227
Configure Library Objects Dialog Box - Dynamics Tab ................................................... 228
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Graphics Tab ................................................................. 229
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Configuration Tab ......................................................... 230
Configuring Trends .............................................................................................................. 231
Configure Objects Dialog Box - General tab .................................................................... 232
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Trend Area Tab ............................................................. 233
xi
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Pens Tab ........................................................................ 234

Configure Trend Pen Dialog Box ................................................................................ 236
Configure Objects Dialog Box – Grid Tab ....................................................................... 241
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Timing Tab ................................................................... 241
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Security Tab (Trends only) ............................................ 242
Configuring Plots .................................................................................................................. 243
Configure Objects Dialog Box - General tab .................................................................... 244
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Plot Area Tab (X/Y plots only) ....................................... 244
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Plot Area Tab (Profile Plots Only) ................................. 246
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Pens Tab ........................................................................ 246
Configure Plot Pen Dialog Box (XY plots) .................................................................. 249
Configure Plot Pen Dialog Box (Profile plots) ............................................................. 251
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Grid Tab ........................................................................ 252
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Timing Tab ................................................................... 253
Configuring Faceplates ......................................................................................................... 254
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Scales/Delta Tab ............................................................ 254
Edit Range Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 254
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Text Substitutions Tab .................................................. 256
Edit Substitution Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 256
Adding Conventions ............................................................................................................. 257
Display Convention Configurator Dialog Box ................................................................. 257
Display Convention Configurator Dialog Box - General Tab ........................................... 257
Display Convention Configurator Dialog Box - Update Tab ........................................... 258
Select Convention File Dialog Box .............................................................................. 258
Editing Dynamics/Connections ............................................................................................ 258
Edit Dynamics/Connections Dialog Box ......................................................................... 258
Unresolved Links Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 262
Verify Display/Selection Dialog box ................................................................................. 262
Setting up User Options ........................................................................................................ 264
User Options Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 264
User Options Dialog Box - General Tab .......................................................................... 264
User Options Dialog Box - Dynamics Tab ....................................................................... 266
User Options Dialog Box - Servers Tab ............................................................................ 267
User Options Dialog Box - External Palettes Tab ............................................................. 267
User Options Dialog Box - Monitor Tab ......................................................................... 268
Recover Backup Files Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 268
Font Setup Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 269
Object Browser Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 270
API Server Connection Utility ......................................................................................... 271
Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................................................. 273
Configuration Shortcuts ................................................................................................... 273
Object Selection Shortcuts ............................................................................................... 273
Drawing Shortcuts ........................................................................................................... 274
Drawing an Object ...................................................................................................... 274
xii
Editing Shortcuts ............................................................................................................. 275

Moving, Scaling, and Rotating Shortcuts ......................................................................... 275
Moving an Object or a Selection ................................................................................. 275
Scaling or Rotating an Object or Selection .................................................................. 275
Aligning and Flipping Shortcuts ....................................................................................... 276
5. Procedures..................................................................................................................... 277
Create an Object ................................................................................................................... 277
Creating a Base Display .................................................................................................... 277
Creating a New Overlay ................................................................................................... 277
Creating a New Library Object for Use in a Generic Overlay ........................................... 278
Creating a New Display using a Template ........................................................................ 278
Copy a Library Object .......................................................................................................... 279
Linking a Library Object .................................................................................................. 279
Linking a Bitmap ............................................................................................................. 279
Linking a Standard Faceplate to a Display ........................................................................ 279
Linking a Trend to a Display ............................................................................................ 280
Linking an X/Y Plot to a Display ...................................................................................... 280
Copying or Linking library objects from a Palette ............................................................ 281
Create a Primitive Object ...................................................................................................... 281
Creating a Circle .............................................................................................................. 281
Creating a Closed Curve ................................................................................................... 282
Creating a Curve .............................................................................................................. 282
Creating an Ellipse ........................................................................................................... 282
Creating a Line ................................................................................................................. 283
Creating a Pie Arc ............................................................................................................ 283
Creating a Polygon ........................................................................................................... 284
Creating a Polyline ........................................................................................................... 284
Creating a Rectangle ......................................................................................................... 285
Creating a Sector .............................................................................................................. 285
Creating a Three-Point Sector .......................................................................................... 285
Creating Background Text ............................................................................................... 286
Creating Scroll Region Object .......................................................................................... 286
Creating a Comment Object ............................................................................................ 287
Create Library Objects .......................................................................................................... 287
Creating a Template ......................................................................................................... 287
Creating a User-Built Faceplate ........................................................................................ 288
Creating a Palette ............................................................................................................. 289
Copying an Existing Faceplate to a Library Object ........................................................... 290
Creating a Generic Overlay .............................................................................................. 291
Creating a Library Object ................................................................................................. 291
Creating a Palette of Another Size .................................................................................... 292
Configure an Object’s Graphic (Static) Attributes ................................................................. 293
Configuring an Object’s Fill ............................................................................................. 293
Configuring an Object’s Edge .......................................................................................... 293
Making an Edge Invisible ................................................................................................. 293
xiii
Configuring a Text Object ............................................................................................... 294

Specifying a Hershey Font ................................................................................................ 294
Changing a Comment Object’s Graphical Attributes ....................................................... 294
Configure an Object with Animation .................................................................................... 295
Applying a Dynamic to an Object .................................................................................... 295
Editing a Dynamic ........................................................................................................... 295
Applying a Convention to an Object ................................................................................ 296
Converting a Convention into Individual Dynamic Attributes ......................................... 296
Specifying a Blink Rate ..................................................................................................... 297
Resetting an Individual Dynamic Element ....................................................................... 298
Creating a Dynamic Update Horizontal Move ................................................................. 298
Making an Object Invisible/Visible .................................................................................. 299
Configuring a Pipe with Fill Attributes ............................................................................. 299
Increasing the Size of a Pipe ............................................................................................. 300
Specifying a Bit Extension ................................................................................................ 300
Configuring an Overlay .................................................................................................... 301
Configuring a Background Text Object to Display Read File Data .................................. 301
Work with Conventions ........................................................................................................ 302
Configuring a Convention ............................................................................................... 302
Merging Conventions ....................................................................................................... 303
Configure an Object with Operator Actions .......................................................................... 304
Configuring an Operator Action ...................................................................................... 304
Configuring a Momentary Contact Action ....................................................................... 304
Using Momentary Contact with a Relative Pick ............................................................... 305
Using a Ramp with Relative Pick ..................................................................................... 305
Using a Connect Variable with a Relative Pick ................................................................. 305
Executing a Script ............................................................................................................ 306
Protecting an Action with a Protection ID ....................................................................... 306
Creating an Operator Action Horizontal Move ................................................................ 307
Creating a Base Display with Relative Pick and Open Overlay Operator Actions ............. 307
Configuring a Trend ........................................................................................................ 309
Configuring a Single Block Trend .................................................................................... 310
Configuring an X/Y Plot .................................................................................................. 310
Configuring a Base Display .............................................................................................. 311
Alias Tutorial ........................................................................................................................ 312
Prerequisites ..................................................................................................................... 312
Creating a Library Object Configured with Aliases ........................................................... 313
Using the Library Object in a Display .............................................................................. 315
Creating a Useful Library Object ...................................................................................... 319
Valve and Pump Specifications .................................................................................... 319
Creating a Library Object with Valve and Pump Specifications ................................... 320
Using the Useful Library Object in a Display ................................................................... 323
Linking the library object into a display ....................................................................... 323
Optional Configurations and Graphic Attributes ............................................................. 324
Setting the Optional Configuration ............................................................................. 325
Setting Graphic Attributes ........................................................................................... 325
Using Objects with Optional Configurations and Graphical Attributes in a Display ........ 327
xiv
Complex Objects or Nested Objects ................................................................................. 329

Object Specifications ................................................................................................... 329
Creating a Complex or Nested Object ......................................................................... 330
Using the Complex or Nested Object in a Display ...................................................... 334
Work with Multiple Objects ................................................................................................. 339
Modifying One or More Objects ...................................................................................... 339
Selecting an Undetectable Object ..................................................................................... 339
Hiding an Object ............................................................................................................. 339
Restoring Visibility of a Hidden Object ........................................................................... 339
Ordering Objects ............................................................................................................. 339
Spacing Objects Evenly .................................................................................................... 340
Operate on a Point ................................................................................................................ 340
Adding a Point ................................................................................................................. 340
Deleting a Point ............................................................................................................... 340
Moving a Point ................................................................................................................ 340
Setting a Reference Point .................................................................................................. 341
Changing and Checking a Reference Point ....................................................................... 341
Identifying an Object’s Points .......................................................................................... 341
Changing a Reference Point ............................................................................................. 342
Enabling Display Focus Mode .......................................................................................... 342
Snapping an Object’s Center to the Nearest Grid Intersection ......................................... 342
Snapping an Object’s Point to the Nearest Grid Intersection ........................................... 342
Snapping an Object’s Reference Point to the Nearest Grid Intersection ........................... 343
Move and Size an Object ...................................................................................................... 343
Moving an Object ............................................................................................................ 343
Moving Object Points ...................................................................................................... 343
Adjusting Arrow Key Precision ......................................................................................... 344
Moving an Object Horizontally or Vertically ................................................................... 344
Using Snap Gravity .......................................................................................................... 345
Rotating an Object ........................................................................................................... 345
Scaling an Object ............................................................................................................. 346
Perform Basic Operations on an Object ................................................................................ 347
Deleting an Object ........................................................................................................... 347
Copying an Object ........................................................................................................... 347
Duplicating an Object ...................................................................................................... 347
Cutting an Object ............................................................................................................ 347
Pasting an Object ............................................................................................................. 348
Determining Whether an Object is Copied or Linked ...................................................... 348
Work with Palettes ................................................................................................................ 349
Copying an Object from a Palette .................................................................................... 349
Enabling Support of an External Palette ........................................................................... 350
Copying a Palette Without Using the Palette Browser ...................................................... 350
Copying a Palette With the Palette Browser ..................................................................... 351
Work With Toolbars ............................................................................................................. 352
Displaying or Hiding Toolbars ......................................................................................... 352
Moving and Resizing a Toolbar ........................................................................................ 352
xv
Displaying ToolTips ........................................................................................................ 352

Perform Miscellaneous Tasks ................................................................................................ 353
Starting FoxDraw ............................................................................................................. 353
Obtaining Statistics about the Selected Display ................................................................ 353
Predicting Display Call-Up Time ................................................................................ 353
Viewing a Display in FoxView ......................................................................................... 354
Setting Maximum Undo Number .................................................................................... 354
Configuring Backup Capability ........................................................................................ 355
Recovering Backup Files ................................................................................................... 355
Converting a Display File ................................................................................................. 355
Moving Files .................................................................................................................... 355
Moving .g Files ............................................................................................................ 356
Moving Environment Files .......................................................................................... 356
Known Issues in Moving Files Between Platforms ....................................................... 356
Changing the Visibility of Comment Objects ................................................................... 357
Testing a Generic Overlay ................................................................................................ 357
Using the FoxDraw Help ................................................................................................. 357
Make API Server Connections .............................................................................................. 358
Retrieving a Server’s Address and Letterbug ...................................................................... 358
AW70 .......................................................................................................................... 358
AW51 Procedures ........................................................................................................ 359
Configuring Client Connections ...................................................................................... 359
Work with Fonts ................................................................................................................... 360
Adding and Deleting Fonts .............................................................................................. 360
Adding or Removing a Font ............................................................................................. 360
Appendix A. Display Edit or DEdit ................................................................................... 363

Overview of DEdit ................................................................................................................ 363
Replacing References in Display Files .......................................................................... 363
Generating Reports on Display Element Files .............................................................. 363
Using DEdit ..................................................................................................................... 363
Invoking DEdit from FoxDraw ........................................................................................ 364
Invoking DEdit from a Command Window .................................................................... 364
Supported Features and Parameters ............................................................................. 364
Connection Report ........................................................................................................... 366
Example Report ........................................................................................................... 366
Complexity Report ........................................................................................................... 366
Example Report ........................................................................................................... 367
Exception Report ............................................................................................................. 371
Example Report ........................................................................................................... 371
Where Used Report .......................................................................................................... 372
Example Report ........................................................................................................... 372
Dump File ........................................................................................................................ 373
Example File ................................................................................................................ 373
Editing Rules for Dump Files ...................................................................................... 375
File Statistics .................................................................................................................... 376
xvi
DEdit Window and Dialog Boxes ......................................................................................... 376

DEdit Window ................................................................................................................ 376
Find/Replace Tab ............................................................................................................. 378
File Stats Tab ................................................................................................................... 380
Text Replace Tab ............................................................................................................. 382
Command Tab ................................................................................................................. 383
Access Level Tab .............................................................................................................. 385
Aliases Tab ....................................................................................................................... 386
Ranges Tab ...................................................................................................................... 387
Dialog Boxes .................................................................................................................... 389
Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 389
Edit Alias Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 391
Edit Range Alias Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 392
DEdit Procedures .................................................................................................................. 393
Setting DEdit Properties .................................................................................................. 393
Selecting Display Files ...................................................................................................... 393
Obtaining Information about a Display File ..................................................................... 394
Replacing Compound, Block, and Parameter Names ....................................................... 394
Replacing a Text String .................................................................................................... 394
Editing Access Level ......................................................................................................... 395
Editing an Alias ................................................................................................................ 395
Editing a Range Alias ....................................................................................................... 396
Generating a Complexity Report ...................................................................................... 396
Generating a Connection Report ...................................................................................... 397
Generating an Exception Report ...................................................................................... 397
Dumping and Uploading a Display File ........................................................................... 397
Command Window ......................................................................................................... 398
Generating a Where Used Report ................................................................................ 398
Generating a Connection Report ................................................................................. 398
Generating a Complexity Report ................................................................................. 398
Generating an Exception Report .................................................................................. 398
Replacing any Combination of Compound, Block, and Parameter Strings .................. 399
Validating Connections ............................................................................................... 399
Replacing any Combination of Compound, Block, and
Parameter Strings with Matching ................................................................................. 399
Writing Command Line Help Information to a File .................................................... 399
Changing the Log File’s Path and Name ..................................................................... 399
Replacing Any Text String ........................................................................................... 399
Creating a Dump File .................................................................................................. 400
Uploading a Dump File ............................................................................................... 400
Showing All Aliases in Dump Report .......................................................................... 400
Showing Parts List in Complexity Report .................................................................... 400
Listing Configured Points Only in Complexity Report ................................................ 400
Matching Whole Find String ....................................................................................... 400
Replacing Aliases ......................................................................................................... 400
Replacing Range Aliases ............................................................................................... 401
Using Spaces in Match, Find, and Replace Strings ....................................................... 401
xvii
Appendix B. Display Convert Utility................................................................................. 403

Convert Utility ...................................................................................................................... 403
Conversions ...................................................................................................................... 403
AutoCAD Tips ................................................................................................................. 404
Convert Display Files Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 405
Converting Display Files and Library Objects ....................................................................... 407
Converting Displays from the Command Line ...................................................................... 408
Changing Foxboro Display File Format ........................................................................... 408
Copying Display Manager Displays .................................................................................. 408
Converting the Displays ................................................................................................... 409
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 410
Converting Displays with Bitmaps .............................................................................. 410
Upgrading Displays ............................................................................................................... 411
Display Convert Utility - Library Objects Having First Character as Numeric ............ 413
Converting Customized Markers ........................................................................................... 416
Creating Bitmap Display Bar Files ........................................................................................ 417
Converting 10x Displays/Library Objects to 9x ..................................................................... 417
Appendix C. Widescreen Conversion for Displays............................................................. 421

Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 421
fdf_wsmfdf Conversion Utility .............................................................................................. 424
Backup Files ..................................................................................................................... 425
Viewing Log Files ............................................................................................................. 426
Converting Multiple Files ................................................................................................ 427
Converting Using Folders ................................................................................................. 427
Converting Files in Subdirectories Recursively ................................................................. 427
Display Files That Do Not Convert Or Cannot Be Converted ......................................... 427
Converting Files through FoxDraw .................................................................................. 428
Displays After Conversion ................................................................................................ 431
Viewing Displays in FoxView ................................................................................................ 432
Conversion of Overlays ......................................................................................................... 433
Overlay Windows ............................................................................................................. 433
Standard Overlays ............................................................................................................ 434
Custom Overlays .............................................................................................................. 436
Additional Notes on Converting Overlays ........................................................................ 437
Appendix D. External Palette Browser .............................................................................. 439

Overview ............................................................................................................................... 439
External Palettes ............................................................................................................... 439
Palette Browser Utility ..................................................................................................... 439
Palette Browser Versus FoxDraw ................................................................................. 439
Using the Palette Browser ............................................................................................ 440
Two Directory Levels .................................................................................................. 440
xviii
Directory Preservation ................................................................................................. 440

How Palette Browser Copies Palettes ................................................................................ 441
Copying an External Palette ........................................................................................ 441
The Copy Operation ................................................................................................... 441
Directory Structure Preservation .................................................................................. 442
Palette Browser Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 442
Appendix E. Frequently Asked Questions.......................................................................... 443

How do I colorize gray 3D objects? ............................................................................. 443
How do I import a bitmap? ......................................................................................... 444
Why do some .dfx files not import from the Convert dialog box? ................................ 445
What is the difference between copied and linked objects in displays? ......................... 445
How do I change the background color of trend objects? ............................................. 446
I saw the message “Saved in version 6 format” when I saved my display.
What does this mean? .................................................................................................. 447
Appendix F. Glossary......................................................................................................... 449
Appendix G. Reserved Keywords (Not For Use in Foxboro Display Files)......................... 455
Index .................................................................................................................................. 457
xix
xx
Figures
1-1. FoxDraw Window - Standard Definition (4:3 Aspect Ratio) ......................................... 2
1-2. FoxDraw Window - Widescreen (16:9 Aspect Ratio) .................................................... 2
1-3. Reference Object Parameters in IACC .......................................................................... 5
1-4. Foxboro Display Files Converted from 4:3 Aspect Ratio to
Widescreen 16:9 Aspect Ratio ..................................................................................... 12
1-5. Color Definition File .................................................................................................. 19
1-6. Faceplate ..................................................................................................................... 23
1-7. Trend .......................................................................................................................... 24
1-8. Trend Example #1 ...................................................................................................... 28
1-9. Trend Example #2 ...................................................................................................... 29
1-10. Trend Example #3 ...................................................................................................... 30
1-11. X/Y Plot Example ........................................................................................................ 32
1-12. An X/Y Plot With More Than One Plotted Pair. ........................................................ 33
1-13. Profile Plot Example ................................................................................................... 44
1-14. API Server Connection Utility .................................................................................... 50
2-1. Screen Co-ordinates .................................................................................................... 55
2-2. Palette ......................................................................................................................... 58
2-3. Palette (links_pipes) .................................................................................................... 62
2-4. Scaling an Object in Point Mode ................................................................................ 65
2-5. Hershey Fonts ............................................................................................................. 66
3-1. Focused Objects .......................................................................................................... 77
3-2. Example of a Temperature Indicator in a Thermometer .............................................. 83
4-1. FoxDraw Window .................................................................................................... 131
4-2. File Menu ................................................................................................................. 132
4-3. Edit Menu ................................................................................................................ 134
4-4. View Menu ............................................................................................................... 136
4-5. Draw Menu .............................................................................................................. 139
4-6. Object Menu ............................................................................................................ 141
4-7. Tools Menu .............................................................................................................. 143
4-8. Layout Menu ............................................................................................................ 144
4-9. Options Menu .......................................................................................................... 145
4-10. Help Menu ............................................................................................................... 146
4-11. Standard Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 147
4-12. Draw Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 152
4-13. Layout Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 154
4-14. Rotate Toolbar .......................................................................................................... 155
4-15. Tip Of the Day Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 158
4-16. Display Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................... 165
4-17. Display Properties - Script Tab ................................................................................. 166
4-18. Display Properties - Menu Tab ................................................................................. 167
4-19. Configure Menu Item Dialog Box ............................................................................ 168
4-20. Select Palette Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 179
4-21. Open Overlay Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 202
4-22. Open Overlay More Attributes Dialog Box ............................................................... 204
xxi
B0700BE – Rev F Figures
4-23. Close Display/Overlay Dialog Box ............................................................................ 207

4-24. Configure Objects - Menu Tab ................................................................................. 219
4-25. Configure Menu Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 221
4-26. Configure Menu Item Dialog Box ............................................................................ 222
4-27. User Options Dialog Box - Widescreen Preferences .................................................. 266
4-28. API Server Connection Utility Dialog Box ................................................................ 272
5-1. Grouped Objects ....................................................................................................... 299
5-2. Pipe Examples ........................................................................................................... 300
5-3. Valve Examples ......................................................................................................... 307
5-4. Relative Pick Command Builder - Dialog Box .......................................................... 308
5-5. Configure Objects Dialog Box .................................................................................. 313
5-6. Text Contents Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 314
5-7. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Aliases Tab ............................................................. 315
5-8. Edit Text Alias Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 316
5-9. Text Contents Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 317
5-11. Verify Display Option ............................................................................................... 318
5-12. TextBox Example ...................................................................................................... 320
5-13. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Update Tab ............................................................ 325
5-14. Select Graphic Attribute Dialog Box ......................................................................... 326
5-15. Edit Graphic Attribute Name Dialog Box ................................................................. 326
5-17. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Dynamics Tab ........................................................ 328
5-18. Fill Color Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 328
5-19. Tank with Input and Output Flow ........................................................................... 329
5-20. Tank with Output Flow ............................................................................................ 329
5-21. Fill Level Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 330
5-22. Edit Text Alias Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 331
5-24. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Exp. Graphics Tab .................................................. 333
5-26. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Ranges Tab ............................................................. 335
5-27. Edit Range Alias - Dialog Box ................................................................................... 335
5-28. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Graphics Tab .......................................................... 336
5-29. Display in FoxDraw .................................................................................................. 337
5-30. Display in FoxView ................................................................................................... 338
A-1. Find/Replace Tab in DEdit Window ........................................................................ 378
A-2. File Stats Tab in DEdit Window ............................................................................... 380
A-3. Text Replace Tab in DEdit Window ......................................................................... 382
A-4. Command Tab in DEdit Window ............................................................................ 383
A-5. Access Level Tab in DEdit Window .......................................................................... 385
A-6. Aliases Tab in DEdit Window .................................................................................. 386
A-7. Ranges Tab in DEdit Window .................................................................................. 388
A-8. Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 389
A-9. Edit Alias Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 391
A-10. Edit Range Alias Dialog Box (1 of 2) ......................................................................... 392
A-11. Edit Range Alias Dialog Box (2 of 2) ......................................................................... 392
C-1. Display Canvas in FoxDraw 10.2.3 (or Earlier) As Shown in Widescreen Monitor
xxii
Figures B0700BE – Rev F
(1920x1080 Resolution) ........................................................................................... 421

C-2. Display Canvas in FoxDraw 10.2.4 (or Later) Shown in Widescreen Monitor
(1920x1080 Resolution) ........................................................................................... 422
C-3. FoxDraw Displays Shown in Widescreen Monitor (Pre-Conversion) ........................ 423
C-4. FoxDraw Display Shown in Widescreen Monitor (After Conversion) ....................... 423
C-5. Converted and Backed Up FoxDraw Display Files .................................................... 425
C-6. Conversion Successful Message ................................................................................. 426
C-7. Conversion Failed Message ....................................................................................... 426
C-8. User Options Dialog Box - Widescreen Preferences .................................................. 428
C-9. Conversion Confirmation Dialog Box ....................................................................... 430
C-10. Displays After Conversion ......................................................................................... 431
C-11. Legacy Display Viewed on Widescreen Monitor ....................................................... 432
C-12. Legacy Display Converted and Viewed on a Widescreen Monitor ............................. 433
C-13. 1/8 Standard Overlay Before and After Conversion ................................................... 435
C-14. Unconverted Custom Overlay Windows ................................................................... 436
C-15. Converted Custom Overlay Windows ....................................................................... 437
xxiii
B0700BE – Rev F Figures
xxiv
Tables
1-1. Object Types ................................................................................................................. 3
1-2. Link Commands ........................................................................................................... 3
1-3. Display Types ............................................................................................................... 9
1-4. File Types ................................................................................................................... 10
1-5. Display Element - Directory Location ......................................................................... 13
1-6. Trend Options ............................................................................................................ 26
1-7. Color Representation in an X/Y Plot ........................................................................... 32
1-8. X/Y Plot Data File Keywords ...................................................................................... 38
1-9. Object Data File Keywords ......................................................................................... 42
1-10. Contents of Data Arrays .............................................................................................. 47
1-11. Foxboro Trend Types ................................................................................................. 48
1-12. Variable Types for Object Manager Variables ............................................................. 50
1-13. Naming Limitations of Object Manager Variables ...................................................... 51
1-14. Template and Grid Sizes used by FoxDraw ................................................................. 52
1-15. Template and Grid Sizes used by FoxDraw (for Widescreen Displays/Overlays) ......... 53
2-1. Zoom Commands ....................................................................................................... 56
2-2. Point Mode Types ...................................................................................................... 65
2-3. Object Detectability .................................................................................................... 67
2-4. Object Alignment Commands and Buttons ................................................................ 69
2-5. Flip Commands and Buttons ...................................................................................... 70
2-6. Point Modes ............................................................................................................... 71
2-7. Toolbar Types ............................................................................................................. 72
3-1. Object Selection .......................................................................................................... 77
3-2. Object Focus Commands ............................................................................................ 78
3-3. Select Actions .............................................................................................................. 80
3-4. Table of Dynamics ...................................................................................................... 86
3-5. Minimum/Maximum Values of Dynamics .................................................................. 88
3-6. Scale Dynamics ........................................................................................................... 91
3-7. Conversion Information .............................................................................................. 94
3-8. Examples of Data Types ............................................................................................ 101
3-9. Integer Data Type ..................................................................................................... 101
3-10. Fixed Decimal Data Type ......................................................................................... 101
3-11. Exponential Data Type ............................................................................................. 101
3-12. Hexadecimal Format ................................................................................................. 102
3-13. Binary Format ........................................................................................................... 102
3-14. Bit Extensions for Trend Connections ...................................................................... 103
3-15. Bit Extensions for Operator Actions .......................................................................... 104
3-16. Bit State .................................................................................................................... 104
3-17. ALMSTA Bit Acronyms ............................................................................................ 105
3-18. ALMOPT/INHSTA Bit Acronyms ........................................................................... 106
3-19. BLKSTA Bit Acronyms ............................................................................................. 107
3-20. INHALM Bit Acronyms ........................................................................................... 109
3-21. Conversion Types ..................................................................................................... 110
3-22. Logical Operators ...................................................................................................... 111
xxv
B0700BE – Rev F Tables
3-23. State Table ................................................................................................................ 113

3-24. Attribute State Table ................................................................................................. 113
3-25. State Table for Color ................................................................................................. 114
3-26. Attribute State Table ................................................................................................. 114
3-27. Threshold States ........................................................................................................ 120
3-28. GEdit Text Files ........................................................................................................ 120
3-29. GEdit Parameters ...................................................................................................... 121
3-30. GEdit Script Commands ........................................................................................... 122
3-31. Comparison of Coordinate Locations ........................................................................ 123
3-32. GEdit Commands for Plots and Trends .................................................................... 124
4-1. File Menu - Options ................................................................................................. 132
4-2. Edit Menu - Options ................................................................................................ 134
4-3. View Menu - Options ............................................................................................... 136
4-4. Draw Menu - Options .............................................................................................. 139
4-5. Object Menu - Options ............................................................................................ 141
4-6. Tools Menu - Options .............................................................................................. 143
4-7. Layout Menu - Options ............................................................................................ 144
4-8. Options Menu - Options .......................................................................................... 145
4-9. Help Menu - Options ............................................................................................... 146
4-10. Standard Toolbar - Options ...................................................................................... 147
4-11. Draw Toolbar - Options ........................................................................................... 152
4-12. Layout Toolbar - Options ......................................................................................... 154
4-13. Rotate Toolbar - Options .......................................................................................... 156
4-14. Floating Toolbar - Options ....................................................................................... 156
4-15. Object Types ............................................................................................................. 159
4-16. Object Directories ..................................................................................................... 162
4-17. File Data Group Box ................................................................................................. 163
4-18. User Data Group Box ............................................................................................... 164
4-19. Menu Tab of Display Properties Dialog Box - Options ............................................. 168
4-20. Configure Menu Item - Options ............................................................................... 169
4-21. Display Command Builder Dialog Box ..................................................................... 169
4-22. Overlay Tab of Display Properties Dialog Box - Options .......................................... 170
4-23. Statistics Tab of Display Properties Dialog Box - Options ......................................... 171
4-24. Grid Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 172
4-25. Grid Settings Tab of Grid Dialog Box - Options ....................................................... 172
4-26. Grid Files Tab of Grid Dialog Box - Options ............................................................ 173
4-27. Types of Dialogs - Graphic Attributes ....................................................................... 175
4-28. Fill Tab of Set Default/Selection Attributes - Options ............................................... 176
4-29. Edge Tab of Set Default/Selection Attributes - Options ........................................... 176
4-30. Text Tab of Set Default/Selection Attributes - Options ............................................. 177
4-31. True Type Information ............................................................................................. 177
4-32. Link Faceplate/Trend Dialog Box - Options ............................................................. 178
4-33. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options .................................................................. 181
4-34. Left side of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options ................................................ 182
4-35. Update Tab of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options .......................................... 184
4-36. Dynamics Table - Options ........................................................................................ 184
4-37. Scales Group Box - Options ...................................................................................... 186
4-38. Options Group Box .................................................................................................. 187
xxvi
Tables B0700BE – Rev F
4-39. Discrete State Dialog Box - Options ......................................................................... 188

4-41. Bit State Dialog Box - Options .................................................................................. 189
4-42. Configure Object Dialog Box - Options ................................................................... 190
4-43. Threshold State Dialog Box - Options ...................................................................... 191
4-44. Minimum/Maximum Values of Dynamics ................................................................ 192
4-46. Priority (PRI) Options .............................................................................................. 193
4-47. Logical Operator buttons .......................................................................................... 193
4-48. Numeric/Text Dialog Box - Options ........................................................................ 194
4-49. File Format - Options ............................................................................................... 196
4-50. Edit Convention Dialog Box - Options ..................................................................... 197
4-51. Compound Block Browser - Options ........................................................................ 198
4-52. Action Tab of Configure Object Dialog Box - Options ............................................. 199
4-53. Operator Action Types .............................................................................................. 200
4-54. Open Overlay Dialog Box – Options ........................................................................ 203
4-55. Open Overlay More Attributes Dialog Box – Options .............................................. 205
4-56. Close Display/Overlay Dialog Box – Options ........................................................... 208
4-57. Display Command Builder Dialog Box - Options ..................................................... 209
4-58. Relative Pick Dialog Box - Options ........................................................................... 210
4-59. Pulse Type ................................................................................................................ 211
4-60. Options ..................................................................................................................... 211
4-61. Limits Group Box ..................................................................................................... 212
4-62. Direction - Options .................................................................................................. 213
4-63. Connect Variable Dialog Box - Options .................................................................... 213
4-64. Limits - Options ....................................................................................................... 214
4-65. Limits - Options ....................................................................................................... 216
4-66. Numeric/Text Entry Dialog Box - Options ............................................................... 217
4-67. Limits group Box - Options ...................................................................................... 218
4-68. Menu Tab of Configure Object Dialog Box - Options .............................................. 220
4-69. Configure Menu Dialog Box - Options ..................................................................... 221
4-70. Configure Menu Item - Options ............................................................................... 222
4-71. Display Command Builder Dialog Box ..................................................................... 223
4-72. Graphic Attribute Table ............................................................................................ 224
4-73. Edit Graphic Attribute Name Dialog Box - Options ................................................. 224
4-74. Aliases Table ............................................................................................................. 225
4-75. Edit Text Alias Dialog Box - Options ........................................................................ 226
4-76. Range Table .............................................................................................................. 227
4-77. Edit Range Alias Dialog Box - Options ..................................................................... 227
4-78. Dynamics Table ........................................................................................................ 228
4-79. Graphics Table - Options .......................................................................................... 229
4-80. Graphic Alias Properties ............................................................................................ 229
4-81. Navigation - Options ................................................................................................ 230
4-83. Left Panel of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options ............................................. 231
4-84. Block Connection ..................................................................................................... 233
4-85. Trend Area Tab of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options .................................... 233
4-86. Pens Tab ................................................................................................................... 234
xxvii
4-87. Pens Tab for Trends .................................................................................................. 235

4-88. Pen Information ........................................................................................................ 236
4-89. Data Group Box ....................................................................................................... 237
4-90. Options for Numeric Data ........................................................................................ 237
4-91. Options for Boolean Data ......................................................................................... 240
4-92. Grid Tab of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options .............................................. 241
4-93. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Security Tab Options ............................................. 242
4-95. Left Panel of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options ............................................. 243
4-97. X and Y Axis Group Boxes ........................................................................................ 245
4-98. Plot Area Tab (Profile plots only) .............................................................................. 246
4-99. Pens Table ................................................................................................................ 246
4-100. Pens Table for X/Y Plots ........................................................................................... 247
4-101. Pens Table for Profile Plots ....................................................................................... 248
4-102. Configure Plot Pen Dialog Box - Options (XY plots only) ........................................ 249
4-103. Items for X-Axis and Y-Axis (XY plots only) ............................................................. 249
4-104. Color Information ..................................................................................................... 250
4-105. Configure Plot Pen Dialog Box (Profile plots only) ................................................... 251
4-106. Color Information (Line-style profile plots) .............................................................. 252
4-107. Color Information (Bar-style profile plots) ................................................................ 252
4-108. Grid Tab of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options .............................................. 253
4-109. Configure Objects Dialog Box .................................................................................. 254
4-110. Left side of Configure Objects Dialog Box ................................................................ 254
4-111. Edit Range Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 255
4-112. Scales/Delta Table ..................................................................................................... 255
4-113. Edit Substitution Dialog Box .................................................................................... 256
4-114. Select Convention - Options ..................................................................................... 257
4-115. Select Convention Area - Options ............................................................................. 258
4-116. Dynamic/Connection Table ...................................................................................... 259
4-117. Dialog Box - Options ................................................................................................ 260
4-118. Global Change Group Box - Options ........................................................................ 261
4-119. Display/Selection Table ............................................................................................. 263
4-120. General Tab of User Options Dialog Box - Options ................................................. 264
4-121. General Tab of User Options Dialog Box (lower portion) - Options ......................... 265
4-122. General Tab of User Options Dialog Box (Widescreen Preferences) - Options ......... 265
4-123. Dynamics Tab of User Options Dialog Box - Options .............................................. 266
4-124. Monitor Tab of User Options Dialog Box - Options ................................................ 268
4-125. Recover Backup Files Dialog Box - Options .............................................................. 268
4-126. Font Setup Dialog Box - Buttons and Fields ............................................................. 269
4-127. Object Browser Dialog Box - Options ....................................................................... 270
4-128. API Server Connection Utility Dialog Box ................................................................ 271
4-129. Configuration Shortcuts ............................................................................................ 273
4-130. Object Selection Shortcuts ........................................................................................ 273
4-131. Drawing Shortcuts .................................................................................................... 274
4-132. Drawing an Object .................................................................................................... 274
4-133. Editing Shortcuts ...................................................................................................... 275
4-134. Options for Moving an Object or Selection .............................................................. 275
xxviii
Tables B0700BE – Rev F
4-135. Options for Scaling or Rotating an Object or Selection ............................................. 276

4-136. Aligning Objects ....................................................................................................... 276
4-137. Flipping Objects ....................................................................................................... 276
5-1. Navigation methods .................................................................................................. 286
5-2. Steps for Generic Overlay Creation ........................................................................... 291
5-3. Commands in a Script File ........................................................................................ 306
5-4. Commands to Type in the Initial.acl File .................................................................. 306
5-5. Faceplate Directory Information ............................................................................... 309
5-6. Object Types and their Movable Point ...................................................................... 344
5-7. Starting FoxDraw - Options ...................................................................................... 353
A-1. Command Line Arguments ....................................................................................... 364
A-2. Dump File ................................................................................................................ 373
A-3. DEdit Window Elements .......................................................................................... 377
A-4. Find/Replace Tab Elements ...................................................................................... 378
A-5. File Stats Tab Elements ............................................................................................. 381
A-6. Text Replace Tab Elements ....................................................................................... 382
A-7. Command Tab Elements .......................................................................................... 384
A-8. Access Level Tab Elements ........................................................................................ 385
A-9. Aliases Tab Elements ................................................................................................. 387
A-10. Ranges Tab Elements ................................................................................................ 388
A-11. Properties Fields ........................................................................................................ 389
A-12. Edit Alias Dialog Box Elements ................................................................................. 391
A-13. Edit Range Alias Dialog Box Elements ...................................................................... 393
B-1. Conversion Types ..................................................................................................... 403
B-2. Conversion Type - Options ....................................................................................... 405
B-3. Button Options ......................................................................................................... 407
B-4. Versions of Display File Formats ............................................................................... 408
B-5. Command Arguments ............................................................................................... 409
B-6. File Types Produced by the Conversion Utility ......................................................... 409
B-8. Files Produced ........................................................................................................... 413
B-10. Files Produced ........................................................................................................... 419
B-11. FoxView Version on Source Box ............................................................................... 419
C-1. fdf_wsmfdf Command Arguments ............................................................................ 424
C-2. File Types Produced by the fdf_wsmfdf Conversion Utility ...................................... 425
C-3. Widescreen Preferences in User Options Dialog Box ................................................ 428
C-4. Standard Overlay Window Dimensions Comparison ................................................ 434
xxix
xxx
Preface
This document is a print version of the on-line Help file for the FoxDraw™ software application
(“FoxDraw”).
Audience
The information in this document is intended for process engineers.
Revision Information
For FoxDraw v10.2.4 used with I/A Series software v8.2 and above (refer to the release notes doc-
ument (B0700RJ) for specific version compatibility), the following changes were made to this
document:
Global
 Removed all references to Windows NT.
Chapter 1 “FoxDraw Software Overview”
 Added “.fdf4_3” to Table 1-4 “File Types” on page 10, and Figure 1-4 “Foxboro Dis-
play Files Converted from 4:3 Aspect Ratio to Widescreen 16:9 Aspect Ratio” on
page 12.
 Added Table 1-15 “Template and Grid Sizes used by FoxDraw (for Widescreen Dis-
plays/Overlays)” on page 53.
Chapter 2 “Drawing and Editing”
 Updated Figure 2-1.
Chapter 4 “Window and Dialog Boxes”
 Updated “Displayable Area” on page 157 and “Base Display” on page 159.
 Added “Widescreen Preferences for User Options Dialog Box” on page 265.
Chapter 5 “Procedures”
 Updated the note under “Creating a Base Display” on page 277.
Appendix B “Display Convert Utility”
 Added the “.fdf to wsmfdf ” conversion type in Table B-1 and Table B-2.
Appendix C “Widescreen Conversion for Displays”
 Added this appendix.
Appendix G “Reserved Keywords (Not For Use in Foxboro Display Files)”
 Added this appendix.
NOTE
For earlier versions of FoxDraw, refer to FoxDraw™ Software (B0193WG).
xxxi
B0700BE – Rev F Preface
Reference Documents
The following documents may be found on the V8.x Electronic Documentation CD-ROM
(K0173WT). The latest revisions of most of these documents are available through the Global
Customer Support Center (Global CSC) at http://support.ips.invensys.com.
 FoxView™ Software (B0700BD)
 FoxView™ and FoxDraw™ Software V10.2.4 Release Notes (B0700RJ)
 Process Operations and Displays (B0700BN)
 Display Commands (B0193DF)
 AIM*API User’s Guide (B0400YN)
 FoxAPI™ Installation Guide (B0193UC)
 FoxAPI User’s Guide (B0193UD)
 I/A Series Configuration Component (IACC) User’s Guide (B0400BP)
 Alarm and Display Manager Configuration (B0700AM).
xxxii
1. FoxDraw Software Overview
This chapter introduces the concept of displays and display objects.
Overview
The FoxDraw™ software application (“FoxDraw”) is a graphical display editor for creating and
maintaining displays for viewing process control dynamics.
What is a Display?
A display is a file that is constructed and configured to be viewed from a FoxView™ window or a
Display Manager window.
A display can represent a plant, a process area, or a detailed portion of a process. A display can
be configured to allow operator interaction with the process by moving objects or typing inputs.
A display is composed of objects, each of which can be configured with attributes. Object attri-
butes determine the object’s static and dynamic appearance and the actions an operator can per-
form on an object.
The term “object” includes primitive objects (such as lines, rectangles, circles, and text), library
objects, and bitmaps. Library objects include Invensys Foxboro supplied and user-built symbols,
overlays, faceplates and trends. The term “symbols” refers to the vast collection of objects that you
can copy to a display from Invensys Foxboro supplied and user-build palettes.
The FoxDraw Window

From FoxDraw, you can create and configure displays and library objects. In the process,
you create customized templates and user palettes from which displays can be built.
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show a display in the FoxDraw window, followed by a description in
Table 1-1.
1
B0700BE – Rev F 1. FoxDraw Software Overview
Figure 1-1. FoxDraw Window - Standard Definition (4:3 Aspect Ratio)
Figure 1-2. FoxDraw Window - Widescreen (16:9 Aspect Ratio)
2
1. FoxDraw Software Overview B0700BE – Rev F
Table 1-1. Object Types
Item Description
Bitmap A display can include one or more bitmap files. Typical uses include
a company logo or pictures of your plant.
Trend A display can include a trend to monitor the behavior of one or
more process variables over time.
An X/Y plot can graph the relationship between two monitored
points.
A profile plot graphs the value of a monitored point over time.
Faceplate A faceplate is a display object that shows critical parameters for a
particular block.
Primitive Object Primitive objects include lines, rectangles, polylines, polygons,
curves, closed curves, circles, pies, sectors, 3-point sectors, text,
background text, comment objects, and scroll region objects.
Create primitive objects by using Draw toolbar tools or Draw menu
commands.
Library Object Library objects (.m1 files) refer to the objects that FoxDraw and
FoxView recognize.
FoxDraw recognizes library objects stored in either of two display
library directories:
 \opt\fox\displib
 \opt\customer\displib
The library objects are subdivided into groupings with
appropriately named directories.
The subdirectories (bitmaps, buttons, faceplates, faceplates_1,
grids, markers, palettes, Profile Plots, symbols, templates, trends,
and X/Y plots) serve as receptacles for the library objects.
FoxDraw includes over one thousand library objects. You can also
build your own library objects.
Display Creation
You can draw basic objects using the mouse in combination with toolbars, menu bar commands,
and shortcut keys.
Copying a Library Object

Building a display is easy, because FoxDraw readily provides lists of library objects from which to
link to your display. The Object menu offers various choices, as listed in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2. Link Commands
Command Allows you to copy

Link from Library Markers, trends, X/Y plots, profile plots, symbols, and buttons.
Link Faceplate/Trend Faceplates and trends
Link Bitmap Bitmaps
3
Table 1-2. Link Commands (Continued)
Command Allows you to copy

Link/Copy from Palette Symbols
Objects can be copied or linked.
This method of placing library objects on a display (or another library object) copies a link to the
library object. Linked library objects yield consistency and save time.
Copying Objects Composed of Primitive Objects

FoxDraw includes numerous palettes of pre-built objects such as pumps, tanks, pipes, motors,
valves, and ISA symbols. Standard libraries include vast selections of simple and complex objects
for building displays.
FoxDraw includes palettes that contain “link” and “copy” versions of library objects. You can copy
an object from a “copy” palette to a display and modify the object’s primitive objects.
Object Configuration
Each display object can be configured with attributes to affect its presentation (how it looks and
moves). You configure an object’s dynamic attributes to the value of a variable (process variable or
shared variable) which then controls the object’s behavior. Dynamic attributes or properties of
dynamic attributes of an object can be exposed. Properties of dynamic attributes can be exposed
through text aliases.
You can specify an object’s static presentation (as specified by its graphic attributes). Typically
these attributes include an object’s fill color, edge color, edge style etc. Graphic attributes can be
exposed through graphic attribute alias names. The static text contents of text and background
text objects can be exposed through text aliases. A text object’s specifications include font style,
color, and direction.
Certain properties of operator dynamics of an object can also be exposed through text aliases.
A display object can reflect the current value of a process variable. The appearance of a display
object can be animated, based on the value of one or more process variables. You configure anima-
tion by specifying an object’s dynamic attribute, choosing a conversion method, and creating a
table of expected inputs and desired outputs.
FoxDraw allows you to assign an operator action to a display object, creating an interactive con-
nection between the display object and the operator. This capability permits an operator to trigger
an event by performing an action or recording data.
Object Configuration Menu

FoxDraw provides quick access to currently configured connections for each object in a display.
When you right-click on an object, a menu of connected objects is displayed. Clicking on one of
these menu items opens the Configure Object dialog box for the object.
Integration with IACC

The FoxDraw application is integrated into I/A Series Configuration Component (IACC)
software as an application that reads and writes common data to the IACC database. The
IACC FoxDraw Editor supports all the functionality of a stand-alone FoxDraw Editor. The
4
interface requires that the FoxDraw software be installed on the same workstation as the IACC
client application.
The Foxboro display file is represented by a reference object in the IACC database. The reference
object is created and maintained by IACC. Right-clicking the reference object displays a pop-up
menu, with the IACC FoxDraw Editor as one of the options available to create and edit the dis-
play file. You build displays in the editor using all of the same resources and procedures described
in this document.
Whenever a Foxboro display file is saved, IACC automatically creates lists of compounds and
blocks referenced in the display, and information about the linked object which is stored in the
display reference object. Figure 1-3 shows the information stored in the object reference.
Object Reference
Display Files
Display File
Parameter
Station Reference
Parameter
Parameter
IACC Configured Workstations
Linked Object
Parameter
Display File Linked Object

Figure 1-3. Reference Object Parameters in IACC
By integrating the FoxDraw application, IACC offers the following capabilities:

 Create displays using data obtained directly from the IACC database, which contains
all the control and reference information required for FoxDraw displays.
 Store display-related information in the IACC database, enabling control engineers to
perform tasks such as:
 Finding all the displays in which a block is referenced
 Displaying stations or workstations that contain a specific display
 Listing all the symbols in a display
 Listing all the variables in a display.
 Assign and distribute displays to workstations. You can distribute the displays as part
of a control configuration download or in separate actions dealing only with the
display files.
5
For additional information on the integration of FoxDraw into IACC and management of the
displays in the IACC database, refer to I/A Series Configuration Component (IACC) User’s Guide
(B0400BP).
Display References
A display reference object represents a display in the IACC database. Display files are located
outside the IACC database, thus enabling the stand-alone version of the FoxDraw application as
well as the IACC version of the FoxDraw application to edit them. The drawing is stored in a
Foxboro display file (*.fdf ).
A reference object supports the following:
 A display associated with the reference object can be opened from the IACC FoxDraw
Editor utility.
 The display stays intact when the reference is deleted.
 A display can be edited from the stand-alone FoxDraw application.
 The name of a reference object can be different from the name of the display.
Display files can contain linked library objects that exist as independent, physically separate files.
A list of symbols, workstations, and compound:block.parameters that a display file uses are
available from its reference object and can be viewed using the ListView utility.
When you try to open a display that was manually deleted or renamed, the IACC version of the
FoxDraw application displays an appropriate warning message.
NOTE
If the FoxDraw file (.fdf ) is moved or renamed in the stand-alone FoxDraw
application, IACC is not able to find it. To access the file with IACC, you must
import it into the application.
Display Templates
A template is a display file that has specific compound and block references converted to macros.
When an instance of a template is created, the macro substitution process converts the macro
references back into instance-specific compound and block references (that reflect the actual
control strategy to which it is tied), and saves this information in the template reference object.
When an existing display is converted to a template, however, a reference object is not created
because a template has its compound and block references composed of macros, and does not
refer to any actual instances of blocks and compounds.
6
Synchronizing Displays and IACC

Synchronizing Changes Done Within Display Files
Changes can be made to display files outside the IACC version of FoxDraw software, in one of the
following three ways:
 The stand-alone version of the FoxDraw application can make changes to the display
file.
 DEdit can be used to find and replace parameter tag names in one or more display
files.
DEdit can be run via a command script.
 GEdit can add faceplates, trends, symbols, and buttons to existing displays.
GEdit, run via a command script, is a display engineering and maintenance utility
that supplements the capabilities of the FoxDraw application.
The above methods do not update the reference object contained in IACC. The reference object
is updated only when the IACC version of the FoxDraw application scans the display file, or
when a display is saved via the IACC FoxDraw Editor.
Synchronizing Changes Within IACC

You can delete or rename blocks and compounds from the IACC configuration, independent of
the IACC FoxDraw application, regardless of the number of displays in which the blocks and
compounds are referenced. When a block or compound has been deleted or renamed in an IACC
configuration, it is not removed from the reference object in which it resides.
7
Displays
Display Properties
Each display has a set of properties.
Choosing Display Properties from the FoxDraw File menu invokes the Display Properties dialog
box from which you can view statistics about the display object (library object, palette, overlay, or
base display) currently open in FoxDraw. You can readily view the display file’s name and direc-
tory location, and you can check its size in world coordinate units used by FoxDraw.
This dialog box also allows you to specify various display attributes, such as background color, and
whether to record historical information (comments) about the display object.
In addition, you can obtain display file statistics, which include information about the items that
comprise the display.
Base Displays
For base displays, there are additional tab pages that allow you to specify the Object Manager scan
rate and scan delay and the scripts that run when the base display opens or closes. The OM_Data
tab includes a checkbox for the Fast Scan option which specifies the rate at which data is sent
from the CP to FoxView to match that of the block processing cycle (BPC) of the CP. This
option, which is supported with I/A Series Version 8.0 and greater, only affects the rate at which
data is sent from the CP, and not the frequency with which FoxView updates the display.
Overlay Displays
For overlays, there are additional tab pages, which allow you to specify the Object Manager scan
rate and scan delay. You can also configure the following FoxView attributes:
 Overlay position
 Overlay mode specifies the behavior of the initial display in FoxView:
Stationary - The overlay can not be repositioned by the user. The overlay always open
as a stationary overlay, regardless of the overlay mode setting in FoxView.
Moveable - The overlay can be dragged to another location on the screen. The overlay
always open as a moveable overlay, regardless of the overlay mode setting in FoxView.
FoxView - The overlay is opened as either moveable or stationary based on the current
FoxView overlay mode setting and based on the configuration of the button that
invokes the overlay.
 Script that runs when the overlay opens and the script that is run when the overlay
closes.
8
Table 1-3 lists the different types of displays with which you can work.
Table 1-3. Display Types
Display type Description

Base display Occupies the entire FoxView window in world coordinate units:
100 units wide by 75 units high for displays with standard 4:3 aspect ratio, or
133.33 units wide by 75 units high for displays with widescreen 16:9 aspect
ratio.
In FoxView, when another base display opens, the previous base display closes.
You can open one or more overlays on top of a base display.
When you open an overlay, the base display does not close. A base display,
however, can be hidden by a full-screen overlay.
A base display file has an .fdf extension.
Overlay display Opens over a base display but does not replace it.
An overlay can be full-screen, half-screen (horizontal or vertical), quarter-
screen, eighth-screen, or a custom size.
Specify the overlay’s position and mode (stationary, moveable, or FoxView
determined) with the Display Properties dialog box.
Similar to a base display, an overlay display has an .fdf extension.
Library object A file linked to a base display. Library objects include faceplates, trends, sym-
bols, markers and buttons.
Palette A window containing graphic objects that you can copy into your display.
9
FoxDraw File Types

Display File Conversion
Use the Display Converter utility from the Tools menu to convert files from one display file type
to another.
Converting a display file

Table 1-4 lists the file types that can be viewed and edited in FoxDraw.
Table 1-4. File Types
File Type Description

.fdf Foxboro display files. These include base displays and overlay
displays in binary format created with FoxDraw and viewed in
FoxView. Base displays and overlays communicate process condi-
tions. For example, a display can include digitized measurements
and visual indication of tank fill levels, switch status, time elapsed,
and time to completion.
.fdf4_3 Backup of an .fdf file which has been converted to the new
widescreen 16:9 aspect ratio.
The Foxboro display files are in 4:3 aspect ratio. Using the methods
described in Appendix C “Widescreen Conversion for Displays”,
Foxboro display files can be converted to widescreen format (16:9
aspect ratio) as shown in Figure 1-4 on page 12.
.pdf 50 Series display files. These are older binary format displays
supported on 50 Series workstations.
You can convert .pdf files into Foxboro display file format (.fdf )
with the Display Converter utility from the Tools menu.
.m1 Library objects. These include faceplates, trends, symbols, palettes,
markers and buttons. They are stored in .m1 binary file format. You
can edit an .m1 file in FoxDraw.
50 Series markers Use the Display Converter utility to convert older user-built
and Invensys Foxboro supplied marker files into library objects
(.m1 format).
Converted Foxboro markers (system markers and PLC markers) are
stored in the Foxboro display directory:
 \opt\fox\displib\Markers
User-built markers are stored in the user display directory:
 \opt\customer\displib\Markers
.dxf AutoCAD® files. You can convert AutoCAD .dxf files into Foxboro
display file format (.fdf ) with the Display Converter utility
from the Tools menu. FoxDraw supports up to AutoCAD Version
12.0.
10
Table 1-4. File Types (Continued)
File Type Description

Bitmap files (.i or .bmp) A bitmap can be linked to a base display, overlay, or library object.
Bitmaps are not converted and are not stored within the display file
itself. Instead, FoxDraw saves a reference to the name of the bitmap
file (*.bmp), located in one of the following directories:
 \opt\fox\displib\Bitmaps
 \opt\customer\displib\Bitmaps
When the drawing is used on a Solaris workstation, the referenced
bitmap is stored as an *.i file. See “Moving Files” on page 355.
ASCII files This is the platform-independent ASCII representation of Foxboro
(.g) display files. In the File > Open and File > Save As dialog boxes,
you can select .g as a file type to open or save as.
When a .g file is selected to be opened, FoxDraw automatically con-
verts the file to its .fdf representation. The .fdf file takes up the
same basename as the original .g file but now has the .fdf extension.
Similarly, the current display file may be saved in its .g format
through the Save As option in the File menu bar. This also cre-
ates a corresponding .fdf file.
Note that any previously existing .fdf file having the same name as
the .g file that is opened/saved gets overwritten.
11
FoxView Display - 4:3 Aspect Ratio on 4:3 Monitor
Conversion
Example 1 - 16:9 Aspect Ratio Example 2 - 16:9 Aspect Ratio

View Display on Successful Conversion View Display or Successful Conversion and
Manual Modification of Visual Elements
Widescreen Monitor - used with I/A Series Workstations with FoxView/FoxDraw V10.2.4 or later
Figure 1-4. Foxboro Display Files Converted from 4:3 Aspect Ratio to
Widescreen 16:9 Aspect Ratio
Display Library Directories

FoxDraw uses two display library directories:
 Foxboro display library
 User display library.
Foxboro Display Library - Root Directory

The Foxboro display library is \opt\fox\displib.
Location of Foxboro Display Elements

The Foxboro display library contains all the elements for building displays, palettes, and library
objects.
Table 1-5, lists the location of library elements on the workstations.
12
Table 1-5. Display Element - Directory Location
Display Element Subdirectory File Extension

Bitmaps \opt\fox\displib\Bitmaps .bmp
(.i when moved to a
Solaris workstation)
Buttons \opt\fox\displib\Buttons .m1
Faceplates \opt\fox\displib\Faceplates .m1
and
\opt\fox\displib\Faceplates_1
Grids \opt\fox\displib\Grids .grd
Markers (converted \opt\fox\displib\Markers .m1
50 Series Foxboro graphic
symbols)
Palettes \opt\fox\displib\Palettes .m1
Profile plots \opt\fox\displib\ProfilePlots .m1
Symbols \opt\fox\displib\Symbols .m1
(tanks, valves, and so on) - and -
\opt\fox\displib\Symbols_1
Templates \opt\fox\displib\Templates .m1
Trends \opt\fox\displib\Trends .m1
Temporary storage of \opt\fox\displib\Work .m1
unsaved user files
X/Y plots \opt\fox\displib\XYplots .m1
User Display Library - Root Directory

Store user-built library objects (such as symbols, trends, and palettes) in the user display library.
The directory structure for the user display library is identical to the Foxboro display library.
The user display library is \opt\customer\displib.
NOTE
If display objects are not located in this structure, FoxDraw cannot locate them
NOTE
When FoxDraw starts up, if the user display library directory structure does not
exist, FoxDraw creates it.
13
Default File Locations

FoxDraw default directories are located on the FoxDraw installed drive.
! CAUTION
Do not modify Foxboro supplied files located in the Foxboro data directory or the
Foxboro display library directory. Do not add your own symbols, faceplates, or
trends to the Foxboro subdirectories. The contents of these directories can be over-
written as part of a future system upgrade. Instead, copy any file you want to mod-
ify to the corresponding user directory and work with it there.
Data Directories
There are two data directories:
 Foxboro data directory
 User data directory.
Display Library Directories

There are two display library directories:
 Foxboro display library.
 User display library.
Base Display Directory

A base display that contains linked library objects relies on the library object files and the file
locations (directory path) at the time of the base display’s creation.
NOTE
When you copy a base display from one workstation to another, copy all the refer-
enced library object files into a directory structure that is identical to the structure
at the original location.
Example 1
You created a base display on a laptop and saved the display to the directory:
\opt\customer\displib
The linked library objects are in this directory:
\opt\customer\displib\Symbols
When you copy the base display to a workstation:
 Copy the base display (.fdf file) to the opt\menus directory on the workstation.
 Copy the linked library objects to \opt\customer\displib\Symbols on the
workstation.
14
Example 2
Displays created with a custom trend template are dependent on that template file.
If you copy displays to another system, you must also copy the custom trend template to a direc-
tory location on the new system that is identical to the directory location on the old system.
For example, if you store your template in \opt\customer\displib\Trends on the system
where you created the display, you must copy your trend template file to
\opt\customer\displib\Trends on the new system. Otherwise, FoxDraw and FoxView use
the Foxboro supplied trend template file on the new system.
AutoCAD .dxf File Conversion

When converting AutoCAD .dxf files, be aware of the following current limitations.
AutoCAD Versions
In general, all AutoCAD versions (12 through 14) are compatible. This means that if a particular
DXF entity was supported in version 12, it is also supported in version 14. Conversions work best
with versions 12 or 13, because version 14 has some new entities that are not supported.
AutoCAD Format
AutoCAD file conversion works only with ASCII DXF file formats, and in particular, DXF,
which is generated from AutoCAD. Other products that generate “DXF-like” output may not
convert properly, yet may be readable by AutoCAD.
Filename Limitations
There should be no limitation to the number of characters. If you have a problem, report this as a
bug and provide an example .dxf file. You may have some character dependencies in FoxDraw
that are not part of the converter. DXF filenames can begin with a number, but GMS files cannot.
The filename 123456.dxf is converted to an_123456.g. The “an_” stands for AutoCAD number.
FoxDraw probably does not handle this renaming of DXF files which are invalid GMS filenames.
Bugs and Anomalies

Color/Line type bugs
There are some problems converting color and line types in certain cases. In particular, color/line
attributes of objects that have been set explicitly or BY_LAYER work fine, but color/line types
that have been set BY_BLOCK do not. These problems are being investigated.
AutoCad 14
AutoCAD Version 14 has some new objects. In particular, AutoCAD has introduced an object
called a light-weight polyline. These objects do not convert. It is likely that when AutoCAD
converts to older versions of DXF output, these polylines are converted to objects that the
converter does support.
15
Objects
Graphic Attributes
An object’s graphic attributes specify its static representation.
Modifying an Object’s Graphic Attributes

Select an object and choose Object > Graphics Attributes to invoke the Set Selection Attributes
dialog box. Use this dialog box to modify the selected object’s Fill and Edge attributes. If the
selected object is text, you can modify its Font attributes. Changes are immediately applied.
TIP
When no object is selected, you can specify default graphic attributes via the Set
Default Attributes dialog box. Until you change them, these specifications apply to
all objects that you configure.
If you want to configure several objects, leave the Set Selection Attributes dialog box
open.
If necessary, reverse changes with the Undo command.
When No Object is Selected

When no object is selected, use the Object menu’s Graphics Attributes command to set the
default Fill, Edge, and Font attributes for all new objects, and default scan rate.
Overriding an Object’s Graphic Attributes

A dynamic attribute can override a static attribute. Most often, however, dynamic attributes and
graphic attributes complement each other.
Example
A tank is always at least 25% full. You configure a graphic attribute to specify this static level.
But during a batch process, the tank’s fill level might range from 25% to 100%. To visually indi-
cate the tank’s varying level, you would configure a dynamic Fill Level attribute for the tank. One
way of doing this is by specifying a Low Fill % at 25 and a High Fill % at 100 in the Continuous
dialog box.
Exposing an Object’s Graphic Attributes through Alias Names

You can expose the graphic attributes of components of library objects (primitive objects) through
graphic attribute alias names. For information on exposing graphic aliases, refer to “Exposing
Graphic Attributes via Aliases” on page 99.
16
Dynamics
Dynamics (also called dynamic attributes) change the appearance of a display object in response
to changes in a process variable or system variable. Thus, an updating value animates the display
object.
Use one or more dynamics to animate an object. Typical examples include:
 Rectangles that display actual fill levels
 Text objects that display process values
 Lines that represent meter needles that move in response to changing system values
 Valves that open and close
 Timers that start when a batch process starts.
NOTE
You cannot apply a dynamic to a trend, X/Y plot, profile plot, faceplate, or a com-
ment object.
Conversions
You can apply a conversion to a dynamic. Depending on the dynamic, different types of conver-
sions are available.
Conventions
As an alternative to applying dynamics to an object, you can apply a convention, which is a group
of one or more dynamics. Using conventions decreases configuration time.
Connecting a Dynamic to the Process

You typically select an object and configure it with a dynamic, which you connect to a process
variable, shared variable, or file.
Exposing Dynamics
You can expose the dynamics of components of library objects. Dynamics can also be exposed by
exposing the tag-name through text aliases. For more information on this feature, refer to
“Exposing and Resolving Dynamics” on page 84.
You can expose the properties of dynamics of library objects through text aliases.
The following properties of dynamics can be exposed:
 Tag (tag-name) and Range through text and range aliases respectively
 Values of Text Contents dynamic through text aliases.
For more information on alias syntax and exposing text aliases, refer to “Exposing Text Aliases” on
page 98.
17
Object Movement
You can configure an object with movement. There are two types of object movement
configurations:
 A dynamic update, in which the display object moves, based on changes in a process
value
 An operator action, in which the operator moves (drags) the display object, which in
turn, changes a process value (such as a set point).
Use these configuration techniques to customize your displays.
Display Conventions
A display convention is a collection of one or more dynamic attributes.
These collections of dynamics can be given names and used later when configuring objects.
NOTE
FoxDraw does not allow exposing of a dynamic that uses display conventions.
Display conventions offer these benefits:

 You can quickly apply a group of dynamics to an object. Once a convention is config-
ured, you can apply it to many different objects, which saves time configuring objects.
Also, you avoid errors and debug time when you apply a convention that you have
already built and debugged.
 If you change a convention’s configuration, each object to which the convention
is applied automatically receives the change. This greatly improves display
maintainability.
 For each dynamic, a parameter automatically appears, helping you to quickly config-
ure the dynamic. This occurs only when the optional list of parameters has been pre-
specified.
 Display call-up times are improved in FoxView.
You can apply the supplied conventions to objects. You can also configure your own conventions.
NOTE
The rules governing the application of an attribute to an object also apply to
conventions; you can apply no more than one occurrence of a particular attribute to
an object. Because a convention comprises one or more attributes, FoxDraw does
not allow you to apply a convention to an object already configured with an attri-
bute contained in the convention. For example, if an object has already been
assigned the Fill Color attribute, you cannot apply a convention that includes the
Fill Color attribute. Similarly, you cannot apply an attribute to an object that has
been configured with a convention that includes that same attribute.
18
Custom Shortcut Menus

Custom shortcut menus are user-defined menus that open in FoxView when the mouse is right-
clicked over an object that supports shortcut menus. Shortcut menus are supported for:
 Displays
 Overlays
 Scratch Pad Trends
 Objects with passive dynamics.
The labels in each shortcut menu are defined by the user and are associated with a display com-
mand that is executed when the menu item is selected.
Custom menus can be configured in any of three ways:
Environment Shortcut Menu definition files - A menu definition file can be specified
that is used for all displays and a separate menu file can be specified to be used for all
objects with passive dynamics.
Custom Shortcut Menu Definition File - Each display and each object with passive
dynamics can be configured to use a menu definition file other than the default envi-
ronment.
Custom Shortcut Menu Definitions - Instead of menu definition files, individual
menu items can be configured for both displays and objects with passive dynamics.
Details on adding object menu items are covered in “Display Properties Dialog Box - Menu Tab”
on page 167 and “Configure Objects Dialog Box - Menu Tab” on page 219.
FoxDraw Color Definition Files

The FoxDraw color palette is \usr\fox\wp\data\colordef.dat (Figure 1-5).
Figure 1-5. Color Definition File
FoxDraw color definitions are expressed with decimal points (.).
! CAUTION
Do not change the Regional Settings. You may experience color problems if you go
into the Windows Control Panel, Regional Settings, Number tab, and change the
decimal symbol from a decimal point (.) to another symbol such as a comma (,).
19
Comment Object
As an option, you can insert one or more comment objects into a model to add your own model
development comments. In FoxView, comment objects do not appear. The comment object looks
like a regular background text object. When you save the model, all the model’s comment objects
are made invisible. This means the comment objects are invisible in FoxView.
Rules
 You can place comment objects in .fdf models only. You cannot place a comment
object in an .m1 model.
 You can create a comment object only when comment objects are visible.
 If you apply graphical attributes to a comment object while it is invisible, FoxDraw
does not change the comment object’s graphical attributes.
 You cannot apply a dynamic (passive or operator) to a comment object.
Bitmaps in FoxDraw
Bitmaps are typically used as background images such as maps or plant overviews, and for
company logos. A bitmap is not embedded in a display but is linked to a display. You can
configure the bitmap’s dynamic attributes to make it grow or shrink, change location, or be
visible or invisible based on the value of a process variable.
FoxDraw Bitmap Capability

You can do this with a bitmap:
 Move it
 Resize it
 Configure it with Visibility, Move and Scale dynamic attributes
 Snap it to the grid
 Layer an object on top of it or beneath it
 Copy and paste it.
You cannot do this with a bitmap:
 Rotate it
 Snap it to another object
 Change its graphic attributes.
20
Library Objects
Library objects include:
 Faceplates
 Trends
 Symbols
 Palettes
 Profile Plots
 Markers
 Buttons
 XY Plots.
NOTE
Primitive objects (lines, rectangles, polylines, polygons, curves, closed curves, cir-
cles, pies, sectors, 3-point sectors, text, background text, comments, and scroll
regions) are not library objects.
You can link a library object to a base display, overlay, or another library object that contains a
pointer to the library object instead of a pasted copy.
A display can have multiple references to the same library object.
You can expose the dynamics of components library object. Certain properties of dynamics, oper-
ator actions, and graphic attributes can also be exposed through aliases.
The advantages of this feature are:
 The object with exposed properties can be used repeatedly in the same display and
modified to look and operate differently.
 When linked to another display the properties become visible to the current display.
These properties can then be modified if required.
Components of a Library Object

A library object can include primitive objects (for example, rectangles or text) created with Fox-
Draw drawing commands, symbols, buttons, markers, or bitmaps. Objects can be static or
dynamic.
Aliases
Library objects can be configured fully or partially to compounds, blocks, or parameters using
aliases. The aliases can be of three types text, graphic or range. For more information, refer to
Chapter 3 “Object Configuration”, section “Aliases” on page 96.
21
Linked Objects Versus Copied Objects

When you create a new library object, consider where the object is to be used. Each type of object
has its advantages and disadvantages.
Linked Objects
You can link a library object to a base display, overlay, or another library object that contains a
pointer to the library object.
Linked objects provide these advantages:
 When you change the definition of a linked object, all occurrences of that linked
object are automatically updated.
 Displays that use a linked object can have a uniform appearance.
 The display size is smaller.
Copied Objects
A copied object (or instance of an object), unlike a linked object, is a stand-alone entity. It may be
a copy of another object, but its attributes are not controlled by the original object’s
configuration.
You can individually configure the primitive object(s) of a copied object. You can configure the
attributes (graphic attributes, dynamics, and operator actions) of each of its primitive objects. In
addition, you can group and ungroup primitive objects.
Library Objects Linked to Other Library Objects

A library object can contain a link to another library object, which, in turn, can contain a link to
another library object. There is no limit to how deep the links can go.
! CAUTION
Using more than eight levels of linking decreases performance.
Although you can create multiple levels of library objects, you can configure dynamic
attributes only for the first level.
Advantages
Linked library objects have these advantages:
 Linked library objects simplify the task of updating base displays. When you modify a
library object, all the displays that reference the library object automatically update.
Thus, you do not need to update each base display manually.
 A base display with a link to a library object requires less disk space than the same dis-
play saved with the library object information (copied into the display).
22
Disadvantages
Linked library objects have these disadvantages:
 At the base display, you cannot edit the primitive objects in a library object or a prim-
itive object’s attributes. Instead, you must open the library object. Alternatively, you
can copy the library object to a palette, paste it from the palette directly into your dis-
play, and then configure the primitive objects with dynamic updates or modify their
graphic attributes.
 If a library object is corrupted or lost, each display that points to it is adversely
affected.
Faceplates
Faceplates include supplied faceplates and user-built faceplates. Faceplates are library objects and
have an .m1 extension. You can build a base display that contains up to eight faceplates.
Invensys/Foxboro Supplied Faceplates

Invensys Systems, Inc. supplies a 1/8-screen faceplate for each block type. An example of a
supplied faceplate is displayed in Figure 1-6.
Figure 1-6. Faceplate
The template contains all critical block parameters. In FoxView, if the block is in manual mode,
an operator can access modifiable parameters and make changes.
User-Built Faceplates
You can use FoxDraw to build a custom faceplate for any block type.
23
Trends
A trend can monitor the behavior of one or more process variables over time. You can configure
up to eight trend graphs on a single base display (or base display plus library object).
A trend can display up to four numeric or Boolean process variables over time. The data values
being graphed can be from real time or historical data. FoxDraw provides many trend types from
which to choose.
Depending on trend configuration and operator permission (access levels) in FoxView, operators
can reconfigure and save trends.
Trend time appears on the X-axis. The number of time stamps depends on the size of the graph.
Data values appear on the Y-axis. You can configure the trend and specify the parameters such as
low and high values for each process variable’s range. Individual ranges can be automatically
scaled. Figure 1-7 displays a trend.
Figure 1-7. Trend
Values appear on the graph at a rate that depends on the duration you select. Data scrolls to the
left as new values appear above and to the right.
The trend display can include up to four user-configured horizontal lines to mark boundary val-
ues. In the configuration dialog boxes, these static lines are labelled HI%, HI-HI%, LO%, and
LO-HI%.
FoxView indicates status conditions by using different line styles. A dashed line indicates bad sta-
tus. If the trend includes an update field, an asterisk followed by the last good value indicates bad
data. Four asterisks indicate no data.
24
Trend Configuration
You can configure a trend’s display style, including:
 Trend area presentation
 Access levels required for on-line trend configuration
 Trend duration and scan rate.
Access Levels Required for On-line Trend Configuration

For security purposes, you can specify an integer between 0 and 255 used in FoxView to deter-
mine the trend’s:
 Access level required to bring up the On-Line Trend Configurator
 Access level to protect against an operator saving an on-line trend configuration
 Access level to protect against keyboard entry to the On-Line Trend Configurator.
Trend Duration and Scan Rate

For the trend, you must specify timing for the display of data values.
Scan rate The amount of time that elapses between requests to the Object Manager
for the values of the points being trended. At a minimum, you can specify a
1-second scan rate. This entry must be an integer.
Duration The time span of the trend during which data values display. The time
duration of a trend can be configured to a minimum value of 1 minute.
NOTE
For X/Y plots, only the scan rate is available.
25
Trend Area Presentation

Each trend’s configuration options determines its presentation. The trend options are listed in
Table 1-6.
Table 1-6. Trend Options
Option Specifies
Trend type Whether the trend is to be linear or logarithmic. This trend area attribute applies
to all lines trended in the graph.
Time stamp The format of the trend area’s bottom edge (X-axis).
format FoxView permits two styles: local time and relative time.
This illustration shows the use of local time.
This illustration shows the use of relative time.
Markers Whether markers are to be used and their color, symbol, quantity, and so on.
Trend lines (pen lines) are composed of line segments, which can optionally be
connected by markers. (Each pen is configured with a line color.)
Optionally, the trend’s configuration may specify the use of a marker on each
point or a specific number of markers per line. Markers are selected from a pull-
down list in the Configure Trend Pen dialog box.
Off-normal A trend can be configured with off-normal operating areas at the top and bottom
area of the trend graph. These areas, which can be configured in any color, are based
on a percent of range for the entire graph.
Background A trend area’s configuration includes its background color.
color
Display style Each trend is configured to be merged or banded.
A merged trend can display up to four trend lines inside the same graph area.
A banded trend displays each line inside an individual “quarter-height” area.
Banded format is often used for auto-scale trends.
26
Table 1-6. Trend Options (Continued)
Option Specifies
Y-axis scales A trend’s configuration can include the display of scale settings (labels) along the
trend area’s Y-axis. Each trend pen (line) can be configured to include its own
scales.
Decimal The number of decimal places used in a trend display can be set in the range from
Format 0 to 4, or automatic decimal formatting can be specified. With automatic format-
ting, the number of decimal places is based on the field value. The format for Real
parameters is as follows:
 Four decimal places for numbers less than 1
 Two decimal places for numbers less 100
 No decimal places if the value is 100 or greater.
Static Lines The display area can include up to four horizontal lines at user-specified positions
on the vertical axis. The user determines the meaning of these static lines. The
lines are configured on the Grid tab in the Configure Objects dialog box. They
are specified as a percentage of the vertical scale and are labeled HI%, HI-HI%,
LO%, and LO-HI%.
27
Examples of Trends
The following examples show trends with different configurations.
Example #1
The trend’s configuration in Figure 1-8 displays:
 Two lines (pens)
 No Y-axis scales
 Banded mode
 Local time stamps.
Figure 1-8. Trend Example #1
28
Example #2
 Two lines (pens), each with five markers
 Merged mode
 No Y-axis scales
 Local time stamps
 High and low limits (off-normal areas) shown on a red background, at 95% and 5%
of the graph area, respectively.
29
Example #3
 Relative time stamps
 Logarithmic Y-axis.
Group Trends
A group trend includes the following:
 Graph
 Trend duration
 Data collection rate
 Numeric update fields for each process variable
 Pause and scroll buttons.
You can create a group trend that includes the graph only (Graph Only option) or a group trend
with additional information on each variable (Full Trend option).
Select a trend of a different size to include varying information.
30
X/Y Plots
You configure an X/Y plot by selecting any two monitored points (creating a relation) and plot-
ting them against each other. Up to four relations may be plotted on a single X/Y plot. The plots
consist of a trace line that shows all current real-time data points. In addition to real-time points,
you can plot historical data or points from a data file (often called a read data file).
Linear and logarithmic scales are supported on both the X-axis and the Y-axis. You can configure
graph gridline color and visibility. The plot lines appear in the configured colors. You can also dis-
play a cursor that represents the currently plotted data. By default, there is no cursor.
You can configure one or more polygons, or zones, in the plot area to represent out-of-normal pro-
cessing values. The polygons are configured with an object data file (see “Object Data Files” on
page 38), which is referenced in the Plot Area tab of the Configure Objects dialog box. When any
pen, or a particular pen specified in the object data file, enters the zone, the edge of the polygon
changes color to indicate the condition. When the pen exits the zone, the edge returns to its
default color. The zone object can also be configured to change the color of a pen when the pen
enters the zone. The pen reverts to its default color when it exits. Markers and connecting lines
inside the zone keep the color configured in the zone object (Figure 1-11).
Configurable Items
For the X/Y plot’s trend area, you can specify:
 Number of plotted points (up to 600), the scan rate, and time delay
 Color, density, and visibility of the graph’s gridlines
 Whether to use markers, and the number of markers to display on a trend line
 Graph area background color
 Visibility and scales for each plot axis
 Object filename
 Polygons depicting out-of-normal conditions for one or all plotted relationships.
For the trend pen, you can specify:
 Each pen’s axis time delay, read filename, range, Historian, and scale information
 The pen’s color (most recent point color, real recent point color, and file read data pen
color). The color of the most recent point can be driven by the value of another
variable.
 The pen’s marker style.
Example X/Y Plot

The X/Y plot, as shown in Figure 1-11, includes two regions configured by an object data file.
31
Figure 1-11. X/Y Plot Example
Data Points in this Example X/Y Plot

The data points in this example X/Y plot use color to represent the information listed in
Table 1-7.
Table 1-7. Color Representation in an X/Y Plot
Color Indicates Where configured

Green The most recent real- Leading Real Point box of the Configure Plot Pen dialog box.
time point This is configured per pen.
Light Points not in the two Real Point box of the Configure Plot Pen dialog box. This is
Blue polygons defined in configured per pen.
the object data file
Yellow Points within the top The X/Y plot’s object data file’s CURSORCOLOR setting
of the polygon [color code 27 (yellow)] for the first configured shape. This is
configured per X/Y plot in the object data file.
NOTE: When a point falls into this portion of the plot area,
the object data file’s color setting overrides the pen colors
configured for the pen in the Configure Plot Pen dialog box.
Red Points within the The X/Y plot’s object data file’s CURSORCOLOR setting
lower polygon [color code 25 (red)] for the second configured shape. This is
configured per X/Y plot in the object data file.
32
NOTE
The X/Y plot’s object data file’s CURSORCOLOR settings [yellow (color code of
27) for the first configured shape, and red (color code of 25) for the second config-
ured shape] override the pen colors configured for the pen in the Configure Plot
Pen dialog box.
The colors specified in the object data file are defined as FoxDraw color numbers.
X/Y Plot Fill Patterns

Fill pattern values (numbered 1 through 6) correspond to the fill patterns that display in the Fill
Pattern box of the Set Selection Attributes dialog box in FoxDraw.
NOTE
The example X/Y plot above does not use fill patterns.
X/Y Plot Appearance

The appearance of an X/Y plot is determined by:
 The X/Y plot’s configuration (via FoxDraw).
 The X/Y plot’s object data file. This creates background objects and affects the point
color that lies in various portions of the X/Y plot area.
 The pen’s X/Y plot data file. When an X/Y plot is invoked, this data (specified in a
file) loads into the pen’s data buffer and is displayed on the X/Y plot.
 Real-time data values (compound:block.parameter values and/or shared variable
values).
Markers
An X/Y plot can display up to four series of plotted points (also called lines or pens).
Each pen’s appearance, which is configured in FoxDraw, can display:
 A leading marker with the previously plotted points indicated by the vertices of a
polyline (for example, -------o, or ------+).
 A specified marker at each point (for example, ooooooo or ++++++++). Optionally,
the markers can be connected with polylines (for example, o---o---o---o).
When the X/Y plot displays, the marker configured for the plotted pair displays in the area next to
the names of the X and Y pairs. The indicator example, as shown in Figure 1-12, distinguishes
plotted data on plots containing more than one plotted pair.
Figure 1-12. An X/Y Plot With More Than One Plotted Pair.
33
Color
In addition to the marker (quantity and style) configuration, specifications for the X/Y plot’s
background color and pen color (point color) affect the X/Y plot’s appearance.
The newest X/Y pair is drawn in the recent color (Leading Real Point specification from the
Configure Plot Pen dialog box). Previously plotted points are drawn in the real-time color
(Real Point specification from the Configure Plot Pen dialog box).
Data read in from an X/Y plot data file displays in the configured color (File Read Data
specification from the Configure Plot Pen dialog box).
Plot Area Background

The X/Y plot area is user-defined in FoxDraw. The plot area can include background display
objects (from a data object file). Specification of the object data file is made from the Plot Area tab
of the Configure Objects dialog box in FoxDraw.
Real-Time Data Values

Real-time values for the X/Y points are derived from Object Manager-connectable variables (pro-
cess or shared) within the system. These values appear on the X/Y plot area at the configured scan
rate, once per scan period. The number of values retained in memory (data buffer) is configurable
(up to 600 X/Y points).
The latest X/Y pair is drawn in the configured recent color; previously plotted points are drawn in
the real-time color.
Once this buffer is filled, the oldest points are removed from the plot. The X/Y plot displays up to
the configured limit within the plot. For example, if the plot is configured to display 300 points,
and 400 points are read in from a data file, only the last 300 points display within the X/Y plot. If
the plot is configured for 300 points, after 300 real-time points are collected and displayed, the
oldest point (301st point) is erased because only the most recent 300 points display.
If one of the data values in a plotted pair is unavailable, out-of-service, bad, or in error, no data is
plotted for the pair. This data field (indicating the current values for each pair displayed) includes
an indicator of the data quality.
Read and Write File Operations

X/Y plots can be configured with buttons to use X/Y plot data files.
Saving Data
The data currently in the memory buffer can be written to a specified file for retrieval and com-
parison analysis. An X/Y plot can include a Write File function key configured to perform the
write-to-file function.
Refer to Display Commands (B0193DF) for information about the plot command.
Reading Data
A Read File function key can be configured to retrieve information from a data file and display it
on the X/Y plot. Data is read to a specified pen. This pen must have been configured previously
(using the Add function from the Pens tab of the Configure Objects dialog box). The pen color
for the added pen must also be configured.
The values for X/Y points can be taken from X/Y pairs stored in a file created from having used
the pre-configured Write File function key.
34
Uses for Read and Write File Operations

Using the read file and write file operations, you can perform the following:
1. Write the X/Y pairs to a file (X/Y plot data file).
2. Using the X/Y plot data file as input, use an application program to perform a linear
regression analysis on the points.
3. After writing the data to the X/Y plot data file, the plot command can be used to clear
the plot area.
4. The points plotted from the X/Y plot data file can be configured to be drawn on the
X/Y plot in a different color to distinguish the points.
Visual Comparison
The above process enables a visual comparison of the saved file data with the recent real-time data
(from the data buffer).
NOTE
The file data is plotted with the same scales used for real-time data.
All the data within the file is read regardless of the number of X/Y pairs.
Curve fitting tools can create intermediate points to smooth the data.
Data Used by X/Y Plots

An X/Y plot displays two types of data:
 Plot area data
 Pen buffer data.
Plot Area Data

If configured, an X/Y plot can display background polygon objects or polyline objects. Although
they are configured in a separate data file, these objects are considered part of the background of
the plot area. Only one object data file may be specified per plot area, but this data file may con-
tain definitions for up to 20 polygons or polylines.
In addition to the optional inclusion of an object data file, an X/Y plot area’s configuration
includes specifications for the number of points (up to 600) that are displayed, the use of markers,
a background color, and scale criteria.
Pen Buffer Data

Each configured pen displays the point values retained in its data buffer (memory). These X and Y
values comprise the points (or relations) drawn on the X/Y plot. At any time, the current contents
of a pen’s data buffer can be saved to a file (X/Y plot file) for future display.
Pen Data Buffer Contents

The contents of a pen’s data buffer can include X/Y values from:
 A data file
 X and Y object values from real time.
When an X/Y plot is first invoked, each pen’s data buffer includes the contents of its read data file.
If no read data file is configured, the data buffer is empty, and no points appear for the pen. Then,
35
at the X/Y plot’s configured scan rate (as configured on the Configure Object dialog box’s Timing
tab), new point data is added to each pen’s data buffer, and the points appear on the X/Y plot.
X/Y Plot Data Collection

You configure an X/Y plot’s data collection from the Configure Objects dialog box. You can spec-
ify the amount of data to be retained in memory (data buffers), the source of the X and Y values,
delays (if used), and the scan rate.
Amount of Data
Each X/Y plot pen displays point values from its data buffer. The number of data points (maxi-
mum of 600), which are configured in FoxDraw from the Plot Area tab of the Configure Objects
dialog box, sets the size of the data buffers.
Data Source
The X and Y values that are stored in the data buffer come from:
 Compound:block.parameters or shared variables read in real time
 Historian instance
 Specified read data file.
Each point (relation) displayed on an X/Y plot is determined by values stored in the pen’s data
buffer.
Time Delay
From the FoxDraw Configure Plot Pen dialog box, an X-axis object (process variable or shared
variable) and a Y-axis object are paired for the pen. The time at which the Y-axis object’s value is
read can be delayed up to 999 scan periods after the reading of the X-axis object.
If a nonzero time delay is configured, the Y variable is delayed with respect to the X variable by
the configured number of scan periods.
For example, if a pen is configured for a scan delay of 3, and the plot has a rate of one second,
no data displays until three scan cycles have passed, or in this case, three seconds. When data dis-
plays, the X value at second “1” is paired with the Y value as second “4” for a delay of three scan
periods.
Scan Rate
Data points are collected at the configured scan rate, which is configured on the Configure
Objects dialog box’s Timing tab.
X/Y Plot Data Files

About X/Y Plot Data Files
An X/Y plot data file contains X/Y plot data that can be read into an X/Y plot.
File Creation
You can create an X/Y plot data file:
 With a text editor.
36
 From FoxView, by writing out the contents of the current X/Y plot for a specific rela-
tion to a file (the X/Y plot data file). This FoxView written file represents a snapshot
of an X/Y plot.
X/Y plot data files are created by FoxView by means of the plot w command. Refer to
the plot command in Display Commands (B0193DF) for more information.
 Externally by means of a separate application.
X/Y Plot Data Files

An X/Y plot data file is an ASCII file, containing start and end keywords to encapsulate data for a
single X/Y plot relation.
An X/Y plot can be configured in FoxDraw to automatically read a data file when the display con-
taining the X/Y plot is invoked. These data files can also be referenced by a plot r command,
which displays real-time data within the plot area. Refer to the plot command in Display Com-
mands (B0193DF) for more information.
When FoxView reads an X/Y data file, default values are used if optional parameters are not pro-
vided. The default values are listed in the table in X/Y plot data file keywords. Specified limits
override pre-configured limits on the relation, as long as the relation is not configured to perform
real-time updating. If a relation has scales configured in an X/Y plot data file and scales configured
for real-time data, the scales for the real-time data take precedence.
File Layout
The X/Y plot data file consists of optional and required keywords, and associated data fields.
Entry Format
Where the format of an individual entry is “keyword keyvalue”, the white space in the entry may
consist of one or more blanks and tabs.
Example of an X/Y Plot Data File

This is an example of an X/Y data plot file.
NOTE
Only one pen is permitted per data file.
# Comments may be placed anywhere

# and makes for a nice header section
STARTPEN
LOWLIMITS 0.00 0.00
HIGHLIMITS 100.00 100.00
97.51 37.83
91.88 24.53
82.55 13.57
70.33 5.92
ENDPEN
37
X/Y Plot Data File Keywords

Use the keywords in Table 1-8, in an X/Y data plot file to read data from an X/Y plot data file or
to write data to an X/Y plot data file.
Table 1-8. X/Y Plot Data File Keywords
Keyword/Line Key value Default Description

ENDPEN N/A N/A End of a pen definition
HIGHLIMITS high X scale, The values configured in High scale value for the X-axis
high Y scale FoxDraw for the X/Y plot and Y-axis variables
LOWLIMITS low X scale, The values configured in Low scale value for the X-axis and
high X scale FoxDraw for the X/Y plot Y-axis variables
STARTPEN N/A N/A Start of a pen definition
XY N/A N/A X/Y plotted pair values.
# N/A N/A Comment designator, which can
appear anywhere in the file. Any
text on a line after a # character is
discarded.
Object Data Files

Object Data File for X/Y Plots
Use an object data file to define polygons and polylines in the plot area of an X/Y plot.
You specify the name of the object data file for an X/Y plot from the Plot Area tab of the
Configure Objects dialog box.
Objects in an X/Y Plot

Objects define target areas within an X/Y plot.
Objects are drawn directly onto the plot area. The objects can be simple lines or closed objects.
If an object is a closed object, the fill type and fill pattern can be configured as a color-coded area,
representing a set of X and Y values. Filled objects can be hollow or opaque, pattern-filled objects.
Closed objects can be configured such that if a plotted point falls within the object area, the color
of the plotted marker and line change color. This configuration takes precedence over the X/Y
plot’s pen colors as configured in the Configure Objects dialog box.
NOTE
Use this FoxView feature to indicate to the operator that there may be a problem,
requiring attention.
If an object is a line or curve, FoxView does not check to determine whether the plotted X/Y
point falls inside the object, since lines and curves have no “inside” area.
38
NOTE
For both logarithmic and linear plot objects, the object data file should have values
in decimal format rather than logarithmic format.
Example Object Data File

This is an example of an object data file.
STARTOBJ
CURSORCOLOR 27
EDGECOLOR 32
EDGESTYLE solid
EDGEWIDTH 2
FILLCOLOR 37
FILLTYPE transparent
FILLSTYLE 1
LINETYPE straight
OBJTYPE closed
POINTTYPE percent
VISIBILITY visible
ZONELINE 25
0 30
10 40
20 50
30 60
40 70
100 70
100 0
0 0
ENDOBJ
STARTOBJ
CURSORCOLOR 25
EDGECOLOR 32
EDGESTYLE solid
EDGEWIDTH 2
39
FILLCOLOR 23
FILLTYPE transparent
FILLSTYLE 1
LINETYPE straight
OBJTYPE closed
POINTTYPE percent
VISIBILITY visible
ZONELINE 27
0 0
10 10
20 20
30 30
40 40
100 40
100 0
0 0
ENDOBJ
STARTLABEL
LABELTEXT Object 1
LABELCOLOR 27
LABELFONT 1
LABELSIZE 2
LABELPREC raster
50 10
ENDLABEL
STARTLABEL
LABELTEXT Object 2
LABELCOLOR 25
LABELFONT 1
LABELSIZE 2
LABELPREC raster
50 50
ENDLABEL
40
Object Data File Format

An object data file is an ASCII file that contains the definition of polygon objects and polyline
objects. Each object can be defined explicitly in this file, or the file may reference another file
(via an include statement) that contains the object definition.
Rules
 There can be only one object data file per X/Y plot.
 An object data file may reference other object data files.
 The order in which the objects are ordered in the file is important. The objects are
drawn on the X/Y plot in the same order in which they appear in the file. The first
objects in the file are drawn first (back of the X/Y plot) and the last objects are drawn
last (front of the X/Y plot).
 If optional parameters are not included in an object definition, FoxView uses default
values for the attributes. The default values are listed in Object Data Keywords.
File Layout
This file consists of required and optional keywords, associated data fields, and comments. Each
object must begin with a STARTOBJ and end with an ENDOBJ.
Ordering of Keywords
 Attribute keywords must appear before the X/Y plotted pair values.
 Place plotted pair values in the order in which they are drawn.
Entry Format
The format of an individual entry is “keyword keyvalue”. The white space in the entry may con-
sist of one or more blanks and tabs.
Limitations
The following limitations are imposed on the composition of these files:
 Object keywords and the “include” keyword are mutually exclusive. Thus, an
“include” keyword cannot be found within the definition of an object. If it is found
within an object definition, it is discarded.
 The file structure includes a limit of five levels. For example, an included file can ref-
erence another included file, but there is a limit of five levels of inclusion. Once the
limit exceeds five, processing ceases and no more files/objects down that path are
processed.
 There is a limit of 20 drawn objects per X/Y plot. Once the number of drawn objects
reaches this limit, processing of the file ceases and no more objects are drawn in the
X/Y plot.
You can use the keywords in Table 1-9, in an object data file to define objects.
41
Table 1-9. Object Data File Keywords

# N/A N/A Comment designator
The text on a line after a comment
designator is discarded and can appear
anywhere in the file.
CURSORCOLOR Valid color number No change Color to use for marker when the plot-
in color ted point enters a closed straight-
edged object.
Note: CURSORCOLOR overrides
the pen colors configured for the pen
in the Configure Plot Pen dialog
box.
EDGECOLOR Valid color number 0 (black) Color to use for the edge of the object
or color of the line/polyline
EDGESTYLE No edge No edge Edge style to use for the object
Solid (No edge)
Dotted
Dashed
EDGEWIDTH An integer greater 1 Width of the edge line
than or equal to 0
ENDLABEL N/A N/A End of a label definition
ENDOBJ N/A N/A End of an object definition
FILLCOLOR Valid color number 0 (black) Color to be used for the object’s fill
FILLSTYLE 1-6 1 Fill pattern for object
FILLTYPE Solid Solid Fill type to be used for a closed object

Hollow
Opaque
Transparent
INCLUDE Filename N/A Full path filename of another object
data file that contains objects to be
drawn in this X/Y plot
LABELCOLOR Valid color number 0 - Black Number of the color to be used for
label text
42
Table 1-9. Object Data File Keywords (Continued)

LABELFONT Valid font number 1 - Arial Number of the font to be used for
label text
LABELPREC Raster raster Font precision to use for label
Hershey
Vector
LABELSIZE Valid point size 11 Font size of label
LABELTEXT Char String Null Label for object
LINETYPE Straight Straight Type of line to use to connect indexes
of object
OBJTYPE Closed Closed The type of object to be created
Open Use closed to connect the last point
to first point in X/Y plotted pair list.
Use open to not connect these points.
POINTTYPE Percent Absolute Indicates the kind of values the data
Absolute points represent.
Use percent to indicate a percentage of
range. Use absolute to indicate an
absolute value.
STARTLABEL N/A N/A Start of a label definition
STARTOBJ N/A N/A Start of an object definition
VISIBILITY Invisible Visible The visibility of the object
Visible
XY N/A N/A X/Y plotted pair values
ZONELINE Valid color number No change Number of color to be used for the
in color outline of the out-of-normal polygon
when a plotted point enters a closed,
straight-edged object.
ZONE_LINE_PEN Pen number, 1 N/A Specifies which relationship in X/Y
through 4 Plot drives a zone line color change.
When the pen depicting the relation-
ship enters the zone, the zone line
color changes to the color specified
with ZONELINE. This feature allows
the configuration of multiple zones,
each configured to show an out-of-
normal condition for a different rela-
tionship. If ZONE_LINE_PEN is not
specified, all pens drive the zone line
color change, that is, any pen entering
the zone changes the color.
43
Profile Plots
The profile plot area displays a series of data points along its X-axis. The X-axis may represent, for
example, length, distance, or frequency. The Y-axis represents the value of each data point. Up to
four color-coded sets of data points may be displayed in the plot area in one of the following pro-
file styles:
 Line, or
 Bar.
Both profile styles use color to indicate:
 Each line or bar line (1-4) with data values within normal limits
 Each line or bar line of data values exceeding alarm limits
 Each reference line (1-4)
 The fill colors for bars if filled bars are configured.
Figure 1-13 shows an example of two profile plots. The upper portion of the figure shows a bar-
style profile plot while the lower part of the figure shows a line-style profile plot.
Figure 1-13. Profile Plot Example
The width of the profile plot area in pixels does not necessarily represent the number of data
points. If there are fewer data points than pixels, the space occupied by each data point is
expanded so that the width of the plot area is filled. Conversely, when a plot line has more points
than pixels, the plot line is drawn, but the points may overlap.
The profile plot supports NAN (Not-A-Number) values, but the NAN values are not displayed.
These NAN values are indicated by line gaps in the profile plot.
44
The standard function buttons included with the profile plot library objects are preconfigured
with FoxView commands. Because these buttons reference the plot name, the plot must be named
in order for the buttons to operate.
Configuration allows you to perform the following tasks:
 Select the configured plot area to execute a FoxView command, for example, access an
overlay or display read-out values.
 Toggle between the pause mode and unpaused mode. When in the paused mode, the
plot area is not updated.
 Read out a data point on the X-axis. A vertical hairline appears at the selected X-coor-
dinate, and the point number and value on each line are recorded in FoxView
memory and optionally displayed in the read-out fields in the profile area.
 After performing a read-out, select the Send Value to send the point number and
value for each line to the configured compound:block.parameter or shared variable.
 Select an object configured with both read-out and send in order to read and send
point numbers and values with one selection.
 Request FoxView to redraw the profile plot.
Profile Plot Pens

Each set of plot pens has its own:
 High and Low Scale Values
 High and Low Alarm Limits
 Reference Line Value
 Start and End Offsets
 Send Read Point and Send Read Value.
This information is available from the profile pen configuration or, if unconfigured, from the
Data Header record in the Data Array.
When the high and low alarm limit values are exceeded, a line or bar is drawn in the specified
alarm color. The fill color of a bar that has exceeded the alarm limits changes to the alarm color.
Pens can be drawn:
 On the X axis from left to right (default) or from right to left (reverse X axis).
 With a horizontal reference line that indicates either the median value of the data or
the low scale value.
When reverse X axis is configured, the profile line is reversed in direction. The pen, which is nor-
mally drawn from left to right, is drawn from right to left creating a mirror image.
Depending on the profile style selected, the optional reference line is drawn under or on top of
the plot line or bar. When “line” is selected, the reference line appears under the plot line; when
“bar” is selected, the reference line appears on top of the bar line.
The color and value of the reference line are configurable. The reference line value is defined
either by the display file, a process control variable, or the data-array header. It may be the median
value or the low-scale value represented by the X-axis.
The bar graph has a different appearance depending on whether the reference line is the median
value or the low-scale value represented by the X-axis.
45
Data Updates
All data points on a profile plot are updated simultaneously and the previous values are discarded.
A profile plot (line or bar) with multiple lines configured has the following line priority scheme:
Line 1 has the highest priority, Line 2 has the next highest priority, and so on. The lines are drawn
on the screen in the following order: from Line 4 (lowest priority) to Line 1 (highest priority).
When one line is redrawn, all the other lines are also redrawn. In bar profiles, when a single point
changes every bar is redrawn.
Profile Plot Data

The data to be plotted is a set of string variables in an Object Manager data array variable. The
data source for the contents of the data array is an application program, which maintains the data
array. The trigger is altered each time a change is made to the data stored in the data array.
Each profile pen is connected to a trigger variable via a change-driven connection. When a new
value appears in the trigger variable, FoxView reads (via the Data Array path name) all the values
from the set of string variables to be displayed.
When the trigger connection and the data array connection names indicate that both variables are
in the same station, FoxView uses the OM list references to retrieve the PSAP address through a
getval_list() OM call. To be valid for such a call, the Trigger name and Data Array name should
be:
Data_Array_Name=<trigger_name>01
For example: Trigger Connection Name: PAPER
Data Array Name: PAPER01
It is recommended,
 Per profile area, the trigger and data connection variables reside in one station.
 Per profile plot line, the optional input connections all reside in the same station.
NOTE
Profile plots do not support connections to individual data points or individual
bars.
String variables are capable of holding multiple values to be plotted. The maximum length of
string variables is 255 bytes. Therefore a string variable can hold a maximum of:
 63 float or long values,
 127 integer values, or
 255 byte values.
46
The first Data Array contains the Data Header information as well as a set of data values. The
Data Header includes the following information, which is only used if not defined in the profile
plot configuration:
 The data type being used (always used)
 The number of points
 High and low scale limits
 High and low alarm limits
 The reference value.
Therefore, the first Data Array cannot hold as many data points as subsequent data arrays. If the
number of points in a profile plot exceeds the number of data values available in the first Data
Array, additional string variables are used. See Table 1-10.
When multiple strings are required, the subsequent Data Arrays contain the same path name as
the first Data Array with the exception of the last two characters. These characters are automati-
cally substituted with a number depending on the array, for example, 02 for the second array, 03
for third array... 59 for last array.
Table 1-10. Contents of Data Arrays
No. Of Values in No. Of Values in

Type Type Length First Data Array Subsequent Arrays
FLOAT 4 55 63
LONG 4 55 63
INTEGER 2 114 127
BYTE 1 234 255
For example, when you need to display 480 data points that are stored in the data array type
“float”, the number of string arrays needed is:
1 + (480-55)/63 = 8 data arrays
These 8 string arrays may be named, such as FLOATARR01, FLOATARR02..... FLOATARR08.
When the 480 values are packed in the data array type “integer”, the number of arrays needed is:
1 + (480-114)/127 = 4 data arrays
Packing the same 480 values into a byte array would result in 2 arrays.
A special tool (/opt/fox/bin/tools/omary50) is used to create, get, set, or delete the Object Man-
ager string arrays. Refer to Object Manager Calls (B0193BC).
To engineer data array access, refer to Display Engineering for FoxView Software and Display Man-
ager Software (B0193MQ).
47
Installation Notes
FoxDraw operates on I/A Series workstations that run Microsoft Windows XP. FoxDraw can also
be installed off-platform on computers using one of the following operating systems:
 Windows XP
 Windows Server 2003.
Foxboro Trends
FoxDraw includes many standard Foxboro trends. Table 1-11 lists some examples.
Table 1-11. Foxboro Trend Types
Trend type Description

Graph Only This graph displays no identifying information.
Group Trend 1/8 screen - This graph includes trend duration, scan rate, variable
name and value (updating) displayed above graph.
The trend also includes Pause, Back, and Forward scroll buttons.
TND_FULL_TREND 1/4 screen (full trend) - In addition to containing the same informa-
tion and functions as a group trend, a full trend includes: Com-
pound, Block, and Parameter names; and Low and High scale values.
TND_FWxHH_CB 1/2 screen, full width, half height - This graph has the same infor-
mation and functions as a full trend.
Note: Two half-height trends fit on a single screen, allowing enough
room for a row of buttons at the bottom of the screen.
TND_FWxHH_BD 1/2 screen, full width, half height - This graph has the same infor-
mation and functions as a full trend, but with Block name and
Descriptor only.
TND_FWxHH_CD 1/2 screen, full width, half height - This graph has the same infor-
mation and functions as a full trend, but with Compound name and
Descriptor only.
TND_UPDATE_RIGHT 1/8 screen - This is the same as a group trend, except the information
displays to the right of the graph.
48
Accessing I/A Series Data

FoxDraw uses either AIM*API or FoxAPI software installed on an I/A Series workstation to
retrieve I/A Series data, including:
 Compound Summary Access (CSA) data to support the Compound/Block Browser
 Process information stored in an AIM*Historian instance
 Parameter and range data from a CP database for configuring faceplates, trend pens,
marker locations, and attributes such as Fill Level.
The workstation is selected from a pull-down list in the Servers tab of the User Options dialog
box. When the server is another workstation on the network, FoxDraw establishes a TCP/IP con-
nection with the workstation to access its AIM*API or FoxAPI server. This client/server connec-
tion enables you to run FoxDraw on off-platform workstations.
FoxDraw uses two different methods to include networked workstations in the list of available
servers:
Configured List of Servers The FoxDraw host workstation references a client initialization
file (an_init.cfg), which includes the server name, IP address,
server-side port number of each workstation to be accessed by
FoxDraw and other API clients. You configure this file with
API Server Connection Utility dialog box (Figure 1-14), which
can be accessed by choosing the Options > Configure
Servers from the menu bar.
Broadcast Request When the FoxDraw application is started, it broadcasts a
request-to-connect message to all workstations on the network,
and establishes a connection with each API server that
responds within a configured timeout period. The available
workstations are included in a pull-down list in the Servers tab
of the User Options dialog box. When this auto-discover
method is used, the workstation also includes workstations
configured in the client initialization file, if there is one on the
workstation.
Broadcast Request can be disabled by checking an option in the API Server Connection Utility
dialog box. If the option is checked, you must use the utility to configure at least one server
connection.
49
Figure 1-14. API Server Connection Utility
Object Manager Variables

You can specify the process variable or shared variable to which a display object is connected.
Object Manager Variable Types

Table 1-12 lists the variable types for Object Manager variables.
Table 1-12. Variable Types for Object Manager Variables
Syntax Description
Compound:Block.Parameter A block parameter.
.Parameter A shortcut block parameter. The display object is connected to
the compound:block that is defined somewhere else.
This syntax is supported only in library objects (for example,
faceplates) and detail displays.
Compound.Parameter A compound parameter.
Shared_Variable A shared variable.
$NAME Dollar sign substitution name. FoxView replaces the $name field
with the contents of the NAME variable. The NAME data type
must be a string and must be an environment variable or a
shared variable.
50
Table 1-12. Variable Types for Object Manager Variables (Continued)
Syntax Description
<subs_name> A substitution name. The substitution name must be defined in
a substitution list. See “Substitution List” on page 453 for more
information.
Naming Limitations
Table 1-13 lists the naming limitations for Object Manager variables.
Table 1-13. Naming Limitations of Object Manager Variables
Variable Limitations
Compound You can use:
 Up to 12 characters
 A through Z (uppercase only)
 0 through 9
 The underscore character (_).
Note: The underscore character cannot be the first character.
Block Same as Compound.
Parameter Same as Compound, but only six characters.
Shared_Variable Same as Compound, but up to 14 characters.
$NAME Same as Compound.
Note: When surrounded by other names, use braces.
For example, UC01_LEAD:${P1}.OUT
<subs_name> Up to 12 characters. Cannot be surrounded by other characters.
Bit Extensions to Variables

To connect an attribute to an individual bit in a variable (for example, a Packed Boolean
or Packed Long), specify a bit extension to the variable. Use bit extensions in a:
 Trend pen configuration
 Display (manager) command, such as toggle and setb
 Momentary contact.
Momentary Timed Contacts

With a Momentary Contact operator action, you can optionally concatenate the time constant
to the variable through the expression |T=<time>.
The syntax is:
<Variable>|T=<seconds>
You can use this function only when the variable is unknown (for example, $P1 or
<subs_name>). You can specify the value of the time constant via the Momentary Contact dialog
box, if known.
51
Files Required by FoxDraw

Invensys/Foxboro Supplied Templates
FoxDraw includes Invensys/Foxboro supplied templates for a base display, library object, overlay,
or palette (see Table 1-14 and Table 1-15). Template and grid sizes are based on the World Coor-
dinate system used by FoxDraw.
Table 1-14. Template and Grid Sizes used by FoxDraw
Template Size Description

Base Display 100 units wide Standard full-screen display with a gray background.
by 75 units high This is the default new file type.
Library Object 100 units wide Library object without a background.
by 75 units high
Overlay 100 units wide Full-screen display with a gray background. The overlay
by 75 units high hides the base display.
Overlay 100 units wide Half-screen horizontal overlay with a gray background
- 1/2 horizontal by 37.5 units high positioned over the top half of the display.
Overlay 50 units wide Half-screen vertical overlay with a gray background
- 1/2 vertical by 75 units high positioned over the left half of the display.
Overlay - 1/4 50 units wide Quarter-screen overlay with a gray background
by 37.5 units high positioned over the upper-left quarter of the display.
Overlay - 1/8 25 units wide Eighth-screen overlay with a gray background
by 37.5 units high positioned over the upper-left section of the display.
Palette 18 units wide Palette
18 x 24 by 24 units high
Palette 25 units wide Palette. This is the default size.
52
Table 1-15. Template and Grid Sizes used by FoxDraw (for Widescreen Displays/Overlays)
Template Size Description

Base Display 133.33 units wide Standard full-screen display with a gray background.
by 75 units high This is the default new file type.
Library Object 133.33 units wide Library object without a background.
by 75 units high
Overlay 133.33 units wide Full-screen display with a gray background. The overlay
by 75 units high hides the base display.
Overlay 133.33 units wide Half-screen horizontal overlay with a gray background
- 1/2 horizontal by 37.5 units high positioned over the top half of the display.
Overlay 66.66 units wide Half-screen vertical overlay with a gray background
- 1/2 vertical by 75 units high positioned over the left half of the display.
Overlay - 1/4 66.66 units wide Quarter-screen overlay with a gray background
by 37.50 units high positioned over the upper-left quarter of the display.
Overlay - 1/8 33.33 units wide Eighth-screen overlay with a gray background
by 37.50 units high positioned over the upper-left section of the display.
53
FoxDraw Data Directories

FoxDraw uses two data directories:
 Foxboro data directory, \usr\fox\wp\data, contains the following data files:
fontdef.dat - font configuration file
colordef.dat - color configuration file
dspblock.dat - block database file
dsppdef.dat - parameter definition file.
 \opt\customer\data holds user data files that you copied from the Foxboro data
directory and modified to meet your needs.
Default Configuration Database

Database defaults are determined by two ASCII files located in the \usr\fox\wp\data directory:
 dspblock.dat contains parameters for each block type.
 dsppdef.dat contains range definitions and colors.
If you want to change the default data associated with an I/A Series block, follow the directions at
the beginning of these .dat files.
! CAUTION
Copy these .dat files to your data directory and edit the copies. Do not change the
.dat files in the fox directory, as your edits may be overwritten in a future system
upgrade.
FoxDraw Settings
FoxDraw settings are saved in the Windows registry.
These settings include:
 Default graphic attributes
 User option settings
 Most recently used files list
 Chosen File directories
 FoxDraw window sizes and locations.
The settings are saved between uses of the application. When FoxDraw starts up, it reads the
settings. When FoxDraw exits, it saves settings.
54
2. Drawing and Editing
This chapter describes the FoxDraw drawing area and how you create and draw objects.
Viewing Objects
FoxDraw Drawing Area
The view is the drawing area in FoxDraw. Use View menu commands to change the appearance
of the drawing area or to affect object behavior when Snap to Grid or Snap Gravity is enabled.
Screen Co-ordinates
Standard Definition (4:3 Aspect Ratio) Widescreen (16:9 Aspect Ratio)

Figure 2-1. Screen Co-ordinates
FoxDraw uses the world coordinate system, which is based on floating-point numbers. The sys-
tem originates at 0,0 and extends both positively and negatively to limits of -32768,-32768 and
32767,32767. Refer to Figure 2-1.
For displays in standard definition format ((4:3) aspect ratio), a FoxDraw full-screen base display
has its lower-left corner at 0,0 and extends 100 world coordinate units in the X-axis and 75 units
in the Y-axis.
For displays in widescreen format ((16:9) aspect ratio), a FoxDraw full-screen base display has its
lower-left corner at 0,0 and extends 133.33 world coordinate units in the X-axis and 75 units in
the Y-axis.
Displayable Area
The displayable area is the part of the drawing area that appears in FoxView. The area varies,
according to the type of display.
55
B0700BE – Rev F 2. Drawing and Editing
For a base display in standard definition format ((4:3) aspect ratio), the displayable area fills the
entire screen and measures 100 units by 75 units. For a quarter-screen overlay, the displayable area
is 50 units by 37.5 units.
For a base display in widescreen format ((16:9) aspect ratio), the displayable area fills the entire
screen and measures 133.33 units by 75 units. For a quarter-screen overlay, the displayable area is
66.66 units by 37.5 units.
Scratchpad Area
For each display type, a black outline indicates the displayable area. Use the space outside this area
as a scratchpad. You can temporarily move objects to the scratchpad area for editing, away from
finished areas of a drawing.
Scroll Bars
Use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars to position the display. To return the display to its
default position, use the View menu’s Normal View command.
Zoom Commands
Use Zoom commands to control how large or small the drawing appears on screen. You can
zoom in or zoom out on the entire drawing area, or you can zoom in on a specific area with the
Zoom Lasso command.
Zooming is typically used to magnify the drawing area for detail work. To return to the default
view size, use the View menu’s Normal View command.
Height-to-Width Ratio
When you use the Zoom commands, objects appear larger or smaller, but their original height-to-
width proportions do not change.
The View menu offers several zoom commands, as listed in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1. Zoom Commands
Command Description
Zoom In Magnifies the drawing area by one increment.
Zoom Out Shrinks the drawing area by one increment.
Zoom In Changes the cursor to a magnifying glass, and permits you to magnify the drawing
Continu- area incrementally by clicking the left mouse button.
ous
For a fast zoom, hold down the left mouse button.
To stop zooming, click the right mouse button.
Zoom Out Changes the cursor to a magnifying glass, and permits you to shrink the drawing
Continu- area incrementally by clicking the left mouse button.
ous
Zoom Lets you lasso an area for magnification by drawing a selection rectangle around it.
Lasso
Zoom commands are also available from buttons, as shown below:
56
2. Drawing and Editing B0700BE – Rev F
Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Lasso Normal View
57
Grids
A grid is a matrix of solid lines or dotted lines that you can display as an aid while positioning and
aligning objects in FoxDraw. Grids are a display building feature and are not visible when display
files are opened in FoxView.
You can modify grid settings and save individual settings as grid files, which you can reuse later
with different displays.
Optionally, you can configure FoxDraw to automatically save grid settings with your display files.
When you open the file for editing, the grid reloads.
NOTE
This is not the same as saving a particular setting as a grid file.
Palettes
Palettes are windows that contain graphic objects that you can use to build a display or library
object. Numerous symbols, markers, and ISA-recommended graphic objects are conveniently
available from FoxDraw palettes.
An extended directory of palettes, entitled I/A Series Symbols Palettes, is also available to accom-
pany the FoxDraw existing palettes and provides over 1,200 configurable FoxDraw graphical
objects. Refer to FoxDraw specification sheet (PSS 21S-2B3 B4) for more information.
The palette shown in Figure 2-2, is one of many available palettes with objects, that you can copy
or link to your drawing.
Figure 2-2. Palette
Creating Palettes
If you frequently use certain objects, and the objects are not included in the standard Foxboro pal-
ettes, you can save time by creating your own palettes.
You can create simple palettes of basic objects such as rounded rectangles or triangles, or more
elaborate palettes such as company logos or DIN symbols.
58
Copying an Object from an External Palette

FoxDraw allows you to copy an object from an external palette to the display library Palettes
directory tree.
Recognized Palettes
The Select Palette dialog box’s tree list displays available palettes, based on these criteria:
 Foxboro palettes are located in /opt/fox/displib/Palettes directory (Solaris)
or \opt\fox\displib\Palettes directory (Windows).
 User palettes must be located in these directories, or directories immediately under
them:
 /opt/customer/displib/Palettes (Solaris)
 \opt\customer\displib\Palettes (Windows).
NOTE
FoxDraw supports two levels of palettes. If a palette is not in one of these two direc-
tory levels (the Palettes directory or a subdirectory under Palettes), FoxDraw does
not recognize the palette, and the Select Palette dialog box does not display the pal-
ette’s name.
 You can view the names of palettes in one external palette directory.
The names of the palettes in the external location are examined and are compared to
the names of the palettes in the Foxboro Palettes directory and User Palettes directory.
NOTE
If the name of a palette in the external directory is identical to a palette name in the
Foxboro Palettes directory or User Palettes directory, the external palette does not
appear in the tree list.
Enabling Support of an External Palette

You can display the name of one directory in the External Palettes portion of the Select
Palette dialog box.
To specify an external palette

1. Choose User Options from the Options menu.
The User Options dialog box appears.
2. Select the External Palettes tab.
3. Select the Use External Palettes check box.
If this check box is not selected, there is no access to External Palettes from the
Select Palettes dialog box.
4. Click Location.
5. Navigate to the directory of interest and click OK.
6. Click OK to exit the dialog box.
59
Palette Name Appearance in the Tree Control

FoxDraw lists an external palette in the tree control only when the models with the same name do
not exist under the /opt/fox and opt/customer directory trees.
Fox example, if the 3D_Tanks library object is in the /opt/fox/displib/Palettes directory, the exter-
nal 3D_Tanks palette does not appear in the tree control.
NOTE
If you want to use the external palette, you must delete, rename, or move the local
3D_Tanks library object or use the Palette Browser.
Copied Objects Verses Linked Objects

When you place an object from a palette in a display, in the majority of cases, FoxDraw copies the
object from the palette and pastes it into the display. Some palette names are clearly identified as
copy palettes (for example, copy_2dshapes and copy_metal_pipes).
Linked Library Objects

Some palettes, which are identified as links palettes (for example, links_boiler and
links_metal_pipes) contain linked library objects. To edit the primitive objects in a linked library
object, you must open the library object itself.
Copied Objects
Unlike a linked object such as a bitmap or a symbol, a copied object becomes part of the display
file. You can ungroup a copied object, and you can configure its primitive objects the same way as
an object that you draw. You can add dynamic attributes and change graphic attributes.
How FoxDraw Copies a Palette

When you copy (install) an external palette, FoxDraw copies the palette to the /opt/cus-
tomer/displib/Palettes directory tree (Solaris) or the \opt\customer\displib/Palettes directory tree
(Windows).
Behind the Scenes

Before FoxDraw copies an external palette, it first copies the symbols used by the external palette
into the /opt/customer/displib/Symbols_1 directory. After the symbols are successfully copied,
FoxDraw then copies the external palette.
The Copy Operation in Detail

Before copying an external palette, FoxDraw checks the following:
 The /opt/customer/displib directory tree does not contain a library object with the
same name as the external palette.
If conflicting library object(s) are located (except under the Palettes directory tree), an
error message displays, listing all the conflicting library objects.
60
NOTE
You must resolve all these conflicts before the palette can be copied.
If FoxDraw locates conflicting library object(s) under the

/opt/customer/displib/Palettes directory tree, it checks that each library object is
different from the external palette.
NOTE
If there is a difference, a warning displays, listing all the conflicting library objects.
You can continue copying the palette.
 FoxDraw checks that the /opt/fox/displib directory tree does not contain a library
object with the same name as a library object on the external palette. It does not check
for conflicts for the external palettes.
If a library object with the same name exists in the same location under the /opt/cus-
tomer/displib/Palettes directory tree, FoxDraw assumes that you previously confirmed
the copy of the external palette, regardless of the name conflict.
If FoxDraw locates conflicting library object(s), a warning displays, listing all the con-
flicting library objects. You can continue copying the palette.
 FoxDraw checks that the /opt/customer/displib directory tree does not contain a
library object with the same name as symbols used by the external palette.
If a conflicting library object is located (except in Symbols_1 directory), FoxDraw dis-
plays an error message that lists all the conflicting library objects. You must resolve all
these conflicts before the palette can be copied.
If FoxDraw finds conflicting library object(s) in the /opt/customer/displib/Symbols_1
directory, it checks that the library object(s) are different from the external symbol. If
there is a difference, FoxDraw displays a warning that lists all the conflicting library
objects. You can continue copying the palette.
 FoxDraw checks that the /opt/fox/displib directory tree does not contain a library
object with the same name as symbols used by the external palette. It does not check
for conflicts for the external symbols.
If a library object with the same name exists in the /opt/customer/displib/Symbols_1
directory, FoxDraw assumes that you previously confirmed the copy of the external
symbol, regardless of the name conflict.
If FoxDraw finds conflicting library object(s), a warning message displays, listing all
the conflicting library objects. You can continue copying the palette.
Links Palettes with Red Objects

Some links palettes (for example, the links_pipes palette as shown in Figure 2-3) contain two ver-
sions of the same object, one gray and the other red.
Red objects are linked library objects with a polygon overlay.
You can configure the polygon with dynamic attributes (such as Fill Color) without affecting the
three-dimensional appearance of the linked library object.
61
Figure 2-3. Palette (links_pipes)
High, Medium, or Low Resolution Objects

Some palettes contain two or three sets of objects, which are labeled high, medium, and/or low
resolution.
NOTE
The objects differ only in the number of primitive shapes used to build them.
TIP
Whenever possible, choose a low-resolution object to minimize the display file’s size
and optimize performance.
Palette Building Tips

If an object is composed of multiple parts, group them together so you can select them from the
palette as an entity. When you place the grouped object in your display, you can ungroup it, if
needed.
To ensure that object labels are not accidentally placed in a drawing

1. Select the label.
2. From the Object menu, choose Detect Off.
The labels cannot be selected.
62
Editing
Undo Buffer
The undo buffer stores operations that are performed on graphic objects (for example,
Create, Select, and Align). The Undo command and Redo command use the information in the
undo buffer.
The undo buffer resets when you open any display for editing. By default, up to 24 operations are
stored.
Dynamic attribute configuration, faceplate configuration, and trend configuration commands are
also stored in the undo buffer, as are other operations that change the current display (for exam-
ple, Display Properties).
The undo buffer does not store operations such as zooming, changing default attributes, or grid
settings.
Clipboard
The clipboard is a temporary storage area for data that you move or copy from one area of a dis-
play to another, from one FoxDraw display or library object to another, or from one FoxDraw
instance to another.
Use the Cut or Copy commands to place selected objects onto the clipboard. Then paste the
selection to the FoxDraw workspace.
TIP
Use the Copy command to copy text entries from FoxDraw dialog boxes onto the
clipboard, and then paste the text to other applications.
Text objects can also be pasted to WordPad, Notepad, or Microsoft Word. When you cut or copy
graphic objects, a bitmap copy of the entire display is placed on the clipboard. You can paste this
bitmap to applications such as Microsoft Paint or Microsoft Word.
User Options
FoxDraw allows you to specify user preferences, which serve as default settings that affect the way
you draw things.
FoxDraw User Options dialog box provides a means of specifying user preferences. From this
dialog box, you can configure:
 Whether to save grid data to a display
 Cursor size
 Whether to display the actual object or a frame of the object during a
movement operation
 The maximum undo number
 Whether to save default attributes (graphic attributes)
63
 The move arrow distance

 Automatic backup capability
 Depth of the history list used for process variables, ranges, and display files
 The default template used for trends
 AIM*API and FoxAPI server settings
 External palette specification
 Retain Case.
Drawing an Object
FoxDraw Objects
You can include these types of objects in FoxDraw displays:
 Primitive objects
 Bitmaps
 Library objects (buttons, symbols, faceplates, trends, X/Y plots, profile plots, and
markers).
Use Draw menu commands to create primitive objects. These commands are also available as but-
tons from the Draw toolbar.
Reference Points
The reference point of an object or group of objects is the point:
 On which the object rotates
 From which the object grows or shrinks
 That snaps to the grid
 That snaps to another object.
By default, the reference point is the center of the object. You can specify a different location with
the Reference point command.
FoxDraw Versus FoxView

In FoxDraw, the reference point governs rotation, scaling, and snapping only when Point Modes
option in the View menu is set to Reference.
In FoxView, however, the reference point always determines how an object moves, rotates, and
grows or shrinks.
Point Modes
An object can be associated with one of three point modes: point mode, center mode, or reference
mode. You can change an object’s point mode from Point Modes commands in the View menu.
Point Mode commands affect the way an object snaps to grid or snaps gravity, as well as the way it
is rotated and scaled. The commands and their description are listed in Table 2-2.
64
Table 2-2. Point Mode Types
Mode Description
Point Mode This is the default mode. Scaling is relative to the handle opposite
the handle that you select for scaling.
For example, if you drag the upper-right selection handle, the
lower-left handle remains anchored.
Scaling
handle
Anchored
handle
Center Mode An object grows or shrinks in all directions from its center or
toward its center. The center point is anchored.
Reference An object grows or shrinks from or toward its reference point.
Mode The reference point is anchored.
When you rotate an object in point mode (refer to Figure 2-4), it rotates on the point opposite
the handle you select for rotation.
Selection
handle
Rotation
point
Figure 2-4. Scaling an Object in Point Mode
When you scale an object in point mode, it is scaled relative to the handle opposite the handle you
select for scaling.
FoxDraw Fonts
Two types of fonts are available in FoxDraw:
 Standard fonts, which include:
 X-Window System™ scalable
 Windows TrueType
 Hershey fonts.
Hershey Fonts
Hershey fonts, which are public domain vector fonts developed by A.V. Hershey, are distributed
by the National Bureau of Standards (now called NIST).
Hershey fonts are not as sharp and well-defined in appearance as standard fonts.
65
Unlike standard system fonts, Hershey fonts can be rotated or flipped. You can configure them
with the Rotate dynamic attribute. Hershey fonts are displayed in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5. Hershey Fonts
Filled and Unfilled Objects

Objects you create with drawing tools can be filled or unfilled. Closed objects and open objects
(such as polylines and curves) can be filled.
NOTE
Select a filled object by clicking anywhere on the object. Select an unfilled object by
clicking on its edge.
You can fill these objects:

 Polyline
 Rectangle
 Polygon
 Curve
 Closed Curve
 Circle
 Sector
 Rectangle enclosing background text.
66
Object Detectability
Making an Object Undetectable
The Object menu’s Detect Off command makes an object undetectable. The object is fully visi-
ble.
Use the Detect Off command to copy or move certain objects in a display, while leaving others
untouched. For example, if you are copying objects from a FoxDraw palette, you can make the
object labels in the palette undetectable so they do not inadvertently become part of your display.
Also, while working on a display, you can make carefully positioned objects temporarily undetect-
able to avoid accidentally moving them.
Restoring Detectability
Use the Object menu’s Detect On command to restore detectability to an object. The detectabil-
ity details are listed in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3. Object Detectability
When an object is Then

Detectable You can click on it to select it
Undetectable Clicking has no effect
Object Visibility
You can assign the Visibility attribute to an object, which makes the display object visible or invis-
ible, depending on the state of a process variable.
For example, you might configure a Restart button to be visible only while a process is in the
Hold state.
NOTE
In FoxView, an invisible object cannot be selected.
Visibility can be associated with these conversion types:

 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
67
Object Edge
You can change the edge line style, width, and color of these objects:
 Line  Polyline  Rectangle  Polygon
 Curve  Closed curve  Circle  Sector
 Rectangle enclosing background text.
Edge Style
Choices include: invisible, solid, dotted, dashed, and dot-dash.
NOTE
To optimize display performance style for filled objects, select the invisible edge.
Edge Width
You can choose a width of 1 to 20 pixels.
Edge Color
You can choose a color from the standard color palette or create a custom color.
Object Movement
Default Movement
You can configure the default fast and slow movement from the General tab of the User Options
dialog box.
Changing Movement Speed

For routine object movement, turn off Fast Arrow Move (from the Layout menu).
Fast Arrow Move toggles arrow key movement speed between fast (0.5 world coordinate units per
keystroke) and slow (0.05 units). The default speed is fast.
To precisely position objects, turn off Fast Arrow Move.
68
Object Alignment
Use alignment commands to align objects to the focused object. These commands, as listed in
Table 2-4, are available from the Layout toolbar on the right or from the Align option in the
Layout menu.
Table 2-4. Object Alignment Commands and Buttons
Command Aligns
Vertical Center Selected objects vertically to the center point of the focused object.
This command is available from the Layout menu, F9, or .
Horizontal Cen- Selected objects horizontally to the center point of the focused object.
ter This command is available from the Layout menu, Shift+F9, or .
Top The top edge of selected objects with the top edge of the focused object.
This command is available from the Layout menu, Shift+UP, or .
Bottom The bottom edge of selected objects with the bottom edge of the focused
object. This command is available from the Layout menu, Shift+DOWN,
or .
Left The left edge of selected objects with the left edge of the focused object.
This command is available from the Layout menu, Shift+LEFT, or .
Right The right edge of selected objects with the right edge of the focused object.
This command is available from the Layout menu, Shift+RIGHT, or .
Object Flipping
Use flip commands to change the orientation of objects.
You can flip text displayed in a Hershey font. You cannot flip text displayed in a Windows stan-
dard TrueType font or X-Windows system scalable font.
NOTE
Do not use a flip command to reverse the fill level direction of an object. Instead,
configure the fill direction from the Fill tab of the Set Default Attributes dialog box.
69
These commands, as listed in Table 2-5, are available from the Rotate toolbar at the bottom of the
window or from the Flip option in the Layout menu.
Table 2-5. Flip Commands and Buttons
To flip the object Choose or click

On its center point over the Flip Horizontal from the Layout menu, press F8, or
horizontal axis click
On its center point over the vertical Flip Vertical from the Layout menu, press Shift+F8,
axis, to produce a mirror image or click
Vertically on its top edge Flip Top from the Layout menu or press Ctrl+UP
Vertically on the bottom edge Flip Bottom from the Layout menu or press
Ctrl+DOWN.
Horizontally over the left edge Flip Left from the Layout menu or press Ctrl+LEFT.
Over the right edge Flip Right from the Layout menu or press Ctrl+RIGHT.
Object Rotation
The rotation commands, available in the Rotate option of the Layout menu, allows certain
degrees of rotation of the object. Menu items allow you to rotate the object by 15, 30, 45, or 90
degrees as well as by a custom amount.
Rotation commands can also be accessed from the Rotate toolbar.
A positive amount rotates the object counterclockwise. A negative amount rotates the object
clockwise.
Rules
You cannot rotate Windows TrueType fonts and X-Windows system scalable fonts. To rotate text,
use a Hershey font.
You cannot rotate bitmaps.
NOTE
Do not use the Layout menu’s Rotate command to reverse the fill level direction of
an object. Instead, configure fill attributes from the Fill tab of the Set Defaults
Attributes dialog box (or Set Selection Attributes dialog box).
70
Object Scaling
The Same Size option in the Layout menu has commands that scale selected object(s) to the same
size as the focused object. Some of these commands are also available from toolbar buttons.
Use the Height command or button to make the selected objects the same height as the focused
object.
Use the Width command or button to make the selected objects the same width as the focused
object.
Use the Both command to make the selected objects the same height and width as the focused
object.
Object Layout
Use commands in the Layout menu to:
 Move (ordering) objects to the front or back.
 Align objects
 Space numerous objects evenly
 Flip objects
 Rotate Objects
 Make numerous objects the same size as the focused object
Object Snapping
Use snap commands to precisely position objects in a drawing. The Snap to Grid and Snap
Gravity commands are mutually exclusive and stay in effect until you deselect the command.
You can display a grid and use the View menu’s Snap to Grid command to make objects snap to
the nearest intersection point on the grid.
As an alternative, use the View menu’s Snap Gravity command to snap objects to a point on a
nearby object.
Instead of snapping an object to the grid, you can select Snap Gravity, which causes an object to
snap to another object.
These commands are also available from the and buttons.
Point Mode’s Effect on Snapping

The way an object snaps depends on the current point mode. Table 2-6 lists the Point modes
Table 2-6. Point Modes
Point Mode Allows you to

Point Select and drag any point in an object, and snap the point to the nearest grid
intersection.
Center Drag the object and snap its center point to the nearest grid intersection.
Reference Drag the object and snap its reference point to the nearest grid intersection.
71
Toolbars Command
Use the View menu’s Toolbars command to:
 Display or hide individual FoxDraw toolbars.
By default, FoxDraw displays all toolbars and the Status bar.
 Turn on and turn off Tooltips.
The Toolbar types are listed in Table 2-7.
Table 2-7. Toolbar Types
Select To
Standard Display or hide the Standard toolbar.
Draw Display or hide the Draw toolbar.
Layout Display or hide the Layout toolbar.
Rotate Display or hide the Rotate toolbar.
Status Display or hide the Status bar.
ToolTips Display or hide the names of toolbar buttons.
Order Commands
Use order commands to help you order objects.
By default, objects are ordered according to the sequence in which they were created.
Use the To Front command from the Order option of the Layout menu, Ctrl+F, or Layout
toolbar button to move the selected object(s) in front of other objects.
Use the To Front command from the Order option of the Layout menu, Ctrl+B, or Layout
toolbar button to move the selected object(s) to the back of other objects.
Ordering Objects by Selection

The layout menu’s By Selection command reorders the selected object(s) according to the
sequence in which you select them. The order determines the object that has the focus.
About Arcs
FoxDraw provides tools that you use to create different types of arcs.
Pie Arcs
The picture shown below displays counterclockwise selection of three points and the resulting pie
arc.
72
This picture shown below displays clockwise selection of three points and the resulting pie arc.
Sector Arcs
This picture shown below displays counterclockwise selection of three points and the resulting
sector.
This picture shown below displays clockwise selection of three points and the resulting sector.
3-Point Sector Arcs

This picture shown below displays how you can select the three points.
This picture shown below displays how some completed sectors appear.
73
74
3. Object Configuration
This chapter describes the attributes you assign to an object. These attributes give an object life.
Object Attributes
You configure a display object’s static (graphic) attributes from the Set Selection Attributes dialog
box.
You can configure a display object with animation via the Configure Objects dialog box. You can
use either or both of these two methods:
 By applying one or more dynamics (also called dynamic attributes or dynamic
updates) such as Visibility or Fill Level to the object and connecting each dynamic to
a process variable or file. With this type of configuration, as the process variable’s value
changes, the object’s presentation changes. Operator intervention is not necessary.
NOTE
You can also configure and apply a convention, which is a group of dynamics.
Applying a convention to an object saves time and ensures display consistency.
 By connecting the object to an operator action (such as opening a display or executing

a command). This type of configuration, for example, allows an operator to trigger an
action by selecting an object.
NOTE
1. Although an object can have many dynamics or conventions, it can have at most
only one operator action.
2. Each object type (such as rectangle, circle, or text) has its own set of dynamics
(for example, a line includes these dynamics: Visibility, Edge Style, Edge Width,
Edge Color, Edge Blink, Move Horizontal, Move Vertical, Move Path Percent,
Move Path Point, Rotate, Scale Horizontal, Scale Vertical, and Scale Proportional).
3. You can assign unique names to the objects that you create and configure in Fox-
Draw. Although names are optional, they help you to distinguish among several
objects of the same type in a single display.
75
B0700BE – Rev F 3. Object Configuration
Display Building Tips

The following tips can help to improve FoxView performance.
Eliminate Edges
Make the edge invisible when possible.
Use Polygons Instead of Rectangles

A rectangle is stored with only two points. FoxDraw and FoxView calculate the other two points.
The calculation time can impair performance, particularly when a rectangle is rotated. A polygon
is stored with all its points, requiring no internal calculations.
Use Polygons Instead of Circles or Arcs

Circles and arcs require about three times as long to update as polygons. If you have many circle
or arc shapes in a display, you can improve performance by creating the shapes as polygons. Draw
a circle, then trace the polygon on top with multiple points.
Use Bitmaps Economically

Bitmaps are valuable as company logos or for picturing the manufacturing plant. They can sup-
port some dynamic attributes, but using them may diminish performance.
Use Linked Library Objects instead of Reusing Symbols

Rather than using a symbol more than once, make it a linked library object. This eliminates
repeated loading of the symbol when you load the display. Using a linked library object also min-
imizes disk space and improves maintainability. If you later change the library object, all instances
of the library object are automatically updated. Place the library object into your own palette of
symbols for easy reuse.
Isolate Dynamic Update Areas

Avoid having objects overlap a dynamically updating object. This can degrade performance,
because the objects must be refreshed. In some cases, it can cause flashing in your display.
Invent alternatives. For example, to create a frame around an updating object, use a polyline
instead of a rectangle or polygon. The line does not traverse the update area and does not need to
be refreshed. A rectangle, however, must be partially redrawn when the object updates.
Working with Objects

Object Selection
After you select an object, you can move it, scale it or rotate it, or select other commands to
change its appearance, its relation to other objects, and its dynamic attributes.
NOTE
To select an object located behind another object, lasso both objects. A selection
rectangle appears around the object in back. You may need to change the focus.
76
3. Object Configuration B0700BE – Rev F
Table 3-1. Object Selection
To select Do this
A single object Click the object.
–or-
Lasso it by drawing a selection rectangle around it.
Multiple objects Select a single object, then press and hold the Shift key as
you select additional objects.
-or-
Lasso multiple objects.
All objects From the Edit menu, choose Select All.
Precision Movement
FoxDraw offers tools to help you create precise drawings. You can position objects using the key-
board’s arrow keys.
Object Focus
When multiple objects are selected, the focused object is highlighted with a dashed outline.
The focused object is the object that is acted upon when you use a Reference Point, Graphic Attri-
butes, or Configure Objects command.
Figure 3-1 shows the same selected objects, but the focus is different.
The single rectangle is

the focused object
The grouped object (line,

sector, and rectangle) is
the focused object.
Figure 3-1. Focused Objects
77
Moving the Focus

Use one of the View menu’s object focus commands to indicate the object that has the focus. The
Object Focus commands are listed in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2. Object Focus Commands
Command Description
First Moves focus to the first object that you created.
Previous Moves focus to the previously focused object.
Next Moves focus to the object that was created after the currently focused object.
You can also use these buttons to control object focus:

 Previous Object
 Next Object
Reference Mode
An object can have one of three point modes, one of which is Reference mode.
Rotating and Scaling an Object

When you rotate or scale an object in Reference mode, the object is rotated and scaled around its
reference point.
NOTE
To scale an object, set the reference point inside or on the edge of the object. As you
enlarge or reduce the object, the reference point remains fixed.
Operator Actions
Each display object can have one operator action configured to it. You can, however, trigger two
or more events with a single operator action by configuring an object with a FoxView display
command script.
Use FoxDraw to create an interactive display, from which an operator triggers an event by per-
forming an action.
For example, in response to the operator’s action:
 A new display can open
 An overlay can appear
 A variable can be modified.
78
FoxDraw allows you to configure three types of operator actions:
Select actions (typically by clicking a button)

When the operator clicks on a display object configured with a select
action, the action is triggered.
Move actions (typically by dragging and dropping an object)

Move actions permit the operator to set a variable by moving a display
object.
Set text context action (typing text or a numerical value)

This attribute applies only to text objects or background text objects.
When text is configured with this action, the operator can set a variable by
typing a numeric value or modifying a variable string.
Exposing Operator Actions

The properties of the Operator dynamics can be exposed using text aliases, if they are components
of library objects.
The following properties of Operator Dynamics can be exposed through aliases:
 Action Name and Protection ID
 Filename property of File Open and Overlay Open
 Parts of the command of the Command String property of DM Command and Rela-
tive Pick.
For more information on alias syntax and exposing text aliases, refer to the section “Aliases” on
page 96.
Select Actions
A Select action triggers when an operator selects an object.
Exception: To ramp a variable, the operator can click (or press and hold) the left mouse button.
79
The available select actions are listed in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3. Select Actions
Select Action Purpose

Open Display Closes the current display and all overlays and opens a new full
screen base display.
Open Overlay Opens an overlay on top of a base display or another overlay.
Close Display/Overlay Closes the current display or overlay. When a base display is closed,
the previous display opens.
Display Manager Executes one or more display manager commands.
Command
Relative Pick Selects the parameter to be affected, and executes single or multiple
display commands. Use this in conjunction with another action
such as Momentary Contact, Ramp, or Connect Variable.
Momentary Contact Toggles or sets a Boolean variable momentarily.
Ramp Ramps a variable up or down.
Connect Variable Sets the value of a process variable according to a conversion table.
Move Actions
In FoxView, an operator performs a move action by dragging an object along a horizontal or verti-
cal path.
By configuring an active connection in FoxDraw, an operator’s action (display manipulation) can
alter a process or system variable.
The variable is set according to the position in which the object is dropped.
Set Text Contents Action

By configuring an active connection in FoxDraw, an operator’s action (tying input) can alter a
process or system variable.
The operator types a numeric or text entry to set a variable or specify a string.
NOTE
When configuring a grouped object with an operator action, do not assign an oper-
ator action to any of its component objects.
80
List of Operator Actions

Open Display
The open display action opens a new base display. The specified file includes the full path name
(but no drive identifier), and must be located on the same drive on which FoxView is running.
You can also use this action to invoke a:
 Display script
 Substitution list
 FoxView environment file.
Open Overlay
The Open Overlay action opens an overlay on top of another display.
NOTE
The overlay file must be located on the same drive as FoxView.
Use the Open Overlay dialog box to specify how and where the overlay opens.
Close Display/Overlay
A display object (typically a button) configured with this action closes the current display or
overlay in the manner specified.
Display Commands
Use a display command select action to execute one or more display manager commands. Fox-
Draw includes over 100 display manager commands that you can configure to an action,
permitting an operator to perform tasks such as:
 Acknowledging alarms
 Setting process variables
 Opening and queuing displays (to local or remote FoxView)
 Reading/writing files
 Accessing files remotely
 Starting up custom applications
 Changing FoxView environments (menus, protection levels)
Display Manager Command Syntax

At a minimum, a display manager command requires one argument. Otherwise, FoxView
assumes the command is a file to be opened.
If a command has no arguments, prefix the command with the dmcmd keyword. For example,
to close the current display with the close command, type:
dmcmd close
The command syntax is case sensitive. Refer to Display Commands (B0193DF) for more
information.
81
Set Text Contents

Permits the operator to set a variable by entering a value into a text field. This action is valid only
with Text or Background Text objects.
Relative Pick
Relative Pick is normally used when several variables in a display are affected by the same action.
For example, you may have a number of faceplates that you want to control with a single set of
buttons.
You can configure all parameters of the same type with the Relative Pick action, and configure the
buttons with the second step actions. The operator selects the desired parameter and uses a button
at the bottom of the display to carry out an action on the parameter.
When an operator selects a display object configured with Relative Pick, the object highlights
with a yellow box.
How Relative Pick Works

Two FoxView variables, PICK1 and PICK2, are reserved for Relative Pick actions. When you
configure an object for Relative Pick, you set PICK1 (or PICK2) equal to a process variable by
typing the following in the Command String box:
=PICK1 Compound:Block.Parameter
Then you configure the second step action, for example, a Momentary Contact, with dollar sign
substitution by typing the following in the Tag field:
$PICK1
Unpicking an Object
The operator clicks the object a second time to unpick it. This clears the value of PICK1.
PICK1 also clears when an operator closes the display or overlay containing the relative pick
action.
Momentary Contact
Momentary contact momentarily changes the state of a Boolean, Packed Boolean, or Packed Long
process variable. The options are:
 Pulse to 1
 Pulse to 0
 Toggle the current state.
You can specify a hold-down pulse (which holds the variable in the selected state as long as the
object, usually a button is pressed) or a timed pulse (which holds the variable in the selected state
for a specified duration).
To address a Packed Boolean or Packed Long variable, use bit extension acronyms.
82
Ramp
Ramps a variable up or down by a specified amount.
Use with real, integer, and simple Boolean variables. Packed Booleans and Packed Longs are not
supported.
Connect Variable
A connect variable associates the value of a process variable with a state in a conversion table that
you configure.
Move Horizontal/Vertical
An object configured with a move horizontal action or a move vertical action permits an operator
to set a process variable by moving a graphic object along the X-axis or Y-axis.
For example, you can draw a thermometer and configure the temperature indicator with a
setpoint variable and the Move Vertical action, as shown in Figure 3-2. The operator can then set
a vessel temperature by dragging the indicator.
Figure 3-2. Example of a Temperature Indicator in a Thermometer
83
Dynamic Attributes
Dynamics
Dynamics (also called dynamic attributes) change the appearance of a display object in response
to changes in a process variable or system variable. Thus, an updating value animates the display
object.
Use one or more dynamics to animate an object. Typical examples include:
 Rectangles that display actual fill levels
 Text objects that display process values
 Lines that represent meter needles that move in response to changing system values
 Valves that open and close
 Timers that start when a batch process starts.
NOTE
You cannot apply a dynamic to a trend, X/Y plot, faceplate, or a comment object.
Conversions
You apply a conversion to a dynamic. Depending on the dynamic, different types of conversions
are available.
Conventions
As an alternative to applying dynamics to an object, you can apply a convention, which is a group
of one or more dynamic. Using conventions decreases configuration time.
Connecting a Dynamic to the Process

You typically select an object and configure it with a dynamic, which you connect to a process
variable, shared variable or file. Variables can be process values or descriptions.
Exposing and Resolving Dynamics

You can expose the dynamics of components of library objects. This is done by checking the
Expose Dynamic check box in the Dynamic Configuration dialog box. Exposing the dynamic of a
library object allows you to modify the settings of the dynamic when the containing library object
is used on a base display or in another library object. This is useful for customizing the general
behavior of a graphical object for specific usages.
When the library object containing the exposed dynamics is used, the exposed dynamic can be
viewed and modified in the Dynamics tab of the Configure Objects dialog box. Any configurable
attribute of an exposed dynamic may be changed. This includes, for instance, the number of states
in a threshold dynamic, the colors in a fill color dynamic or the ranges of a fill level dynamic.
The tag for the dynamic can be made to be optional or required whether the dynamic is exposed
or not.
When you configure the tag as Optional, the tag field can be left empty. It may be filled in later
when the library object is used later or left blank.
84
When you configure the tag as Required, the tag field must be filled in, either with a real tag name
or an alias. If an alias is used, then that alias must be resolved when the library object is used later.
It may be resolved in the Aliases tab of the Configure Objects dialog box when the library object
is used on a base display or another library object.
NOTE
Dynamics that use display conventions cannot be exposed.
When a library object that exposes its dynamics is linked to another library object, you have the
following options:
 Change the configuration of dynamics and not expose it to the base display.
 Change the configuration of dynamics and expose it to the base display.
 Not change the configuration of dynamics and expose it to the base display.
(default option)
 Not expose configuration of dynamics to the base display.
When a library object that exposes its dynamics is linked to a base display, you have the option of
changing the configuration of dynamics.
Display Conventions
A display convention is a collection of one or more dynamic attributes. Display conventions offer
these benefits:
 You can quickly apply a group of dynamics to an object. Once a convention is config-
ured, you can apply it to many different objects, which saves you time configuring
objects. Also, you avoid errors and debug time when you apply a convention that you
have already built and debugged.
 If you change a convention’s configuration, each object to which the convention is
applied automatically receives the change. This greatly improves display
maintainability.
 For each dynamic, a parameter automatically appears, helping you to quickly config-
ure the dynamic. This occurs only when the optional list of parameters has been pre-
specified.
 Display call-up times are improved in FoxView.
Invensys Systems, Inc. supplies conventions that you can apply to objects. You can also configure
your own conventions.
NOTE
The rules governing the application of an attribute to an object also apply to con-
ventions - you can apply no more than one occurrence of a particular attribute to an
object. Because a convention comprises one or more attributes, FoxDraw does not
allow you to apply a convention to an object already configured with an attribute
contained in the convention. For example, if an object has already been assigned the
Fill Color attribute, you cannot apply a convention that includes the Fill Color
attribute. Similarly, you cannot apply an attribute to an object that has been config-
ured with a convention that includes that same attribute.
85
Table of Dynamics
Depending on the object, the dynamics listed in Table 3-4 may be available.
Table 3-4. Table of Dynamics
Rectangle,
Polygon, Circle, Back-
Dynamic Polyline, or Closed Pie, or ground Library
Attribute Line Curve curve Sector Text Text Bitmap Group object
Visibility X X X X X X X X X
Fill Level X X X X X
Filled X X X X X X
Fill Color X X X X X X
Fill Blink X X X X X X
Fill Pattern X X X X X X
Edge Style X X X X X X X
Edge Width X X X X X X X
Edge Color X X X X X X X
Edge Blink X X X X X X X
Text X X X
Contents
Text Color X X X X
Text Blink X X X X
Text Height X X X X
Move X X X X X X X X X
Radius X
Arc Length X
Rotate X X X X X X X X
Scale X X X X X X X X
Dynamic Element Modification

FoxDraw provides several modes of operating on dynamic elements. From the Tools menu select
the Edit Dynamics/Connections option to open the Edit Dynamics/Connections dialog box. Use
this dialog box to individually change a dynamic element’s Tag and /or configuration. This dialog
box is ideal for defining and applying text substitutions.
For the currently selected objects, the dynamic elements table lists these dynamic elements:
 Passive dynamics
 Operator dynamics
 Trend pens
 Plot pens axis.
You can sort the dynamic elements by name, type, dynamic, or tagname. In addition, you can sort
the selected dynamic elements to quickly see what has been changed.
86
Text Substitution
Select the Global Change button to view the bottom half of the dialog box. This contains a sub-
stitution table and controls for defining the parts of the dynamic elements to which the substitu-
tions are to be applied. You can apply text substitutions to:
 Dynamic element connection
 Display manager commands
 Text strings in a Text Context passive dynamic.
The text substitutions are applied to all dynamic elements in the dynamic element table. An “X”
under the Chng column indicates a change to a dynamic element that is applied.
Range Selection
Various FoxDraw dialog boxes facilitate the retrieval of scale data (High Scale and Low Scale) and
Delta values from the control processor (CP) or from the local database.
 Configure Trend Pen dialog box
 Configure Plot Pen dialog box
 Continuous dialog box
 Edit Range dialog box
 Limit Configuration dialog box
 Numeric Text/Entry dialog box
 Ramp dialog box
 Scales/Delta page of the Configure Objects dialog box.
Obtaining Values from the Control Processor (CP)

If your workstation is connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server and the compound:block exists
in the CP, you can retrieve the High Scale, Low Scale, Delta, and Engineering Units from the CP.
NOTE
This retrieved information is saved with the display. If you make control changes
later on, the display information is not up to date.
Clicking the Control Values button automatically retrieves these values.

If you are not connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, clicking the Control Values button
results in the prompt: No server is connected. Do you want to connect now? If you
click Yes and if FoxAPI is installed, FoxDraw opens the API Server Connection Utility dialog box
(see “Accessing I/A Series Data” on page 49).
You can retrieve control values for Numeric data, but not Boolean data. If the Scale option is
selected, clicking the Control Values button:
 Retrieves High Scale, Low Scale, and Eng. Units from the CP
 Retrieves Delta in percentage from the local database
 Calculates Delta in units based on the CP scales.
If the Range option is selected: clicking the Control Values button:
 Retrieves Eng. Units from the CP
87

Obtaining Values from the Local Database

Clicking the Default Values button retrieves scales (High Scale and Low Scale) and Delta in per-
centage from the local database and calculates Delta in units based on the retrieved scales.
If the default data type is Boolean, FoxDraw retrieves 0 Name, 1 Name, 0 Offset, and 1 Offset
from the local database.
If the default data type is Numeric and the Scale option is selected, FoxDraw retrieves Pen Color,
High Scale, Low Scale, Eng. Units, and Delta in percentage from the local database and calculates
Delta in units based on the scales.
If the default data type is Numeric and the Range option is selected, FoxDraw retrieves Pen Color,
Range name, Eng. Units, and Delta in percentage from the local database and calculates Delta in
units based on the local database scales.
Dynamics with Minimum/Maximum Values

The dynamics listed in Table 3-5 have minimum and maximum values.
Table 3-5. Minimum/Maximum Values of Dynamics
Dynamic Minimum Maximum

Fill Level 0% 100%
Text Contents empty string 32 characters
Text Height 0.5% of original 100%
Rotate -360 360
Scale (different types) 0.5% of original 32,000%
Color Dynamics
You can connect fill color, edge color, and text color to the state of a process variable.
You can also connect a blink dynamic independent of the color.
Color dynamics can be associated with these conversion types:
 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Blink Dynamic
You can assign blinking to text, filled objects, and objects with an edge.
88
Multiple Blink Rates

You can configure any blink dynamic’s state with:
 No blink
 Slow blink rate
 Fast blink rate.
As an alternative to using the Blink dynamic, you can also control an object’s appearance with the
Fill Color, Edge Color, or Text Color dynamics. The object’s color depends on the state of the
process variable.
Use blinking with these conversions:
 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Move Dynamics
Use Move dynamics to make a display object move across the screen. The object can move hori-
zontally, vertically, or follow the path of another object. An individual object, however, can move
only one way.
You can configure a simple (primitive) object, a grouped object, or a library object with a Move
attribute.
! CAUTION
If you do resize an object that has a move configuration, you must reset the location
for the move dynamic so that the dynamic can be correctly displayed in FoxView.
Move Horizontal Dynamic and Move Vertical Dynamic

These dynamics allow you to configure an object to move horizontally, vertically, or both, in pro-
portion to the value of a float type process variable.
By specifying the high location and low location, you define the object’s range of movement.
The high location specifies the object’s location when the process variable equals the high scale.
The low location specifies the object’s location when the process variable equals the low scale.
If you copy and paste an object that has a Move Horizontal dynamic or Move Vertical dynamic,
the copy has the same range of movement as the original, although relative to its own reference
point.
NOTE
Set an object’s reference point before you assign a Move dynamic. If you change the
reference point after assigning a Move, the high and low locations change, requiring
you to edit them.
89
Move Path Dynamics

Instead of a horizontal or vertical path, use a Move Path Percent dynamic and Move Path Point
dynamic to configure an object to follow another object, such as a polyline or curve.
A path is another user-built object in the display. The path must have a unique name, which you
assign from the General tab of the Configure Objects dialog box.
NOTE
Without a path name, you can not specify the object to follow.
FoxView places the object’s reference point on the path. If the reference point is the center of the
object (the default), the center moves along the outline of the followed object.
The display shown below depicts a reference point set to the lower part of the Move object.
Selecting the Show Object Followed option in the Continuous dialog box makes the followed
object visible in FoxView. The default is On.
Move Path Percent Dynamic

Use the Move Path Percent dynamic to specify the percent of the total path length that the object
covers. You supply a high percent and a low percent, and the object moves within those limits.
By selecting the Adjust Object Orientation option (in the Continuous dialog box), the object
rotates, but always maintains the same position relative to the path. For example, in the following
figure, when the object moves down, it rotates 90 degrees.
Move Path Percent can be used with these conversions:

 Discrete  Threshold
 Bit state  Continuous
90
NOTE
Move Path Percent puts heavy demands on the CPU, especially if the followed
object is a curve. Use polylines or polygons, because straight line segments are easier
for FoxView to calculate. Where possible, use the Display attribute.
Move Path Point Dynamic

Use the Move Path Point dynamic to configure a display object to move to a point on another
object, such as a polyline or curve. The points on polylines, curves, rectangles, and polygons are
created when you draw the object.
You must specify a point number, where point #1 is the first point on the object to be followed.
If you configure multiple identical objects to follow the same object (for example, a polyline rep-
resenting a conveyor) configure a point offset for each object after the first. For example, the fol-
lowing table shows how to configure five objects following the same path.
Object 1 2 3 4 5
Point Offset 0 -1 -2 -3 -4
By using point offsets, you do not have to reconfigure the state table for each copy of the object.
The Move Path Point dynamic is very efficient, because FoxView does not perform any calcula-
tions to position the object.
Use Move Path Point with these conversions:
 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Scale Dynamics
Apply Scale dynamics to an object to vary its size, depending on the value or state of a variable.
The Scalar is expressed as a percent of original size.
NOTE
You can scale an object, making it smaller but not larger. If you scale an object, you
should reset the location of the move dynamics.
The object is scaled relative to its reference point. For example, if the reference point is at the
lower left, the object scales down and to the left. If the reference point is the center, the object
scales equally on all sides. The scale dynamics is listed in Table 3-6.
Table 3-6. Scale Dynamics
To decrease or increase an object’s Use this dynamic

Height Scale Vertical
Width Scale Horizontal
91
Table 3-6. Scale Dynamics (Continued)
To decrease or increase an object’s Use this dynamic

Height and width (proportional scaling) Scale Proportional
You can use the Scale Vertical dynamic and the Scale Horizontal dynamic with the same variable.
When you select the Scale Proportional dynamic, vertical scaling and horizontal scaling are not
available.
With a pie arc, sector, or circle, this Scale dynamics have the same results as the Radius attribute
when the reference point is the center of the object.
Scale dynamics can be used with these conversions:
 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold
 Continuous.
Fill Level Dynamic

A Fill Level dynamic associates a display object’s fill level with a process variable.
NOTE
To use this dynamic, the object must be filled.
You can use Fill Level with open objects (such as polylines) and closed objects (such as polygons
and rectangles).
Fill Level direction can be up, down, left, or right. The minimum value can be 0%, and the max-
imum value can be 32,000%.
TIP
1. If you select the Optimized Update option (from the Continuous dialog box), the
fill level is drawn more quickly in FoxView. This option does not support objects
that move, rotate, or scale.
2. Fill polygons instead of rectangles. In FoxView, polygons refresh faster, especially
if they are rotated.
Fill Level can be used with these conversions:

 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold
 Continuous.
Visibility Dynamic
Use the Visibility dynamic to make an object visible or invisible, depending on the state of a pro-
cess variable. For example, you might configure a Restart button to be visible only while a process
is in the Hold state.
92
NOTE
In FoxView, an invisible object cannot be selected.
Visibility can be associated with these conversion types:

 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Filled Dynamic
Use the Filled dynamic to display a graphic object as filled or unfilled, depending on the state of a
process variable. You can fill open objects (for example, polylines) and closed objects (such as
polygons and circles).
The Filled dynamic can be used with these conversions:
 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Fill Color Dynamic

The Fill Color dynamic associates a display object’s fill color with the state of a process variable.
NOTE
The object must be filled.
Fill Color can be used with these conversions:

 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Fill Pattern Dynamic

The Fill Pattern dynamic associates a display object’s fill pattern with the state of a process
variable.
NOTE
To use Fill Pattern, the object must be filled, and the fill style option must be trans-
parent or opaque.
Fill Pattern can be used with these conversions:

 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
93
Edge Style Dynamic

Use an Edge Style dynamic to associate the edge style (none, solid, dotted, and so on) of an object
to the state of a process variable.
Edge Style can be used with these conversions:
 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Edge Width Dynamic

The Edge Width dynamic associates an object’s edge width to the state of a process variable.
Edge Width can be used with these conversions:
 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Edge Color Dynamic

Use an Edge Color dynamic to associate a display object’s edge color with the state of a process
variable.
Edge Color can be used with these conversions:
 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Text Contents Dynamic

Use the Text Contents dynamic to associate a text object’s contents with a variable or a disk file.
The text contents can be an empty string or up to 32 characters. Text Contents can be used with
conversions as listed in Table 3-7.
Table 3-7. Conversion Information
Use this convention To

Numeric/Text conversion Associate a text object with a numeric value
Associate a text string from a process variable.
Read File conversion Associate a text object to a disk file. You do this to display
individual words or lines or an entire file (for example,
sequence code). The file displays in a scrollable window.
94
Text Color Dynamic

The Text Color dynamic associates a text object’s color with the state of a process variable.
Text Color can be used with these conversions:
 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Text Height Dynamic

Use the Text Height dynamic to associate a text object’s height with the state of a process variable.
Text height is defined as a percent of the original height.
NOTE
You can make the text smaller than the original, but you cannot make it larger.
Text Height can be used with these conversions:

 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold.
Radius Dynamic
Use the Radius dynamic to scale the radius of a pie arc, sector, or circle.
You can use the Radius dynamic with these conversions:
 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold
 Continuous.
With a Continuous conversion, you must specify a High Radius and Low Radius percent. For
example, if you set the High Radius at 100% and the Low Radius at 50%, the radius is 100% of
its original size when the variable reading is 100%, and the radius is 50% of its original size when
the variable reading is 0%.
Arc Length Dynamic

The arc length is the number of degrees between the start point and end point of a pie arc
or sector. Arc length can range from 0 degrees (invisible object) to 360 degrees (circle).
NOTE
Pie arcs and sectors are always drawn counterclockwise.
95
Arc Length can be used with these conversions:

 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold
 Continuous.
Rotate Dynamic
Use the Rotate dynamic to rotate an object on its reference point, based on the value of a process
variable.
By default, FoxView rotates objects in a counterclockwise direction. To rotate an object clockwise,
specify a negative rotation angle.
NOTE
You can use the Rotate dynamic with Hershey fonts only. Windows TrueType fonts
and X-Windows scalable fonts do not rotate.
Rotate can be used with these conversions:

 Discrete
 Bit state
 Threshold
 Continuous.
NOTE
You can improve display performance by rotating a polygon instead of a rectangle.
Polygons require fewer FoxView calculations.
Aliases
Library objects can be configured fully or partially to compounds, blocks, parameters, texts, or
files using aliases. The aliases can be of three types text, graphic or range.
Alias Syntax
The syntax to be followed when using aliases is as follows:
 The alias is usually enclosed within curly braces, for example, {alias}. The braces are
mandatory when an alias is used to replace a tag or a part of it. Range aliases need not
be enclosed within braces.
 Aliases are case-sensitive, for example, {CMP}, {Cmp} and {cmp} are three different
aliases. The alias text can comprise of alphanumeric characters and underscores.
96
 A good labeling scheme can help in grouping compounds together, blocks together,
parameters together and labels together. Few labeling examples are given below:
Compound, Block, and Parameter Aliases
 {C}, {CMP}, {CMP_in}, {CMP_out}, {CMP_pid}
 {B}, {BLK}, {BLK_in}, {BLK_out}, {BLK_ain}
 {P}, {PRM}, {PRM_in}, {PRM_out}, {PRM_aout}
 {CB}, {CB_aout}
 {CBP}, {CBP_aout}
Static Label Aliases
 {L}, {LBL}, {LBL_in}, {LBL_out}, {LBL_eu}
Graphic Attribute Labels
 Visibility - VIS_sensor
 Fill Color - FC_level
Edge Color - EC_alarm
 Text Font - TX_alarm
 Aliases can be used in combination with other aliases or with valid compounds, blocks
or parameters such as:
 {CBP}
 {CB}.{P}
 {C}:{B}.{P}
 {C}:SINE.{P}
 {CB}.ALMSTA
 UC01_LEAD:{B}.MA
 Aliases can be used as parts of, or an entire DM command string or path/file name,
such as:
 The alias {DMstrg1} used in a DM command string could be resolved to toggle
UC01_LEAD:SINE.MA or setb UC01_LEAD:SINE.MA 0.
 A DM command string can be toggle {CBP} or toggle {CB}.MA.
 The path for a open display or open overlay command, can be
/opt/menu/{file2opn} or just {path_n_file}.
97
Exposing and Resolving Aliases

Required and Optional Configurations
When used to expose the properties of a dynamic, the text alias can be configured as either
required or optional. The alias is configured as required by clicking the Required check box in the
dynamic configuration dialogs. If left unchecked, the alias is considered an optional
configuration.
Required
An alias with a Required configuration has to be resolved (in the base display or within a nested
library object). If left unresolved, the dynamic associated with the object is not operational, and
the object is drawn with an Out-Of-Service indication at run-time, in FoxView.
Optional
An alias with an optional configuration is not required to be resolved (in the base display or
within a nested library object). If left unresolved, the dynamic associated with the object is not
operational, and the object is not drawn with an Out-Of-Service indication at run-time, in
FoxView.
Exposing Text Aliases

The components of a library object can expose the properties of dynamics through text aliases.
The following properties of Dynamics can be exposed through text aliases:
 Tag
 Values of Text Contents dynamic.
The following properties of Operator Dynamics can be exposed through text aliases:
 Action Name and Protection ID
 Filename property of File Open and Overlay Open
 Parts of the command of the Command String property of DM Command and
Relative Pick.
The Static text contents of Text and Background Text objects can also be exposed through
text aliases.
The property of a dynamic is exposed if the value or part of the value (of the property) is defined
as a text alias. A dynamic’s property can include more than one text alias. The same alias can also
be used more than once. The exposed aliases are displayed under the Aliases tab of the Configure
Objects dialog box.
Resolving Text Aliases

The exposed alias can be resolved on a base display or within a nested library object.
Resolving Text alias

The text alias is resolved when you specify the text that should be used in place of the orig-
inal alias, at run-time. An alias is resolved only once even if it is used more than once. If a
text alias is resolved, it is not exposed to the base display or other library objects.
98
Not Resolving Text alias

If you do not resolve the text alias, FoxView uses an empty string to resolve it at run-time.
When a library object with exposed properties is linked to another library object, you have the fol-
lowing options:
 Resolve the text alias and not expose it to the base display.
 Not resolve the text alias and expose it to the base display.
 Not resolve the text alias and not expose it to the base display.
When a library object with exposed properties is linked to a base display, you have the following
options:
 Resolve the text alias.
 Not resolve the text alias. (If you do not resolve the text alias FoxDraw uses an
empty string to resolve it.)
Exposing Graphic Attributes via Aliases

The components of a library object can expose graphic attributes through graphic attribute alias
names. The same graphic attribute alias name cannot be used for different types of graphic attri-
butes. However, the same graphic attribute alias name can be used to expose the same graphic
attribute type of several objects. For example, an object might expose its fill color. In this case, the
fill color can be resolved differently for each usage of the library object.
The exposed aliases are displayed under the Graphics tab of the Configure Objects dialog box.
The exposed alias can be resolved in the base display or within a nested library object.
Resolving Graphic Attributes via Aliases

The Graphic attribute aliases can be resolved to a graphic attribute value.
Library objects can be either linked to another library object or linked to a base display.
When a library object with exposed graphic attributes is linked to another library object, you have
the following options:
 Change graphic attribute alias value and not expose it to the base display.
 Change graphic attribute alias value and expose it to the base display.
 Not change the value and expose graphic attribute alias to the base display (default
option).
 Change the value and not expose graphic attribute alias to the base display.
When a library object with exposed graphic attributes is linked to a base display, you have the
following options:
 Change the graphic attribute values exposed from an intermediate level.
 Redefine the name of the graphic attribute alias exposed from the outer levels.
99
Exposing Ranges via Aliases

The Range property is exposed through the range alias.
The range alias is exposed when the following conditions are true:
 The Tag is exposed
 The dynamic has range attributes
 The RunTime option is selected
 The Range Alias option is selected.
The range aliases are displayed under the Ranges tab of the Configure Objects dialog box.
Resolving Range Aliases

You can resolve the range alias, when the tag-name that uses the range alias is resolved. The range
aliases are not visible to be resolved, if the tag-name is not resolved.
The Range alias can be resolved to one of the following:
 Range name (FoxView retrieves the range, for example, RI01, at run-time).
 Manually entered values (low scale and high scale).
 Default scales (values retrieved from control station).
If you do not resolve range alias, the default scales (0.0-100.0) are used to resolve, at run-
time.
Data Formats
Numeric Format
These are the numeric formats:
 Automatic
 Integer
 Fixed decimal point
 Exponential
 Hexadecimal
 Binary.
Automatic Format
Automatic format is the default format.
FoxView displays four decimal places for a real number between -1 and 1. A number between –1
and -10000 or between 1 and 10000 displays with two decimal places. Numbers outside of this
range display as integers (no decimal places).
The Packed Boolean or Packed Long data types display in hexadecimal notation. Examples of
data types are given in Table 3-8.
100
Table 3-8. Examples of Data Types
Value Data Type Displays as

100 Integer 100
100.5 Real 100.50
5.654 Real 5.65
0.654 Real 0.6540
11 Packed Boolean 000B
11 Packed Long 0000000B
Integer (####) Format

In this format the value is shown as a right-justified integer (no decimal places). Refer to
Table 3-9, for examples.
Table 3-9. Integer Data Type

100 Integer 100
100.5 Real 101
Fixed Decimal Point (####.##) Format

Specify the number of decimal places when you use this format. For integer variables, the decimal
point and trailing zeros do not display. Refer to Table 3-10, for examples.
Table 3-10. Fixed Decimal Data Type
Value Data Type Options Displays as

100 Integer Decimal loc. = 1 100
100.5 Real Decimal loc. = 1 100.5
Exponential (###.###E###) Format

The value appears in scientific notation. You must specify the number of decimal places. Refer to
Table 3-11, for examples.
Table 3-11. Exponential Data Type

12000 Integer Decimal loc. = 4 12E3
4512.354 Real Decimal loc. = 2 4.51E+003
101
Hexadecimal Format
The value appears in 4-digit (for 16-bit values) or 8-digit (for 32-bit values) hexadecimal nota-
tion. Refer to Table 3-12, for examples.
Table 3-12. Hexadecimal Format

11 Integer 000B
Binary Format
The value appears in 16-digit or 32-digit binary format. Optionally, you can define a Boolean
range or a single Boolean. Refer to Table 3-13, for examples.
Table 3-13. Binary Format

11 Packed Boolean Range: B1-B16 0000000000001011
11 Packed Boolean Range: B15 1
11 Packed Boolean Range: B11-B14 0010
11 Packed Long Range B27-B30 0010
Bit Extensions
Use bit extensions to reference specific bits within Packed Boolean and Packed Long parameters.
Parameter bit extensions contain logical operators and one of the following:
 Value mask
 List of bit numbers
 List of bit acronyms.
Syntax
A dot ( . )separates a parameter name from a bit extension.
Two dots ( .. ) separate a shared variable name from a bit extension.
The syntax is as follows:
Compound:Block.Parameter.bitextension
Shared_variable..bitextension
Dollar Sign Substitution

If you use dollar sign substitution, do not separate bit extensions from the parameter name.
For example, do not use the “$P1.bitextension” expression, because conversion utilities evaluate
the bit extension as a parameter name, and a bit extension without a parameter name has no
meaning. When using dollar sign substitutions, substitute only compound or block names, as in
“$P1.parameter.bitextension”.
102
Bit Extensions for Trend Connections

You can trend a single Boolean bit or multiple packed Boolean bits by using bit extensions. This is
the syntax for bit extensions for trend connections:
[~] {& | A | X} {bitmask | bit_acr_1, bit_acr_2, ... bit_acr_n}
Refer to Table 3-14, for an explanation of each term in the syntax.
Table 3-14. Bit Extensions for Trend Connections
Term Meaning
~ Invert the Boolean result.
& The result equals the bitwise AND of source value and mask, then compare
whether the result equals the mask. The result is true if all the bits defined
by the mask are set in the value.
A The result equals the bitwise OR of source value and mask. The result is
true if any bit defined in the mask is set in the value.
This is not needed if you are OR’ing the bits and bitmask or
bit_acronym_1 does not start with an “A.”
For example, to connect to the MA BLKSTA bit, the expression
Comp:Block.BLKSTA.MA is valid and it is identical with
Comp:Block.BLKSTA.AMA. When connecting to the Active BLKSTA bit,
the tag-name Comp:Block.BLKSTA.ACT is invalid; the valid expression is
Comp:Block.BLKSTA.AACT.
X The result equals the bitwise XOR of defined bits. If all defined bits are the
same, the result is 0; otherwise, the result is 1.
For example, the result of the Tag Comp:Block.Param.XB3,B6,B7 is as fol-
lows: when bit numbers 2, 6 and 7 are all 0 or all 1, the result is 0; other-
wise, the result is 1.
Bitmask Hexadecimal bit mask: 4 digits if you are masking a Packed Boolean, 8 dig-
its if you are masking a Packed Long.
bit_acr Multiple bit acronyms or bit numbers separated by commas. You can mix
bit acronyms and numbers.
Packed Long bit numbers are B1-B32 and represent bits 31-0.
Packed Boolean bit numbers are B1-B16 and represent bits 15-0.
B1 is the most significant bit; B16 or B32 is the least significant bit (OM
data is bit 0).
103
Examples
Comp:Block.BLKSTA.MA,LR
Comp:Block.BLKSTA.~XMA,LR,ON
SHAREDVAR..B1,B2,B16
Bit Extensions for Operator Actions

This is the syntax for bit extensions for operator actions:
[-] {bitmask | bit_acronym_1, bit_acronym_2, . . . bit_acronym_n}
Refer to Table 3-15, for an explanation of each term in the syntax.
Table 3-15. Bit Extensions for Operator Actions
Term Meaning
- Invert the resulting bit mask.
Bitmask Hexadecimal bit mask.
Four digits if you are masking a Packed Boolean.
Eight digits if you are masking a Packed Long.
bit_acronym Multiple bit acronyms or bit numbers separated by commas. You can mix
bit acronyms and numbers.
Packed Long bit numbers are B1-B32 and represent bits 31-0.
Packed Boolean bit numbers are B1-B16 and represent bits 15-0.
B1 is the most significant bit; B16 or B32 is the least significant bit (OM
data is bit 0).
Bit State Table

The Bit State table contains the fields as listed in Table 3-16.
Table 3-16. Bit State
Field Description
State # State number.
Note: Configure states in order of importance (most important is 1) since
FoxView examines the states sequentially and stops when it finds a match.
Bit mask The bits to be compared with the bits in the process value.
Bit match The value (0, 1, or X) of the bits being compared
Operator Specifies whether All bits or Any bits in the process value must be the same
as the bit match for the state to be true.
Attribute To edit, select this field and then click Edit, or double-click the attribute.
104
Bit Acronyms
For a list of bit acronyms refer to:
 ALMSTA bit acronyms
 ALMOPT/INHSTA bit acronyms
 BLKSTA bit acronyms
 INHALM bit acronyms
 General bit acronyms.
General Bit Acronyms

Bits B1-B32 are used for any 32-bit variables, such as Packed Long. B1 through B32 are equiva-
lent to binary bits 31-0.
Bits B1-B16 are used for any 16-bit variables, such as Packed Boolean. B1 through B16 are equiv-
alent to binary bits 15-0.
Table 3-17 gives a definition of the ALMSTA bit acronyms.
Table 3-17. ALMSTA Bit Acronyms
Acronym Definition
B3 Uninhibit Alarm
B17-B24 Bit numbers 17-24 (bits 15-8). Not used.
BAD Bad I/O Alarm
HDA High Deviation Alarm
HHA High High Absolute Alarm
HMA High Measurement Alarm
HOA High Output Alarm
LDA Low Deviation Alarm
LLA Low Low Absolute Alarm
LMA Low Measurement Alarm
LOA Low Output Alarm
PTRG PreTarget Alarm
OOR Out of Range Alarm
OPER Operational Error Alarm
ROC Rate of Change Alarm
STA State Alarm
TARG Target Alarm
TRIP Trip Alarm
UNAK Unacknowledged Alarm
NOTE
The CRIT and PRI integers map to ALMSTA, and therefore are not bit acronyms.
105
Table 3-18 lists the ALMOPT/INHSTA acronyms and their definition.
Table 3-18. ALMOPT/INHSTA Bit Acronyms
Acronym Definition
B17-B32 Bit numbers 17-32 (bits 15-0). Not used.
BAD Bad I/O Alarm
HDA High Deviation Alarm
PNT1 Point 1 Alarm
PNT2 Point 2 Alarm
PNT3 Point 3 Alarm
PNT4 Point 4 Alarm
PNT5 Point 5 Alarm
PNT6 Point 6 Alarm
PNT7 Point 7 Alarm
PNT8 Point 8 Alarm
PTRG Pre-Target Alarm
STA State Alarm
TARG Target Alarm
TRIP Trip Alarm
106
Table 3-19 lists the BLKSTA acronyms and their definition.
Table 3-19. BLKSTA Bit Acronyms
Acronym Definition
B1, B2, B3, B12, B29 Bit numbers (bits 31, 30, 29, 20, 3). Not
used.
ACC Accumulate
ACT Active
ASP Alternate Setpoint
BAD Bad I/O
BADR Bad Redundant I/O
CTL Control
DEV Redundant I/O Deviation
DSB Disabled
DSR DSR Mismatch
FBM FBM Failure
FOL Follow
FS Fail-safe Output
FTN Feedforward Tune Active
FTNI Feedforward Tune Inactive
HLD Hold
HOL High Output Limit
HRQ Hold Request
ILK Interlocked
IWC 0=INTERSPEC™ Workstation Control
1=Computer Control
LOL Low Output Limit
LR 0=Local; 1=Remote
LRO LR Override
MA 0=Manual; 1=Auto
MAO MA Override
MTN Manual Tune
107
Table 3-19. BLKSTA Bit Acronyms (Continued)
Acronym Definition
ON Compound On
PAUS, PAU Paused
PTN Pre-Tune
RMP Ramp
SBX Execute SBX Statements
SEL Redundant I/O Select
SIM PLB Simulation Mode
SPDN Setpoint Ramp Down
SPUP Setpoint Ramp Up
STN Self Tune
STRK Setpoint Track
TEST PLB Test Mode
TRIP Tripped
TRK Track
UDEF Undefined
NOTE
The SPD, SPI, and OPN bits are no longer used.
108
Table 3-20 lists the INHALM acronyms and their definition.
Table 3-20. INHALM Bit Acronyms
Acronym Definition
BAD Bad I/O Alarm
HAD High Deviation Alarm
PNT1 Point 1 Alarm
PNT2 Point 2 Alarm
PNT3 Point 3 Alarm
PNT4 Point 4 Alarm
PNT5 Point 5 Alarm
PNT6 Point 6 Alarm
PNT7 Point 7 Alarm
PNT8 Point 8 Alarm
PTRG Pre-Target Alarm
STA State Alarm
TARG Target Alarm
TRIP Trip Alarm
109
Conversions
You can configure an object to have animation. You do this by configuring the object with a
dynamic and associating the dynamic with a process variable and a conversion.
Depending on the dynamic, FoxDraw provides the conversions as listed in Table 3-21.
Table 3-21. Conversion Types
Conversion Purpose
Continuous Certain dynamics, such as Move Vertical, can be associated only with
continuous change, in which a value (such as a temperature) fluctuates
without interruption over a given range.
Discrete Some dynamics, such as Fill Blink, can be associated with state changes
only.
Bitstate
Other dynamics (such as Fill Level, Rotate, and Scale) can be associated
Threshold with both continuous and state changes.
Numeric/Text Use a numeric/text conversion to display a process variable as a number or
to display a parameter (such as a block descriptor or state name) as text.
Read File Use a read file conversion to display a file or part of a file on screen.
Continuous Conversion
For continuous conversions (such as Fill Level, Move, Rotate, and Scale), specify the process vari-
able, deadband, and limits.
Limits (High/Low Scale or Range)

In FoxView, a process value is clamped between the high and low scales. Input values are propor-
tionally scaled within the high and low boundaries.
For example, if the low scale is 0 and the high scale is 100, but the values actually range from 40
to 60, a value of 45 displays as 25%, a value of 48 displays as 40%, and a value of 55 displays
as 75%.
Instead of high and low scales, you can specify a process range name (such as RI1 or RO1). Then,
when the display is called up, FoxView obtains the range from the Control Processor. Use a pro-
cess range name to build a multi-purpose display or faceplate using dollar sign substitution
of variable names ($P1:$P2.MEAS) or variable substitution (<Compound:Block.Parameter>).
Reversing Direction
When you specify the low scale value that is greater than the high scale value, the direction
reverses.
For example, with Fill Level, setting the high scale to 0 and the low scale to 100, increases the fill
level as the process variable decreases, and vice versa.
The Rotate dynamic, by default, has a counterclockwise direction. To rotate an object clockwise,
for example, you can set the high angle to 0 and the low angle to 90.
110
Discrete Conversion
For a discrete conversion, specify a variable whose state can change, and define the state changes.
Bit State Conversion

Use a bit state conversion to connect a display object dynamic to individual parameter bits.
Most often you connect Packed Boolean or Packed Long variables such as BLKSTA and ALM-
STA to dynamics such as Text Contents, Text Color, or Blink. You can use any variable type
except string variables.
To configure a Bit State conversion, you must create a state table.
States
Each state specifies:
 The bit mask (the bits to be compared)
 The bit match (whether the bits are 0 or 1).
For the state to be true, use a logical operator to determine whether:
 All the bits must match
 Any bit can match.
When a state is true, FoxView displays the object with the associated dynamic (for example, a text
string such as OPEN, or a color such as red).
Threshold Conversion
A threshold conversion uses a logical operator to compare a process value against a set of defined
values. When a comparison expression becomes true, the display object uses the associated
dynamic.
The logical operators are listed in Table 3-22.
Table 3-22. Logical Operators
Operator Description
< Less than
= Equal to
<= Less than or equal to
> Greater than
>= Greater than or equal to
!= Not equal to
111
Numeric/Text Conversion
Use Numeric/Text conversion with the Text Contents dynamic to display:
 A process variable as a number
 A string variable (block descriptor, EGU name, or state name) as text.
Numeric Types
You can choose from several numeric formats: Automatic, Integer, Fixed Decimal Point, Expo-
nential, Hexadecimal, or Binary.
Text Types
String variables update at display call-up. Most strings do not change, especially in continuous
control applications.
In batch control applications, text can change, depending on the batch step or recipe. Use a Trig-
ger connection to simultaneously update display text. When a Trigger changes, FoxView retrieves
the new string variable from the process and updates the text in the display.
If you create a text object with multiple lines, FoxView fills the lines one by one and wraps to the
next. For example, if you create a two-line text field to display a block description, FoxView fills
the first line and wraps to the second, provided there is enough text to wrap.
NOTE
Create the text object big enough to accommodate the numeric value or text.
Read File Conversion

Use Read File conversion with the Text Contents dynamic to display a text file (or a portion of a
file) in a text object. FoxView reads the file at display call-up.
Use this capability, for example, to display an entire file (such as a list of sequence codes) in a
scrolled list.
NOTE
The read file can contain only text strings in which all records have the same length
(blocked text).
As an alternative to displaying the file at display call-up, display the file in response to an operator
action by configuring a Display Command operator action.
112
Using a State Table to Display Text

This example shows how you use a state table to determine the text that is to be displayed.
Apply the Text Contents dynamic of a text object to a BLKSTA parameter and configure three
states as listed in Table 3-23.
Table 3-23. State Table
When the block is in The display shows

Tracking mode The word “TRACK”
Not in tracking mode The word “HOLD”
Any other condition A blank
For the TRACK state, the TRK bit is set to 1 (true) and the other bits are set to X (don’t care).
The All operator is selected.
For the HOLD state, the HLD bit is set to 1 (true) and the other bits are set to X (don’t care). The
All operator is selected.
For the <blank> state, all bits are set to X (don’t care) and the All operator is selected. The Attri-
bute State table is as shown in Table 3-27.
Table 3-24. Attribute State Table
State Bit mask Bit match Oper Text Contents

1 00000040 00000040 ALL TRACK
2 00000080 00000080 ALL HOLD
3 00000000 00000000 ALL <blank>
The bit mask and bit match patterns are in hexadecimal notation, each digit representing four bits
of a 32-bit word. With the ALL function, the process value returned from the control processor is
ANDed with the mask and compared to the match pattern.
113
Using a State Table to Display Color

This example shows how you use a state table to determine the color that is to be displayed.
You configure the Fill Color dynamic of a display object to indicate the two states as shown in
Table 3-25.
Table 3-25. State Table for Color
When The object appears

Both the TRK bit and the HLD bit are set Red
The TRK bit or the HLD bit are not set White
For the red state, the TRK bit and the HLD bit are set to 1, and all other bits are set
to X (don’t care). The Any operator is selected.
For the white state, all the bits are set to X (don’t care), and the All operator is selected.
The attribute state table is as shown in Table 3-26.
Table 3-26. Attribute State Table
State Bit mask Bit match Oper Color

1 000000C0 000000C0 Any 25
2 000000C0 00000000 All 31
Configuration Examples
Creating a Tank with a Fill Level Connection
To create a tank with a fill level connection
1. Create a closed tank with the Polygon tool, or create an open tank with the
Polyline tool.
2. With the tank selected, choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
3. Select the Update tab.
4. Click Add.
The Add Dynamic Update dialog box appears.
5. Select the Fill Level attribute and the Continuous conversion.
6. Click OK.
The Fill Level dialog box appears.
7. Type the process variable name, and set the high and low scales.
8. Click OK.
The Configure Objects dialog box appears.
9. Click Apply or OK.
10. Save the display and test it in FoxView.
114
Creating a Numeric Text Update Field

You can create a numeric text field, whose contents update, based on the value of a process
variable.
To create a numeric text update field

1. Create a background text object using the Background Text tool.
2. With the text selected, choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
4. Click Add.
5. Select the Text Contents dynamic and the Numeric/Text conversion.
6. Click OK.
The Numeric/Text dialog box appears.
7. In the Tag field, type the process variable name.
8. In the Type field, select Numeric.
9. Set Numeric format to Automatic.
10. Click OK.
11. Click OK or Apply.
Creating a Rotating Needle

To create a rotating needle
1. Use the Line Tool to draw a vertical line.
2. From the View menu, choose Snap Gravity and Point Mode.
3. Set the reference point to the line’s bottom end.
An object is scaled relative to its reference point. If you do not set the reference point,
the line rotates around its center point like a compass needle instead of on its end.
4. With the needle selected, choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
TIP
You can also click the right mouse button to bring up the pop-up menu.

6. Click Add.
7. Select the Rotate and Continuous conversion.
8. Click OK.
The Rotate - Continuous dialog box appears.
115
9. Type the variable name, the high and low scales, and the high and low rotation angles.
In this example, the needle is to rotate clockwise as the value increases. Since a positive
angle rotates an object counterclockwise (the default) and a negative angle rotates an
object clockwise, set the High Angle at -60and the Low Angle at 60.
10. Click OK.
11. Click OK.
Creating a Ramp Pushbutton

To create a ramp pushbutton
1. From the Object menu choose Link from Library.
The Link from Library dialog box appears.
2. Double-click Fox Buttons and then fox_pushbtn.
3. Click Load.
4. Paste the button in your display.
5. With the pushbutton selected, choose Edit Text from the Object menu.
The Edit Text dialog box appears.
6. Type: Ramp Up
7. Click OK.
8. With the pushbutton still selected, choose Configure Objects from the Object
menu.
9. Select the Action tab.
10. Click Add.
The Add Operator Action dialog box appears.
11. Select the Ramp action.
12. Click OK.
The Ramp dialog box appears.
13. Type the variable name. Be sure it is a variable you can ramp, such as an output.
14. Select the ramp direction and the range.
15. Click OK.
16. Click OK.
116
Creating and Changing Text

To create text
1. Choose Text from the Draw menu, or click the Text tool .
The cursor changes to a vertical insertion point.
2. Place the cursor at the desired location for the text, and click the left mouse button.
3. Type the text.
4. When you finish, click the right mouse button, or select another tool.
To change text
1. In the drawing area, select the text you want to change.
2. Choose Edit Text from the Object menu.
The Edit Text dialog box appears.
3. Modify the text and click OK.
To change the font, color, or direction of the text

1. From the Object menu, choose Graphic Attributes.
The Set Selection Attributes dialog box appears.
2. Select the Text tab.
3. Modify the properties of the selected text.
NOTE
Text objects do not reflect out-of-service conditions by turning cyan. Use back-
ground text objects to reflect this condition.
Creating a T-Bar (Scale Dynamic)

A T-bar is an object that scales up when a process value increases and scales down when a process
value decreases.
To create a T-Bar (scale dynamic)

1. Using the Line tool, draw a vertical line and a horizontal line to create a T.
You may want to use Snap to Grid to simplify drawing the lines.
2. Group the lines.
4. Set the reference point to the bottom of the T-bar so that it grows from the
bottom up.
An object is scaled relative to its reference point. If you do not set the reference point,
the T-bar grows out in all directions from the center.
5. With the T-bar selected, choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
117
TIP

7. Click Add.
8. Select the Scale Vertical dynamic and the Continuous conversion.
9. Click OK.
10. In the Scale Vertical box, type the variable name, set the high and low scales, and
click OK.
11. Click OK.
Simulating 3-D Animation (Scale Dynamic)

This example shows you how to simulate 3-D animation using the Scale Horizontal dynamic.
Refer to “Creating a T-Bar (Scale Dynamic)” on page 117, for step-by-step details on configuring
a scale dynamic.
To simulate 3-D animation (scale dynamic)

1. From a 3-D palette, select an object such as a valve that can appear to rotate.
2. Configure a scale horizontal dynamic.
Keep the reference point in the center of the object (the default setting).
Use Continuous conversion.
3. Set the Low Scalar % at about 15%.
NOTE
Do not enter 0%. This makes the object disappear.
118
Creating a Relative Pick

This example includes two valves with a pushbutton to toggle the valve states.
To create a relative pick

1. From the 3D_Valve palette, link two valves into your display.
2. From the 3D_Button palette, link a pushbutton into your display.
3. With the first valve selected, choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
TIP

5. Select Add, and choose the Relative Pick action.
The Relative Pick dialog box appears.
6. After the =PICK1 command, replace the variable (if it exists) with the valve state
parameter (for example, Compound:Block.MA).
7. Click OK.
8. Click Apply.
9. Select the second valve and repeat Steps 4, 5, and 6.
10. Select the pushbutton and assign the display manager command action to it.
The Relative Pick Command Builder dialog box appears.
11. Type toggle $PICK1 and click OK.
12. Click OK.
13. Save the display and test it as follows:
 Open the display in FoxView.
 Select the first valve (note the yellow highlighting) and then click the pushbutton.
The MA parameter toggles.
 Select the second valve and click the pushbutton. The second valve’s MA parame-
ter toggles.
NOTE
For visual feedback, assign the Fill Color discrete dynamic to the valve state vari-
ables. For example, use red for state 0 and green for state 1.
Threshold Conversion Example

For example, you could configure Fill Color for five threshold values as shown in Table 3-27.
119
Table 3-27. Threshold States
State Operator Value Fill Color

1 < 0.0 Red
2 <= 5.0 Orange
3 <= 95.0 Green
4 <= 100.0 Orange
5 > 100.0 Red
When the variable is less than 0.0, the display object is red. When the variable is less than or equal
to 5, the display object is orange.
NOTE
State 1 has the highest priority, then state 2, and so on. When more than one state is
true, FoxView displays the state with the highest priority.
GEdit
GEdit is a display engineering and maintenance utility that supplements FoxDraw capabilities.
You run GEdit via a command prompt, specifying script files that contain commands informing
GEdit how to build the display.
Files Required for GEdit

GEdit requires the text files, as listed in Table 3-28, to perform display creation and editing.
Table 3-28. GEdit Text Files
File Purpose
g_edit_fd.cfg This GEdit configuration file specifies the screen position,
default faceplates and trend types, server name with which to
connect, and prompt modes.
\usr\fox\wp\data\dspblock.dat These files, which come standard with FoxDraw, are the block
- and - databases and contain defaults associated with block types.
\usr\fox\wp\data\dsppdef.dat
User-defined add script files These files define the information to be added to display file(s).
You can redefine default faceplates and trends as well as a server
name and prompt mode in an add script file.
Log File
GEdit generates a log file that lists all GEdit actions, including display creation, addition of new
objects, and an object’s configuration. It also includes a list of syntax errors found by GEdit.
If you do not specify the log filename in the command line, GEdit generates the filename.
120
The format of the log file name is logfile_.txt. The underscore is replaced with a digit. The first
log file in the directory is named logfile1.txt, the second, logfile2.txt, and so forth. You may delete
these log files at any time.
Running GEdit
Access GEdit from a command prompt.
Syntax
The command’s syntax is:
foxdraw -gedit -parmeter(s) script_file1 [script_file2
… script_fileN] [logfile=log_file_name] [UPDATEEXT] [CLEANDISP] [-
delete]
NOTE
When invoked from the command line, FoxDraw and Gedit produce many, many
information messages. Many of those look like errors but all may be ignored. See
the log file created by FoxDraw/Gedit for the actual results of the operation.
Parameters
You must supply one or more parameters to the GEdit command, as listed in Table 3-29.
Table 3-29. GEdit Parameters
Parameter Purpose
-a Runs in normal mode. This mode has no user interface.
-at Checks script files syntax.
-av Runs in visual mode, allowing you to view the displays being created.
-al Same as the -a option, but when done, GEdit displays log file.
-atl Same as the -at option, but when done, GEdit displays log file.
-avl Same as the -av option, but when done, GEdit displays log file.
121
Syntax of the g_edit_fd.cfg File and Add Script File

Although the 20 Series and 50 Series script file syntax is still supported, new features have been
added. Refer to Grouped Object Editor for Displays (B0193DV, Rev C) for the old syntax
definition.
You can use the default (20/50 Series) coordinate system or the FoxDraw/FoxView coordinate
system.
Some GEdit script commands can be used in the g_edit_fd.cfg file only. Some commands can be
used only in an add script file. Some can be used in both files.
GEdit supports the script commands listed in Table 3-30.
Table 3-30. GEdit Script Commands
Use in Use in
Script Use in add Script Use in add
Command g_edit_fd.cfg script Command g_edit_fd.cfg script
VERSION Yes Yes FILE No Yes
DEF_TD Yes No LOC*** No Yes
DEF_FP Yes Yes SYMBOL No Yes
SERVER Yes Yes BUTTON No Yes
P1 .. P8 Yes No Compound:Block No Yes
PBUT Yes No Group No Yes
ERR_PROMPT Yes No TL# No Yes
PROMPT Yes Yes TL#_COLOR No Yes
TL#_HIST No Yes
122
Coordinate Systems
Coordinates in new FoxDraw displays and old (50 Series and 20 Series) displays are different.
These are the differences:
 In the old system, the (0,0) coordinate is at the top-left display corner. In the new sys-
tem, the (0,0) coordinate is at the bottom-left display corner.
 In the old system, a coordinate has the format (y,x). In the new system, the format is
(x,y).
x refers to the horizontal position.
y refers to the vertical position.
 In the old system, the absolute size of the full display is (y=3456, x=5120). In the new
system, it is (x=100, y=75) for displays in standard definition format ((4:3) aspect
ratio) and (x=133.33, y=75) for displays in widescreen format ((16:9) aspect ratio).
GEdit supports both coordinate systems. Use the VERSION command to specify the
coordinate system to be used.
 If the VERSION command returns 7 or later, GEdit also supports Wide Screen Format
display files (described in Appendix C “Widescreen Conversion for Displays”).
Table 3-31, compares coordinate locations specified in the old and new coordinate systems.
Table 3-31. Comparison of Coordinate Locations
New Location (Using

4:3 Aspect Ratio) Old Location
20,30% 70,20%
80,30% 70,80%
50,37.5 1728,2560
6,5CHAR 5,6CHAR
123
GEdit Commands
These groups of GEdit commands are available:
 Trend and plot configuration commands
 Trend configuration commands
 Plot configuration commands
 Plot and trend creation commands.
Table of GEdit Commands for Plots and Trends

Table 3-32, indicates which GEdit commands can be used in:
 Trends
 X/Y plots.
Table 3-32. GEdit Commands for Plots and Trends
GEdit Command Trend X/Y-Plot

P_FILE_OD Yes
P_LEAD_MARKER Yes
P_NPOINTS Yes
P_TYPE_X Yes
P_TYPE_Y
PL#_COLOR_FR Yes
PL#_COLOR_MR Yes
PL#_COLOR_RR Yes
PL#_DELTA_X Yes
PL#_DELTA_Y
PL#_DESC_X Yes
PL#_DESC_Y
PL#_FILE_RD Yes
PL#_LIN_SCALE_X Yes
PL#_LIN_SCALE_Y
PL#_LOG_SCALE_X Yes
PL#_LOG_SCALE_Y
PL#_OBJ_X Yes
PL#_OBJ_Y
PL#_RANGE_X Yes
PL#_RANGE_Y
PL#_TIME_DELAY Yes
PL#_UNITS_X Yes
PL#_UNITS_Y
PLOT Yes
T_ACCESS_CT Yes
T_ACCESS_KE
T_ACCESS_SC
T_BGRCOLOR Yes Yes
124
Table 3-32. GEdit Commands for Plots and Trends (Continued)
GEdit Command Trend X/Y-Plot

T_DISPSTYLE Yes
T_DURATION Yes
T_GRID Yes Yes
T_GRIDCOLOR
T_GRIDNUM Yes
T_MARKERS Yes
T_NUMMARKER Yes
T_OFFCOLOR Yes
T_OFFHI
T_OFFLO
T_SCAN Yes Yes
T_TIME Yes
T_TYPE Yes
TL#_0NAME Yes
TL#_0OFFSET
TL#_1NAME
TL#_1OFFSET
TL#_AUTOSCALE Yes
TL#_DATATYPE Yes
TL#_DELTA Yes
TL#_DESCR Yes
TL#_GUARDBAND Yes
TL#_LIN_SCALE Yes
TL#_LOG_SCALE Yes
TL#_MSTYLE Yes Yes
TL#_MINSPAN Yes
TL#_OBJ Yes
TL#_RANGE Yes
TL#_UNITS Yes
TREND Yes
125
Trend and Plot Configuration Commands

These commands apply both to the next created trend and to the next created plot.
NOTE
The # symbol refers to the pen number.
T_GRID
T_GRIDCOLOR
T_SCAN
T_BGRCOLOR
TL#_MSTYLE
Trend Configuration Commands

These commands are applied to the next created trend.
NOTE
The # symbol is a pen number.
T_DURATION
T_TYPE
T_TIME
T_DISPSTYLE
T_MARKERS
T_OFFHI
T_OFFLO
T_OFFCOLOR
T_GRIDNUM
T_ACCESS_CT
T_ACCESS_SC
T_ACCESS_KE
TL#_OBJ
T_NUMMARKER
TL#_LIN_SCALE
TL#_LOG_SCALE
TL#_DESCR
TL#_DATATYPE
TL#_RANGE
TL#_DELTA
TL#_UNITS
TL#_AUTOSCALE
TL#_GUARDBAND
TL#_MINSPAN#
TL#_0NAME #
TL#_1NAME
TL#_0OFFSET
TL#_1OFFSET
126
Plot Configuration Commands

These commands are applied to the next created plot.
NOTE
The # symbol is a pen number.
P_NPOINTS
P_FILE_OD
P_TYPE_X
P_TYPE_Y
P_LEAD_MARKER
PL#_OBJ_X
PL#_OBJ_Y
PL#_DESC_X
PL#_DESC_Y
PL#_FILE_RD
PL#_LIN_SCALE_X
PL#_LIN_SCALE_Y
PL#_LOG_SCALE_X
PL#_LOG_SCALE_Y
PL#_RANGE_X
PL#_RANGE_Y
PL#_DELTA_X
PL#_DELTA_Y
PL#_UNITS_X
PL#_UNITS_Y
PL#_COLOR_MR
PL#_COLOR_RR
PL#_COLOR_FR
PL#_TIME_DELAY
127
Plot and Trend Creation Commands

These commands create trends and plots at specified location, name them and apply trend/plot
configuration.
Configuration commands must be placed before a trend creation command.
The creation commands execute and then delete all pending configuration commands. The pend-
ing configuration commands, which cannot be applied to the created object, are also deleted by
the creation commands. The creation commands are as follows:
TREND
PLOT
Other GEdit Features

The following two FoxDraw GEdit commands are used to address problems caused when parts of
the display are moved, or placed well off the display file's visible drawing area. When this occurs,
displays take a long time to open and allocate large amounts of swap space.
 UPDATEEXT (Update Extents) command helps to identify the affected displays.
 CLEANDISP (Clean Display) command fixes the displays.
Update Extents (UPDATEEXT) Command

There are circumstances when the extents reported by DEdit complexity reports are incorrect.
When this is suspected, the UPDATEEXT command determines the actual size of the display file.
This is significant when one or more graphic elements are moved considerably off the usable
drawing area of the display. This situation can cause memory leaks in the X Server. Using this
command in conjunction with the CLEANDISP command, can correct the affected displays.
This command processes each of the display files passed as arguments to the command and recal-
culates the size of the display. The resulting extents are available for each display in the GEdit log
file as well as the Complexity Report generated by DEdit. The extents for all files processed are
shown in the log file.
As with other GEdit commands, when FoxDraw is invoked via the command line, a great number
of diagnostic messages are printed to the console. Under normal circumstances, these messages
can be ignored.
Following are formats and examples:
Format of the GEdit Invocation Command

To invoke GEdit, enter:
foxdraw -gedit -av <ScriptFile>
Format of the GEdit Script File

The following shows the format of the GEdit script file:
UPDATEEXT <FileList>
Note that <FileList> may contain wild cards.
Examples of a Script File

The following are the examples of a script file:
Example 1
128
UPDATEEXT d:\opt\menus\file1.fdf d:\opt\menus\file2.fdf

Example 2
VERSION = 6
FILE = d:\opt\menus\myDisp1.fdf
LOC1 = P1
LOC_Left_1 = 40,50%
SYMBOL = eductor P4 newName
SYMBOL = aramcoke P5 NEWNAM1
FOXANALYST:SINE FP 0,0% PID
TANK1_COMP:LV100 FP 25,75% AOUT
UC01_LEAD:SINE FP 45,20% PID
UC01_LEAD:COSINE FP 45,25% PID
UC01_LEAD:COSINE TD 75,75% PID
NOTE
Change the compound and block names whereever applicable.
Save the script in some location and run the below command to create the display using
the script file.
foxdraw -gedit -avl <Scriptfile>
Example 3 : Syntax of the Gedit script file to create the display
VERSION = 6
FILE = file_name [NEW] [FILE_TYPE] Background_color
Example:
FILE= D:\opt\menus\myDisp1.fdf NEW (create the Base Display.)
FILE= D:\opt\menus\myDisp1.fdf NEW F (Creates the base Display.)
FILE= D:\opt\menus\myDisp1.fdf NEW HH (Creates Half horizontal overlay.)
FILE= D:\opt\menus\myDisp1.fdf NEW HV (Creates Half vertical overlay)
FILE= D:\opt\menus\myDisp1.fdf NEW Q (Creates Quarter overlay.)
FILE= D:\opt\menus\myDisp1.fdf NEW Background_color_index(n) (Where n is
within the FoxDraw Palate limit between 16 and 91 )
Example 4: Syntax of the Gedit script file to Add FacePlates to the Display
COMPOUND:BOLCK FP 0,41.25 BOLCK_TYPE FACEPLATE_NAME * IACC
Command
COMPOUND:BOLCK FP 0,41.25 BOLCK_TYPE "FACEPLATE_NAME"
Example 5: Syntax of the Gedit script file to Add Trend to the Display
COMPOUND:BOLCK FP 0,41.25 [BOLCK_TYPE] ["TREND_TYPE"
["TREND_NAME"]]
Example 6: Example of the Gedit script file to Add Objects to an existing Display
129
VERSION = 6
FILE= D:\opt\menus\myDisp1.fdf
BUTTON=BTTNS_SRC_40 0,0
SERVER=AWX002
DEPDEP1:DEP1 FP 0,41.25 DEP DEP *
Save the script in some location and run the below command to create the display using
the script file.
foxdraw -gedit -a <Scriptfile>
Example 7: Example of a Log File
Note that this log file indicates that the first two displays each have objects outside the
normal drawing area. The coordinate information is given in this format:
Lower Left X, Y, Upper right X, Y
Typical sizes for full size base displays are close to (0,0) (100, 75). Log files are created in
the current directory and are named:
logfileX.txt
where X is replaced by a number beginning at zero and increasing each time a new log file
is created.
Parsing g_edit_fd.cfg...
==== PROCESSING SCRIPT FILE : d:\opt\menus\test1.txt
Updated extents "d:\opt\menus\file1.fdf" -32174.545, -28615.564 32274.230,
28690.278
Updated extents "d:\opt\menus\file2.fdf" -32174.545, -28615.564 32268.060,
28647.775
Updated extents "d:\opt\menus\file3.fdf" 0.0, 0.0 100, 75
Clean Display (CLEANDISP) Command

The CLEANDISP command processes each of the display files passed as arguments to the com-
mand and looks for graphic objects that are off the usable part of the drawing area. By default, it
moves any objects that it finds outside the drawing area to the center of the X axis. You may then
view the object and either delete it or reposition it. For example, the following centers out-of-area
objects in class.fdf and displays results in a GEdit log file:
foxdraw -gedit -avl CLEANDISP d:\opt\fox\displib\class.fdf
If the -delete option is used, then any remote objects are automatically deleted. The actual
repositioning of the objects is dependent on the type of object and past transformations applied to
the object. This means that occasionally, some moved parts are not placed in the usual location.
When this happens, it may be necessary to carefully inspect the display to locate the moved parts.
As with other GEdit commands, when FoxDraw is invoked via the command line, a great number
of diagnostic messages are printed to the console. Under normal circumstances, these messages
can be ignored.
130
4. Window and Dialog Boxes
Parts of the FoxDraw Window

The FoxDraw Window
From FoxDraw, you can create and configure displays and library objects. In the process, you can
create customized templates and user palettes from which to build displays.
Table 4-1, shows a display in the FoxDraw window.
Figure 4-1. FoxDraw Window
131
B0700BE – Rev F 4. Window and Dialog Boxes
FoxDraw Title bar

The title bar in FoxDraw displays the filename of the current display along with the server name
(if the server connection exists) and FoxDraw title.
Menu Bar
The FoxDraw menu bar offers these menus.
File Menu
The File menu appears as shown in Figure 4-2. The options and their descriptions are available in
Table 4-1.
Figure 4-2. File Menu
Table 4-1. File Menu - Options
Command Description
New Opens the New dialog box for creating a new base display, overlay, library
object, or palette.
If a display is open with unsaved changes, you are prompted to save,
disregard, or cancel.
This command is available by pressing Ctrl+N or clicking a toolbar button.
Open Opens the Open dialog box from which to open an existing base display,
overlay, library object, or palette.
Note: You cannot open a display on another workstation. You can open a
display on the local file system only.
Tip: You can also open a display object from the File menu’s most recently
used list.
This command is available by pressing Ctrl+O or clicking a toolbar button.
For a list of file types supported by FoxDraw, refer to “FoxDraw File Types”
on page 10.
132
4. Window and Dialog Boxes B0700BE – Rev F
Table 4-1. File Menu - Options (Continued)
Command Description
Save Immediately saves the display file to disk with the current date and time. If
the file is new and has not yet been named, the Save As dialog box
appears.
Note: You cannot save to another workstation. You can save the display to
the local file system only. FoxDraw does not automatically create backup
files. Save your work often to prevent loss in case of system or network fail-
ure.
This command is available by pressing Ctrl+S or clicking a toolbar button.
Save As Opens the standard Save As dialog box in which to specify the name and
location of the current display, library object, overlay, or palette.
You can also use the Save As command to assign the file a new name.
Note: You cannot save to another workstation. You can save the display to
the local file system only.
For a list of file types supported by FoxDraw, refer to “FoxDraw File Types”
on page 10.
Save as 9.x Opens the Save As 9.x dialog box in which to specify the name and loca-
tion of the current display, library object, overlay, or palette. Additionally,
you can save the 10.x version in the path mentioned and the 9.x version of
the file is saved in 9.x directory of the current location (For example: If you
select the path as d:\opt\menus\d1, the file is saved in the
d:\opt\menus\d1\9x location)
Note: You can save the display to the local file system only, but you cannot
save it to another workstation.
For a list of file types supported by FoxDraw, refer to“FoxDraw File Types”
on page 10.
Display Properties Invokes the Display Properties dialog box in which to define proper-
ties for the display.
Recover Invokes the Recover Backup Files dialog box from which you can select
crash files saved by FoxDraw.
Note: This command is available only when there are files to be recovered.
Recent File Near the bottom of the File menu is a list of the names of the four most
recently opened files. The last used file is at the top of the list.
Clicking a filename opens the file.
Exit Ends the FoxDraw session. You are prompted to save any unsaved changes.
This command is also available by pressing Alt+F4 or clicking the Close
button (X) in the upper right corner of the FoxDraw window.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu appears as shown in Figure 4-3. The options and their descriptions are available in
Table 4-2.
133
Figure 4-3. Edit Menu
Table 4-2. Edit Menu - Options
Command Description
Undo SelectChange Reverses the previous operation.
The name of the operation to be undone displays to the right of Undo
SelectChange. As you cycle through previous operations, the menu iden-
tifies each operation. For example, you might see “Undo FillColor”, then
“Undo EdgeWidth”, and then “Undo CreateCurve”.
This command is also available by pressing Ctrl+Z or clicking a toolbar
button.
Note: Redo reverses an Undo operation, as stored in command history.
Redo Reverses an Undo operation, as stored in command history.
You can redo all undo operations, one by one. As you cycle through redo
operations, each operation is identified in succession on the menu. For
example, you might see “Redo CreateCurve”, “Redo EdgeWidth”, and then
“Redo FillColor”. If an operation cannot be redone, the command is dis-
abled and the menu item displays the label “Can’t Redo”.
This command is also available by pressing Ctrl+Y or clicking a toolbar
button.
Note: Undo reverses the previous operation.
Cut Removes the selected object and places it on the clipboard.
This command is available by pressing Ctrl+X or clicking a toolbar button.
Copy Copies the selected object(s) to the clipboard.
This command is available by pressing Ctrl+C or clicking a toolbar button.
Paste Pastes FoxDraw objects from the clipboard to the display.
This command is available by pressing Ctrl+V or clicking a toolbar button.
Delete Removes an object without storing it on the clipboard.
Note: You can reverse this operation with the Undo command.
This command is also available by pressing the keyboard’s DEL key.
134
Table 4-2. Edit Menu - Options (Continued)
Command Description
Duplicate Duplicates an object without storing it on the clipboard.
This command is available by pressing Ctrl+D.
Tip: You can also duplicate by pressing the Ctrl key and clicking on the
object.
Select All Selects all the objects in a display.
This command is available by pressing Ctrl+A.
Note: The Deselect All command deselects all objects in the display.
Invert Selection Reverses the selection of objects.
All selected objects become unselected, and all unselected objects become
selected.
Deselect All Deselects all objects in the display.
Tip: You can also deselect all objects by moving the mouse pointer to an
empty area of the display and clicking the left mouse button.
Note: The Select All command selects all the objects in a display.
135
View Menu
The View menu appears as shown in Figure 4-4. The options and their descriptions are available
in Table 4-3.
Figure 4-4. View Menu
Table 4-3. View Menu - Options
Command Description
Zoom Zoom In magnifies the drawing area by one increment.
Zoom Out shrinks the drawing area by one increment.
Zoom In Continuous changes the cursor to a magnifying glass, and per-
mits you to magnify the drawing area incrementally by clicking the left
mouse button.
Zoom Out Continuous changes the cursor to a magnifying glass, and per-
mits you to shrink the drawing area incrementally by clicking the left
mouse button.
Zoom Lasso selects an area for magnification by drawing a selection rectan-
gle around it.
Normal View Restores the view size to the default of 100%.
This command is available from a toolbar button.
136
Table 4-3. View Menu - Options (Continued)
Command Description
Refresh Redraws the screen.
Use this command to correct problems such as stray marks that may appear
after you manipulate display objects.
This command is available by pressing F5.
Special Refresh FoxDraw is not aware of the default values of the exposed graphic attri-
butes. Hence, when the user resets a graphic alias at the intermediate/base
level, FoxDraw does not update the appearance of the library object which
exposed its graphic attribute. To update the appearance of the library object
which had exposed its graphic attributes, the user can execute the Special
Refresh command. The command is available through the application
menu (View/Special Refresh) or through the Shift+F5 shortcut.
FoxView Opens the current FoxDraw display in FoxView.
Running this command automatically saves the display.
This command is also available from the standard toolbar’s button.
Note: If FoxView is not running or FoxDraw is running on a non I/A sys-
tem, the FoxView button is not available.
Object Focus First moves focus to the first object that you created.
This command is available from the View menu.
Previous moves focus to the previously focused object.
This command is available from the View menu and from the toolbar’s but-
ton.
Next moves focus to the object that was created after the currently focused
object.
This command is available from the toolbar’s button.
Point Modes Point sets point mode to Point.
When Snap to Grid is turned on, you can select any point in an object, drag
the point, and snap it to the nearest grid intersection.
When Snap Gravity is turned on, you can select any point in an object,
drag the point to a target object, and snap it to the nearest point on the tar-
get.
Center sets the point mode to Center.
If Snap to Grid is turned on, when you move an object, the center point of
the object snaps to the nearest grid intersection.
If Snap Gravity is turned on, you can drag the object to a target object and
snap its center point to the nearest point on the target.
When you rotate or scale an object in Center mode, it rotates and is scaled
around its center point. For example, if you are enlarging a pipe, it grows at
both ends.
Reference sets the point mode to Reference. By default, the reference
point is at the center of the object.
Note: The reference point can be outside the object, so the object itself may
not appear to be snapped to the grid or to a target object.
The snap command options affect the action of the Reference command.
137
Table 4-3. View Menu - Options (Continued)
Command Description
Grid On Shows or hides the grid.
You may want to deselect this command to see how your display appears in
FoxView.
Note: When Snap to Grid is selected, objects snap to the grid, regardless of
whether the grid is visible.
Snap to Grid If selected, when you move an object, it snaps to the nearest grid intersec-
tion.
How the object snaps depends on the current point mode.
Snap Gravity If selected, when you move an object to a target object, the first object snaps
to the target.
Snap Gravity stays in effect until you deselect the command.
Instead of snapping an object to another object, you can select Snap to
Grid. Snap Gravity and Snap to Grid are mutually exclusive.
Grid Opens the Grid dialog box, allowing you to
 Modify grid size, color, line type, and other settings, and save the grid
with the display.
 Save current settings to a file or load an existing file.
Toolbars Standard displays or hides the Standard toolbar.
Draw displays or hides the Draw toolbar.
Layout displays or hides the Layout toolbar.
Rotate displays or hides the Rotate toolbar.
Status displays or hides the Status bar.
Tooltips displays or hides the names of toolbar buttons.
Show Comments Changes the visibility of comment objects.
Draw Menu
The Draw menu appears as shown in Figure 4-5. The options and their descriptions are available
in Table 4-4.
138
Figure 4-5. Draw Menu
Table 4-4. Draw Menu - Options
Command Description
Select Tool Allows you to select an object.
Point Tool Moves, adds, or deletes points on these objects:
 Line
 Polyline
 Polygon
 Curve
 Closed curve.
Exception: You cannot delete a point from a line.
Multi Create Allows you to create multiple objects of the same type without reselecting
the drawing tool. While using this tool, you are in Multi Create mode.
In normal drawing mode, you must reselect a command every time you
want to create another object.
To cancel Multi Create mode:
 Deselect the Multi Create command.
 Click the Multi Create button again.
Line Allows you to draw a straight line.
Rectangle Allows you to draw a rectangle.
Polyline Allows you to draw a polyline. A polyline consists of more than two points
connected by straight lines.
139
Table 4-4. Draw Menu - Options (Continued)
Command Description
Polygon Allows you to construct a polygon. A polygon is a closed shape composed
of three or more points. The points are connected with straight lines, and
the last point is connected to the first.
Curve Allows you to construct a curve. A curve (also called a spline or Bezier
curve) is a polyline whose points are connected with the smoothest possible
curved lines.
Closed Curve Allows you to construct a closed curve. A closed curve is a polygon whose
points are connected with the smoothest possible curved lines.
Circle Allows you to construct a circle or ellipse.
Arcs Allows you to create an arc.
Text Allows you to add and change text.
Background Text Allows to create and change background text.
For example, you can use this tool to display text on a background rectan-
gle. The background rectangle has the same fill and edge attributes as a
standard rectangle, and can also have dynamic attributes.
Comment Creates a comment object.
Note: You can create a comment object on an *.fdf file only when com-
ment objects are visible.
Scroll Region Allows you to create a scroll region object, which can be configured to dis-
play an ASCII text file.
140
Object Menu
The Object menu appears as shown in Figure 4-6. The options and their descriptions are available
in Table 4-5.
Figure 4-6. Object Menu
Table 4-5. Object Menu - Options
Command Description
Reference Point Set Reference Point sets the reference point.
Reset Reference Point resets the reference point, canceling the
user-defined reference point of an object or objects and restores the
default, which is the center point.
Edit Text Opens the Edit text dialog box from which you edit the selected
text.
To edit multiple text objects, select the objects before choosing this
command.
Tip: You can select this command from the Pop-up menu.
This command is also available by pressing Ctrl+T.
Graphic Attributes Opens the Set Default Attributes dialog box or Set Selec-
tion Attributes dialog box, depending on whether an object is
selected.
This command is also available by pressing Ctrl+Enter.
Configure Objects Opens the Configure Objects dialog box, in which you associate
an object with a process variable or an operator action.
This command is also available by pressing Alt+Enter.
141
Table 4-5. Object Menu - Options (Continued)
Command Description
Group Groups multiple objects together so that you can move, rotate, or
resize them, and change their graphic attributes as if they were a sin-
gle entity.
To separate the objects (after they have been grouped), choose the
Ungroup command.
Ungroup Separates multiple objects that have been grouped together with the
Group command.
Visibility Allows you to turn visibility on or off.
Detect Allows you to turn detection on or off.
Link from Library Opens the Link from Library dialog box from which to select a
library object to link to your display. You can choose from:
 User markers
 User trends
 User XY plots
 User profile plots
 User symbols
 User buttons
 Fox markers
 Fox trends
 Fox XY plots
 Fox profile plots
 Fox symbols
 Fox buttons.
User objects (markers, trends, XY plots, profile plots, symbols, and
buttons) are files created and saved in the corresponding subdirec-
tories in your displib directory.
Invensys supplies Fox markers, trends, XY plots, profile plots, sym-
bols, and buttons. These files are stored in the corresponding subdi-
rectories in /opt/fox/displib (Solaris) or \opt\fox\displib
(Windows).
Link Faceplate/ Invokes the Link Faceplate/Trend dialog box.
Trend
Link Bitmap Opens the Link Bitmap dialog box from which you select a bit-
map (.bmp file) to link to your display. Choose from User Bitmaps
or Fox Bitmaps.
Link/Copy from Palette Invokes the Select Palette dialog box to open a palette and to
copy an object from a palette onto the drawing area.
142
Tools Menu
The Tools menu appears as shown in Figure 4-7. The options and their descriptions are available
in Table 4-6.
Figure 4-7. Tools Menu
Table 4-6. Tools Menu - Options
Command Description
Convention Editor Invokes the Display Convention Configurator dialog box for config-
uring a display convention.
Edit Dynamic/ Invokes the Edit Dynamics/Conventions dialog box from which to
Connections configure or modify object attributes.
Verify Selection The Verify Selection utility verifies the current selection’s configuration.
It checks for the following problems in the selection:
 Instance of a library object having exposed aliases configured with a
Required condition and remaining unresolved (in .fdf displays).
 Instance of different components of a library object having similar
configurations and similar names.
 Instance of a library object exposing its dynamics with an empty tag-
name and a Required configuration.
Verify Display The Verify Display utility verifies the entire display’s configuration. It
checks for the following problems in the display:
 Instance of a library object having exposed alias(es) configured with a
Required condition and remaining unresolved (in .fdf displays).
 Instance of different components of a library object having similar
configurations and similar names.
 Instance of a library object exposing its dynamics with an empty tag-
name and a Required configuration.
Display Converter Displays the Convert Display Files dialog box from which to convert
display files to different formats.
Display Editor Invokes the DEdit utility for finding and replacing compound names in
(DEdit) one or more displays.
FoxDraw also includes a GEdit utility, allowing you to add faceplates,
trends, symbols, and buttons to existing or new displays using add script
files.
143
Table 4-6. Tools Menu - Options (Continued)
Command Description
Palette Browser Opens an expandable list box of user-built or Invensys Foxboro supplied
palettes.
Layout Menu
The Layout menu appears as shown in Figure 4-8. The options and their descriptions are available
in Table 4-7.
Figure 4-8. Layout Menu
Table 4-7. Layout Menu - Options
Command Description
Order Allows you to specify order preference.
Align Allows you to specify an alignment type.
Space Evenly Makes the center points of all selected objects equidistant from each other.
Flip Allows you to flip an object.
Rotate Allows you to rotate an object.
Same Size Height makes selected objects the same height as the focused object.
Width makes selected objects the same width as the focused object.
Both shapes the selected objects to be the same height and width as the
focused object.
Fast Arrow Move Toggles arrow key movement speed between fast (0.5 World Coordinate
units per keystroke) and slow (0.05 units). The default speed is fast.
144
Options Menu
The options menu appears as shown in Figure 4-9. The options and their descriptions are avail-
able in Table 4-8.
Figure 4-9. Options Menu
Table 4-8. Options Menu - Options
Command Description
User Options Opens the User Options dialog box in which to specify:
 Save grid with display
 Cursor size
 Retain case
 Full object display during move, rotate, and scale
 Maximum undo operations
 Save display on exit
 Arrow move distance
 Number of control variables, ranges or display files that appear in
drop-down history list
 Template for Single Block Trend
 AIM*API and FoxAPI server.
Font Setup Invokes the Font Setup dialog box from which you operate on FoxDraw
fonts.
Configure Servers Opens the API Server Connection Utility dialog box in which you
configure connections to FoxAPI servers on remote workstations. The con-
nected workstations are listed in the Servers tab in the User Options dialog
box.
Note: In FoxDraw, the pop up message “Unable to invoke configure Servers
tool” is invoked, if the FoxAPI connect utility is not properly installed in
“D:\opt\fox\ais\bin\” path. Refer to API Connectivity Release Notes for
FoxAPI installation (B0193UJ).
145
Help Menu
The Help menu appears as shown in Figure 4-10. The options and their descriptions are available
in Table 4-9.
Figure 4-10. Help Menu
Table 4-9. Help Menu - Options
Command Description
Using Help Invokes the standard Windows Help system that describes
the use of a help system.
Contents Displays the Contents tab of the FoxDraw on-line Help system.
Search for Help on Displays the Contents tab of the FoxDraw on-line Help system.
Quick Access Provides a list of topics describing mouse and keyboard shortcuts.
Toolbars Displays the Help topic that describes FoxDraw toolbars.
FoxDraw Tip of the Day Displays the Tip Of the Day dialog box.
About FoxDraw Displays the FoxDraw version and copyright information.
New Features_10.0 Lists the features available in FoxDraw Version 10.0
146
Toolbars
Toolbars contain buttons, providing mouse access to the most commonly used FoxDraw
commands.
Standard Toolbar
By default, the Standard toolbar is located at the top of the drawing area. This toolbar as shown in
Figure 4-11, contains the most frequently used commands from the File, Edit, View, and Object
menus.
Figure 4-11. Standard Toolbar
Table 4-10. Standard Toolbar - Options
Button Command Description

New Opens the New dialog box for creating a new base display, over-
lay, library object, or palette.
If a display is open with unsaved changes, you are prompted to
save, disregard, or cancel.
Selecting the drop-down menu button associated with the
New menu button presents a list of the display types that can be
created. Select the desired type and a new display is created.
This is faster than going through the New Display dialog box.
The drop-down menu appears as shown below.
This command is available from the File menu or by pressing

Ctrl+N.
Note: New, Open and Save actions will perform additional

actions, depending on the Widescreen Preferences set in the
User Options dialog box. For more details, refer to “Convert-
ing Files through FoxDraw” on page 428.
147
Table 4-10. Standard Toolbar - Options (Continued)

Open Opens the Open dialog box from which to open an existing base
display, overlay, library object, or palette.
Selecting the drop-down menu button associated with the
Open menu button presents a list of the most recently used
directories containing display files. This eliminates the necessity
to navigate to the desired directory via the Open File dialog
box.
Note: You cannot open a display on another workstation. You

can open a display on the local file system only.
Tip: You can also open a display object from the File menu’s
most recently used list.
This command is available from the File menu or pressing
Ctrl+O.
Save Immediately saves the display file to disk with the current date
and time. If the file is new and has not yet been named, the
Save As dialog box appears.
Note: You cannot save to another workstation. You can save the
display to the local file system only.
Important: FoxDraw does not automatically create backup
files. Save your work often to prevent loss in case of system or
network failure.
This command is available from the File menu or pressing
Ctrl+S.
Cut Removes the selected object and places it on the clipboard.
This command is available from the Edit menu or pressing
Ctrl+X.
Copy Copies the selected object(s) to the clipboard.
Ctrl+C.
148

Paste Pastes FoxDraw objects from the clipboard to the display.
Ctrl+V.
Undo Reverses the previous operation.
The name of the operation to be undone displays to the right of
Undo in the command’s label.
Note: Redo reverses an Undo operation, as stored in command
history.
Ctrl+Z.
Redo Reverses an Undo operation, as stored in command history.
You can redo all undo operations, one by one. If an operation
cannot be redone, the command is disabled.
Note: Undo reverses the previous operation.
Ctrl+Y.
Zoom In Magnifies the drawing area by one increment.
Zoom Out Shrinks the drawing area by one increment.
Zoom Lasso Selects an area for magnification by drawing a selection rectan-

gle around it.
Normal View Restores the view size to the default of 100%.
View Percent Indi- This read-only indicator shows the magnification/reduction
cator percentage achieved through zoom operations.
Grid On Shows or hides the grid.
You may want to deselect this command to see how your dis-
play appears in FoxView.
Note: When Snap to Grid is selected, objects snap to the grid,
regardless of whether the grid is visible.
Snap to Grid If selected, when you move an object, it snaps to the nearest
grid intersection.
149

Snap Gravity If selected, when you move an object to a target object, the first
object snaps to the target.
Snap Gravity stays in effect until you deselect the command.
Instead of snapping an object to another object, you can select
Snap to Grid. Snap Gravity and Snap to Grid are mutually
exclusive.
Point Mode Point sets point mode to Point.
When Snap to Grid is turned on, you can select any point in
an object, drag the point, and snap it to the nearest grid inter-
section.
When Snap Gravity is turned on, you can select any point in
an object, drag the point to a target object, and snap it to the
nearest point on the target.
Center Mode Center sets the point mode to Center.
If Snap to Grid is turned on, when you move an object, the
center point of the object snaps to the nearest grid intersection.
If Snap Gravity is turned on, you can drag the object to a tar-
get object and snap its center point to the nearest point on the
target.
When you rotate or scale an object in Center mode, it rotates
and is scaled around its center point. For example, if you are
enlarging a pipe, it grows at both ends.
Reference Mode Reference sets the point mode to Reference. By default, the ref-
erence point is at the center of the object.
Note: The reference point can be outside the object, so the
object itself may not appear to be snapped to the grid or to a
target object.
The snap command options affect the action of the Reference
command.
If Snap to Grid is selected, when you move an object, its ref-
erence point snaps to the nearest grid intersection.
If Snap Gravity is selected, you can drag the object to a target
object and snap its reference point to the nearest point on the
target.
Set Reference Sets the reference point.
Point This command is available from the Object menu.
Reset Resets the reference point to the original point.
Reference Point
150

Show Comments Changes the visibility of comment objects.
FoxView Opens the current FoxDraw display in FoxView.

Running this command automatically saves the display.
Note: If FoxView is not running, the FoxView button is not
available.
151
Draw Toolbar
By default, the Draw toolbar is located to the left of the drawing area. This toolbar contains fre-
quently used Draw menu commands. The toolbar appears in Figure 4-12, and its description in
Table 4-11.
Figure 4-12. Draw Toolbar
Table 4-11. Draw Toolbar - Options

Select Selects an object.
Point Moves, adds, or deletes points on these objects: line, polyline,

polygon, curve, and closed curve.
Exception: You cannot delete a point from a line.
This command is available from the Draw menu.
Multi-Create Allows you to create multiple objects of the same type without
having to reselect the drawing tool. While using this tool, you
are in Multi Create mode.
In normal drawing mode, you must reselect the drawing tool
every time you want to create another object.
Line Allows you to draw a straight line.
Rectangle Allows you to draw a rectangle.
Polyline Allows you to draw a polyline. A polyline consists of more than
two points connected by straight lines.
Polygon Allows you to construct a polygon. A polygon is a closed shape
composed of three or more points. The points are connected
with straight lines, and the last point is connected to the first.
152
Table 4-11. Draw Toolbar - Options (Continued)

Curve Allows you to construct a curve. A curve (also called a spline or
Bezier curve) is a polyline whose points are connected with the
smoothest possible curved lines.
Closed Curve Allows you to construct a closed curve. A closed curve is a poly-
gon whose points are connected with the smoothest possible
curved lines.
Circle Allows you to construct a circle or ellipse.
Pie Allows you to construct a pie arc. A pie arc is a segment of a cir-
cle. This command is available from the Draw menu.
Sector Allows you to construct a sector. A sector is part of the circum-
ference of a circle. This command is available from the Draw
menu.
Three-Point Sector Allows you to construct a three-point sector.
Text Allows you to add and change text.
Background Text Allows to create and change background text.

For example, you can use this tool to display text on a back-
ground rectangle. The background rectangle has the same fill
and edge attributes as a standard rectangle, and can also have
dynamic attributes.
Comment Object Creates a comment object.
Note: You cannot add a comment object to library objects.
Scroll region object Allows you to create a scroll region object, which can be config-
ured to display an ASCII file.
A scroll region object is a window that you create on a base dis-
play that shows the contents of one ASCII text file. In FoxView,
the selected file appears in the window, allowing the operator to
scroll through the file.
153
Layout Toolbar
The toolbar appears in Figure 4-13, and its description in Table 4-12.
Figure 4-13. Layout Toolbar
Table 4-12. Layout Toolbar - Options

Previous Object Moves focus to the previously focused object.
Next Object Moves focus to the object that was created after the currently-
focused object.
To Front Moves the selected object(s) in front of other objects.
This command is available from the Layout menu or by press-
ing Ctrl+F.
To Back Moves the selected object(s) to the back of other objects.
ing Ctrl+B.
Align Top Aligns the top edge of selected objects with the top edge of the
focused object.
ing the Shift+UP Arrow.
Align Bottom Aligns the bottom edge of selected objects with the bottom edge
of the focused object.
ing Shift+DOWN.
Align Right Aligns the right edge of selected objects with the right edge of
the focused object.
ing Shift+RIGHT.
Align Left Aligns the left edge of selected objects with the left edge of the
focused object.
ing Shift+LEFT.
Align Vertical Aligns selected objects vertically to the center point of the
focused object.
ing F9.
154
Table 4-12. Layout Toolbar - Options (Continued)

Align Horizontal Aligns selected objects horizontally to the center point of the
focused object.
ing Shift+F9.
Space Evenly Makes the center points of all selected objects equidistant from
each other.
This command is available from the Layout menu.
Same Height Makes selected objects the same height as the focused object.
Same Width Makes selected objects the same width as the focused object.
Group Groups multiple objects together so that you can move, rotate,
or resize them, and change their graphic attributes as if they
were a single entity.
This command is available from the Object menu.
To separate the objects (after they have been grouped), choose
the Ungroup command.
Ungroup Separates multiple objects that have been grouped together with
the Group command.
This command is available from the Object menu.
Rotate Toolbar
By default, the Rotate toolbar is located to the bottom of the drawing area. This toolbar as shown
in Figure 4-14, contains buttons that duplicate frequently used rotation commands from the Lay-
out menu.
The rotate buttons rotate the object in a counterclockwise direction. To rotate the object in a
clockwise direction, type a negative number in the Custom Rotation box. A description for
each of the options appears in Table 4-13.
Figure 4-14. Rotate Toolbar
155
Table 4-13. Rotate Toolbar - Options
Button/Box Description
Rotate 15 Degrees Rotates the object by 15 degrees.
Custom Rotation box Invokes the Rotate dialog box for rotating
with Apply button an object.
Entering a positive amount rotates the
object counterclockwise. A negative amount
rotates the object clockwise.
Flip Horizontal Flips the object such that the object’s screen
position does not change, but it appears
upside down.
Flip Vertical Flips the object such that the object’s screen
position does not change, but yields a mir-
ror image of the object.
Floating Toolbars
If you move a toolbar to the left, right, or bottom edge of the screen, it anchors itself to that loca-
tion. If you move a toolbar anywhere else, it becomes a floating toolbar with a title bar.
The options in the floating toolbar are listed in Table 4-14.
Table 4-14. Floating Toolbar - Options
To Do this
Create a vertical toolbar Hold down the keyboard’s Shift key and click in the title bar.
To create an anchored vertical toolbar, drag a horizontal toolbar
to the left or right edge of the screen. When the outline becomes
vertical, release the mouse button.
Create a horizontal toolbar Hold down the Shift key and click in the title bar.
To create an anchored horizontal toolbar, drag a vertical toolbar
to the top or bottom of the screen. When the outline becomes
horizontal, release the mouse button.
Move a floating toolbar Point to the title bar on the toolbar, and drag to a new location.
Return a toolbar Double-click the title bar, or drag it to the original location.
to its original position
156
Displayable Area
The displayable area is the part of the drawing area that appears in FoxView. The area varies,
according to the type of display.
For a base display in standard definition format ((4:3) aspect ratio), the displayable area fills the
entire screen and measures 100 units by 75 units. For a quarter-screen overlay, the displayable area
is 50 units by 37.5 units.
For a base display in widescreen format ((16:9) aspect ratio), the displayable area fills the entire
screen and measures 133.33 units by 75 units. For a quarter-screen overlay, the displayable area is
66.66 units by 37.5 units.
Scratchpad Area
For each display type, a black outline indicates the displayable area. Use the space outside this area
as a scratchpad. You can temporarily move objects to the scratchpad area for editing, away from
finished areas of a drawing.
Scroll Bars
Use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars to position the display. To return the display to its
default position, use the View menu’s Normal View command.
Status Bar
Shows information at the bottom of the FoxDraw window about the following (left to right):
 Menu items, toolbar buttons, or drawing procedures
 Mouse pointer coordinates
 Caps Lock
 Num Lock
 Scroll Lock.
The step-by-step drawing directions on the status bar are helpful when you are first learning to use
the drawing tools.
ToolTips
Tooltips are labels that identify toolbar buttons.
If ToolTips is enabled, you can view a button’s information by pointing at the button with the
mouse and waiting one or two seconds.
157
Pop-Up Menu
Click the right mouse button to display the pop-up menu, which offers access to major functions
such as:
 Cut
 Copy
 Paste
 Zoom In
 Zoom Out
 Group
 Ungroup
 Edit Text – Invokes the Edit Text dialog box.
 Graphic Attributes – invokes the Set Default Attributes dialog box or the Set
Selection Attributes dialog box.
 Configure Objects – Invokes the Configure Objects dialog box.
 Link Faceplate/Trend – Invokes the Link Faceplate/Trend dialog box.
NOTE
The available commands depend on the context when the pop-up menu was
invoked.
Tip of the Day Dialog Box

FoxDraw provides a Tip of the Day dialog box that appears at startup. The tips include informa-
tion on features, short-cuts and hints for using FoxDraw effectively. The Go To Help button on
the dialog takes you to the corresponding section in the on-line help files for more information on
the topic in the dialog box. The Next Tip button takes you to the next tip in the list. The Close
button closes the dialog box.
The Tip of the Day is also available from the Help pull down menu. To enable or disable the tip
of the day, check or uncheck the Show tips at startup check box on the FoxDraw Tip of the Day
dialog box.
The dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-15. Tip Of the Day Dialog Box
158
Working with Files

New Dialog Box
This dialog box appears by choosing New from the File menu.
Use this dialog box to create a new display. Display sizes are based on the World Coordinate sys-
tem used by FoxDraw.
Type Selection
Base Display
This creates a full screen base display with a gray background and a 10-by-10 grid, sub-divided
into 2 x 2. The file extension is *.fdf (which stands for Foxboro display file).
For displays with the standard definition format ((4:3) aspect ratio), the full screen size is 100
units wide by 75 units high.
For displays with the widescreen format ((16:9) aspect ratio), the full screen size is 133.33 units
wide by 75 units high.
Overlays
This creates a Full Screen, 1/2 Horizontal, 1/2 Vertical, 1/4 Screen, 1/8 Screen, or Custom overlay
display on top of a base display or another overlay. The base display does not close when an over-
lay is opened. The file extension for an overlay is *.fdf.
Components
The object types and their description appear in Table 4-15.
Table 4-15. Object Types
Item Description
Library Object Creates a specially formatted display linked to a base display or another
library object. A library object does not have a background. By default, a
library object is full screen size. The file extension is *.m1.
Palette Create a 25-unit by 40-unit window. Use this window to contain objects
used in building displays or library objects. The file extension is *.m1.
Create from Allows you to select a user-built template or a Foxboro supplied template.
Template
Template Selection
User-Built Templates
When this check box is selected (default setting), user-built templates appear in the list box.
When this check box is not selected, the list of Invensys Foxboro supplied templates appears.
159
NOTE
Invensys Systems, Inc. supplies a template for a base display, five overlay templates,
a library object template and five palette templates.
160
Open Dialog Box

When you choose Open from the File menu, the Open dialog box appears.
Use this browser dialog box to open a:
 Display file (*.fdf extension)
 Library object (.m1 extension)
 Palette (.m1 extension)
 Display file (.pdf extension)
 ASCII file (.g extension).
Files of type
Select a type (.fdf, .pdf, .m1, .g or all) to filter the file extensions.
To open a file:
1. Use the Look in field to select a subdirectory.
By default, Invensys/Foxboro supplied displays, library objects, overlays, palettes, and
display elements (fonts, grids, and markers) are stored in \opt\fox\displib.
User-built files are stored in an identical subdirectory structure located, by default,
under \opt\customer\displib.
2. Use the Files of Type field to select a file type.
NOTE
FoxDraw cannot directly open bitmap (.bmp or .i) files. To link a bitmap in a
display, choose Link Bitmap from the Object menu.
3. In the File Name field, type a filename or select one from the list.
4. Click Open.
Save As Dialog Box

The Save As dialog box appears the first time you save an object.
Save in
You must save your files on the I/A Series installation drive to permit FoxView access.
161
Select a subdirectory from the list available in Table 4-16.
Table 4-16. Object Directories
File Type Subdirectory

Faceplate library objects \Faceplates
Palettes of symbols \Palettes
Symbols such as tanks, valves, etc. \Symbols
File templates \Templates
Trend library objects \Trends
XY plot objects \XYplots
Profile plot objects \ProfilePlots
File Name
Select a file from the list or type the desired name.
Save As Type
Select *.fdf for display files including overlays, or *.m1 for library objects, palettes, and templates
or .g for platform independent ASCII representation of Foxboro display files.
Display Properties Dialog Box

The File menu’s Display Properties command invokes the Display Properties dialog box,
which includes these tabs:
 General
 History
 OM Data
 Script
 Menu
 Overlay
 Statistics.
162
Display Properties Dialog Box - General Tab

Use this tab to set properties for the display. Table 4-17 and Table 4-18 list the options.
Table 4-17. File Data Group Box
Field Description
Name Name of display (also shows directory)
Revision Foxboro internal revision number
Type Shows display type (base display, overlay, library object, or palette)
Size Shows display size in bytes
Background Color
This button’s face displays the current background color. Clicking this button invokes the stan-
dard color palette from which to choose a new background color. Background color is not avail-
able for library objects that do not have a background.
Detail Display
Select this check box if the display is to be used as a detail display. This option is available for base
displays only.
Detail Overlay
Select this check box if the display is to be used as an overlay in a detail display. This option is
available for overlays displays only.
Full Redraw
This check box switches the manner in which FoxView updates a display. If this box is unchecked
(default update mode), FoxView updates only the areas of the display that have changed. For
example, if a text field value changes, only the text field and any overlapping objects are redrawn
with the new data.
If this box is checked (full redraw mode), the whole display is completely redrawn whenever any
object on the display changes.
Under most conditions, normal update mode is the most efficient way for FoxView to update a
display. For complicated displays with large numbers of objects constantly changing, it can actu-
ally be more efficient for FoxView to redraw the entire display.
FoxView Read-Only
As part of normal display processing, FoxView writes information into the current display. There
are three occasions where displays are updated by FoxView:
1. FoxView saves network addresses for configured points in the display file. This is
called optimizing the display. A display is called up faster if it is optimized.
2. Trend graphs may be permanently changed using the On-Line Trend Configurator.
The new trend configuration information is written back to the display file.
3. FoxView writes the name of the historian associated with each trend pen back to the
display file. This makes FoxView more efficient when calling up a trend.
163
If FoxView Read-Only is checked, none of the data described above is written back to the
display file by FoxView; that is, FoxView is not allowed to change (optimize) the *.fdf file. This
may make display call-up slower and less efficient for the I/A Series network as a whole.
Width
This read-only field displays width in World Coordinates.
You can edit this field for a custom overlay only.
Height
This read-only field shows display height in world coordinate units.
You can edit this field for a custom overlay only.
Table 4-18. User Data Group Box
Field Description
Revision Type an optional file revision number
Description Type an optional file description
Revision
This field is for user-defined identification information. It may contain any combination of let-
ters, numbers, and spaces.
Description
This field is for a user-defined description of the display. It may contain any combination of let-
ters, numbers, and spaces.
The Revision and Description fields only save the last values entered. Previously entered values are
discarded and no history is maintained. If you wish to keep a history of changes to the display, use
the History tab in the Display Properties dialog box.
Display Properties Dialog Box - History Tab

This tab displays the date, time, and a comment from the first time you saved the file and up to
nine edits.
If you do not enter a comment before the initial save, by default, the display history indicates
FoxDraw: New Display. The initial save always appears in the History list.
The date and time of an edit, with an optional comment, are added to the Display History only
when the Add to Display History on Save option is selected.
Figure 4-16 shows the Display Properties Dialog box.
164
Figure 4-16. Display Properties Dialog Box
Add to Display History on Save

Select this check box to add the date and time of an edit and an optional comment to the display
history.
Comments
Type up to 48 characters. The comment is appended to the date and time, and added to the
display history when you save the display.
Display Properties Dialog Box - OM Data Tab

Use this tab to enable or disable the Fast Scan option, and to specify the display’s scan rate and
scan delay.
Fast Scan Option

The Fast Scan option causes data to be sent from the CP to the FoxView display at the block pro-
cessing cycle (BPC) of the CP. Thus, if the BPC is 500 ms, data updates are sent to FoxView every
half second. If the BPC is 100 ms, the updates are sent every 1/10 second.
This setting only affects the rate at which updates are sent to FoxView, and not the rate at which
FoxView updates displays. That rate is determined by type of display as configured in the Display
Alarm Configurator, as described in Alarm and Display Manager Configuration (B0700AM).
Scan Rate
Type or select a scan rate between 0.5 and 10 seconds.
165
Scan Delay
Enter or select a scan delay between 0.5 and 10 seconds.
Display Properties Dialog Box - Script Tab

When a display opens in FoxView, its Open Display command script executes if it is configured.
Similarly, when a display closes in Foxview, its Close Display script executes if it is configured.
Use this tab to create and edit these command scripts. The Script Tab dialog appears as in
Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17. Display Properties - Script Tab
Open Display Command Script

This read-only list box shows the display’s embedded Open Display command script, if one exists.
Edit Button
Clicking this button opens the Display Command Builder dialog box from which to create and
edit an Open Display script.
Close Display Command Script

This read-only list box shows the display’s embedded Close Display command script, if one exists.
Edit Button
Clicking this button opens the Display Command Builder dialog box, from which you can cre-
ate and edit a Close Display script.
166
Display Properties Dialog Box - Menu Tab

This tab allows customization of the display’s custom shortcut menu. See “Custom Shortcut
Menus” on page 19 for more information on custom display shortcut menus. The Display
Properties - Menu Tab dialog box appears as in Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-18. Display Properties - Menu Tab
167
Table 4-19 gives a description of the options.
Table 4-19. Menu Tab of Display Properties Dialog Box - Options
Attribute Description
Default Display Check this box if you want the shortcut menu to display all the menu items
Menu that are in the default display menu definition file. The default display
menu definition file is specified in the current environment’s .env file.
Custom Display Check this box if you want the shortcut menu to display all the menu items
Menu that are in a custom display menu definition file.
File This field is for the path of the custom display menu file. You may enter the
path of the menu file or use the File Button to select a menu file.
File Button Invokes the standard File Browser dialog to select the custom display menu
file that you want to use.
Custom Display Check this box if you want to add custom items to the shortcut menu list
Items or to delete or edit existing custom items.
Delete Deletes the selected custom menu item.
Add Invokes the Configure Menu Item dialog to add a new item to the dis-
play’s shortcut menu. See the next section for details on the Configure
Menu Item dialog box.
Edit Invokes the Configure Menu Item dialog to modify the selected custom
menu item. See the next section for details on the Configure Menu Item
dialog box.
Configure Menu Item

The Configure Menu Item dialog appears as in Figure 4-19.
Figure 4-19. Configure Menu Item Dialog Box
168
Table 4-20. Configure Menu Item - Options
Label Enter the text that you want to appear in the display’s shortcut menu.
Command Script If you are adding a new menu item this box is blank. If you are editing an
existing custom menu item this box displays the command or commands
that are invoked when the menu item is chosen from the display’s shortcut
menu in FoxView.
Edit Button Press this button to invoke the Display Command Builder so that you can
add or edit commands for a custom menu item.
Protection ID Enter a protection ID to be associated with this menu item. A protection
ID is optional.
Display Command Builder Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to configure a menu item to execute one or more display commands.
Table 4-21, gives a description of the options.
Table 4-21. Display Command Builder Dialog Box
Field or Button Description

File Opens the standard File Browser dialog box to select a filename.
The filename automatically appears in the Command String box.
Tag Opens a list of variables in the system. The server must be connected.
Delete Deletes entries from Command String box, one line at a time.
Command String Displays each command as you insert it.
Click anywhere in the box to manually edit commands or parameters.
When you insert multiple commands, place the cursor on a new line before
selecting a new command.
Parts of the command can be replaced with text aliases to expose them.
Command Browser Double-click a command category, then double-click a command to insert
it into the Command String box.
Description Provides a description of the command currently highlighted in the
Command Browser box.
Syntax Illustrates the syntax of the command currently highlighted in the
Include arguments Select this check box to insert placeholders for command parameters
Use large font Select this check box to display larger text in Command String and
Command Browser boxes.
Save environment Select this check box to save the state of the Command Browser box and
redisplay it when you reopen this dialog box.
169
Display Properties Dialog Box - Overlay Tab

This tab includes specifications for an overlay display. Table 4-22, gives a description of the
options.
Table 4-22. Overlay Tab of Display Properties Dialog Box - Options
Relative Pick Opens the overlay next to a Relative Pick (yellow highlighted) area.
Sticky Overlay Keeps the overlay open until the operator clicks the overlay’s Close button or
closes the base display. Normally, an overlay closes when another overlay opens
on top of it or when the operator closes an overlay that was opened before it.
On Top Prevents the overlay from closing when another overlay opens.
Root size Overrides the overlay size, making the overlay the same size as the root group
in the base display. The root group contains all the objects in a display. For
example, if a base display contains two objects and occupies a fraction of the
screen, the Root size option sizes the overlay to exactly match the size of the
rectangle that encloses the root group.
Pick Opens the overlay next to a Pick area.
Moveable The overlay can be dragged to another location on the screen. The overlay
always opens as a moveable overlay, regardless of the overlay mode setting in
FoxView.
Stationary The overlay can not be repositioned by the user. The overlay always opens as a
stationary overlay, regardless of the overlay mode setting in FoxView.
FoxView The overlay is opened as either moveable or stationary based on the current
FoxView overlay mode setting and based on the configuration of the button
that invokes the overlay.
Select Screen Position

Click one of the nine screen positions. The default is top left.
170
Display Properties Dialog Box - Statistics Tab

This tab provides counts of various display items (objects, library objects, trends, bitmaps, tags,
passive dynamics, and operator dynamics) for the currently selected display. Table 4-23, gives a
description of the options.
NOTE
This capability is similar to DEdit’s Complexity report.
Table 4-23. Statistics Tab of Display Properties Dialog Box - Options
Item Description
Total The total number of items in the display. The state of the Recursively
option affects this count.
Unique The number of single items (this number does not include duplicate
items). The state of the Recursively option affects this count.
More For the selected item, invokes a read-only dialog box:
Objects statistics
Submodels statistics
Trends statistics
Bitmaps statistics
Tags statistics
Passive Dynamics statistics
Operator Dynamics statistics
The state of the Recursively option affects the resulting count.
Recursively Select this check box to include statistics for library objects in the counts.
Complexity Index This number indicates the time FoxView requires to draw an image. Use
this number to compare the length of time for one display to appear versus
another display.
171
View Settings
Grid Dialog Box
The Grid dialog box has two tabs as listed in Table 4-25.
Table 4-24. Grid Dialog Box
Select this tab To

Grid Settings Modify grid size, color, line type, and other settings,
and save the grid with the display.
Grid Files Save current settings to a file or load an existing file.
Grid Dialog Box - Grid Settings Tab

Table 4-25. Grid Settings Tab of Grid Dialog Box - Options
Field or
Button Description
Grid On Displays or hides the grid. Selecting or clearing this check box is the same as
choosing Grid On from the View menu or clicking the Grid button.
Color The button indicates the current grid color. Click this button to open the color
palette and select a new color.
Snap Off turns off Snap to Grid or Snap to Gravity
To Grid turns on Snap to Grid. Clicking this radio button is the same as choos-
ing Snap to Grid from the View menu or clicking the Snap Grid button.
Gravity turns on Snap Gravity. Clicking this radio button is the same as choos-
ing Snap Gravity from the View menu or clicking the Snap Gravity button.
Grid Type Line displays the grid with solid lines.
Marker displays the grid with crosshatch markers and dots. The markers display
at intervals defined in the Grid Size field. The dots display at intervals defined
in the Divisions field.
Grid Size Type a horizontal setting (0 to 50) and a vertical setting (0 to 37.5). These are the
major intersections of the grid. They display as crosshatch markers when you
select the Marker grid type. Click Apply Coord to enter new settings.
Divisions Type horizontal and vertical settings (1 to 20), or use the spin boxes. These set-
tings determine the subdivisions of the grid. The subdivisions appear as dots when
you select Marker grid type and as solid lines when you select Line grid type.
Offset Origin Type a horizontal offset (0 to 50) and a vertical offset (0 to 37.5). These settings
define the distance between the origin (bottom-left corner of the drawing area)
and the first grid intersection. The default offset is 0,0 so that the first intersection
is at the origin. Click Apply Coord to enter new settings.
Apply Coord Enters new settings for grid size, divisions, and offset from origin.
Close Closes the Grid dialog box.
172
Table 4-25. Grid Settings Tab of Grid Dialog Box - Options (Continued)
Field or
Button Description
Options Opens the User Options dialog box, in which you can configure FoxDraw to
save grid settings with your files. You can also set other FoxDraw options.
Grid Dialog Box - Grid Files Tab

Table 4-26. Grid Files Tab of Grid Dialog Box - Options
Field or
Button Description
Grid File Displays the name of a file to load or save.
To load previously saved grid settings, select a file from the list and click Load.
To save current grid settings, type a filename in the Grid File box and click
Save. FoxDraw automatically appends a .grd file extension. Make sure the
User Grid Files check box is selected.
User Grid Files Select this check box to display grid files you have created and saved. When the
check box is not selected (empty), Invensys Foxboro supplied grid files are listed.
Close Closes the Grid dialog box.
Load Loads the currently selected grid file. The new grid settings are immediately
applied to the current display.
Save Saves the current grid settings to a file (this button is available only when
User Grid Files is selected). Type or select a name in the Grid File field
and click Save. FoxDraw automatically appends the required .grd file extension.
Delete Deletes the currently selected file from the Grid File list. This button is avail-
able only when User Grid Files is selected). You are prompted for confirma-
tion.
173
Working with Graphics and Text

Edit Text Dialog Box
Choosing Edit Text from the Object menu invokes this dialog box.
Name
Read-only field displaying the name of the text object, if assigned. You assign a name from the
General tab of the Configure Objects dialog box.
Editing window
This area contains the text to be edited. You can highlight text with the mouse and use standard
editing keys. A text object can contain up to 1000 characters.
Command Buttons
The First button chooses the first object from multiple text objects selected for
editing. Objects are ordered according to the sequence in which they are selected.
The Previous button chooses the previous object from multiple text objects
selected for editing.
The Next button chooses the next object from multiple text objects selected for
editing.
OK saves changes and closes the dialog box. Cancel cancels changes and closes the dialog box.
This command cancels edits to the current object only. If you have selected multiple objects, edits
are automatically saved when you move to another object.
NOTE
If you must cancel edits to multiple objects, click Cancel and then choose Undo
from the Edit menu (or press Ctrl+Z) as many times as needed.
174
Set Default Attributes Dialog Box and Set Selection Attributes

Dialog Box
Choosing Graphic Attributes from the Object menu invokes this dialog box.
The dialog box displays one of two different titles as listed in Table 4-27, depending upon
whether an object is selected.
Table 4-27. Types of Dialogs - Graphic Attributes
If Then
No object is selected The dialog box title is Set Default Attributes.
This allows you to specify default graphic attributes that apply to
all the objects that you configure.
One or more objects The dialog box title is Set Selection Attributes.
are selected This allows you to specify the graphic attributes for the selected
object(s) only.
Three tabs organize the settings:
 Fill tab  Edge tab  Text tab.
Apply to All
This check box appears only on the Set Selection Attributes dialog box.
When this option is The attribute is applied to

Selected All the selected objects
Not selected Only the object with the focus
NOTE
The modification to properties using the Apply to All check box is effective only on
the tab for which it is checked/unchecked. FoxDraw does not apply the modifica-
tion to the properties of a tab across all other tabs unless Apply to All on the Graphic
Attributes window is selected.
175
Set Default/Selection Attributes Dialog Box - Fill Tab

Table 4-28. Fill Tab of Set Default/Selection Attributes - Options
Button or Field Description

Fill or Unfill Click one of these buttons to specify whether an object is filled.
Fill Direction This determines the direction of the fill. Select Up, Down, Left, or Right
Fill Level Type a percent (0.0 to 100.0) to specify the portion of the object that appears
filled in FoxView.
Fill Type Select one of four fill types: Solid, Hollow, Opaque, or Transparent.
A Solid object display the fill color.
A Hollow object does not display the fill. Since an object is filled, you can
select the object by clicking anywhere in its interior.
An Opaque fill hides the background and any underlying object. You can
select a Fill Pattern.
A Transparent fill does not hide the background or any underlying object.
You can select a Fill Pattern.
Fill Pattern (Applies only to the Opaque and Transparent fill types)
Select one of six fill patterns.
Color Palette Click any square in the palette to select a new fill color. Use the horizontal
scroll bar to view all the color choices.
Set Default/Selection Attributes Dialog Box - Edge Tab

Use this tab to change the edge line style, width, and color of these objects:
 Line  Polyline  Rectangle  Polygon

 Curve  Closed curve  Circle  Sector
 Rectangle enclosing background text
Table 4-29. Edge Tab of Set Default/Selection Attributes - Options
Item Description
Edge Style Select Invisible, Solid, Dotted, Dashed, or Dash-Dot.
Note: Select Invisible to optimize display performance style for filled
objects.
Edge Width Click a button to select a width of 1, 2, 3, 5, or 7 pixels.
Or type an integer (1 to 20) pixels in the text box below the buttons.
Color Palette Click anywhere in the palette to select a new edge color. Use the horizontal
scroll bar to view all color choices.
176
Set Default/Selection Attributes Dialog Box - Text Tab

Use the dialog box’s Text tab to change text and background text attributes. FoxDraw supports:
 Windows TrueType fonts
 X-Windows scalable fonts
 Invensys Foxboro supplied Hershey fonts
Table 4-30. Text Tab of Set Default/Selection Attributes - Options
Item Description
Text Align (Background text only) Positions background text within the rectangle.
Use the middle row of buttons to move the text left, right, or center.
Use the other buttons to make limited up or down adjustments from the hori-
zontal center.
Font Style Select a font type, True Type or Hershey, then click Style to select a specific
font.
Style Opens one of two font dialog boxes:
 Font if you have selected True Type.
 Select Font if you have selected Hershey fonts.
Direction Click the horizontal arrow to display the text from left to right.
Click the vertical arrow to display the text reads from top to bottom.
Color palette Click any square in the palette to select a text color.
Font Style Dialog Box

Available options depend on whether you selected True Type or Hershey in the Text tab of the
Set Default Attributes or Set Selection Attributes dialog box.
Table 4-31, gives a description of the font options for True Type.
Table 4-31. True Type Information
Field or button Description

Font Click one of the fonts in the list. You can click the Cancel button to exit
without selecting a different font.
Font Style Click Regular, Italic, Bold, or Bold Italic.
Size Click the desired point size, or type a custom size (integer only) in the edit
box. You can override this setting by scaling the text with the mouse.
Effects Click a check box to add Strikeout, Underline, or both.
Sample This read-only field displays the font style, size, and effects.
Script
The Select Font dialog for Hershey only lists the style names. Select one of the fonts in the list and
click OK.
177
Linking Library Objects

Link from Library Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to select the library item to link.
You can expand a category, such as Fox Markers, by clicking the character.
Link Faceplate/Trend Dialog Box

Use the Link Faceplate/Trend dialog box to link a display to a faceplate or trend configured
for a single control block.
Table 4-32, gives a description of the link options.
Table 4-32. Link Faceplate/Trend Dialog Box - Options

Compound Enter an existing I/A Series system compound.
Block Enter an existing control block.
C:B Select a Compound and Block from the Compound:Block Browser dialog
box.
Link Faceplate Click this option button to link a faceplate. If custom faceplates exist for the
block type, select the desired faceplate from a list.
Link Trend Click this option button to link a trend.
Apply Control If you are connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, clicking this button
Values retrieves the High Scale, Low Scale, Delta, and Units from the Control Pro-
cessor.
OK Closes the dialog box and link the faceplate or trend.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without linking.
Select Block Type Dialog Box

Block Type
Type the block type, or select from the list.
Select Faceplate Dialog Box

When there is more than one faceplate for a given block type, use the Select Faceplate dialog
box to select the desired faceplate.
Faceplate
Type the faceplate name, or select from the list.
178
Select Palette Dialog Box

The Object menu’s Link/Copy from palette command invokes the Select Palette dialog box,
which displays the names of palettes that FoxDraw recognizes. The dialog box appears as shown
in Figure 4-20.
NOTE
Strict requirements (filenames and palette locations) determine the palettes that dis-
play in the dialog box’s tree list.
Palette tree
Click the to expand a palette directory.
The following example, the FPh_feeders_copy palette resides in the top directory level. The
mmo_grinders_copy palette resides in the second directory level. FoxDraw recognizes only two
levels.
Figure 4-20. Select Palette Dialog Box
179
Load
Clicking this button displays the contents (symbols) of the selected palette.
Copy
Click this button to copy the selected external palette and its symbols to the \opt\customer\displib
directory tree.
If there is a conflict between the name of a palette you want to copy and an existing palette, an
Error dialog box or Warning dialog box appears. This dialog box lists the palette name in con-
flict between the external palette’s symbol and the library object under the \opt\customer direc-
tory tree.
NOTE
You cannot copy multiple palettes in one copy operation.
Palette Browser Dialog Box

Choosing Palette Browser from the Tools menu invokes this dialog box.
Palettes Location box and Browse button
Use these controls to select an external palette location (for example, J:\sym_pack).
The external palettes must be located in the Palettes subdirectory (for example, J:\sym_pack\Pal-
ettes). Symbols used by external palettes must be located in a subdirectory (for example,
J:\sym_pack\Symbols_1).
Palettes
The Palettes tree control hierarchically lists external palettes. When you select a palette, the palette
contents displays in the preview window (right side dialog box).
Palette Filters
Use these controls to filter palettes based on the palette type. Two types of palettes are supported;
copy palettes and link palettes. Palette names with a “_copy” suffix are copy palettes, and palette
names without this suffix are link palettes.
Copy
Click this button to copy the selected external palette (and the symbols used by the external pal-
ette) to the \opt\customer\displib directory tree.
180
Configuring Library Objects

Configure Objects Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to apply, expose, resolve a dynamic or a graphic attribute to an object. Various
tabbed pages are available, depending on the selected object as listed in Table 4-33.
Table 4-33. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options
Tab Purpose
General (All object types) View read-only information. The tab page varies according
to the selected object type.
Update (Primitive objects and library objects) Give the object or library object a
dynamic that mirrors changes in a process variable. The dynamics or proper-
ties of the dynamics can be exposed.
Action (Primitive objects and library objects) Associate the library object with an
action (such as opening another display). In FoxView, the action triggers
when an operator clicks on the object. The properties of certain operator
actions can be exposed.
Menu (Library objects with a passive dynamic configured) Configure a custom
menu that is displayed when you right click on an object.
Exp. Graphics (Primitive Objects) Configure the object with a graphic attribute and expose
the object’s graphic attribute through a graphic attribute alias name.
Aliases (Library objects with exposed text aliases) Resolve the exposed text alias to a
value or continue to expose it (cannot be exposed from base displays or over-
lays).
Ranges (Library objects with exposed range aliases) Resolve the range alias to a value
(after the text aliases associated with the range have been resolved).
Graphics (Primitive objects with exposed graphic aliases) Resolve the exposed graphic
attribute to a value or continue to expose it (cannot be exposed from base
displays or overlays).
Dynamics (Library object with exposed dynamics) Change the dynamic’s configura-
tion. Resolve the exposed dynamics or continue to expose it (cannot be
exposed from the base display).
Configuration (Scroll region objects only) Specify a scroll method after selecting a file for
display.
The panel on the left side of the dialog box displays the options listed in Table 4-34.
181
Table 4-34. Left side of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options
Item Description
Select Object This tree displays all selected objects in the display. Objects appear in the order
selected.
The icon indicates the object type (primitive, group, library object, faceplate,
trend, X/Y plot).
A yellow-filled icon indicates that the object has been configured.
Tip: Open a group of objects by clicking + or double-click the group.
Prev Selects the previous object.
Next Selects the next object.
Filter This drop-down list shows the types of objects selected.
To view one type only, select the type from this list.
Configured Filters the objects in the tree, displaying only the objects that have dynamics
Objects Only applied.
182
Configure Objects Dialog Box - General Tab

Use this tab page to provide an optional name to an object. The name appears in the Select
Object tree list. If you do not provide a name, a generic name appears in the tree.
A name distinguishes one object from another object of the same type. For example, names are
helpful when you configure several identical buttons at the same time.
The fields that appear on this tab page depend on the object (primitive object, faceplate, trend,
or symbol) being configured.
NOTE
A graphic object that is followed by another object (such as Move Path Percent)
requires a unique name.
Object Type
Displays the object type.
Object Name
If no name is assigned, this field is blank. To add or change an object name, type up to 32 charac-
ters and click Apply. These are the valid characters:
 A to Z (uppercase or lowercase)
 0 to 9
 Underscore ( _ ).
NOTE
The first character of the Object Name must be a letter.
NOTE
It is recommended that you give unique names to objects, to distinguish similar
objects with similar configurations.
Library Object
This applies only to faceplates, trends, XY plots, profile plots, and symbols. It shows the filename,
which is the name of a standard I/A Series block. If you are configuring a user-built object, the
filename includes an underscore character ( _ ) and additional text.
Apply
Click the Apply button to accept the name.
183
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Update Tab

Use the Update tab of the Configure Objects dialog box to show, add, edit, expose and delete
dynamic attributes for a selected object.
Table 4-35, gives a description of the option buttons.
Table 4-35. Update Tab of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options
Button Description
Delete Removes the selected attribute. To undelete, choose Undo SelectChange
from the Edit menu, then Redo SelectChange.
Add Opens the Add Dynamic Update dialog box.
Edit Depending on the conversion, opens one of these dialog boxes:
Continuous dialog box
Discrete dialog box
Bit State dialog box
Threshold dialog box
Numeric/Text dialog box
Read File dialog box
Copy Select an object and click this button to copy the object’s attribute to the
buffer.
Paste Select an object and click this button to paste the contents of the buffer.
Dynamics Table
The table’s horizontal and vertical scroll bars allow you to view the columns and rows. To adjust
the column width, place the cursor on one of the label edges. The standard pointer changes to a
re-sizing pointer. Drag the column edge to the desired width. To edit an attribute, select the attri-
bute and then click the Edit button, or double-click the attribute.
Table 4-36. Dynamics Table - Options
Field Description
Dynamic The dynamic type (for example, Fill Level, Text Contents, or Rotate).
Tag The process variable or alias.
Range The range (for example, RI1), which overrides the high-scale and low-scale
values. This applies only to Continuous conversions.
Conversion The conversion type (for example, Continuous or Discrete).
Convention The convention used.
Delta The deadband value.
184
Add Dynamic Update Dialog Box

Clicking the Add button displays the Add Dynamic Update dialog box. Use this dialog box to
add a dynamic to the selected object. The name of the selected object appears above the dynamics
list box.
Dynamics list box

This box shows the available dynamics for this object. Dynamics already in use do not appear in
the list. For a list of all FoxDraw dynamics, refer to the Table of Dynamic Attributes, Table 3-4,
under the section “Table of Dynamics” on page 86.
Convention
This button appears when you configure a primitive object or a library object. The button does
not appear when you configure a convention.
Clicking this button invokes the Add Convention dialog box.
Conversions
Click one of the available option buttons to indicate the desired conversion for the dynamic.
 Discrete conversion
 Bit state conversion
 Threshold conversion
 Continuous conversion
 Numeric/text conversion
 Read file conversion.
Continuous Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to specify a continuous conversion based on a dynamic such as Fill Level,
Move, Rotate, and Scale.
The buttons and fields on this dialog box differ, depending on the object being configured.
Tag
Enter the Compound:Block.Parameter that controls the dynamic. You can also enter a text alias,
to expose the Tag property of the dynamic. Click the down arrow to view a drop-down list of pre-
viously configured variables.
Required
(If the Tag field has an alias) Check this check box to specify that the exposed alias has to be
resolved (in the intermediate level or base display). If left unresolved, the dynamic associated with
the object is not operational and the object is drawn Out-Of-Service at run-time.
Expose Dynamic
Check this check box to expose the dynamic. The dynamic’s configuration is exposed and can be
modified when the object is linked into a display or another library object.
185
Edit (button)
Click this button to open the Edit dialog box which allows you to edit the tag. It also displays the
Tag button.
Tag (button)
If you are connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, click this button to open a list of all vari-
ables in the system.
Scales Group Box

The options in this group box are listed in Table 4-37.
Table 4-37. Scales Group Box - Options

Static Displays the High Scale, Low Scale, and Delta boxes.
Clicking Control Values retrieves High and Low Scales from CP, and
retrieves Delta in percentage from the local database and calculates Delta in
units based on the retrieved scales.
Clicking Default Values retrieves High and Low Scales, and Delta in per-
centage from the local database and calculates Delta in units based on the
retrieved scales.
RunTime Displays the Range and Delta boxes.
Clicking Control Values retrieves Delta in percentage from the local data-
base and calculates Delta in units based on CP scales.
Clicking Default Values retrieves Range name and Delta in percentage
from the local database, and calculates Delta in units based on the local data-
base scales.
Range Check the range check box and type the range, or select from the drop-down
list. You can also enter a range alias.
Delta Enter a deadband to trigger updating of the variable. Specify the number in
(units) engineering units.
Control Values When Static is selected, clicking this button retrieves High Scale and Low
Scale from the CP, and retrieves Delta in percentage from the local database
and calculates Delta in units based on the retrieved scales.
When RunTime is selected, clicking this button retrieves Delta in percentage
from the local database and calculates Delta in units based on the CP scales.
Default Values When Static is selected, clicking this button retrieves High Scale, Low Scale,
and Delta in percentage from the local database and calculates Delta in units
based on the retrieved scales.
When RunTime is selected, clicking this button retrieves the Range name and
Delta in units from the local database and calculates Delta in units based on
the local database scales.
186
Table 4-37. Scales Group Box - Options (Continued)

High Scale Specify the maximum/minimum value for the variable. These fields are avail-
Low Scale able when Static is selected.
High Fill % (Fill Level only) Type the fill percent for the high scale and low scale.
Low Fill %
High X/Y Location (Move Horizontal and Move Vertical only) Type the screen location (X or Y
Low X/Y Location coordinate) of the variable’s maximum and minimum values. The location is
relative to the current position of the display object.
Note: Specify the object location in terms of its reference point.
For example, to allow an object to travel half the width of the screen
(50 World Coordinate units), set the High X/Y Location to 25 and the Low
X/Y Location to -25.
Note: The High X/Y Location can be lower than the Low X/Y Location.
Set (Move Horizontal/Vertical only) Clicking this button sets the High and Low
Location locations and returns to the display. The mouse pointer changes to a frame to
indicate the size of the object.
High Location % (Move Path Percent only) Specifies the percent of the total path distance that
Low Location % the object covers. Type the High and Low percentages.
High Angle (Rotate only) Type the rotation angles for the high scale and low scale.
Low Angle Note: By default, FoxView rotates objects counterclockwise.
To rotate clockwise, set the High Angle smaller than the Low Angle.
High Scales % (Scale Vertical, Horizontal and Proportional only) Type a percent of the
Low Scales % original for the high scale and low scale.
Options (group box)

The options in this group box are listed in Table 4-38.
Table 4-38. Options Group Box
Field Description
Optimized (Fill Level only) Causes FoxView to update an object’s fill level more quickly.
Update Exception: You cannot optimize fill update for objects that move, rotate,
or scale.
Show Object (Move Path only) Makes the followed object visible or invisible in FoxView.
Followed
Adjust Object (Move Path only) Changes an object’s orientation when necessary, so it can
Orientation track the orientation of the followed object.
187
Discrete State Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to configure a discrete state table. Table 4-39, gives a description of the
options.
Table 4-39. Discrete State Dialog Box - Options

Tag Type the Compound:Block.Parameter that controls the dynamic. You can
also enter a text alias. Click the down arrow to select from a list of previ-
ously configured variables.
Tag (button) If connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, clicking this button opens
the Browser dialog box, offering access to a list of all the variables in the
system.
Edit (button) Invokes the Edit dialog box that allows you to edit the tag name.
Required (If the Tag field has an alias) Check this check box to specify that the
exposed alias has to be resolved (in the intermediate level or base display). If
left unresolved, the dynamic associated with the object is not operational
and the object is drawn Out-Of-Service at run-time.
Expose Dynamic Check this check box to expose the dynamic. The dynamic’s configuration
is exposed and can be modified when the object is linked into a display or
another library object.
Minimum State This value specifies the first state in the state table. The default is 0.
Type a value, or use the spin box to increment or decrement the value.
Number of States Type a number, or use the spin box to increment or decrement the value.
The maximum number of states is 125. The minimum is 1.
To add a single state, click the area below the last entry in the table.
Copy Copies the selected state’s attribute to the buffer.
Paste Pastes the contents of the buffer to the selected state.
Edit Select a state and click this button to open a dialog box from which to
change the state’s dynamic (for example, the Fill Color or the Line Width).
Alternatively, you can double-click the state (non-Boolean attributes) or
click the check box (Boolean attributes).
State Table Displays the value of the attribute for each state.
188
Options Group Box

Table 4-40, gives a description of the options in the Options group box.
Check Box Description

Optimized Update (Fill Level only) In FoxView, updates the object’s fill level more quickly.
Exception: Do not optimize fill update for objects that move, rotate, or
scale.
Show Object Fol- (Move Path Percent or Point) Makes the followed object visible or invisible
lowed in FoxView.
Adjust Object Ori- (Move Path Percent only) Changes the object’s orientation when necessary
entation so it can track the orientation of the followed object.
Bit State Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to configure a bit state table. Table 4-41, gives a description of the options.
Table 4-41. Bit State Dialog Box - Options

Tag Type the Compound:Block.Parameter that controls the dynamic. You can
also enter a text alias. Click the down arrow to select from a list of previ-
ously configured variables.
Tag (button) If connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, clicking this button opens
the Browser dialog box, offering access to a list of all the variables in the
system.
Edit (button) Invokes the Edit dialog box that allows you to edit the tag-name.
Number of States Type a number, or use the spin box to increment or decrement the value.
The maximum number of states is 100, and the minimum is 1.
If you add a single state by clicking the row below the last entry in the table,
this field updates automatically.
Copy Copies the selected state’s attribute to the buffer.
Paste Pastes the selected state from the buffer.
Insert Select a state and click this button to insert the contents of the buffer above
the selected state.
Delete Deletes the selected state.
189
Table 4-41. Bit State Dialog Box - Options (Continued)

Edit Select the Bit mask, Bit match or Oper field and then click this button to
open the Bit Selection dialog box. Alternatively, double-click one of
these fields. In the Bit Selection dialog box, specify the desired setting
for each bit or the operator. These settings are automatically written to the
appropriate column in the state table.
Configure Object Dialog Box

Clicking the Tag button from the Bit State dialog box or the Discrete State dialog box
invokes this dialog box.
Use this dialog box to specify an object’s process variable. Table 4-42, gives a description of the
options.
Table 4-42. Configure Object Dialog Box - Options

Compound:Block Type the Compound and Block for the object, or click Browse button to
invoke the Object Browser dialog box to define the Compound and
Block.
Browse Click this button to view the process variables in the system. The server
must be connected for this.
Parameter Select the parameter.
Update Parameter When this check box is selected, clicking the Browse button displays the
Object Browser dialog box.
Select a parameter from the right side of the dialog box.
When the check box is not selected, you can select only the Compound and
Block.
190
Threshold State Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to configure a threshold state table to associate a dynamic with a process vari-
able’s states or values. The threshold state table uses logical operators and comparison values.
Table 4-43. Threshold State Dialog Box - Options
Field or
Button Description
Tag Enter the Compound:Block.Parameter that controls the dynamic. You can also
enter a text alias. Click the down arrow to view a list of previously configured vari-
ables.
Tag (button) If connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, opens a list of all variables in the
system.
Required (If the Tag field has an alias) Check this check box to specify that the exposed alias
has to be resolved (in the intermediate level or base display). If left unresolved, the
dynamic associated with the object is not operational and the object is drawn
Out-Of-Service at run-time.
Edit (but- Invokes the Edit dialog box that allows you to edit the tagname.
ton)
Expose Check this check box to expose the dynamic. The dynamic’s configuration is
Dynamic exposed and can be modified when the object is linked into a display or another
library object.
Delta (units) Type a deadband to control updating of the variable. Specify the number in
engineering units.
Number of Type a value or use the spin box to increment or decrement the value.
States The maximum number of states is 125, and the minimum is 1.
Add a single state by clicking on the area below the last entry in the table.
Copy Select a state and click this button to copy the state’s attribute to the buffer.
Paste Select a state and click this button to paste the contents of the buffer.
Insert Select a state and click this button to insert the contents of the buffer above the
selected state.
Delete Deletes the selected state.
Edit Select a field and click this button to edit the field. Select or type the desired value.
Alternatively, you can double-click a non-Boolean field or click the check box in a
Boolean field.
191
Table 4-44, lists the dynamic and their minimum and maximum values.
Table 4-44. Minimum/Maximum Values of Dynamics
Dynamic Minimum Maximum

Fill Level 0% 100%
Text Contents empty string 32 characters
Text Height 0.5% of original 100%
Rotate -360 360
Scale 0% of original 32,000%
Options Group Box

Table 4-45, gives a description of the options in the Options group box.
Check box When selected

Optimized Update (Fill Level only) FoxView updates an object’s fill level more quickly.
Exception: Do not optimize fill update for objects that move,
rotate, or scale.
Show Object Followed (Move Path Percent or Point) Makes the followed object visible in
FoxView.
Adjust Object (Move Path Percent only) Orientation changes an object’s orienta-
tion when necessary so it can track the orientation of the followed
object.
Bit Selection Dialog Box

Editing a parameter from the Bit State dialog box invokes the Bit Selection dialog box.
Depending on the parameter to which the dynamic is connected, bit fields are labeled with a
number (B1, B2, and so on) or a bit acronym (for example, AM or LR). The least significant bit
(LSB) is located in the lower-right corner.
Bit numbers The black numbers (B1 through B32) represent bits 31 through 0 in
Packed Longs and Long Integers. The green numbers (B1 through B16)
represent bits 15 through 0 in Packed Booleans and Integers. The display
of both black and green numbers indicates that the bit can be part of
either type of variable.
Bit acronyms Identify bits in parameters such as ALMSTA, BLKSTA, and INHALM.
Multiple acronyms for the same bit indicate that the bit has different func-
tions, depending on the block type. Acronyms shown in the same color
are used together.
Integer fields Some parameter fields (such as the ALMSTA fields CRIT and PRI) store
an integer. The values for CRIT are 0-5. The values for PRI are 0-25. To
set either or both fields to “Don’t Care,” enter -1.
192
B1- B32
To change a setting, click the bit field. The field toggles among 0, 1, and X.
Choose X for Don’t Care (bit is not used). This sets the bit mask and bit match to 0.
Choose 0 to set the bit mask to 1 (compare the bit) and the bit match to 0.
Choose 1 to set the bit mask to 1 (compare the bit) and the bit match to 1.
CRIT (ALMSTA parameter only)
Use the CRIT (Criticality) field as an alternative to setting the individual bit fields. CRIT indi-
cates the priority of the block’s highest currently active alarm. Type an integer (1-5), where 1 is the
highest priority.
If you are specifying individual bits, type -1 (Don’t Care).
PRI (ALMSTA parameter only)

Use the PRI (Priority type) field as an alternative to setting the individual bit fields.
PRI is an integer that indicates the alarm type of the highest priority active alarm. Type an integer
(0-25) to indicate one of the conditions as listed in Table 4-46.
Table 4-46. Priority (PRI) Options
PRI Meaning PRI Meaning

0 No alarms 6 LODEV
1 HIABS 7 Rate of Change
2 LOABS 8 BAD
3 High/High Absolute 9 Boolean State
4 Low/Low Deviation 23 HIOUT
5 HIDEV 24 LOOUT
25 RANGE
To specify individual bits, type -1 (Don’t Care).
Set All
Click one of the buttons to set all bit fields to 0, 1, or X.
Match
Click a button to choose the bit state operator. The buttons are listed in Table 4-47.
Table 4-47. Logical Operator buttons
Button The state becomes true when

All (logical AND) All the bits match the process variable bits.
Any (logical OR) Any bit match the process variable bit.
193
Numeric/Text Dialog Box

This dialog box appears after selecting Text Contents and Numeric Text from the Add
Dynamic Update dialog box.
Use this dialog box to configure a Text Contents attribute. This allows you to display a variable’s
numeric value or a text string such as a block descriptor.
Table 4-48. Numeric/Text Dialog Box - Options

Tag Enter the Compound:Block.Parameter that controls the dynamic. You can
also enter a text alias. Click the down arrow to view a list of previously con-
figured variables.
If connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, clicking Tag opens a list of
all variables in the system.
Trigger (Text Format only) The optional trigger (an integer or real variable) updates
string variables.
Most text strings (for example, engineering units, state names, and block
descriptors) do not require a trigger. However, if you are configuring a
batch control display in which the recipe changes sequentially, use the
Trigger field to update the recipe text. In this case, you would enter the
.MSGNO parameter in the Sequence block.
If no trigger is used, the text is updated only when the display is called up in
FoxView.
Delta (units) Type a deadband to control updating of the variable. Specify the number in
engineering units.
Default Values Retrieves the values from the control database.
Type Numeric displays an integer or real number value.
Select Text to display a text string.
Numeric format These fields become active when Numeric is selected.
194
Read File Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to configure a Text Contents dynamic, using a Read File conversion.
A Read File conversion lets you display an entire text file or a file record (individual words or a
line) in a text object.
File
Enter the file’s full path name, or click the down arrow to view a list of previously configured file-
names. You can also enter a text alias.
File (button)
Click this button to display the standard file browser dialog box.
Required
(If the Tag field has an alias) Check this check box to specify that the exposed alias has to be
Expose Dynamic
Check this check box to expose the dynamic. The dynamic’s configuration is exposed and can be
modified when the object is linked into a display or another library object.
195
File Format
Table 4-49, gives a description of the File format options.
Table 4-49. File Format - Options
Format Description
Blocked Text This is a record-based format. Every text line is the same length. If this box is
not checked, FoxView expects a standard ASCII file.
Null Terminated Every text line is a null-terminated line.
Buffered Keeps open the most recently opened file.
Record Size (Blocked text files only) Type the length of the text line. If not selected,
FoxView uses the size of the blocked text file header.
Field Width If the field width is less than the record size, type a width to extract a portion
of the text line. For example, if the line is HI THERE, a field width of 5 displays
the word THERE only (a Field Offset of 3 is required to start with the letter
T).
Field Offset The character offset into the record. The offset is 0-based, and the default is 0.
Use this parameter with Field Width to extract a portion of the text line. For
example, if the line is HI THERE, specifying a field offset of 3 (four characters,
0-3) starts the displayed text with T (you also need to enter a Field Width of 5
to display five characters only).
Index Record Defines the record index. Use this option when you do not want the first line
in the file to be read first.
Note: The display manager setfindex command can change this index, allow-
ing you to scroll through the file.
Display List Also called the base number. Enter a number (1-5). Every file requires its own
Display List number to differentiate it from other files that are open at the
same time. Actions that relate to the same file should refer to this number. If
only one file is read at a given time, you need not specify a Display List
number.
196
Add Convention Dialog Box

This dialog box displays the available conventions. Use the dialog box to select a convention.
NOTE
The rules that govern the application of dynamic to an object also apply to conven-
tions. You can apply no more than one occurrence of a particular dynamic to an
object. Because a convention comprises of one or more dynamics, FoxDraw does
not allow you to apply a convention to an object that is already configured with a
dynamic contained in the convention.
For example, if an object has already been assigned the Fill Color dynamic, you cannot apply a
convention that includes the Fill Color dynamic.
The Edit Convention dialog box opens up after you have selected a convention.
Edit Convention Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to edit the selected convention, which appears in the window.
Table 4-50, gives a description of the options available to edit.
Table 4-50. Edit Convention Dialog Box - Options

Edit Select a dynamic attribute, and click this button to assign an object connec-
tion to the convention.
Convert Click this button to convert the convention into a set of dynamic attributes.
Reset If you have just clicked the Convert button, clicking this button undoes
the conversion.
Tag Click this button to assign a Compound:Block to all the dynamic attri-
butes. This button is enabled when all the dynamic attributes have parame-
ters assigned.
Dynamic table This table lists all the dynamic attributes in the convention.
197
Edge Width Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to specify a line width.
Type a number (in pixels) representing the width of the line, or click one of the buttons.
Rotate Dialog Box

Enter angle (-360 to +360)
Type the angle measurement (in degrees) for the rotation of the selected object.
A positive amount rotates the object counterclockwise. A negative amount rotates the object
clockwise.
Compound Block Browser

The Compound Block Browser is invoked by clicking the Tag button. The browser uses the
FoxIDA database for information. On the left side of the browser is the Tree control while on the
right side you have options that allow you to customize the tree layout.
The More button displays/hides the options on the right side of the browser dialog box. The
browser dialog box is resizable. The browser saves its size, position and settings between sessions.
Table 4-51. Compound Block Browser - Options
Format Description
Compound List Customize the view to display the list of compounds.
View
Block This section allows you to specify block information.
Sort by Name Sorts the blocks alphabetically.
Block type Choose a block type from the list box.
Parameter Check the required check box to choose the Input, Output, String or All
Element parameters.
Selection info Lists the selected compound, block and parameter information.
198
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Action Tab

Use the Action tab of the Configure Objects dialog box to show, add, edit, or delete an opera-
tor action. You can also expose certain Operator Action properties through text aliases.
An object can have one operator action. If an object within a group is configured with an operator
action, do not configure the group with an action. If a group is configured with an operator
action, do not configure any of the individual objects with an action.
NOTE
If you use the fox_pushbtn library object, configure an operator action to the but-
ton alone, not to the button grouped with overlying text. This prevents FoxView
from exiting when the button is pressed.
Table 4-52. Action Tab of Configure Object Dialog Box - Options
Field or
Button Description
Delete Deletes the current operator action.
Add Configures a new operator action. The Add Operator Action dialog box
appears. The button is enabled only when there is no previously configured
operator action.
Edit Edits the action by opening the appropriate dialog box for the current operator
action.
Copy Select an object and click this button to copy the object’s attribute to the buffer.
Paste Select an object and click this button to paste the contents of the buffer.
Action This list box displays the current action, if configured.
Action displays the action type (for example, Open Display or Ramp).
String String displays a filename (as used, for example, with Open Display),
a variable (as used, for example, with Ramp or Text Entry), a FoxDraw com-
mand.
Protection ID Type a nonzero number (1-255) to protect the operator action in certain envi-
ronments. The default, 0, enables the action in all environments.
Each FoxView environment has an Access Level file (.acl file) that contains
protect and unprotect commands. The .acl file uses the Protection ID number
to make certain objects and their configured operator actions inaccessible. Refer
to Display Engineering for FoxView Software and Display Manager Software
(B0193MQ) for more information on using a protection ID.
You can also enter a text alias, to expose the Protection ID property.
Action Name Type a name of your choice. This name can be used with the Relative Pick com-
mand to initiate the action.
You can also enter a text alias, to expose the Action Name property.
199
Add Operator Action Dialog Box

Use the Add Operator Action dialog box to configure the selected display object with an oper-
ator action. In FoxView, the configured object permits the operator to perform a particular action.
Object Name
The name of the object that you are configuring appears at the top of the dialog box.
Operator Action Types

Select one of the option buttons as listed in Table 4-53.
Table 4-53. Operator Action Types
Group Button Invokes this dialog box

Select Actions Open Display Open Display
Open Overlay Open Overlay
Close Display/Overlay Close Display /Overlay
Display Command Display Command Builder
Relative Pick Relative Pick Command Builder
Momentary Contact Momentary Contact
Ramp Ramp
Connect Variable Discrete State
Move Action Move Horizontal Move Horizontal
Move Vertical Move Vertical
Set Text Contents Numeric/Text Entry Numeric/Text Entry
Open Display Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you click Open Display from the Add Operator Action dialog
box. A display object (typically a button) configured with the Object menu’s Configure
Objects command opens a new display or accesses a display script, substitution list, or environ-
ment file.
File
Type the full path and filename of the base display, display script, substitution list, or environ-
ment file. Omit the drive letter identifier. This field is case-sensitive.
Click the down arrow to view a list of previously configured files. By default, this list contains up
to 50 unique filenames. You can change the default setting from the User Options dialog box.
To use with the Relative Pick action, type $PICK1.
Required
(If the File field has an alias) Check this check box to specify that the exposed alias has to be
200
File (button)
Click this button to display the standard file selection dialog box.
201
Open Overlay Dialog Box

This dialog box (Figure 4-21) appears when you click Open Overlay from the Add Operator
Action dialog box. A display object (typically a button) configured with the Object menu’s
Configure Objects command opens a new overlay.
Figure 4-21. Open Overlay Dialog Box
File
Type the name of the overlay (omit the drive letter identifier). This field is case sensitive.
You can click the down arrow to view a history list of previously-used *.fdf files. You can also
click the File button to open a standard dialog box to search for an overlay to open.
Instead of a filename, you can use dollar sign substitution (for example, $PICK1). This permits
the use of a single button for several different displays.
Required
If the File field has an alias, select this check box to specify that the exposed alias has to be resolved
(in the intermediate level or base display). If left unresolved, the dynamic associated with the
object is not operational and the object is drawn Out-Of-Service at run-time.
202
File (button)
Click this button to display the standard file selection dialog box.
Select an Attribute.
Select Screen Position

Select one of the nine positions to set the screen position.
More (button)
Click this button to display the Open Overlay More Attributes dialog box to specify the
overlay coordinates and offset when the Tile check box is not selected. If the Tile check box is
selected, this dialog box allows you to specify the tile size, offset, and tile area. See “Open Overlay
More Attributes Dialog Box” on page 204.
Table 4-54, describes the options in the Open Overlay dialog box.
Table 4-54. Open Overlay Dialog Box – Options
Option Description
Relative Pick Opens the overlay next to a Relative Pick (yellow highlighted) area.
Sticky Overlay Keeps the overlay open until the operator clicks the Close button or closes
the base display. Normally, an overlay closes when:
 Another overlay opens on top of it
 The operator closes an overlay opened before it
On Top Prevents the overlay from closing when another overlay opens.
Root Size Overrides the overlay size and makes the overlay the same size as the Root
Group in the base display.
The Root Group contains all the objects in a display. For example, a base
display may contain only two objects and occupy a fraction of the screen.
The Root Size option makes an overlay exactly the size of the rectangle
that encloses the Root Group.
Pick Opens the overlay next to a Pick area.
Tile Tiles overlays on a base display instead of placing them in specific
locations. You must enter a tile number.
Moveable The overlay can be dragged to another location on the screen. The overlay
always opens as a moveable overlay, regardless of the overlay mode
setting in FoxView.
Stationary The overlay can not be repositioned by the user. The overlay always opens
as a stationary overlay, regardless of the overlay mode setting in
FoxView.
As Built The overlay is opened as either moveable or stationary based on the cur-
rent FoxView overlay mode setting and based on the configuration of the
button that invokes the overlay.
203
Open Overlay More Attributes Dialog Box

This dialog box (Figure 4-22) appears when you click More in the Open Overlay dialog box to
specify the overlay coordinates and offset when the Tile check box is not selected. If the Tile
check box is selected, this dialog box allows you to specify the tile size, offset, and tile area.
Figure 4-22. Open Overlay More Attributes Dialog Box
If the Tile check box is not selected in the Open Overlay dialog box, you can specify the overlay
coordinates and offset. If the Tile check box is selected, you can specify the tile size, offset, and
tile area.
Table 4-55, describes the options in the Open Overlay More Attributes dialog box.
204
Table 4-55. Open Overlay More Attributes Dialog Box – Options
Option Description
Coordinates Specifies the location of the upper left corner of the overlay on the screen. You
can define row,column coordinates to be virtual coordinates, percent of full
screen, or character locations.
Virtual Coordinates Syntax

The following example shows row,column location using virtual coordinates:
Row = 500
Column = 1000
The row and column value ranges are:
0  Row 3455
0  Column 5119
Percent of Full Screen Coordinates Syntax

This following example shows a row%, column% location using percent of full
screen:
Row = 10%
Column = 20%
0%  Row  100%
0%  Column  100%
Character Coordinates Syntax

This following example shows rowCHAR, columnCHAR location using
character position:
Row = 5CHAR
Column = 10CHAR
0CHAR  Row  24CHAR
0CHAR  Column  80CHAR
Note:
Multiple formats in one pair of coordinates are permitted, for example:
(3000,40CHAR)
Offset Changes the location of the overlay or the tile area on the screen by a specified
offset. The offset must be a coordinate specification (row,column) as described
above for the coordinates option.
205
Table 4-55. Open Overlay More Attributes Dialog Box – Options
Option Description
Tile Size Defines the size of each overlay tile. Each tile has a specific width and height.
By default, the width and height are defined by the overlay size (or by the
screen size when the root size option is not used). When you are tiling different
size overlays, the tile size and the final overlay location are different for all the
different size overlays. Because all the tiles must have the same size, only one tile
size needs to be provided.
Values for the tile height and width can be defined in virtual coordinates,
percent of full screen size, or number of character lines/width. See above
description for the Coordinates option.
Tile Area Defines the tile area for the overlay by specifying the upper left (UL) row, upper
left (UL) column, lower right (LR) row, and lower right (LR) column. These
values can be virtual coordinates, percent of screen, or character height/width.
Examples
UL Row UL Col LR Row LR Col Description
0% 50% 100% 100% The right half of
screen is the tiled area.
0 2560 3455 5119 Same as above
0 0 10CHAR 100% The first 10 character
lines are the tiled area
The DM tile algorithm spaces the tile locations. It actually adds eight virtual
coordinates (two pixels for a default DM window) to the size of the overlay.
This means that tiles are not glued together but are spaced.
For example, if the overlay width is exactly 1/4 the width of the screen
(5120/4 = 1280), the tile algorithm uses 1288 (1280 + 8). This means that only
three overlays fit in a tiled row.
To overwrite the DM size tiling algorithm, use the Tile Size option.
206
Close Display/Overlay Dialog Box

This dialog box () appears when you click Close Display/Overlay from the Add Operator
Action dialog box. A display object (typically a button) configured with the Object menu’s
Configure Objects command closes a display/overlay.
Figure 4-23. Close Display/Overlay Dialog Box
207
Table 4-54, describes the options in the Close Display/Overlay dialog box.
Table 4-56. Close Display/Overlay Dialog Box – Options
Option Description
File Name Type the name of the overlay (omit the drive letter identifier). This field is
case sensitive.
You can click the down arrow to view a history list of previously-used *.fdf
files.
You can also click to open a standard dialog box to search for an overlay to
open.
Instead of a filename, you can use dollar sign substitution (for example,
$PICK1). This permits the use of a single button for several different over-
lays.
CB Name Type the name of the compound:block for which to close overlays.
You can click the down arrow to view a history list of previously-used
compound:block names.
You can also click to open the Browser dialog box to search for a
compound:block.
Display/Overlay Closes the current display or overlay
All Overlays Closes all open overlays.
By Position Closes the overlay in the configured screen position. By default, the screen
position is upper left. If you require a different screen position, click
Configure.
Configure Available only when By Position is selected. Opens the Select Screen
Position dialog box from which to select a different screen position.
By Row, Column Closes the overlay whose upper left corner is located at the specified Row and
Column location. You can define row,column coordinates to be virtual
coordinates, percent of full screen, or character locations. See Coordinates
option in Table 4-55.
Selected Allows you to choose one of these options:
Option Description
Non-sticky Closes all non-sticky overlays.
First Closes the first overlay opened.
Last Closes the last overlay opened.
Relative Pick Closes overlays that open next to Relative Pick areas.
208

Use this dialog box to configure a display object to execute one or more display (manager) com-
mands. You can also expose parts of the command of the Command String property through text
aliases.
Table 4-57. Display Command Builder Dialog Box - Options

Object Opens a list of variables in the system. The server must be connected.
Include arguments Select this check box to insert placeholders for command parameters.
209
Relative Pick Dialog Box

You can expose parts of the Command String property through text aliases. Table 4-57, gives a
Table 4-58. Relative Pick Dialog Box - Options

File Opens the standard file browser dialog box.
The filename you select automatically appears in the Command String
box.
Use a filename when the next action is Open Display or Open Overlay.
Object Opens a list of variables in the system. The server must be connected.
Command String By default, displays =PICK1 and the name of the most recently used pro-
cess variable. Type the name of the variable to be acted on.
Note: When the next action is Ramp, pipe the range parameter to the vari-
able name. For example: Compound:Block.ParameterRI1.
Required (If the Command String field has an alias) Check this check box to specify
that the exposed alias has to be resolved (in the intermediate level or base
display). If left unresolved, the dynamic associated with the object is not
operational and the object is drawn Out-Of-Service at run-time.
Description Describes the command currently highlighted in the Command Browser
box.
Syntax Illustrates the syntax of the command currently highlighted in the Command
Browser box.
Include Arguments Inserts placeholders for command parameters.
Use Large Font Displays larger text in Command String box and Command Browser box.
Save Environment Saves the state of the Command Browser box and redisplays it when you
re-open this dialog box.
210
Momentary Contact Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to momentarily change the state of a variable.
Tag
Type the name of the Boolean, Packed Boolean, or Packed Long variable to be pulsed.
NOTE
Use bit extensions to set individual bits in a Packed Boolean or Packed Long.
Click the down arrow to view a list of previously configured variables.

If you are using Momentary Contact with Relative Pick, type $PICK1.
Tag (button)
Clicking this button opens up a list of all variables in the system. The server must be connected.
Pulse Type
Table 4-59, gives a description of the pulse types.
Table 4-59. Pulse Type
Select To
Hold Down Hold the variable in the selected state as long as the object (typically
a button) is pressed.
Timed Pulse Hold the variable in the selected state for a specified length of time.
Type or select the time (1 to 255 seconds).
Options
Table 4-60, lists the options.
Table 4-60. Options
Select To
Pulse to 1, then set to 0 Set the variable to 1, and reset it to 0 when the momentary contact
is complete.
Pulse to 0, then set to 1 Set the variable to 0, and reset it to 1 when the momentary contact
is complete.
Toggle Toggle the variable’s current state and reset it to its original state
when the momentary contact is complete.
211
Ramp Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to increase or decrease a value by the amount specified in the Ramp Value
field.
Tag
Type the name of a Real, Integer, or simple Boolean variable.
If you are using Ramp with Relative Pick, type $PICK1.
Tag (button)
Click this button to open up a list of all variables in the system. The server must be connected.
Limits group box

Table 4-61. Limits Group Box

Range in Object With dollar sign substitution (for example, $PICK1), select this check box
if the substituted variable includes the piped range.
If not, specify the range in the Range field.
Static Selecting this option button enables the Max. Value and Min. Value
boxes and the Control Values button.
RunTime This option button enables the Range box.
Range If limits vary (for example, when the action is used with multiple blocks),
type a range or select one from the drop-down list.
To obtain the default values from the control database, click Default
Values.
If the limits are known, choose Static and use the Max. Value and Min.
Value fields.
Max. Value Specify the maximum value that an operator can set.
To obtain the maximum from the CP, click Control Values.
Min. Value Specify the minimum value that an operator can set.
To obtain the minimum from the CP, click Control Values.
Control Values Only available when Static is selected.
If connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, the button retrieves the low
and high scales from the CP.
Note: This information is saved with your display. If you make control
changes later on, the display information is outdated.
Default Values Retrieves data from the local database.
Direction
212
Table 4-62. Direction - Options
Item Description
Ramp Up Ramps up the variable in increments specified in the Ramp Value field.
Ramp Down Ramps down the variable in increments specified in the Ramp Value field.
Ramp Value (%) Type or select a percentage of the full range.
Connect Variable Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to set a variable to a state, according to the variable’s value.
Table 4-63. Connect Variable Dialog Box - Options

Tag Type the name of a variable.
If you are using a Connect Variable with Relative Pick, type $PICK1.
Tag (button) Opens a list of all variables in the system. The server must be connected.
Minimum State Type a value or use the spin boxes to increment or decrement the value.
The default is 0.
The value you enter becomes the first state in the state table.
Number of States Type a value or use the spin boxes to increment or decrement the value.
The maximum number of states is 125 and the minimum is 1.
To add a single state, click on the area below the last entry in the table.
Copy Copies the selected state to the buffer.
Paste Pastes the contents of the buffer to the selected state.
Edit Select a state and click this button to change the value.
Alternatively, you can double-click the state.
State Table Displays the value of each state. To edit a state, double-click.
213
Move Horizontal Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to configure a display that permits the operator to set a process variable by
moving a display object along the X-axis.
An object moves on its reference point, which, by default, is the center. You can reset the reference
point. For example, you might want to set an arrow indicator’s reference point at the tip.
The High and Low Location (the limits on the object’s movement) are defined in terms of the ref-
erence point.
NOTE
Reset the reference point before you configure the move. If you reset it afterwards,
the High and Low screen locations shift.
Tag
Type the name of a process variable. Click the down arrow to view previously configured
variables.
Tag (button)
Opens a list of all variables in the system. The server must be connected.
Limits
Table 4-64. Limits - Options

Static Selecting this option button enables the Max Value and Min Value boxes
and the Control Value button.
To obtain the default range from the database, click Default Values.
If the limits are known, choose Static and use the Max and Min fields.
Max. Value Only available when Static is selected. Specifies the maximum value that
an operator can set.
Min. Value Only available when Static is selected. Specify the minimum value that an
operator can set.
214
Table 4-64. Limits - Options (Continued)

High X Location Type the screen location (X coordinate) of the variable’s maximum value.
The location is relative to the current position of the display object. For
example, if you want the object to travel half the width of the screen
(50 World Coordinate units), set the High at 25 and the Low at -25, or set
the High at 40 and the Low at -10. The High location can be lower than
the Low location.
Note: The object’s location is specified in terms of its reference point.
Click Set Location to set both High and Low locations with the mouse.
Low X Location Type the screen location (X coordinate) of the variable’s minimum value.
(Refer to High X Location).
Set Location Allows you to use the mouse to set the High X location and Low X loca-
tion.
Click Set Location. The mouse pointer changes to a frame, indicating
the size of the object. Move the frame to the low location and click, then
move it to the high location and click.
Move Vertical Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to configure a display that permits the operator to set a process variable by
moving a display object along the Y-axis.
An object moves on its reference point. By default, this is the center, but you can reset it. For
example, you may want to set the reference point of an arrow indicator at the tip.
The High and Low Location (the limits on the object’s movement) are defined in terms of the ref-
erence point.
NOTE
Reset the reference point before you configure the move. If you reset it afterwards,
the High and Low screen locations shift.
Tag
Type the name of a process variable.
Tag (button)
Opens a list of all variables in the system. The server must be connected.
215
Limits
Table 4-65. Limits - Options

Static Selecting this option button enables the Max Value and Min Value boxes
and the Control Value button.
To obtain the default range from the CP, click RunTime.
If the limits are known, choose Static and use the Max and Min fields.
Max. Value Only available when Static is selected. Specifies the maximum value that
an operator can set.
Min. Value Only available when Static is selected. Specify the minimum value that an
operator can set.
High Y Location Type the screen location (Y coordinate) of the variable’s maximum value.
The location is relative to the current position of the display object. For
example, if you want the object to travel half the width of the screen (50
World Coordinate units), set the High at 25 and the Low at -25, or set the
High at 40 and the Low at -10. The High location can be lower than the
Low location.
Note: The object’s location is specified in terms of its reference point.
Click Set Location to set both High and Low locations with the mouse.
Low Y Location Type the screen location (Y coordinate) of the variable’s minimum value.
(Refer to High Y Location)
Set Location Allows you to use the mouse to set the High X location and Low X loca-
tion.
Click Set Location. The mouse pointer changes to a frame, indicating
the size of the object. Move the frame to the low location and click, then
move it to the high location and click.
216
Numeric/Text Entry Dialog Box

This dialog box appears after selecting Numeric Text Entry from the Add Operator Action
dialog box.
Use this dialog box to configure a Set Text Contents operator action, allowing the operator to set
a variable by typing a numeric value or modifying a variable string.
Table 4-66. Numeric/Text Entry Dialog Box - Options

Tag Enter the Compound:Block.Parameter that controls the dynamic. Click the
down arrow to view a list of previously configured variables.
Tag (button) If connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, opens a list of all variables in
the system.
Text Format Numeric displays an integer or real number value. This permits the opera-
tor to set a variable by entering a numeric value.
Text displays a text string. This permits the operator to enter a string vari-
able such as an engineering units tag.
217
Limits group box

Table 4-67, gives a description of the options in the Limits group box.
Table 4-67. Limits group Box - Options

Static Selecting this option button enables the Max. Value and Min. Value
boxes and the Control Values button.
type a range or select one from the drop-down list. Check the range check
box to do this.
To obtain the default values from the control database, click Default
Values.
If the limits are known, choose Static and use the Max. Value and Min.
Value fields.
Max. Value Specify the maximum value that an operator can set.
Min. Value Specify the minimum value that an operator can set.
218
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Menu Tab

This tab allows customization of an object’s shortcut menu. This tab only appears if a passive
dynamic has been configured for an object. See “Custom Shortcut Menus” on page 19 for more
information on custom object shortcut menus. The Menu Tab dialog appears as in Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-24. Configure Objects - Menu Tab
219
Table 4-68 describes the options.
Table 4-68. Menu Tab of Configure Object Dialog Box - Options

Copy Select a dynamic and click this button to copy the dynamic’s menu attri-
butes to the buffer.
Paste Select a dynamic and click this button to paste the contents of the buffer.
Delete Deletes the menu for the currently selected dynamic.
Add Configures a new menu for the selected dynamic. The Configure Menu
dialog box appears. The button is enabled only when there is no previously
configured menu.
Edit Edits the menu by opening the Configure Menu dialog box for the cur-
rently selected dynamic.
Default Menu An X in this field indicates that a menu item for this dynamic appears in
the object's default menu.
Custom Menu An X in this field indicates that a menu item for this dynamic appears in
the object's custom menu.
File This field contains the name of the menu file that contains the definition
for the object’s custom menu.
Custom Items An X in this field indicates that one or more custom menu items are
defined for the object's custom menu.
Labels This field contains a list of the custom menu items defined for each of the
configured dynamics.
Display Menu An X in this field indicates that the display menu is included with the
object menu.
The Configure Menu dialog appears as in Figure 4-25.
220
Figure 4-25. Configure Menu Dialog Box
Table 4-69. Configure Menu Dialog Box - Options
Default Object Check this box if you want the shortcut menu to display all the menu items
Menu that are in the default object menu definition file. The default object menu
definition file is specified in the current environment's .env file.
Custom Object Check this box if you want the shortcut menu to display all the menu items
Menu that are in a custom object menu definition file.
File This field is for the path of the custom object menu file. You may enter the
path of the menu file or use the File Button to select a menu file.
File Button Use the button to select the custom object menu definition file that you
want to use.
Custom Object Check this box if you want to add custom items to the shortcut menu list.
Items
Delete Deletes the selected custom menu item.
Add Invokes the Configure Menu Item dialog to add a new item to the
object’s shortcut menu. See the next section for details on the Configure
Menu Item dialog box.
Edit Invokes the Configure Menu Item dialog to modify the selected custom
menu item. See the next section for details on the Configure Menu Item
dialog box.
221
Table 4-69. Configure Menu Dialog Box - Options
Include display Check this box to include all items in the Default Object Menu in addition
menu with object to items selected fro the short-cut menu with the Custom Object Menu or
menu Custom Object Items option.
Configure Menu Item

The Configure Menu Item dialog appears as in Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-26. Configure Menu Item Dialog Box
Table 4-70. Configure Menu Item - Options
Label Enter the text that you want to appear in the object’s shortcut menu.
Command Script If you are adding a new menu item this box is blank. If you are editing an
existing custom menu item this box displays the command or commands
that are invoked when the menu item is chosen from the object’s shortcut
menu in FoxView.
Edit Button Press this button to invoke the Display Command Builder so that you can
add or edit commands for a custom menu item.
Protection ID Enter a protection ID to be associated with this menu item if required.
222

Use this dialog box to configure a menu item to execute one or more display commands.
Table 4-71. Display Command Builder Dialog Box

Tag Opens a list of variables in the system. The server must be connected.
Include arguments Select this check box to insert placeholders for command parameters
223
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Exp. Graphics Tab

This tab allows you to assign graphic attributes to primitive objects and also expose them through
a graphic attribute alias name. Each entry (row) in the table represents properties of one graphic
attribute.
Graphics Table
Table 4-72, gives a description of the graphic attribute options that appear in the window.
Table 4-72. Graphic Attribute Table
Item Description
Name The graphic attribute alias name that is exposed.
Attribute The graphic attribute type.
Add
Invokes the Select Graphic Attribute dialog box which allows you to assign a graphic attri-
bute to the object (Visibility, Fill Level, and so forth). This opens the Edit Graphic Attribute dia-
log box, which allows you to expose the graphic attribute through a graphic attribute alias name.
Edit Graphic Attribute Dialog Box

Allows you to expose the graphic attribute by specifying a name. The graphic attribute is exposed
and is visible by this name.
Table 4-73. Edit Graphic Attribute Name Dialog Box - Options
Item Description
Attribute Type Displays the graphic attribute associated with the object.
Name Enter the graphic attribute alias name that exposes the graphic attribute.
Edit
Allows you edit the graphic attribute.
224
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Aliases Tab

This tab is visible only when you select a library object that exposes text alias(es). This tab allows
you to expose the aliases (not from base displays or overlays), or resolve the exposed aliases to a
value.
Alias Table
Each entry (row) in the table represents properties of one text alias.
Table 4-74, lists the options in the table.
Table 4-74. Aliases Table
Item Description
Name The name of the alias.
Req. Required flag. The flag is checked when the alias has a Required configura-
tion.
This indicates that the exposed alias has to be resolved (in the intermediate
level or base display). If left unresolved, the dynamic associated with the
object is not operational and the object is drawn Out-Of-Service at run-
time.
Exp. Expose flag. If checked, indicates that the alias is exposed from the library
object.
The field is disabled (grayed out) for base displays and overlays (a text alias
can only be exposed from library objects).
Exp. Name Exposed Name. If the text alias is exposed and if you have renamed it, then
this field shows the new text alias. When a library object is linked to a dis-
play, the text alias is visible by the new name. The field is disabled (grayed
out) for base displays and overlays (a text alias can only be exposed from
library objects).
Value The text string that the alias is resolved to.
Edit
To edit an entry, you have to select the entry and click the Edit button or double-click the entry.
This invokes the Edit Text Alias dialog box for the selected text alias.
The Edit Text alias dialog box allows you to expose (not from base displays or overlays) or resolve
the text alias. The exposed alias can also be renamed.
225
Edit Text Alias dialog box

Table 4-75, gives a description of the options in this dialog box.
Table 4-75. Edit Text Alias Dialog Box - Options
Item Description
Resolve Alias (Disabled if the Expose Alias section is selected) Select this section to
resolve the text alias.
Resolve Check this check box to resolve the text alias.
Edit (button) (Disabled if the Expose Alias section is selected) Click this button to
view the complete tag name. The Edit dialog box appears which allows you
to edit the Tag or invoke the Tag browser.
File (button) (Disabled if the Expose Alias section is selected) Opens the standard file
browser. Locate the file and click Open.
Tag (button) (Disabled if the Expose Alias section is selected) Invokes the Tag browser
which lists all the variables in the system. The server must be connected for
this.
Value Enter the value that the alias is to be resolved to.
Expose Alias (Disabled if the Resolve Alias section is selected and in base displays and
overlays). Select this section to expose the text alias and rename the text
alias.
Default Name Check this check box to retain the default name.
Rename Check this check box to rename the text alias to a more context specific
name, when you expose it.
Name (Enabled if Rename is checked) Enter the new alias name.
226
Configure Library Objects Dialog Box - Ranges Tab

This tab is visible only when you select a library object that exposes range aliases. Each entry (row)
in the table represents properties of one range alias.
A range alias can be resolved only when the tag-name associated with the range alias is resolved.
When a library object is linked to a display, the table does not display range aliases. When you
resolve the text aliases and hence resolve tag-names, the range aliases become available/visible in
the table for resolving.
The range alias is resolved per tag-name.
Range Table
Table 4-76, gives a description of the range options that appear in the window.
Table 4-76. Range Table
Item Description
Tag Displays the tag-name associated with the exposed range alias.
Range Alias Displays the range alias name.
Value The resolved value. It can be scales, range name or the default scales.
Rslvd The Resolved check box. If checked, indicates that the range alias is
resolved.
Edit
To resolve the range alias, you have to select an entry and click the Edit button or double-click the
entry. This invokes the Edit Range Alias dialog box for the selected range alias. The dialog
allows you to change the range configuration and resolve the range alias.
Table 4-77, gives a description of the options in this dialog box.
Table 4-77. Edit Range Alias Dialog Box - Options
Item Description
Tag Displays the tag-name of the dynamic whose range is exposed.
Resolve Check this to resolve the exposed range alias.
Static Enables the High Scale and the Low Scale boxes.
RunTime Enables the Range box.
High Scale Enter the maximum range value.
Low Scale Enter the minimum range value.
Control Values When Static is selected, FoxDraw retrieves High Scale and Low Scale val-
ues from the CP.
When RunTime is selected, FoxDraw retrieves Range values from the CP.
Default Values FoxDraw retrieves the range from the local database.
When Static is selected, FoxDraw retrieves High Scale and Low Scale val-
ues from the local database.
When RunTime is selected, FoxDraw retrieves Range values from the local
database.
227
Configure Library Objects Dialog Box - Dynamics Tab

This tab is visible only when you select a library object that exposes dynamics. Each entry (row) in
the table represents properties of one dynamic.
Dynamics Table
Table 4-78, gives a description of the properties that appear in the window.
Table 4-78. Dynamics Table
Item Description
Name tz5
Dynamic The dynamic type.
Chng. Changed flag. It indicates if the dynamic’s configuration has been changed.
Exp. Expose flag. It indicates if the dynamic is exposed from the library object.
The flag is disabled (grayed out) for base displays and overlays (dynamics
can only be exposed from library objects).
Edit
Invokes the dynamic configuration dialog box, depending on the dynamics selected. Using this
dialog box the configuration of the exposed dynamic can be changed, that is, the states and the
number of states in the Discrete, Bit State and Threshold dynamics. To expose the dynamic, dou-
ble-click the Exp. cell or select it and click the Edit button. This opens the Expose Dynamic dia-
log box which allows you to expose or not expose the dynamic.
If the Tag associated with the dynamic is also exposed (with the dynamic) and has a Required con-
figuration, then the Tag, Required and the Expose Dynamic check boxes are disabled in the
dynamic configuration dialog box. You can only change the configuration of dynamics and expose
or not expose the dynamic further. The Tag field, however, can be exposed or resolved from
Aliases tab.
For an optional Tag configuration the Tag field is enabled but the Required and the Expose
Dynamic check boxes are disabled.
Reset
This button resets the dynamic’s configuration to its original configuration (that is, the dynamic’s
configuration within the library object). Therefore, the Reset button removes changes made to the
dynamic’s configuration for this instance of a library object.
228
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Graphics Tab

This tab is visible only when you select a library object that exposes graphic attributes. Each entry
(row) in the table represents the property of one graphic attribute alias.
Graphics Table
Table 4-79, lists the graphic attribute options that appear in this window.
Table 4-79. Graphics Table - Options
Item Description
Name The graphic attribute alias name that exposes the graphic attribute.
Attribute The graphic attribute type assigned to the object.
Chng. Changed flag, which indicates if the value of the attribute has been
changed.
Value The graphic attribute value. This field is empty if the attribute has not
changed.
Exp. Expose flag. It indicates if the graphic attribute alias is exposed from the
library object. The flag is disabled (grayed out) for base displays and over-
lays (graphic attribute aliases can only be exposed from library objects).
Exp. Name Exposed Name. If the graphic attribute alias name is exposed and if you
have renamed it, then the field shows the new name. When a library object
is linked to a display, the attribute is visible through the new name. The
field is disabled (grayed out) for base displays and overlays (a graphic attri-
bute can only be exposed from library objects).
Edit
To change the Expose property or to rename the alias, select the alias and click the Edit button or
double-click the alias. This invokes the Edit Graphic Alias dialog box which displays the options
as listed in Table 4-80. This dialog box is not available for base displays and overlays.
Table 4-80. Graphic Alias Properties
Item Description
Expose Check this to expose the graphic attribute.
Default Name Check this to retain the original graphic attribute alias name.
Rename Check this to rename the alias to a new name.
Name (Enabled if Rename is checked) Enter the new name.
To change the value of the graphic attribute in a base display, you can select the Value cell in the
table and click the Edit button or double-click the Value cell.
Reset
This button resets the graphic attribute’s configuration to its original configuration.
229
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Configuration Tab

Use this tab page to configure the properties of a scroll region object.
Open File
Type the name of the file you want to display, or click File.
File
Opens the standard file browser. Locate the file and click Open.
Navigation Method
Table 4-81. Navigation - Options
Button Description
Scroll Bars Specifies that the scroll region object includes scroll bars in FoxView.
This is useful for workstations that employ a mouse.
Buttons Specifies that the scroll region object includes arrow buttons in FoxView.
This is useful for workstations that employ a touchscreen.
230
Configuring Trends
Use this dialog box to configure a trend.
Tab Purpose
General View read-only information. The tab pages vary according to the selected
object type.
Trend Area Configure trend attributes.
Pens Specify a pen color, trend background color, and grid color.
Grid Specify the trend’s grid options.
Timing Enter the trend duration.
Security Specify the access levels for invoking the on-line trend configurator, enter-
ing values into the trend from the keyboard, and saving the trend configu-
ration.
Table 4-83. Left Panel of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options
Item Description
Select Object This tree displays all selected objects in the display. Objects appear in the
order selected.
The icon indicates the object type (primitive, group, library object, face-
plate, trend, X/Y plot, profile plot).
Configured Objects Filters the objects in the tree, displaying only the objects that have dynam-
Only ics applied.
231
Configure Objects Dialog Box - General tab

Use this tab page to provide an optional name to the trend. The name appears in the Select
Object tree list. If you do not provide a name, a generic name (such as TND_FILL_TREND)
appears in the tree.
helpful when you configure several identical buttons at the same time.
The fields that appear on this tab page depend on the object (primitive object, faceplate, trend,
or symbol) being configured.
NOTE
NOTE
A graphic object that is followed by another object (such as Move Path Percent)
requires a unique name.
Object Type
Displays the object type (Line, Polygon, Curve, and so on).
Object Name
 0 to 9
 Underscore ( _ )
NOTE
Library Object
Shows the filename, which is the name of a standard I/A Series block. If you are configuring a
user-built object (such as a faceplate), the filename includes an underscore character ( _ ) and
additional text.
Block Connection
(Applies only to trends and faceplates)
232
Table 4-84. Block Connection
Field Description
Compound Name of the process compound to which the faceplate is connected.
Block Name of the process block to which the faceplate is connected.
Block Type Standard I/A Series block type.
Apply
Click the Apply button to accept the name.
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Trend Area Tab

Use this tab page to configure most of the trend area attributes.
Table 4-85. Trend Area Tab of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options

Trend Type Specifies whether the trend is to be Linear or Logarithmic. This trend
area attribute applies to all lines trended in the graph.
Time Stamp Format Select Local timestamp format or Relative timestamp format.
Markers Trend lines are composed of line segments, which can optionally be con-
nected by markers.
Select Line Markers to use markers. Then choose On Each Point to
place a marker on each point, or type a number in the Number of Mark-
ers box to place this many markers on the trend line.
Off Normal Configure off-normal areas, based on a percent of range for the entire
graph.
High specifies the off-normal operating area (%) at the top of the graph.
Low specifies the off-normal operating area (%) at the bottom of the graph.
Color specifies the background color for these off-normal areas.
Options Define the trend area background color in the Background Color box.
Display Style offers two options:
 Merged displays all trend pens inside the same graph area.
 Banded displays each pen inside an individual area.
Y-Axis This group of attributes specifies scale settings for the trend.
Selecting Y-axis Scale Visible displays Y-axis labels.
Selecting Use Same Scale allows you to configure the trend area’s scales.
If Use Same Scale is not selected, the Trend Area’s Scale configuration is
disabled and the Pen’s Scale configuration is enabled. You can individually
configure Scale settings for each pen.
High Scale and Low Scale set the scale maximum and minimum values.
Increment (linear trends only) specifies the interval between the displayed
scale values.
Low Decade (logarithmic trends only) specifies the low exponent.
233
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Pens Tab

Use the Configure Objects dialog box’s Pens tab to:
 View pen configuration(s) for the selected trend.
 Access dialog boxes to configure pen(s) for a trend.
The Pens table appearance depends on the selected object (trend, XY plot or profile plot).
Table 4-86. Pens Tab
Button Description
Delete Deletes the selected pen configuration. FoxDraw requests confirmation
before performing the deletion. To undo a deletion, click Cancel, then
reopen the Configure Objects dialog box for the trend.
Add Invokes the Configure Trend Pen dialog box to configure the pen.
Edit Invokes the Configure Trend Pen dialog box to modify the selected pen
configuration.
234
Pens Table for Trends

For a trend object, the table includes the columns as listed in Table 4-87.
Table 4-87. Pens Tab for Trends
Column Displays
Color The pen’s color.
Tag The object variable to which the pen is configured.
Type The data type (numeric or Boolean).
Marker Pull-down list to select the type of marker:
Range The configured range.

High Scale The high value (default is 100.00) for the variable’s range.
1-State
Low Scale The low value (default is 0.00) for the variable’s range.
0-State
Increment The interval between each displayed scale value.
RT Scale The Run Time scale flag. A one (1) indicates that this pen’s scale is dis-
played for the trend.
Delta The amount of change required.
Note: I/A Series is change-driven, meaning that values are stored only when
a change takes place. The change must be greater than the delta (deadband)
configured for the variable.
Eng. Units The engineering units for the data.
Min. Span The minimum span (an absolute range) between the minimum and maxi-
mum values set by auto-scale.
For example, if set to 5.0, 5.0 is the minimum range for the pen.
235
Table 4-87. Pens Tab for Trends (Continued)
Column Displays
Guard Band Displays only when Auto-scale is selected. The default is 10.0.
Guardband is an “additional range” or buffer for displaying new data that
falls outside of the new scale values. The guardband is added to the calcu-
lated range when FoxView determines the range for an auto-scaled pen.
A guardband prevents constant range recalculation as trend values are
updated.
For example, if the current high and low values for a pen are 51.8 and 40.3,
FoxView calculates the autoscale range of 35.3 (40.3 - 5.0) as the low scale,
and 66.8 (61.8 + 5.0) as the high scale. Note that half of the 10.0 (default
value) is added to both ends of the scales. The actual scale that FoxView
uses is rounded to the nearest whole number, becoming 35.0 and 67.0.
Configure Trend Pen Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to configure pens for a trend.
NOTE
Logarithmic trends do not support the Boolean pen type. They support only
numeric data.
For logarithmic trends, you must set the logarithmic decade (exponent) for each configured pen.
The High Scale value remains unchanged from the current values.
Pen Information
Table 4-88. Pen Information
Pen Number Type a number (1 to 4) or click the drop-down arrow to select a pen. If you
are adding a pen, you can select a previously unconfigured pen only. For
example, if you have already configured Pens 1 and 2, you can select only
Pens 3 or 4.
While editing an existing configuration, this field displays the selected pen
number.
Pen Color Click this button to select a color from a palette. You can scroll the palette
horizontally.
236
Table 4-88. Pen Information (Continued)
Tag Type the name of a process variable or shared variable, or click the drop-
down arrow to select from a list of previously used variables.
Tag (button) If connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, clicking this button lists all
the variables in the system.
Historian Type the name of a Historian (six characters), or click the drop-down arrow
to select from a list.
Description This attribute is a pen description. It is limited to 12 characters.
Show Scale Only enabled when Use Same Scale is not selected in the Trend Area tab.
Select this box if you want this pen’s scale to be displayed in the trend plot.
Once this box is selected, this attribute is disabled for the remaining pens in
the trend.
Data group box

Table 4-89, gives a description of the option.
Table 4-89. Data Group Box
Field Description
Data type Select Numeric or Boolean, according to the variable type. This selection
determines the resulting fields.
For Numeric Data

Table 4-90. Options for Numeric Data
Field Description
Static (Numeric pens only) Selecting this option enables the High Scale and
Low Scale boxes.
Note: When Use Same Scale is selected on the Configure Objects
dialog box’s Trend Area tab, static settings are disabled.
RunTime (Numeric pens only) Retrieves range data from the CP at display call-up.
This option enables the Range box and disables the High Scale and Low
Scale fields.
237
Table 4-90. Options for Numeric Data (Continued)
Field Description
Range Type a name of the range, or click the drop-down arrow to select from a list.
The Range box must be checked to do this.
Control Values This button is visible only when the Numeric (data type) option is selected.
When Static is selected, clicking this button:
 Retrieves High Scale, Low Scale, and Eng. Units from the CP
When RunTime is selected, clicking this button:
 Retrieves Eng. Units from the CP
Default Values Clicking this button retrieves data from the local database.
If Static is selected, FoxDraw retrieves Pen Color, High Scale, Low Scale,
Eng. Units, and Delta in percentage from the local database and calculates
Delta in units based on the scales.
If RunTime is selected, FoxDraw retrieves Pen color, Range name, Eng.
Units, and Delta in percentage from the local database and calculates Delta
in units based on the local database scales.
High Scale Type the high value (default is 100.00) for the variable’s range.
Low Scale Type the low value (default is 0.00) for the variable’s range.
Clicking the Control Values button retrieves the high value and the low
value from the CP and places them in these fields.
If you entered a range or selected RunTime, these fields are not available.
Increment Type a number to specify the interval between each displayed scale value.
Delta (units) Type the delta value.
Clicking the Control Values button retrieves the delta value from the CP
and places it in this field.
Eng. Units Type the engineering units for the data. The default is percent (%).
Clicking the Control Values button retrieves the engineering units from
the CP and places it in this field.
Auto-scale Selecting this option enables the Guard Band and Min. Span fields.
Deselect this check box to turn off auto-scale.
Auto-scale allows the minimum and maximum values to be read periodi-
cally in FoxView, calculated based upon the values currently plotted for
each pen.
238
Table 4-90. Options for Numeric Data (Continued)
Field Description
Guard Band This field is enabled only when Auto-scale is selected. The default is
10.0.
Guardband is an “additional range” or buffer for displaying new data that
falls outside of the new scale values. The guardband is added to the calcu-
lated range when FoxView determines the range for an auto-scaled pen.
A guardband prevents constant range recalculation as trend values are
updated.
For example, if the current high and low values for a pen are 51.8 and 40.3,
FoxView calculates the autoscale range of 35.3 (40.3 - 5.0) as the low scale,
and 66.8 (61.8 + 5.0) as the high scale. Note that half of the 10.0 (default
value) is added to both ends of the scales. The actual scale that FoxView
uses is rounded to the nearest whole number, becoming 35.0 and 67.0.
Min. Span This field is enabled only when Auto-scale is selected. The default is 10%
of scale.
Specify (type) the minimum span (an absolute range) between the mini-
mum and maximum values set by auto-scale.
For example, if Min. Span is set to 5.0, this is the minimum range for the
pen.
239
For Boolean Data

Table 4-91. Options for Boolean Data
Field Description
Default Values Clicking this button retrieves data from the local database.
FoxDraw retrieves 0 Name, 1 Name, 0 Offset, and 1 Offset from the local
database.
0 Name Type up to six characters for the name of the variable’s 0 state (such as Off
or Open). The state name appears in all trends except a Graph Only trend.
1 Name Type up to six characters for the name of the variable’s 1 state (such as On
or Closed). The state name appears in all trends except a Graph Only trend.
Data Origin Type a two-digit percent value, which specifies the pen’s vertical position on
the trend graph. The position is a percentile of the full height of the graph,
measured from the bottom.
The default vertical positions are: Pen 1 = 80%, Pen 2 = 60%, Pen 3 =
40%, and Pen 4 = 20%.
For example, if Pen 2 is assigned to a Boolean variable, its trend line appears
at the 60th percentile (3/5 full-graph height) measured from the bottom.
0 Offset Type a two-digit percent value as the graph position for the variable’s 0
state.
The percent you enter is added to the pen’s Data Origin percentile so the 0
line is not confused with a grid line.
For example, if Pen 3 is assigned to a Boolean variable, you might want to
display the 0 state at the 42nd percentile.
By default, the 0 state appears 2% higher than the pen’s percentile location.
1 Offset Type a two-digit percent value as the graph position for the variable’s 1
state.
The percent you enter is added to the pen’s Data Origin percentile.
Note: Use a 1 state that contrasts the 0 state.
For example, if Pen 3’s 0 state appears at the 42nd percentile, you may want
the 1 state to appear at the 50th percentile.
By default, the 1 state appears 10% above the pen’s percentile location.
240
Configure Objects Dialog Box – Grid Tab

Use this tab page to configure a trend’s grid lines and to specify static lines. You can configure
color, density, and visibility of the grid. You can also specify up to four horizontal lines to use as
references in the trend. The height of each static line is specified as a percentage of the vertical
scale.
Table 4-92. Grid Tab of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options
Item Description
Grid Settings Group
Grid Line Visible Select this check box to show grid lines. By default, this option is selected.
Line Color Select the color for the grid lines. By default, this is gray.
Line Number Select the number of grid lines for the trend. The default is ten.
Static Line Settings
HI% Enter a numeric value (0 to 100) to position the line on the vertical scale of
HI-HI% the trend.
LO% Click the color button to open a palette dialog box and specify a color for
the line.
LO-HI%
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Timing Tab

The Timing tab has two groups:
 Real-time for specifying the timing for the display of data values
 Format for specifying the number of decimal places to be used in display of values.
Duration
The duration is the time span of the trend during which data values display. The time duration of
a trend can be configured to a minimum value of 1 minute.
NOTE
The duration divided by the scan rate must be less than 600.
Scan Rate
The scan rate of a trend is the amount of time that elapses between requests to the Object
Manager for the values of the points being graphed.
At a minimum, you can specify a 1-second scan rate. This entry must be an integer.
241
Format
Format sets the number of decimal places that are used for the data values in the trend. By default,
FoxView uses different formats for Real parameter values depending the size of the number:
 Four decimal places for numbers less than 1
 Two decimal places for numbers less than 100
 No decimal places if the number is 100 or greater.
Use the spinner buttons or enter a value to specify the number decimal places to be used in
the display.
Specify 0 to 4 decimal places, or enter -1 to use the default display format.
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Security Tab (Trends only)

FoxView supports online trend configuration.
Use the Configure Objects dialog box’s Security tab to specify these access levels for the
selected object.
Table 4-93. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Security Tab Options
Field Specifies the access level required to

Configure Trend Invoke the On-Line Trend Configurator.
Enter an integer between 0 and 255.
Save Changes Protect against saving the trend configuration.
Keyboard Entry Protect against keyboard entry to the On-Line Trend Configurator.
242
Configuring Plots
Use this dialog box to configure an XY plot or a profile plot. Various tabbed pages are available,
depending on the selected object.
Tab Purpose
General View read-only information. The tab pages vary according to the selected
object type.
Plot Area Configure X/Y or profile plot attributes.
Pens Specify a pen color, trend background color, and grid color.
Grid Specify the plot’s grid options.
Timing Enter the plot duration.
Table 4-95. Left Panel of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options
Item Description
order selected.
plate, trend, X/Y plot, profile plot).
Only ics applied.
243
Configure Objects Dialog Box - General tab

Use this tab page to provide an optional name to a plot. The name appears in the Select
Object tree list. If you do not provide a name, a generic name (such as PP_RDOUT_THREE)
appears in the tree.
helpful when you configure several identical buttons at the same time. In addition, a plot must be
named in order for the plot’s standard function buttons to operate correctly.
NOTE
Object Type
Displays the object type (Profile-Plot or XY-Plot).
Object Name
 0 to 9
 Underscore ( _ ).
NOTE
Library Object
Shows the filename, which is the name of a standard I/A Series block. If you are configuring a
user-built object, the filename includes an underscore character ( _ ) and additional text.
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Plot Area Tab (X/Y plots only)
Use this tab page to edit the plot area for an X/Y plot. Other attributes on this tab page specify
scale settings for the X-axis and Y-axis.
NOTE
Use the Pens tab of the Configure Objects dialog box to configure the Leading
Real Point Color (LCol), Real Point Color (RCol), and the X-axis and Y-axis vari-
ables for each pen.
Options group box

244
Field Description
Number of Points Specify the number of points to be plotted.
Background Color Defines trend area background color.
Object Data File Specifies the name of the optional file that defines the objects to be drawn
Name in the plot area.
File Click this button to browse the file system.
Markers Specifies where to place markers.
Leading Marker Only places a marker only on the newest point.
Marker on Every Point places a marker on every point.
X-Axis and Y-Axis group boxes

Table 4-97. X and Y Axis Group Boxes
Field Description
Type Select whether the plot is to be Linear or Logarithmic. The scales selec-
tion is a plot area attribute and applies to all lines plotted in the graph.
Use Same Scale This option:
 Enables the plot area’s scale configuration
 Disables pen scale configuration
When this option is not selected:
 Pen’s scale configuration is enabled
 Plot area’s scale configuration is disabled
X-Axis and Y-Axis Specifies the scale settings for the X/Y plot.
High Scale and Low Scale set the maximum and minimum values.
Increment (linear trends only) specifies the interval between displayed
scale values.
Low Decade (logarithmic trends only) specifies the low exponent.
Note: These fields are not enabled unless Use Same Scale is selected.
245
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Plot Area Tab (Profile Plots

Only)
Use this tab page to edit the plot area for a profile plot.
NOTE
Use the Pens tab of the Configure Objects dialog box to configure the pen colors
for each pen.
Table 4-98. Plot Area Tab (Profile plots only)
Field Description
Background Color Defines plot area background color.
Plot Command This option implements one of two display commands:
Read performs a read-out function and displays the point number and
value in the profile read-out fields.
Read/Write reads the selected point and its value for all pens and writes
the result to the variable configured in the Pens tab.
No Action does not take any action.
Protection ID Defines a protection ID for the plot. This is a non-zero number in the
range 1-255 which can be used to protect the operator action in certain
environments. A protection ID is optional. The default is 0, which enables
the action in all environments.
Action Name Displays the action name. An action name is optional.
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Pens Tab

Use the Configure Objects dialog box’s Pens tab to:
 View pen configuration(s) for the selected X/Y plot or profile plot.
 Access dialog boxes to configure pen(s) for an X/Y plot or a profile plot.
The Pens table appearance depends on the selected object (XY plot or profile plot).
Table 4-99. Pens Table
Button Description
Delete Deletes the selected pen configuration. FoxDraw requests confirmation
before performing the deletion. To undo a deletion, click Cancel, then
reopen the Configure Objects dialog box for the trend.
Add Invokes the Configure Plot Pen dialog box to configure the pen.
Edit Invokes the Configure Plot Pen to modify the selected pen.
Pens table for X/Y Plots

For an X/Y plot, the table includes the columns as listed in Table 4-100.
246
Table 4-100. Pens Table for X/Y Plots
Column Displays
LCol The color used to indicate the leading real point
RCol The color used to indicate the real point
X-Tag The name of a process variable or shared variable
Y-Tag
Time Delay The number of scans (positive value only) for the delay between the X and
Y values.
X-Range The range when the Range option is selected
Y-Range
X-High Scale The high value for the variable’s range. The default is 100.00.
Y-High Scale
X-Low Scale The low value for the variable’s range. The default is 0.00.
Y-Low Scale
X-Incr The interval between each displayed scale value.
Y-Incr
X-Delta The deadband (a numeric variable).
Y-Delta I/A Series is change-driven. Values are stored only when a change occurs.
The change must be greater than the delta.
X-Eng. Units The engineering units (numeric variable).
Y-Eng. Units
RT Scale The Run Time scale flag. A one (1) indicates that this pen’s scale is dis-
played for the trend.
Read File The color to be used to indicate the file read data
FCol The color to be used to indicate the file read data pen color
247
Pens table for Profile Plots

For a profile plot, the table includes the columns as listed in Table 4-101.
Table 4-101. Pens Table for Profile Plots
Column Displays
Style The style of the profile plot; either LINE or BAR
LCol The color used to draw the profile line
BCol The color used to fill the profile bar
ACol The color used to indicate an alarm
RCol The color used to indicate the reference line
ECol The color used to draw the edge of the profile bar
BTp The bar fill type
BPt The bar fill pattern
RX-Axis Reverse X-Axis
Data Variable The name of the array containing the plot data
Trigger The name of the connection trigger
Delta The amount of change required.
Ref Line The value used to draw the reference line
H-Scale The high value for scaling the Y-axis
L-Scale The low value for scaling the Y-axis
H-Alarm The high value for the line or bar to change color (alarm state)
L-Alarm The low value for the line or bar to change color (alarm state)
S-Offset The index into the data array for the first data point
E-Offset The index into the data array for the last data point
Read Point The name of the variable configured for the Read Point data
Read Value The name of the variable configured for the Read Value data
248
Configure Plot Pen Dialog Box (XY plots)

Use this dialog box to configure an XY plot pen.
Table 4-102. Configure Plot Pen Dialog Box - Options (XY plots only)
Item Description
Pen Number Displays the pen number of the selected pen
Time Delay Specify a delay (an integer greater or equal to zero) used to set a delay in the
plotting of X/Y pairs.
Marker Style Pull-down list to select the type of marker:
Read Data File This is the name of the file to view a previously saved plot.
Name
File Click this button to browse the file system.
Show Scale Only enabled when Use Same Scale is not selected in both the X-Axis and
Y-Axis sections of the Plot Area tab. Select this box if you want this pen’s
scale to be displayed in the plot. Once this box is selected, this attribute is
disabled for the remaining pens in the plot.
Historical Data Check this box to specify that the pens uses data from the specified
Historian instead of real-time data.
Items for the X-axis and Y-axis (XY plots only)

Table 4-103. Items for X-Axis and Y-Axis (XY plots only)
Field Description
Tag Type or select the name of a process variable or shared variable, or select
from a list of previously used variables.
Tag (button) Click this button to view all the available process variables and to select a
process variable.
Description Type a description (12 character max.) that appears on the trend.
Historian Type the name of a Historian (six characters), or click the drop-down arrow
to select from a list.
249
Table 4-103. Items for X-Axis and Y-Axis (Continued)(XY plots only) (Continued)
Field Description
Static Selecting this option enables the High Scale and Low Scale boxes.
RunTime Enables the Range box, allowing you to specify a range name.
Range Type the name of the range, or click the drop-down arrow to select from a
list of range names. The Range box must be checked to do this.
High Scale Type the high value for the variable’s range. The default is 100.00. If you
selected Control Values, the field is set to the high value retrieved from
the CP. If you entered a range or selected RunTime, you cannot enter infor-
mation into this field.
Low Scale Type the low value for the variable’s range. The default is 0.00. If you
selected Control Values, the field is set to the low value retrieved from
the CP. If you entered a range or selected RunTime, you cannot enter infor-
mation into this field.
Increment Type a number to define the interval between each displayed scale value.
Control Values When Static is selected, FoxDraw retrieves High Scale, Low Scale, and
Eng. Units from the CP. FoxDraw also retrieves Delta in percentage from
the local database and calculates Delta in units based on the scales.
When RunTime is selected, FoxDraw retrieves Eng. Units from the CP, and
it also retrieves Delta in percentage from the local database and calculates
Delta in units based on CP scales.
Default Values FoxDraw retrieves data type from the local database.
When Static is selected for Numeric data, FoxDraw retrieves Pen Color,
High Scale, Low Scale, Eng. Units, and Delta in percentage from the local
database and calculates Delta in units based on the scales.
When Run Time is selected for Numeric data, FoxDraw retrieves Pen
Color, Range name, Eng. Units, and Delta in percentage from the local
database and calculates Delta in units based on the local database scales.
Delta (units) I/A Series is change-driven. This means that values are stored only when a
change takes place. The change must be greater than the delta (deadband)
Type the delta value. If you selected Control Values, this field is set to
the delta retrieved from the Control Processor.
Eng. Units Type the engineering units for the data. The default is percent (%). If you
selected Control Values, the field is automatically set to the engineering
units retrieved from the CP.
Colors
Table 4-104, gives the color information.
Table 4-104. Color Information
Item Description
Leading Real Point Displays the color to be used to indicate the most recent point.
Click the button to change the point color.
250
Table 4-104. Color Information
Item Description
Real Point Displays the color to be used to indicate the real recent point.
File Read Data Displays the color to be used to indicate the file read data.
Connection Click this button to specify another point to drive the color used for the
most recent point.
Configure Plot Pen Dialog Box (Profile plots)

Use this dialog box to configure a plot pen.
Table 4-105. Configure Plot Pen Dialog Box (Profile plots only)
Item Description
Pen Number Displays the pen number of the selected pen.
Plot Style Select Line Profile or Bar Profile to define the appearance of the
graph.
Trigger Enter the name of the variable to be used as a trigger to update the plot, use
the pull down arrow to choose a previously used variable, or use the button
to the right of this field to browse a list from the connected server.
Data Variable Enter the name of the variable that is the source of the data to be plotted by
this pen.
Delta The amount of change required to trigger a plot update.
Reference Line Enter either a static value or a variable name for the pen’s reference line.
Static Check this box if you want the associated attribute to remain fixed. If this
box is not checked the value of the attribute changes with the value of the
associated variable.
High Scale Enter either a static value or a variable name for the pen’s upper scale point.
Low Scale Enter either a static value or a variable name for the pen’s lower scale point.
High Alarm Limit Enter either a static value or a variable name for the pen’s upper alarm limit.
When this limit is exceeded, the line is drawn in the specified alarm color.
Low Alarm Limit Enter either a static value or a variable name for the pen’s lower alarm limit.
When this limit is exceeded, the line is drawn in the specified alarm color.
Start Offset Enter either a static value or a variable name to define the offset into the
data array for the first point that is plotted.
End Offset Enter either a static value or a variable name to define the offset into the
data array for the last point that is plotted.
251
Table 4-105. Configure Plot Pen Dialog Box (Profile plots only) (Continued)
Item Description
Send Read Point Enter a destination variable name for the read point. This attribute can only
be configured when the Read/Write option is selected in the Plot Area tab.
Send Read Value Enter a destination variable name for the read value. This attribute can only
be configured when the Read/Write option is selected in the Plot Area tab.
Colors
Table 4-106, gives the color information for line-style plots.
Table 4-106. Color Information (Line-style profile plots)
Item Description
Line Color Displays the color to be used to draw the plot line.
Click the button to change the line color.
Alarm Color Displays the color to be used to indicate the alarm point.
Ref. Line Color Displays the color to be used to draw the reference line.
Reverse X-Axis Select this box if you want the profile line for this pen to be plotted from
right to left. By default, the line is plotted from left to right.
Table 4-107, gives the color information for bar-style profile plots.
Table 4-107. Color Information (Bar-style profile plots)
Item Description
Bar Fill Color Displays the color to be used to draw the plot bar.
Click the button to change the bar color.
Alarm Color Displays the color to be used to indicate the alarm point.
Click the button to change the bar color.
Ref. Line Color Displays the color to be used to draw the reference line.
Fill Type Choose either Hollow, Solid, or Opaque for the plot bar’s fill type.
Fill Pattern Choose a fill pattern for the plot bar. This attribute is only enabled when
the Opaque option is chosen for Fill Type.
Edge Color Choose a color for the outside edge of the plot bar.
Reverse X-Axis Select this box if you want the profile bar for this pen to be plotted from
right to left. By default, the line is plotted from left to right.
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Grid Tab

Use this tab page to configure a trend’s grid lines. You can configure color, density, and visibility.
252
Table 4-108. Grid Tab of Configure Objects Dialog Box - Options
Item Description
Grid Line Visible Select this check box to show grid lines. By default, this option is selected.
Line Color Select the color for the grid lines. By default, this is gray. This attribute is
only enabled if the Grid Line Visible option is selected.
X-Axis Divisions Select the number of x-axis grid lines on the plot. The default is ten. (Pro-
file plots only)
Y-Axis Divisions Select the number of y-axis grid lines on the plot. The default is ten. (Pro-
file plots only)
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Timing Tab

Use this tab to specify timing for the display of data values.
Scan Rate (X/Y Plots only)

The scan rate of an X/Y plot is the amount of time that elapses between requests to the Object
Manager for the values of the points being graphed.
At a minimum, you can specify a 1-second scan rate. This entry must be an integer.
Trigger Scan Rate (Profile Plots Only)

The trigger scan rate of a profile plot is the frequency at which the trigger connection is checked
to see whether data has changed.
At a minimum, you can specify a 0.5-second scan rate. The maximum trigger scan rate is 5 sec-
onds. This entry must be in increments of 0.5 seconds.
253
Configuring Faceplates
Use this dialog box to apply a dynamic to an object. The tabs that appear are listed in
Table 4-109.
Table 4-109. Configure Objects Dialog Box
Tab Purpose
General (All object types) View read-only information. The tab pages vary accord-
ing to the selected object type.
Scales/Delta (Faceplates only) View and edit the block’s high, low, and delta values.
Text Substitutions (Faceplates only) View and edit faceplate text fields.
Table 4-110. Left side of Configure Objects Dialog Box
Item Description
order selected.
plate, trend, X/Y plot).
Only ics applied.
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Scales/Delta Tab

Use this tab to view and edit the Low Scale, High Scale, and Delta for the selected variable.
Edit
Opens the Edit Range dialog box.
Edit Range Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to enter the High Scale, Low Scale, and Delta range values for the selected
block. You can also retrieve the scales (High Scale and Low Scale) and Delta from the local data-
base or from the Control Processor (CP).
254
Table 4-111. Edit Range Dialog Box

Comp:Block Displays the name of the process variable.
Block Type Displays the I/A Series block type.
Status Indicates the source of the values:
Default Values – Values were retrieved from the local database.
Control Values – The values were retrieved from the CP.
Operator – Values were entered in the Edit Range dialog box.
High Scale Enter the maximum range value.
Low Scale Enter the minimum range value.
Delta Enter the deadband to trigger updating of the variable
Control Values Clicking this button:
 Retrieves scales from the CP
 Calculates Delta in units based on CP scales.
Default Values Clicking this button:
 Retrieves scales and Delta in percentage from the local database
 Calculates Delta in units based on the retrieved scales.
Scales/Delta Table
NOTE
Double-clicking a field in the Scales/Delta table invokes the Edit Range dialog
box.
Table 4-112a, gives a description of the options.
Table 4-112. Scales/Delta Table
Column Displays the selected object’s

Low Scale Minimum range value.
High Scale Maximum range value.
Delta Deadband to trigger updating of the variable.
Status Indicates the source of the values:
Unset – From the default configuration database
Default – From the Control Processor
Operator – From the Edit Range dialog box
Deleted – Indicates that the faceplate has been modified, and the
attribute that depended on the range has been removed.
Parameters Parameters associated with the block type.
255
Configure Objects Dialog Box - Text Substitutions Tab

Use this tab to view and edit faceplate text.
How Text Substitution Works

You can change text, based on a discrete state, by enclosing it in angle brackets ( < and > ) during
configuration.
By default, when you use <CMPNAME> and <BLKNAME>, FoxDraw automatically substitutes
the actual compound and block names when you insert the faceplate in your base display.
NOTE
If you place text in angle brackets but do not enter a substitution, the text does not
appear in FoxView.
Edit
Click this button to open the Edit Substitution dialog box. Alternatively, double-click a field
in the list box.
Edit Substitution Dialog Box

This dialog box is invoked from the Configure Objects dialog box’s Text Substitutions tab.
Enter new text to replace text that was configured inside angle brackets. Table 4-113, gives a
Table 4-113. Edit Substitution Dialog Box

Comp:Block Displays the process variable name.
Block Type Displays the I/A Series block type.
Name Displays the text in angle brackets.
Value Enter the desired substitution text.
256
Adding Conventions
Display Convention Configurator Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to create a convention. The left side of the dialog box (Select Convention area)
is static. Each of the dialog box’s tabbed page sets the appearance of the right side of the dialog
box.
The dialog box has two tabs:
 General tab
 Update tab.
Table 4-114. Select Convention - Options
Item Description
Tree Navigate the list and select a convention. The selected convention’s attri-
butes appear in the right side of the dialog box.
Delete Click this button to remove the selected convention. You can remove user-
built conventions, but you cannot remove Foxboro supplied conventions.
Add Click this button to add a new convention.
Reset This applies only to Fox™ conventions. Clicking this button resets the
convention to the Foxboro default configuration.
Merge Click this button to import conventions from a user conventions file.
Display Convention Configurator Dialog Box - General Tab

Type a name for the convention in the Name box.
NOTE
You can type a name for user-defined conventions only, not for supplied
conventions.
257
Display Convention Configurator Dialog Box - Update Tab

Table 4-115. Select Convention Area - Options

Dynamic table Displays each of the convention’s attributes and the parameters assigned to
each parameter.
Delete Click this button to remove the selected attribute from the convention.
Add Click this button to add a new attribute to the convention.
Edit Click this button to configure the selected attribute.
Select Convention File Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you merge conventions from one user convention file to the user
convention file located in the \opt\customer\data directory. The default user convention file is
named usr_conventions.dat.
NOTE
The supplied conventions file is named fv_conventions.dat. You cannot modify this
file.
For more information on the different conversion types and the corresponding dialog boxes refer
to “Configure Objects Dialog Box - Update Tab” on page 184.
Editing Dynamics/Connections
Edit Dynamics/Connections Dialog Box
The Edit Dynamics/Connections dialog box:
 Provides easy access to view and edit any dynamic element (operator actions, dynamic
updates, trend pens, plot pens, limits). You can also view and edit connections.
 Allows you to quickly locate dynamic elements
 Provides a means of performing text substitution on selected dynamic elements.
The dialog box is composed of two portions. When the dialog box first appears, only the top por-
tion (the dynamic/connections table) is visible. Use the table to edit individual dynamic elements.
Clicking Global Change expands the dialog box to reveal the Global Change group box, allow-
ing you to define and apply text substitutions to the selected dynamic elements.
258
Global Change
This dialog box allows you to perform a global change on dynamic elements much the same as
using individual dialog boxes (such as the Configure Dynamic Update dialog box or the
Configure Operator Action dialog box).
NOTE
This dialog box does not permit deletion of dynamic elements or the addition of
new dynamic elements.
Dynamic/Connection Table
The Dynamic/Connection table contains the attributes as listed in Table 4-116, for each dynamic
element.
Table 4-116. Dynamic/Connection Table
Item Description
Object A bitmap that represents the object type. The bitmap is similar to the bit-
map in the Dynamic Configuration dialog box.
Dynamic The dynamic element name.
Tag The dynamic element’s current connection.
Chng An “X” or blank. After changing a dynamic element (by editing its connec-
tion, editing its configuration, or by applying text substitution to it), this
attribute is set (indicated by an “X”).
Original Tag Indicates the dynamic element’s original connection. It does not reflect
changes made to the connection until you click Apply or OK.
259
Controls located on the top portion of dialog box

Table 4-117. Dialog Box - Options
Button or Check
Box Description
Restore Resets the dynamic element configuration back to the original setting. This
button is enabled when you select a dynamic or tag-name of the changed
dynamic element in the dynamic element’s table.
Edit Initiates editing of the dynamic element’s connection, or dynamic element’s
configuration. This button is enabled when you select a dynamic or con-
nection in the dynamic element’s table.
When a connection is selected, clicking this button starts in-place connec-
tion editing.
When a dynamic is selected, clicking this button invokes the appropriate
configuration dialog box.
Change Copies the connection from the dynamic element’s table into the substitu-
tion table. This button is enabled when the dialog box is in expanded mode
and a connection is selected in the dynamic element’s table.
Sort Provides option buttons (Name, Type, Dynamic, Tags, and Changed).
Clicking one of these option buttons defines the sort type applied to
dynamic elements in the dynamic element’s table.
Global Change Toggles the dialog box between default mode (top portion only)
and the expanded mode (for text substitutions).
260
Global Change group box (bottom portion of dialog box)

Table 4-118. Global Change Group Box - Options
Item Description
Substitution Table This table contains text substitutions. Upon clicking Change, connections
listed in the Current Value column change to the text in the Change To
column.
Edit a table entry by double-clicking the entry, or by selecting the entry and
clicking Edit.
Add a new substitution to the table by double-clicking on the empty area of
the table.
Remove All Removes all substitutions from the substitution table.
Remove Removes the selected substitution from the substitution table.
Add Adds a new substitution to the substitution table.
Edit Initiates in-place substitution editing.
Changed Select these check boxes to specify the parts of the dynamic element in the
dynamic element’s table to which substitutions are to be applied.
The dialog box supports:
 Tags
 Ranges
 Filenames
 DM Commands
 Text Contents.
Change button Initiates the substitution process.
261
Unresolved Links Dialog Box

This warning dialog box indicates that you are attempting to open (or load) a display or library
object that has an unresolved link.
NOTE
This dialog box appears only once per FoxDraw session when you attempt to open
or load a particular model or library object with an unresolved link. In the interest
of performance, this dialog box does not appear again during the FoxDraw session.
During a different FoxDraw session, this dialog box appears again, but only the first time you try
to open or load a particular model or library object with an unresolved link.
An unresolved link means that a model/library object does not exist. This typically occurs when a
library object is renamed or deleted. This also occurs when you copy a display to a different sys-
tem, but fail to copy the necessary library objects.
You can correct the problem by obtaining the necessary library object(s).
! CAUTION
If you choose to save the model or library object after receiving this warning mes-
sage, the model or library object is saved without links to the library object(s).
Verify Display/Selection Dialog box

You can initiate these utilities via the Tools menu. These utilities verify a display’s configuration.
The Verify Selection utility verifies the current selection’s configuration. The Verify Display utility
verifies the current display’s configuration.
If a utility finds a problem, it displays a dialog box listing the problems. You can rectify most of
the problems from this dialog box. Table 4-119, gives a description of the options available in this
dialog box.
Verify Display and Verify Selection utilities bring to your notice the following problem situations:
1. Instance of a library object having exposed aliases configured with a Required condi-
tion and remaining unresolved (in base displays only).
2. Instance of a library object exposing its dynamics with an empty Tag (Tag-name)
property and a Required configuration
3. Instance of different components of a library object having similar configurations and
similar names.
262
Table 4-119. Display/Selection Table
Item Description
Object Name and Type of the object whose configuration has a problem.
Dynamic/Alias Name of the dynamic or alias whose configuration has a problem. Clicking
this column initiates the editing process.
Error Gives an error description.
Changed This flag indicates if a dynamic or alias has been changed.
Restore The button resets the selected dynamic or alias configuration back to its
original setting.
Edit The button initiates editing of the selected dynamic or alias.
Sort These radio buttons define the sort type to be applied to the entries in the
table. Entries can be sorted by Object Name, Object Type, Dynamic/Alias,
Error or Changed attributes.
Update Focus This button enables/disables the update focus mode. In the update focus
mode, the dialog sets focus to the object that is currently selected in the
table.
263
Setting up User Options

User Options Dialog Box
The User Options dialog box includes these tabbed pages:
 General tab
 Dynamics tab
 Servers tab
 External Palettes.
On Solaris workstations, an additional tab page appears:
 Monitor tab.
User Options Dialog Box - General Tab

Use this tab page to configure user preferences.
Table 4-120. General Tab of User Options Dialog Box - Options

Retain Case Retains case of the compound block parameter or shared variable
while configuring an object in FoxDraw.
Save Grid into Display Saves grid settings with a display. The saved settings are restored
when you reopen the file.
Use Large Cursor Displays a larger drawing cursor.
Full Drag Displays the entire object rather than a layout frame or outline dur-
ing move, resize, and rotate operations.
Maximum Undo Number Type a number (1 to 300). The default is 24. This sets the number
of operations that can be canceled with the Undo command.
Note: A large number of Undo levels requires a significant amount
of memory.
Verify On Save Verifies the configuration for errors before saving it.
264
Bottom of Dialog Box

Table 4-121. General Tab of User Options Dialog Box (lower portion) - Options
Item Description
Default Attributes Select Save on Exit to save the current Fill, Edge, and Text
default attribute settings (Set Selections Attributes dialog
box) each time FoxDraw exits.
Deselect this option to save default attributes only when you inten-
tionally choose to save them.
Click Save Now to immediately save the current Default Attributes
settings
Move Arrow Distance Type a value (0.00 to 25.00) in the Fast and Slow fields.
These settings specify how far an object moves when you press an
arrow key. The values are expressed in World Coordinate units,
with defaults of 0.5 for fast movement and 0.05 for slow move-
ment. The arrow keys set for slow movement are useful for preci-
sion positioning.
Tip: You can toggle between fast and slow modes as you work by
choosing Fast Arrow Move from the Layout menu.
Backup group box Select Backup to permit automatic saves at the time specified in the
Interval box.
Note: This option is required to recover files.
Widescreen Preferences for User Options Dialog Box
Table 4-122. General Tab of User Options Dialog Box (Widescreen Preferences) - Options
Item Description
Create Widescreen display Select one of the following (required:)
by default  Yes
 No
 Prompt on every create
On legacy standard definition monitors (4:3), by default the “No”
option will be selected. “Yes” and “Prompt on every create” will be
grayed out.
Convert 4:3 display to Select one of the following (required:)
WSM format on Open  Yes
 No
 Prompt on every open
On legacy standard definition monitors (4:3), all these options will
be grayed out.
Convert 4:3 display to Select one of the following (required:)
WSM format on Save  Yes
 No
 Prompt on every Save
265
Figure 4-27. User Options Dialog Box - Widescreen Preferences
User Options Dialog Box - Dynamics Tab

Use this tab page to specify various user preferences.
Table 4-123. Dynamics Tab of User Options Dialog Box - Options

History Size This number specifies the number of process variables, ranges, and
display files saved and displayed in drop-down history lists.
Clear History Clears the existing entries in drop-down history lists.
“Single Block Trend” Tem- Displays the name of the file used as the default trend template
plate (refer to the Link Faceplate/Trend command on the Object
menu). By default, this field is blank unless you enter a new default
template name.
Note: Enter the filename only, not the entire path name.
By default, FoxDraw searches the \opt\customer\displib\Trends
directory.
266
User Options Dialog Box - Servers Tab

Use this tab to set up server preferences.
Server
When this tab is selected, FoxDraw broadcasts a request for connected servers to respond. The list
of responding servers is merged with those configured in the an_init.cfg and placed in this
drop-down list.
Select a server from the drop-down list, and click Apply.
Connection Info
These read-only fields display:
 Status (Connected or Not connected)
 Host (server name)
 Version.
Connect on Start Up
Select this check box to have FoxDraw reconnect to the previously connected server at startup.
User Options Dialog Box - External Palettes Tab

This tab page allow you to:
 Enable/disable support for external palettes.
 Select the location of external palettes.
Use External Palettes

Select this check box to enable support for external palettes.
NOTE
If this check box is not selected, the Select Palettes dialog box does not provide
access to External Palettes.
External Palettes Location

Use the text entry field and Location button to select the external palette location (for example,
F:\opt\customer\displib). These controls are enabled when the Use External Palettes check
box is selected.
FoxDraw expects external palettes to be located in a Palettes sub-directory (such as F:\opt\cus-
tomer\displib\Palettes), and expects the symbols used by external palettes to be located in a
Symbols_1 sub-directory (such as F:\opt\customer\displib\Symbols_1).
267
User Options Dialog Box - Monitor Tab

This tabbed page is available only on Solaris workstations.
Use this tab page to monitor system resources. You must select the resources to monitor and
define the thresholds. Messages are sent to indicate that the system has exceeded a threshold.
Table 4-124. Monitor Tab of User Options Dialog Box - Options

Monitor Select this check box to enable or disable the monitoring of system
resources.
Disk Space Select this check box to enable or disable the monitoring of disk space. Type
a percent in the Report if usage exceeds text box.
Swap Space Select this check box to enable or disable the monitoring of swap space.
Type a percent in the Report if usage exceeds text box.
Number of Processes Select this check box to enable or disable the monitoring of number of
processes. Type the number of processes in the Report if usage
exceeds text box.
Scan Rate This setting determines how often to scan the resources.
Recover Backup Files Dialog Box

Table 4-125. Recover Backup Files Dialog Box - Options
Fields and Buttons Description

Files List Select the files of interest.
Recover After selecting files that you want to recover, click this button to perform
the action.
Delete After selecting files that you want to recover, click this button to perform
the action.
Delete All Clicking this button deletes all the files. File selection is not required.
Backup File Info When you select a file from the files list, you can view its date and Pro-
cess. If the process is Unknown, the file was created during a previous Fox-
Draw session. When the process indicates This Process, it means that
the file was created during the current FoxDraw session.
268
Font Setup Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to add and delete fonts.
NOTE
You can also add and delete fonts from FoxDraw and FoxView.
Table 4-126. Font Setup Dialog Box - Buttons and Fields

Font Type This setting filters the display of available fonts. Choose Scalable (Solaris)
or TrueType (Windows), Hershey, or Both.
Available Fonts Displays fonts available on your system that you can add to FoxDraw for
use in your displays.
Loaded Fonts This list shows fonts that are currently available for use in displays.
Add Adds the selected font to the Loaded Fonts list.
Add All Adds all the Available Fonts to the Loaded Fonts list.
Remove Removes the selected font from the Loaded Fonts list.
269
Object Browser Dialog Box

Use the Browser dialog box to define a compound and block (and parameter) from the I/A Series
system.
This dialog box includes a Parameter area when the object being configured requires the entry of a
parameter. It also includes a compound:block.parameter (CBP) selection list for choosing the type
of alias when configuring an object with aliasing.
Table 4-127. Object Browser Dialog Box - Options

Object The most recently used Compound:Block (and Parameter) appears
in this field. Type your selection, or select from entries appearing in
scroll box(es).
Compound:Block In this scroll box, select a sign or double-click a Compound. The
Compound name appears in the Object field, and a list of blocks
opens. When you select a block, its name appears in the Object
field.
Compound List View By default, this check box is selected, showing an alphabetical list of
all the compounds in the system.
Deselect this check box to view a list of the Control Processors in
the system. You do this when you do not recall a compound name
but know its location. Then, double-click a CP to view a list of the
compounds configured at that station.
CBP Selection This list box appears only when configuring an object with aliasing.
It enables you to choose one of the following CBP types when con-
figuring the alias. The CBP types are: Cmpd, Blk, Param,
Blk.Param, Cmpd:Blk, Cmpd:Param, and Cmpd:Blk.Param.
Block Type Filter To view a specific block type, select a filter.
Parameter This scroll box displays the parameters for the selected block. By
default, all parameters display. When you select a parameter, it
appears in the Object field.
Input Select this check box to view all input parameters. You can select
Output and String at the same time.
Output Select this check box to view all output parameters. You can select
Input and String at the same time.
String Select this check box to view all string parameters. You can select
Input and Output at the same time.
All Select this check box to view all block and compound parameters.
Input, Output and string are no longer selectable.
270
API Server Connection Utility

Use the API Server Connection Utility to specify the I/A Series workstations to be included in the
list of available FoxAPI servers in the Servers tab of the User Options dialog box. To access the
API Server Connection Utility dialog box (Figure 4-28), choose Options >
Configure Servers from the FoxDraw menu bar.
NOTE
In FoxDraw, the pop up message “Unable to invoke configure Servers tool” is
invoked if the FoxAPI connect utility is not properly installed in
“D:\opt\fox\ais\bin\” path. Refer to FoxAPI Installation Guide (B0193UC).
Table 4-128 describes the options in the API Server Connection Utility dialog box.
Table 4-128. API Server Connection Utility Dialog Box

Location of Full pathname of the client initialization file (an_init.cfg). The workstation
an_init.cfg references this file when it makes an API server connection. This field can-
not be changed. If the Broadcast Request is enabled, the client initialization
file is not required. However, if there is an initialization file on the worksta-
tion, the configured stations are included in the list of available servers.
AW Stations Lists the available workstations.
AW Name Type the name of the AW station or select it from the AW Stations list.
IP Address Type the IP address for the station to be added.
Apply Adds the new station to the AW Stations list.
Delete Deletes the selected station from the AW Stations list.
Server Port Connec- Specifies the appropriate server-side port number on the selected server for
tion either AIM*API or FoxAPI. Click FoxAPI.
Disable Broadcast Disables request-for-connection broadcasts by client applications on the
Request workstation. When the box is not checked, the workstation broadcasts a
request-to-connect message to the network when the API client is started,
and connects to AIM*API and FoxAPI servers that respond to the broad-
cast. This enables connections in addition to those specified in the client
initialization file. When the box is checked, the workstation only connects
with the servers listed in the initialization file. This setting is applied to all
API clients on the workstation. Changing the setting may affect applica-
tions such as AIM*Historian and AIM*Explorer.
Broadcast timeout Specifies the time in seconds that the workstation allows for server
responses to a broadcast request.
Cancel Discards any changes and closes the dialog box.
271
Figure 4-28. API Server Connection Utility Dialog Box
272
Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts

Mouse and keyboard shortcuts can save you lots of time. They include:
 Configuration shortcuts
 Object selection shortcuts
 Drawing shortcuts
 Editing shortcuts
 Moving, scaling, and rotating shortcuts
 Aligning and flipping shortcuts.
Configuration Shortcuts
These configuration shortcuts can save you lots of time.
Table 4-129, lists the shortcuts.
Table 4-129. Configuration Shortcuts
To Press
Display the pop-up menu Right-click the mouse
Close pop-up menu Left-click the mouse
Invoke the Configure Objects dialog After selecting the object, press Alt+Enter.
box
Close a dialog box Press ESC or Alt+F4
Object Selection Shortcuts

Unless otherwise specified, “click” means to momentarily press and release the left mouse button.
Table 4-130. Object Selection Shortcuts
To Do this
Select an object Click the object.
- or -
Lasso it by drawing a selection rectangle around it.
Select multiple objects Select an object, then press and hold the Shift key as
you select additional objects.
- or -
Lasso multiple objects with a selection rectangle.
Add an object to a selection Press Shift and click the object.
Select all From the Edit menu, choose Select All.
- or -
Press Ctrl+A.
273
Drawing Shortcuts
Allows you to create and save a display.
Table 4-131. Drawing Shortcuts
To Press
Invoke the Display Properties dialog box Alt+Enter
(when no objects are selected)
Create a new display Ctrl+N
Open a display Ctrl+O
Save a display Ctrl+S
Capture a display to the clipboard PRINT SCREEN
Drawing an Object
Table 4-132. Drawing an Object
To Click or press
Display the pop-up menu Right mouse button
Close the pop-up menu Left mouse button
Open a palette F2
Complete a drawing command Right mouse button
Cancel a drawing command Right mouse button
(object incomplete)
Invoke the Set Default Attributes dialog Ctrl+Enter
box
Invoke the Link Faceplate/Trend dialog Ctrl+INS
box
Close a dialog box Alt+F4
274
Editing Shortcuts
Select the object(s) first.
Table 4-133. Editing Shortcuts
To Press
Cut Ctrl+X
Copy Ctrl+C
Paste Ctrl+V
Duplicate Ctrl+D
Delete DEL
Group objects Ctrl+G
Ungroup objects Ctrl+U
Undo edit Ctrl+Z
Redo edit Ctrl+Y
Edit text Ctrl+T
Moving, Scaling, and Rotating Shortcuts

Select the object(s) first. Then perform one of the following actions.
Moving an Object or a Selection

Table 4-134. Options for Moving an Object or Selection
To Do this
Move Drag the object
- or -
Press keyboard arrow keys.
Note: If the object is not filled, drag its edge.
Move with constraints Press Shift and drag
- or -
Press keyboard arrow keys.
Note: The object moves on the horizontal or vertical plane of the
handle that is closest to the pointer when you select the object.
Toggle Fast Arrow Move Press F10
Move to back Press Ctrl+B
Move to front Press Ctrl+F
Scaling or Rotating an Object or Selection

275
Table 4-135. Options for Scaling or Rotating an Object or Selection
To Do this
Scale Drag a selection handle.
Scale proportionally Hold down the Shift key and drag a selection handle.
Rotate Hold down the Ctrl key and drag a selection handle.
Aligning and Flipping Shortcuts

Select the object(s) first. Refer to Table 4-136 for aligning shortcuts and Table 4-137 for flipping
shortcuts.
Table 4-136, lists the aligning shortcuts.
Table 4-136. Aligning Objects
To align Press
Left Shift+LEFT
Right Shift+RIGHT
Top Shift+UP
Bottom Shift+DOWN
Center vertical F9
Center horizontal Shift+F9
Table 4-137, lists the shortcuts for flipping objects.
Table 4-137. Flipping Objects
To flip Press
Horizontal F8
Vertical Shift+F8
Left Ctrl+LEFT ARROW
Right Ctrl+RIGHT ARROW
Up Ctrl+UP ARROW
Down Ctrl+DOWN ARROW
276
5. Procedures
Create an Object
Creating a Base Display
A base display file (.fdf extension) is the file that FoxView displays.
To create a new base display

1. From the File menu, choose New.
The New dialog box appears.
2. Under Type Selection, click Base Display.
3. Click OK.
4. From File menu, choose Display Properties.
The Display Properties dialog box appears.
5. Click the General tab and configure the display.
6. Click OK.
7. From the File menu, choose Save As.
The Save As dialog box appears.
8. Provide a name for the file.
NOTE
1. The file automatically takes on an .fdf extension.
2. If the Prompt on every create option is selected under Widescreen Prefer-
ences in the User Options dialog box (see “Converting Files through FoxDraw” on
page 428), you will be prompted when creating a new display or a widescreen dis-
play.
Creating a New Overlay

To create a new overlay
2. Under Overlays:
 Click a button (such as Full) to create a standard sized overlay.
 Click Custom to create a non-standard size overlay, and set its size.
NOTE
Set the size equal to a library object that you plan to place in the overlay.
277
B0700BE – Rev F 5. Procedures
3. Click OK.
The overlay appears in the drawing area.
4. From the File menu, choose Save As.
The Save As dialog box appears.
5. Type a name for the new overlay.
By default, the file takes an .fdf extension.
Creating a New Library Object for Use in a Generic Overlay

To create a new library object for use in a generic overlay
2. Choose Library Object.
3. Create all the desired graphic objects, then choose Select All from the Edit menu
(or press Ctrl+A).
4. Choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
5. Configure the first Dynamic Update so that CMP=$P1 and BLK=$P2. Enter the
desired parameter.
As you configure all other Dynamic Updates, $P1:$P2 appears as the default Com-
pound:Block assignment. You need only to edit the parameter name where desired.
6. Configure all operator actions so that Compound=$P1 and Block=$P2.
7. Save the library object to \opt\customer\displib\Symbols.
Creating a New Display using a Template

Invensys Systems, Inc. supplies templates that you can use to build a display.
To create a new display using a template

2. Choose Create from Template.
When the User Templates check box is selected, user-built templates appear in the
list box. If this check box is not selected, the list of Foxboro supplied templates
appears.
3. Select a template from the list on the right side of the dialog box.
4. Click OK.
Upon saving the new display file, you are prompted to name the display file as an .fdf file (for base
displays and overlays) or an .m1 file (for library objects and palettes). The template (from which
you created the new display) remains unchanged.
278
5. Procedures B0700BE – Rev F
Copy a Library Object

Linking a Library Object
To link a library object
1. Choose Link from Library from the Object menu.
2. Select an object and click Load, or double-click the object.
3. Move the mouse pointer to the drawing area.
The pointer changes to a layout frame the same size as the library object.
4. Position the frame as desired and left-click.
Linking a Bitmap
You can link a bitmap to a display.
To link a bitmap
1. Choose Link Bitmap from the Object menu.
The Link Bitmap dialog box appears.
2. Select a file and click Load, or double-click the file.
The pointer changes to a layout frame the same size as the bitmap.
4. Position the frame as desired and left-click.
NOTE
Displays that contain bitmaps whose names start with a number cannot be con-
verted to their ASCII (.g) representation. If you plan to convert your displays from
either .fdf or .m1 format to .g, then use bitmap names that start with a letter only.
Linking a Standard Faceplate to a Display

To link a standard faceplate to a display
1. From the Object menu, choose Link Faceplate/Trend.
The Link Faceplate/Trend dialog box appears.
2. Type the Compound and Block names.
By default, the most recently used Compound and Block names appear. If you are
connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, click the Comp:Block button to select
from a list of all variables in the system.
3. Click the Link Faceplate option button.
4. To retrieve the High Scale, Low Scale, Delta, and units from the Control Processor,
select Apply Control Values.
If you do not select this check box, FoxDraw retrieves the values from the block data-
base file, dspblock.dat.
279
5. Click OK.
If you are connected to an AIM*API or FoxAPI server, FoxDraw automatically deter-
mines the block type.
6. If you are not connected to a server, or if the server cannot find the block, type a block
type at the Select Block Type dialog box.
If user-built faceplates are configured, FoxDraw displays a list of available faceplates.
7. At the Select Faceplate dialog box, make a selection and click OK.
At the base display, selection handles indicate the size and location of the faceplate.
8. Move the handles to the desired location, and left-click to paste.
Linking a Trend to a Display

To link a trend to a display
2. In the Compound field, type the name of the compound.
In the Block field, type the name of the block.
Or click C:B to select the compound and block.
3. Select Link Trend.
4. Click OK.
The Select Block Type dialog box appears.
5. Select a block type and click OK.
6. Move the cursor to the position on the display where you want to place the trend.
Selection handles indicate the size and location of the trend.
7. Left-click the mouse outside of the trend to paste the trend.
8. Drag the handles to size the trend. (optional)
Linking an X/Y Plot to a Display

This procedure links an X/Y plot to a display. It is assumed that the display is open.
To link an X/Y plot

1. From the Object menu, choose Link from Library.
2. Open the FoxXY-Plots group and select a plot type (such as xy_every).
3. Click Load.
A rectangle shaped frame indicates the position of the new X/Y plot.
5. Left-click the mouse to drop the plot onto the drawing area.
280
Copying or Linking library objects from a Palette

You can copy or link a library object from a palette directly into your display. You can modify the
copied object’s graphic attributes and its configuration.
The following methods can be used to create an instance of an object:
 Copy a library object from the Link/Copy from Palette option
 Run two instances of FoxDraw and select and copy an object from one FoxDraw win-
dow to another
 Open a base display.
To Copy or Link a library object

1. In FoxDraw, choose Link/Copy from Palette from the Objects menu.
2. Double-click Foxboro Palettes to select from a list of Foxboro supplied palettes or
User Palettes . The objects with a prefix of copy_ are copied objects and those
with links_ are linked objects. Select the desired object and click Load
3. Select an image from the palette and drag it onto the current display and click to copy
or link these objects into the current display.
4. Choose Ungroup from the Object menu.
You can now select any part of the image and configure it with dynamic attributes and
an operator action, and modify its graphic attributes or size.
If the original library object was configured, you can use DEdit to replace
compounds.
Create a Primitive Object

Creating a Circle
You can create a circle which can be filled or unfilled.
NOTE
Circles and arcs take about three times as long to update as polygons. If you have
many circle or arc shapes in a display, you can improve performance by creating the
shapes as polygons. Draw a circle, then trace the polygon on top with multiple
points.
To create a circle
1. Choose Circle from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Place the cursor where you want the center of the circle, and click the left mouse
button.
3. Drag the cursor to the end point of the desired radius.
4. Click the left mouse button to finish creating the circle.
To resize a circle proportionally

 Press and hold the Shift key and drag a selection handle.
281
Creating a Closed Curve

After creating the curve, you can add, delete, or move individual points with the Point tool.
A curved object can be filled or unfilled.
To create a closed curve

1. Choose Closed Curve from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Place the cursor where you want the first point of the curve.
3. Click the left mouse button.
4. Place the cursor at the next point of the curve.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you have created all the points.
7. Click the right mouse button.
The last point of the curve automatically connects to the first point.
Creating a Curve
A curve can be filled or unfilled.
After creating the curve, you can add, delete, or move individual points with the Point tool.
To create a curve
1. Choose Curve from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Place the cursor where you want the first point of the curve.
4. Place the cursor at the next point of the curve.
The polyline appears as a curve.
Creating an Ellipse
An ellipse can be filled or unfilled.
To create an ellipse
1. Create a circle.
2. Resize the circle with a selection handle.
NOTE
Circles and arcs take about three times as long to update as polygons. If you have
many circle or arc shapes in a display, you can improve performance by creating the
shapes as polygons. Draw a circle, then trace the polygon on top with multiple
points.
282
Creating a Line
After you create a line, you can move the end points or add a point with the Point tool.
NOTE
When you add a point, the line becomes a polyline.
To create a line
1. Choose Line from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Place the cursor where you want the line to start.
4. Place the cursor where you want the line to end.
NOTE
While you are drawing, you can click the right mouse button at any time to cancel.
Creating a Pie Arc

A pie arc can be filled or unfilled.
NOTE
To create a circle segment in which the endpoints are not connected to the center,
use the Sector tool .
To create a pie arc

1. Choose Arcs and then Pie from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Place the cursor where you want the center point, and left-click the mouse.
3. Place the cursor where you want the first end point, and left-click the mouse.
4. Moving counterclockwise, place the cursor at the second end point, and left-click the
mouse.
NOTE
Pick the end points in the correct order. The pie is always drawn counterclockwise
from the first end point to the second end point.
283
Creating a Polygon
A polygon can be filled or unfilled.
After creating the polygon, you can add, delete, or move individual points with the Point tool.
To create a polygon
1. Choose Polygon from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Place the cursor where you want the first point of the polygon.
4. Place the cursor where you want the next point.
NOTE
The last point automatically connects to the first point.
Creating a Polyline
A polyline can be filled or unfilled.
After creating the polyline, you can add, delete, or move individual points with the Point tool.
To create a polyline
1. Choose Polyline from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Place the cursor where you want the first point.
4. Place the cursor where you want the next point.
284
Creating a Rectangle
A rectangle can be filled or unfilled.
To create a rectangle
1. Choose Rectangle from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Place the cursor where you want the first corner of the rectangle to be.
4. Move the cursor to the opposite corner.
NOTE
While you are drawing, you can click the right mouse button at any time to cancel.
Creating a Sector
A sector is a geometric figure bounded by two radii and the included arc of a circle. A sector looks
like a slice of pie.
NOTE
Sectors are always drawn counterclockwise. Remember to pick the start and end
points in the correct order.
To create a sector
1. Choose Arcs and then Sector from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Place the cursor at the desired center of the circle, and left-click the mouse.
3. Drag the cursor to create the radius, and left-click the mouse.
This is the start of the sector.
4. Moving counterclockwise, place the cursor at the desired location for the end of the
sector, and left-click the mouse.
Creating a Three-Point Sector

A three-point sector can be filled or unfilled.
To create a three-point sector

1. Choose Arcs and then Three-Point Sector from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Place the cursor at the desired location for the start of the sector, and left-click the
mouse.
3. Drag the cursor to the end of the sector, and left-click the mouse.
4. Drag the cursor to a third point on the sector, and left-click the mouse.
To resize or reshape the sector

 Click the Select tool and drag one of the sector’s handles.
285
Creating Background Text

To create background text
1. Choose Background Text from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Move the cursor to the drawing area, left-click the left mouse.
3. Drag the mouse to form a rectangle, and left-click the mouse.
A vertical insertion point appears in the center of the rectangle.
4. Begin typing.
The text is centered in the rectangle.
5. When you finish typing the text, right-click the mouse or select another tool.
Creating Scroll Region Object

You can create a scroll region object and specify whether the object includes scroll bars or buttons
when viewed in FoxView.
To create a scroll region object

1. Click or choose Scroll Region Object from the Draw menu.
2. Click the mouse on the drawing area.
3. Size the object and move it to the location you desire.
4. Select the object and choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
NOTE
The object type appears in the tree list as “scroll-region”.
5. Select the General tab.

6. In the Name field, type a name for the object.
7. Select the Configuration tab.
8. In the Open File box, type the path and filename or click File to locate the file you
want to display.
9. Choose the Navigation method to be used in FoxView.
Table 5-1. Navigation methods
Scroll Bars Specifies that the scroll region object includes scroll bars. This is useful for
workstations that employ a mouse.
Buttons Specifies that the scroll region object includes arrow buttons in FoxView.
This is useful for workstations that employ a touchscreen.
10. Click OK.
286
Creating a Comment Object

As an option, you can insert one or more comment objects into a model to add comments. In
FoxView, comment objects do not appear.
NOTE
In order to work with comment objects, FoxDraw must be able to display comment
objects.
NOTE
Comment objects cannot be configured using the multi-create option available in
FoxDraw.
To create a comment object

 Perform one of these actions:
 From the Draw menu, choose Comment.
 Click .
Create Library Objects

Creating a Template
When you create a new display, you can select a supplied template or user-built template instead
of a particular display type.
TIP
If you frequently include standard elements such as a company logo in your dis-
plays, templates can save you lots of time.
You can create user templates for any of the supported file types: displays, library objects, and
palettes.
To create a new template

You perform this procedure by copying an existing template and then modifying it to meet your
requirements.
1. Choose New from the File menu.
2. Under Components, select Create from Template.
3. Select a Invensys Foxboro supplied or user-built template.
To view the list of Invensys Foxboro supplied templates, deselect User Templates.
By default, the list displays user-built templates.
4. Click OK.
5. Modify the template, for example, by changing the background color, or adding
objects such as logos, buttons, or bitmaps.
287
6. Save the file as an .m1 file to the user templates directory:

\opt\customer\displib\Templates
NOTE
Open the template at any time to make modifications. Resave it as an .m1 file.
Creating a User-Built Faceplate

You can build your own faceplate for any block type. The procedure involves creating and config-
uring the faceplate objects, positioning the finished faceplate, and then naming and saving the
faceplate file.
To create and configure faceplate objects

2. Select Library Object.
Notice the title on the Library Object screen is Untitled.m1. FoxDraw automatically
appends an .m1 extension to a library object.
3. Draw an object.
4. Select the object.
6. Optionally, select the General tab and type a faceplate name.
7. To configure a dynamic attribute, select the Update tab and click Add.
From the Add Dynamic Update dialog box, select an attribute and a conversion.
NOTE
In the Object field of the resulting <Attribute> <Conversion> dialog box, type only
the parameter name. Assign the Compound:Block name later, when you link the
base display to the faceplate.
Complete the dynamic(s) configuration and click OK, which invokes the
Configure Objects dialog box.
8. If desired, you can also assign one operator action to an object by selecting the
Action tab, clicking Add, and following the standard configuration procedure.
288
To position the faceplate

1. If your faceplate includes more than one object, group the objects.
2. Position the lower-left corner of the grouped object at the lower-left corner of the
screen near the 0,0 location.
This eliminates excess white space when you insert the faceplate on a base display.
To save the file

1. Choose Save As from the File menu.
The Save dialog box appears.
2. Make sure the directory is \opt\customer\displib\Faceplates.
3. Type a faceplate filename, using this convention:
<BLOCKTYPE>_<text>.m1
The <BLOCKTYPE> must be the name of a standard I/A Series block and must be
uppercase. The <text> can be a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters and
the numbers 0-9.
For example, the name PIDA_SlowOilTank might be used for a faceplate for a PIDA
block in a slow cascade loop controlling an oil tank. By using this name, any time you
want to insert a faceplate for a PIDA block, PIDA_SlowOilTank would appear on the
Select PIDA Faceplate list.
NOTE
User-built faceplates are library objects, just like standard faceplates. When you
copy a user-built faceplate into a display, you actually copy a link to the faceplate
file. When you modify a user-built faceplate, all links to that faceplate automatically
reflect the modification.
Creating a Palette
You can create a palette to hold objects that you frequently use.
To create a palette
2. Click Palette.
This creates default palette, 25 unit (wide) by 40 unit (high).
NOTE
For a different size palette, deselect User Templates and choose one of the
following:
- Palette 18 x 24
- Palette 21 x 28
- Palette 24 x 32
- Palette 27 x 36
The palette identification numbers (such as 18 x 24) indicate the width and height
in World Coordinate units.
289
3. Click OK.
A frame appears, indicating the palette window area.
4. Create the graphic objects and place them inside the frame (palette).
NOTE
You can also place library objects or bitmaps on the palette.
5. When you finish placing objects onto the palette, choose File > Save As from the
menu bar to open the Save As dialog box.
6. Save the palette (.m1 file) in the User Palettes directory:
\opt\customer\displib\Palettes\User Palettes
Copying an Existing Faceplate to a Library Object

To copy an existing faceplate to a library object
1. From the File menu, choose Open.
The Open dialog box appears.
2. Select the desired file from \opt\customer\displib\Faceplates.
3. To make sure you copy all the graphic objects in the faceplate, choose Select All
from the Edit menu (or press Ctrl+A). Then choose Copy from the Edit menu (or
press Ctrl+C).
5. Choose Library Object.
6. At the new display (untitled.m1) choose Paste from the Edit menu (or press
Ctrl+V).
7. Position the frame, then click to paste a copy of the faceplate into the library object.
8. Select the faceplate.
10. Open all the grouped objects.
11. Select the first Dynamic Update in the list and edit it so that Compound=$P1 and
Block=$P2.
12. Make sure that all other Dynamic Updates are configured for Parameter only (no
explicit Compound or Block assignment).
At run time, FoxView assigns $P1:$P2 to all other dynamic updates in the faceplate.
13. Select all operator actions in the list and edit so that Compound=$P1 and Block=
$P2.
290
14. Save the library object to \opt\customer\displib\Symbols.
Creating a Generic Overlay

You can create a generic overlay to display the same Compound:Block.Parameter information
(for example, block descriptor, measurement, output, and set point) for each of several process
variables, based on the display object you pick.
Generic overlay creation is a four-step procedure:
Table 5-2. Steps for Generic Overlay Creation
Step Do this
1 Copy an existing faceplate to a library object
-or-
Create a new library object.
2 Create a base display with Relative Pick and Open
Overlay operator actions.
3 Create the overlay.
4 Test the overlay.
Creating a Library Object

An object is created at the origin.
To create a new library object

2. Click Library Object.
A clean work area appears.
3. Draw objects with FoxDraw tools (such as the rectangle tool), and copy objects to this
display from libraries, palettes, or other displays.
4. When you are finished placing objects onto the work area, choose Select All from
the Edit menu.
This selects all the objects.
5. From the Object menu, choose Group.
This groups the objects.
6. Place the mouse cursor over the center of the grouped object and drag the grouped
object toward the work area’s lower-left corner, while viewing the coordinate position
indicator box.
7. Place the lower-left cursor as close as possible to the origin (coordinate position 0,0).
291
NOTE
If the library object is not anchored at the origin, you will have difficulty position-
ing the library object when you link it to a display. You will not be able to place the
mouse pointer on or near the library object.
8. Choose Save As from the File menu and name the library object.
Save the new library object in your user symbols directory (such as in
opt\customer\displib\symbols).
To automatically position a library object at the origin

 From the View menu, choose Snap to Grid.
 To snap the lower-left corner of the library object to the origin, from the View
menu choose Point Modes and then Point.
 To snap the center of the library object to the origin, from the View menu choose
Point Modes and then Center.
NOTE
To precisely place an object, use the keyboard’s arrow keys.
Creating a Palette of Another Size

To create a palette of another size
2. Select Create from Template.
3. Deselect User Templates.
4. In the list box, select one of the Foxboro palette templates.
5. Click OK.
292
Configure an Object’s Graphic (Static) Attributes

Configuring an Object’s Fill
You can configure an object’s fill. This procedure specifies the object’s static presentation. You can
also configure dynamics for the object to achieve animation.
To configure an object’s fill

2. Choose Graphic Attributes from the Object menu.
3. Select the Fill tab.
4. Click Fill.
5. In the Fill Level box, type a number (percent).
6. In the Fill Direction box, click an arrow to specify the direction.
7. In the Fill Type box, select a type (Solid, Hollow, Opaque, Transparent).
8. In the Fill Pattern box, click one of the available patterns.
9. In the Color palette (right side of dialog box), click one of the available colors.
10. Select Apply to All to apply the options to all the selected objects.
Configuring an Object’s Edge

You can configure an object’s edge. This procedure specifies the object’s static presentation. You
can also configure dynamics for the object to achieve animation.
To configure an object’s edge

3. Select the Edge tab.
4. In the Edge Style box, select one of the available styles.
5. In the Edge Width box, select one of the available edge width choices, or type an
integer between 1 and 20 (pixels).
Making an Edge Invisible

You can make an object’s edge invisible. An invisible edge improves FoxView performance.
To make an object’s edge invisible

1. From the Object menu, choose Graphic Attributes.
2. Select the Edge tab.
3. In the Edge Style group box, click the top button.
293
Configuring a Text Object

You can configure a text object. This procedure specifies the text object’s static presentation. You
can also configure dynamics for the object to achieve animation.
To configure a text object

The Set Selections Attributes dialog box appears.
3. Select the Text tab.
4. In the Text Align box, select one of the available styles.
5. In the Font Style box, select True Type or Hershey.
6. Click Style and in the resulting dialog box, specify the font family and font options.
7. Close the font dialog box and return to the Text tab.
9. In the Direction box, click an arrow to specify the direction.
Specifying a Hershey Font

Text can be built with a Hershey font.
To specify a Hershey font

1. Select the text.
3. In Font Style, choose Hershey.
The Select Font dialog box appears.
4. Select a font from the list and click OK.
5. Optionally, change the font’s color.
6. Close the dialog box.
Changing a Comment Object’s Graphical Attributes

You can change the comment object’s graphical attributes.
To change a comment object’s graphical attributes

1. Select the comment object(s) you want to change.
2. From the Object menu, choose Graphical Attributes.
3. If you have selected more than one object, select Apply to All.
To change only the focused object, clear the Apply to All check box.
4. Change the attributes.
5. Click Close.
294
Configure an Object with Animation

Applying a Dynamic to an Object
You can configure one or more dynamics to an object. This animates the object.
To apply a dynamic to an object

1. Click the object.
This selects the object.
2. From the Object menu, choose Configure Objects.
The dynamics table lists the dynamic attributes currently applied to the object.
4. Click Add.
5. Select a dynamic from the list box.
6. Select a conversion from the Conversion box.
7. Click OK.
Depending on the selected conversion, a dialog box appears.
NOTE
You can apply no more than one occurrence of a particular dynamic to an object.
Because a convention comprises of one or more dynamics, FoxDraw does not allow
you to apply a dynamic to an object configured with a convention, containing the
same dynamic.
For example, if an object is already configured with a convention that includes the
Fill Color dynamic, you cannot apply a Fill Color dynamic.
8. Configure the dynamic.

9. Repeat Steps 4 through 8 to apply additional dynamics.
10. Click OK.
Editing a Dynamic
To edit a dynamic
1. Select the dynamic.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select or type the desired value(s).
NOTE
Alternatively, double-click a non-Boolean field or click the check box in a
Boolean field.
295
Applying a Convention to an Object

You can apply a convention (a group of one or more dynamic attributes) to an object. Using a
convention saves time and causes fewer errors.
To apply a convention
1. Select the display object.
3. Click the Update tab.
4. Click Add.
5. Click the Convention button.
The Add Convention dialog box appears.
6. Select a convention and click OK.
The Edit Convention dialog box appears.
7. Configure the convention.
The dynamic attributes associated with the convention appear in the dynamics table
and are grouped with a distinguishing color.
NOTE
The rules governing the application of an attribute to an object also apply to con-
ventions - you can apply no more than one occurrence of a particular attribute to an
object. Because a convention comprises one or more attributes, FoxDraw does not
allow you to apply a convention to an object already configured with an attribute
contained in the convention. For example, if an object has already been assigned the
Fill Color attribute, you cannot apply a convention that includes the Fill Color
attribute.
8. Repeat Steps 4 through 7 to apply another convention to the object. Or, apply a
dynamic to the object.
Converting a Convention into Individual Dynamic Attributes

You might want to convert a convention into individual dynamic attributes. Do this to modify a
particular attribute of an object without changing the convention as a whole.
To convert a convention
1. Select the display object that contains the convention whose dynamic you wish to
change.
2. From the Objects menu, choose Configure Object.
4. In the dynamics table, select the dynamic attribute you want to modify.
296
5. Click Edit.
The Edit Convention dialog box appears. The title bar indicates the name of the
selected convention.
6. Click Convert.
NOTE
You can cancel the conversion by clicking Reset.
A dialog box queries whether to perform the conversion.

7. Click OK.
NOTE
After clicking OK, the Reset button no longer reverts back to the convention.
The color of the attributes that had been part of the convention change to gray, indi-
cating that the attributes no longer belong to a convention. At this point you can
modify or delete individual dynamics without affecting the configured convention.
Also, changes to the convention no longer affects this object.
Specifying a Blink Rate

You can configure a blink rate for an object (fill or edge).
To specify blink rate

1. Select the object you want to blink.
3. Perform one of these actions.
 Click Add to a new dynamic
 Click Edit to modify the existing dynamic.
4. Select Fill Blink or Edge Blink.
5. In the Conversion box, select a conversion (Discrete or Threshold).
6. Click OK.
The Discrete State dialog box or the Threshold State dialog box appears.
7. In the table, select one of the states.
8. Click Edit.
The Fill Blink dialog box or Edge Blink dialog box appears.
9. Select one of the blink rates (No Blink, Blink Slow, or Blink Fast).
10. Click OK.
297
Resetting an Individual Dynamic Element

From the Edit Dynamics/Connections dialog box, you can individually reset a dynamic element
configuration back to its original configuration.
To reset an individual dynamic element

1. Select the dynamic element.
2. Click Restore.
Creating a Dynamic Update Horizontal Move

This example shows how to create an object with a Move Horizontal attribute. The object moves
according to the value of the process variable to which it is connected.
To create a Dynamic Update Horizontal move

1. Create a triangle using the Polygon tool.
3. Set the Reference Point to one of the triangle points by clicking close to the point.
Snap Gravity snaps the reference point to the triangle’s point.
4. With the triangle selected, choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
TIP

6. Click Add.
7. Select the Move Horizontal dynamic and the Continuous conversion.
8. Click OK.
The Move Horizontal dialog box appears.
9. Type the process variable name. Set the high scale and low scale (maximum and mini-
mum values). Click the Set Location button to set the triangle’s high and low
screen location.
These locations, which are defined in World Coordinate units, specify the range of
movement and are expressed as offsets from the triangle’s current position. The X
coordinate for the low location is negative. Low Location specifies the triangle’s loca-
tion when the process variable equals the Low Scale, and High Location specifies the
triangle’s location when the process variable equals the High Scale.
10. At the display, click first for the low location and then for the high location.
11. In the dialog box, check the locations, and click OK.
12. Click OK.
298
Making an Object Invisible/Visible

You can select an object and make it visible or invisible, based on the value of a process variable.
To make an object invisible

4. Click Add to add a new attribute, or click Edit to modify an existing Visibility attri-
bute.
5. Select Visibility.
6. In the Conversions box, select a conversion.
7. Click OK.
A dialog box (such as Discrete State) appears.
8. Under Visibility, configure the attribute.
9. Click OK.
Configuring a Pipe with Fill Attributes

To configure a pipe with Fill attributes
1. Select a red horizontal pipe from the links_pipes palette.
2. Place the pipe in your display and select it.
4. Double-click the grouped object to display a linked object and a polygon, as shown
below.
Figure 5-1. Grouped Objects
5. Select the polygon.

7. Deselect Apply to All, and select the desired pipe color for the unfilled state.
9. Select the polygon and configure it with Filled and Fill Color dynamic updates.
299
Increasing the Size of a Pipe

This example shows how to increase the size of a pipe used to connect two tanks.
To increase the size of a pipe

1. Make sure you are in point mode.
2. Position one end of the pipe flush against the first tank.
This end will not move.
3. Drag the opposite handle to the second tank.
Figure 5-2. Pipe Examples
Specifying a Bit Extension

You can specify a bit extension to a variable to connect an attribute to an individual bit in a vari-
able (for example, a Packed Boolean or Packed Long).
Use bit extensions:
 In trend pen configuration
 With display commands (such as toggle and setb)
 With momentary contact.
To specify a bit extension

This procedure assumes that the object is selected and the Configure Objects dialog box is open.
1. In the Add Dynamic Update dialog box, select Bit State conversion.
The Bit State dialog box appears.
2. Configure a bit state table.
3. As necessary, select a bit mask, bit match, or Oper field and click Edit to edit a
parameter.
The Bit Selection dialog box appears.
300
Configuring an Overlay
This procedure assumes that an overlay is open in FoxDraw.
1. From the File menu, choose Display Properties.
2. Click the General tab and specify the display’s properties, such as background color.
3. Click the Overlay tab and configure the overlay’s screen position and the position
attributes.
4. Click OK.
5. From the Object menu, choose Link from Library.
6. Click User Symbols.
7. Select a library object, and click Load.
8. Click to paste the library object and position it inside the overlay boundaries.
Configuring a Background Text Object to Display Read File Data

You can create a background text object and specify the text to display.
To configure a background text object to display read file data

1. Create a background text object using the Background Text tool.
2. With the text selected, choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
4. Click Add.
5. Select the Text Contents dynamic and the Read File conversion.
6. Click OK.
The Read File dialog box appears.
7. In the File field, type the name of the file, or click File to locate the filename.
8. Under File Format, configure the specifications of interest.
9. Click OK.
10. Click OK or Apply.
301
Work with Conventions

Configuring a Convention
You can configure a display convention that you can save and use on multiple objects.
NOTE
After creating a new convention, you must restart FoxView to be able to view the
convention.
To configure a display convention

1. From the Tools menu, choose Convention Editor.
The Display Convention Configurator dialog box appears.
2. In the Select Convention box, select User Conventions.
3. Click Add.
By default, a default name (such as NewConvention0) is generated for the new
convention.
4. Click the General tab.
5. Type a name for the convention in the Name box.
The name you provided appears in the Select Convention box.
7. On the right side of the dialog box, click Add.
8. Select a dynamic and a conversion (as you would configure a stand-alone dynamic)
and click OK.
Depending on your choices, one of these dialog boxes opens:
 Continuous dialog box
 Discrete dialog box
 Bit State dialog box
 Threshold dialog box
 Numeric/Text dialog box
 Read File dialog box.
9. Configure the dynamic attribute.
When configuring a dynamic, you can specify a list of parameters (for example .IN or
.OUT) for the dynamic. The syntax for entering multiple parameters requires that
you leave a space between entries (for example, .IN .OUT). You cannot configure in
C:B.P (For example FOX:SINE.OUT) or B.P(SINE.OUT) format.
302
10. Click OK.

11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 until you have created and configured each of the conven-
tion’s dynamics.
12. Click OK.
The convention is saved, and the Display Convention Configurator dialog box
closes.
! CAUTION
Although adding and deleting dynamics within a convention is allowed, it is not
recommended. Invensys Systems recommends that you create a new convention
with the desired set of dynamics.
Merging Conventions
You can merge (import) conventions from one user convention file to the user convention file
located in the \opt\customer\data directory. The default user convention file is named
usr_conventions.dat.
NOTE
You cannot modify the supplied conventions file (fv_conventions.dat).
To merge conventions
1. From the Display Convention Configurator dialog box, click Merge.
The Select Convention File dialog box appears.
2. Browse to the directory containing the user convention file of interest.
3. Select the user convention file of interest.
4. Click Open.
If a message box appears, there are conflicts between the two files. A conflict occurs
when the same convention name is present in both files. If no message box appears,
there are no conflicts between convention names.
In response to the message box:
To Click
Override all existing conflicts, replacing convention Yes
definitions with different definitions
Preserve existing conventions for conflicting conventions No
Terminate the merge process Cancel
A confirmation message indicates that a successful merge has been performed.
303
Configure an Object with Operator Actions

Configuring an Operator Action
You can configure an operator action for an object. The following procedure assumes that you
have already selected the object.
To configure an operator action

3. Click Add.
4. Select an action (such as Move Horizontal) and click OK.
Depending on the selected action, a dialog box (such as the Move Horizontal dialog
box) appears.
5. Enter the variable and other configuration criteria.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Apply or OK.
Configuring a Momentary Contact Action

You can configure momentary contact action for an object. This permits you to move or click an
object, affecting a value of a process variable or system variable.
To configuring momentary contact action

3. Click the Action tab.
4. Click Add.
5. Select Momentary Contact, then click OK.
The Momentary Contact dialog box appears.
6. Select an object.
7. Select a pulse type.
8. Select an option.
9. Click OK.
304
Using Momentary Contact with a Relative Pick

By using the Relative Pick action, you can define different durations for different variables.
To use momentary contact with a relative pick

1. In the Momentary Contact dialog box, type $PICK1 in the Tag field.
2. In the Relative Pick dialog box, type the following command in the Command
String field:
= PICK1 Compound:Block.Parameter
3. If you are setting a Packed Boolean or Packed Long, include the bit extension
acronym.
4. If you are using a Timed Pulse, configure the duration by piping it to the variable, as
follows:
= PICK1 Compound:Block.Parameter|T=pulse_time
NOTE
Pulse_time is the duration in seconds.
Using a Ramp with Relative Pick

To use with Relative Pick
1. In the Ramp dialog box, type $PICK1 in the Tag field.
2. In the Relative Pick dialog box, type the variable to be ramped.
Pipe the range or hard-coded limits to the variable. For example:
=PICK1 UC01_LEAD:SINE.MEAS|RI1
=PICK1 BATCH_1:SEQ.RO1|R=0.0,500.0
Using a Connect Variable with a Relative Pick

To use a connect variable with a relative pick
1. In the Connect Variable dialog box, type $PICK1 in the Tag field.
2. In the Relative Pick dialog box, type the following command in the Command
String field:
= PICK1 Compound:Block.Parameter
305
Executing a Script
To execute a script
1. Configure a display object with the Open Display action.
NOTE
To open an overlay, use an Open Overlay action instead.
2. Specify a script instead of a display file.

You can include the following commands in the script file:
Table 5-3. Commands in a Script File
Command Function
almhist Calls up the Alarm History Display from the local Historian.
close Closes current base display.
execute <file> Opens display in current FoxView or other FoxView instance.
nostack Omits display from queue.
ov Calls an overlay display.
rcntalms Displays the Current Alarm Display (CAD).
script Executes a display script.
stack Places display in queue (default).
stddisp Opens a detail display.
source Gets the source connection of a given parameter.
Refer to Display Manager Commands (B0193DF) for more information.
Protecting an Action with a Protection ID

In the Initial Environment, you can protect all actions with a Protection ID of 1.
In the Initial.acl file, type the following commands:
Table 5-4. Commands to Type in the Initial.acl File
Command Meaning
dmcmd script This is a script file.
dmcmd unprotect all Clear any existing protections from the Initial environment.
dmcmd protect 1 Make all actions with a Protection ID of 1 inaccessible.
306
Creating an Operator Action Horizontal Move

You can create an object that allows the operator to move it. The amount of movement sends data
to a process variable or system variable.
To create an Operator Action horizontal move

1. Create a triangle and set the reference point as described in Steps 1-3 of “Creating a
Dynamic Update Horizontal Move.”
2. With the triangle selected, choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
4. Click Add.
5. Select the Move Horizontal action and click OK.
The Move Horizontal dialog box appears.
6. Type the name of the variable, set the maximum and minimum values, and click Set
Location to set the high and low screen location for the triangle. Refer to Step 8 of
“Creating a Dynamic Update Horizontal Move” on page 298.
7. At the display, click first for the low location and then for the high location.
8. In the dialog box, check the locations, and click OK.
9. Click OK.
10. Save the display.
11. In FoxView, test the object. Drag and drop the triangle to set the assigned process
variable.
Creating a Base Display with Relative Pick and Open Overlay

Operator Actions
To create a base display with Relative Pick and Open Overlay Operator actions
1. Create the desired graphic objects (for example, a process vessel with pipe system and
several control valves).
Figure 5-3. Valve Examples
307
2. Select all the valves.

4. Select a valve.
5. Click the Action tab.
6. Click Add.
7. Select Relative Pick.
The Relative Pick Command Builder dialog box appears.
8. Type the following in the Command String box:
=PICK1 <Cmpname>:<Blkname>.<Parameter_name>
=P1 <Cmpname>
=P2 <Blkname>
For example, you might configure the first valve for UC01_LEAD:SINE.MEAS.
Figure 5-4. Relative Pick Command Builder - Dialog Box
9. Configure the other valves with the Relative Pick action, but assign a different
process variable.
10. Configure another graphic object, such as a pushbutton, with the Open Overlay
operator action.
308
To configure a standard faceplate or user-built faceplate

1. Select the faceplate.
3. Select the General tab and type a faceplate name.
4. Select the Scales/Delta tab and specify the new High, Low, and Delta values.
5. Select the Text Substitutions tab and type replacements for text that is config-
ured with angle brackets (< … >).
If you move or copy a display containing a faceplate to another workstation, copy the faceplate file
into the following directory on the other machine:
Table 5-5. Faceplate Directory Information
Standard Invensys/Foxboro
Workstation faceplate User-built faceplate
Solaris /opt/fox/displib/Face- /opt/customer/displib/Face-
plates plates
Windows \opt\fox\displib\Face- \opt\customer\displib\Face-
plates plates
Configuring a Trend
NOTE
During FoxView run time, an operator with permission can use the On-Line Trend
Configurator to temporarily or permanently override the trend’s configuration.
To configure a trend
1. Select the trend.
2. Choose Object > Configure Objects from the menu bar to open the Configure
Objects dialog box.
3. Select the General tab to begin trend configuration.
4. Select the Trend Area tab to configure the trend’s type (logarithmic or linear) time
stamp format (local or relative), markers, off-normal areas, background color and dis-
play style (banded or merged), and Y-axis parameters.
5. Select the Pens tab to configure each trend pen (color, object, marker, data (numeric
or Boolean), scale/range, and auto-scaling.
6. Select the Grid tab to configure grid settings and to add static lines.
7. Select the Timing tab to configure duration and scan rate.
8. Select the Security tab to configure access levels.
NOTE
Also refer to the On-Line Trend Configurator Help system available from FoxView.
309
Configuring a Single Block Trend

You can display variables from a single block on a trend.
To link a single block trend to a display

2. Type the compound and block names, or click C:B to view a list of system variables.
3. Select Link Trend.
4. Select Apply Control Values to retrieve the high/low scale, delta, and units from
the CP.
If not selected, FoxDraw retrieves the values from the block database file,
dspblock.dat.
5. Click OK.
The Select Block Type dialog box appears.
6. Select a block type.
7. Click OK.
8. Position the trend and left-click.
The single block trend is pasted to the display.
To change the single block trend type

By default, the single block trend is a group trend. Perform this procedure to specify another trend
type.
1. From the Options menu, choose User Options.
2. Select the Dynamics tab.
3. In the Single Block Trend Template field, enter a different trend type.
Configuring an X/Y Plot

This procedure assumes that you have selected an X/Y plot.
2. Select the General tab to begin the X/Y plot configuration.
3. Type a name for the X/Y plot.
4. Select the Plot Area tab.
5. Configure:
 Points (number, use of markers)
 Background color
 Object data filename to include polygon and polyline objects, or zones, to indi-
cate off-normal process values
The object data file specifies the behavior of each zone and plot lines when those
plot lines enter and exit the zones.
310
 X-axis and Y-axis scale data (such as linear/logarithmic, high and low values,
visibility).
6. Select the Plot Pen tab.
7. Click Add to open the Configure Plot Pen dialog box.
8. For each pen, configure:
 Time delay and marker style
 The data source and data points
 Specify a data file path in the Read Data File Name
 Use the pull-down list in the Historian field to select the historian instance
name (for example, hist01)
 X-axis and Y-axis scale data (such as scales, delta, units)
 Colors (leading real point, real point, file read data).
Click the Connect button to specify another value to drive the leading point
color.
Configuring a Base Display

After creating a base display file you must configure it. This includes copying objects to the base
display and creating new objects (by using FoxDraw drawing tools). You can configure the objects
with graphic and dynamic attributes. This procedure assumes that you have opened a base display
file via the Open command from FoxDraw File menu.
To configure a base display

1. Copy new objects to the base display by choosing these commands from the Object
menu:
 Link from Library
 Link Faceplate/Trend
 Link Bitmap
 Link/Copy from palette.
2. Create additional objects (such as rectangles or text) using FoxDraw drawing tools.
3. Configure the objects with graphic attributes, dynamics, and operator actions.
4. Choose Display Properties from the File menu.
5. Configure the base display’s properties
6. Choose Save from the File menu to save the base display.
7. Test the display in FoxView.
311
Alias Tutorial
A library object can comprise of one or more objects (components). Simple and complex library
objects can be partially or fully configured to compounds, blocks or parameters using aliases. For
information on alias syntax and usage, refer to the section on “Aliases” on page 96.
The components of a library object can expose the following:
1. Dynamic attributes.
2. Aliases.
a. The following properties of Dynamics are exposed through aliases:
 Tag-name and Range through text and range aliases respectively
 Values of Text Contents dynamic through text aliases.
b. The following properties of Operator dynamics are exposed through aliases:
 Action Name and Protection ID through text aliases
 Filename property of File Open and Overlay Open through text aliases
 Parts of the command of the Command String property of DM Command
and Relative Pick through text aliases.
c. Static text contents of the text and background text objects through text aliases.
3. Static (graphic) attributes through graphic aliases.
NOTE
The Operator dynamics of an object cannot be exposed. However, certain proper-
ties (listed above) of Operator dynamics can be exposed through aliases.
Prerequisites
In order to do this tutorial you require the following:
 Work on a station with access to compounds and blocks
 Have a compound with three configured PID type blocks
This tutorial uses the compound UC01_LEAD and PID blocks; SINE, COSINE and SQUARE.
When copying and pasting library objects in this tutorial, use the Ctrl+Drag method. Hold the
Ctrl key down while selecting an object and drag using the mouse to create a new copy.
If copy and paste are used from the pull down menu, or by the Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V method, the
library object is copied into the copy buffer. If the library object is in the copy buffer you will not
be able to make edits to the library object when the tutorial asks for edits.
312
Creating a Library Object Configured with Aliases

To create a textbox and expose the Text Contents through aliases
1. Create a new library object in FoxDraw.
2. Choose Background Text from the Draw menu, or click the Background Text
tool and draw the background text object.
3. With the object selected, choose Configure Objects from the Object menu.
The Configure Objects dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5. Configure Objects Dialog Box
5. Click Add.
6. Select the Text Contents dynamic and click OK.
The Text Contents dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5-6.
7. In the Tag field use separate aliases for compound, block and parameter, for instance,
{C}:{B}.{P}.
8. Check the Required check box to indicate that this alias must be resolved when this
library object is used in a base display.
9. Check the Expose dynamic check box to allow modification of the Text Contents
dynamic. For instance, to be able to change the Numeric format from Real to
Integer or any other type.
313
NOTE
By exposing the dynamic, the library object can be re-used, and its configuration
modified to serve different purposes.
Figure 5-6. Text Contents Dialog Box
10. Click OK to save the configuration.

Click Apply from the Configure Objects dialog box.
11. Select the General tab. The name of this object appears as Background Text.
Rename the object by typing Text_box in the Name field.
NOTE
As complex objects may have more than one object of the same type, having mean-
ingful names eases the identification process.

13. Save the library object in \opt\customer\displib with a prefix Gen_ to identify it as an
object with general configurations, and add a name to describe it, such as
Gen_TxtBox.
This makes locating these library objects easier as they would appear together in the
library list.
314
Using the Library Object in a Display

To resolve the exposed properties
1. Create a new base display.
2. Choose Link from Library from the Object menu.
Load and position the Gen_TxtBox object in the base display.
Figure 5-7. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Aliases Tab
NOTE
1. In the Configure Objects dialog box, two new tabs are available, the Aliases
and the Dynamics tab.
2. The Aliases tab displays a list of all exposed aliases associated with the selected
object.
3. The Dynamics tab displays a list of all exposed dynamics associated with the
selected object.
4. Select the Aliases tab.

The three aliases B, C, and P are listed.
5. Open the Edit Text Alias window by double clicking an alias or clicking the Edit
tool.
The Edit Text Alias dialog box appears as shown Figure 5-8, and allows you to
resolve the alias (at the base or intermediate level) or expose it further (at the interme-
diate level).
Since this is a base display, the required alias has to be resolved here.
315
Figure 5-8. Edit Text Alias Dialog Box
6. Check the Resolve check box, and give each alias the final compound, block param-
eter value in the Value field, as listed below:
a. {B} – SINE
a. {C} – UC01_LEAD
a. {P} – OUT
NOTE
1. Aliases are case-sensitive.
2. Use uppercase when resolving aliases to Compound:Block.Parameter.
7. Click Apply.
To edit the Gen_TxtBox object, click the Edit tool. The Text Contents dialog box
appears as shown in Figure 5-9.
NOTE
The Tag is pre-defined and you are only allowed to change the settings of the
configuration.
9. Set the Numeric format to Fixed Dec. Point 3.
316
Figure 5-9. Text Contents Dialog Box

11. In the main display, drag and copy the object that was just configured.
12. From the Configure Objects dialog box, click the Aliases tab.
The Configure Objects dialog box now appears as shown in Figure 5-10.
13. Click the Edit button to change the {B} alias value to COSINE.
317
14. Click the Dynamics tab, and click the Edit tool.
In the Text Contents dialog box, change the Numeric format to Fixed Dec.
Point 2.
16. Before saving, check the display for errors by selecting Verify Display from the
Tools menu, as shown in Figure 5-11.
NOTE
You can also have FoxDraw always verify displays prior to saving by setting the
Verify On Save option in the User Options menu.
Figure 5-11. Verify Display Option
17. View the display in FoxView by selecting the FoxView button from the horizontal
toolbar.
318
You are now using the same library object with completely different configurations
and settings.
Creating a Useful Library Object

In this procedure, you create a library object with two sets of text boxes, one for valve readouts
and one for pumps.
Given below are valve and pump specifications:
Valve and Pump Specifications

Fill Color Alarms
 Valve
a. Black for Normal – values < 60
b. Yellow for warning – values < 80
c. Red for Fail – values >= 80.
 Pump
a. Grey for Normal – values < 85
b. Red for Fail – values >= 85.
Text Color Alarm
 Valve
a. White
b. Black
c. Yellow
 Pump
a. White
b. Black.
Fill Blink Alarm
 Valve
a. Blink if in Manual
 Pump
a. Blink if in Auto.
Text Content – Configured. (Refer to the sections “Creating a Library Object Configured with
Aliases” on page 313 and “Using the Library Object in a Display” on page 315.)
User Action – Toggle the Manual/Auto when pressed.
Static Label – To identify the Block Name that the object is connected to.
MA Box – To identify the current state of Manual/Auto.
319
Creating a Library Object with Valve and Pump Specifications

You can create one object that meets both conditions. Configure an object with the valve specifi-
cations and expose the dynamics. These exposed configurations can be modified to meet the
pump specifications, when configured in the main display.
Open the Gen_Txtbox file in FoxDraw.
To configure the Text Contents dynamic

This specification has been completed. Refer to the section “Creating a Library Object Config-
ured with Aliases” on page 313 and “Using the Library Object in a Display” on page 315. The
textbox figure appears as shown in Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12. TextBox Example
To configure the Fill Color dynamic

2. From the Configure Objects dialog box, click the Update tab with the object
selected.
Click the Add icon.
3. In the Add Dynamic Update dialog box, choose Fill Color and click the
Threshold radio button.
Click OK to save the configuration.
4. The Fill Color - Threshold dialog box appears.
Enter the alias name in the Tag field as {C}:{B}.{P}, or select it from the pull down
list.
5. Click the Exposed check box.
This causes the dynamic to be exposed, making these colors available for change, for
the pumps.
NOTE
The Configure Objects dialog box for base displays and library objects do not have
the Expose dynamic and Required check boxes for the dynamic, and do not support
exposing aliases.
6. Set the Number of States to 3, and configure each state by double-clicking the
Operator, Value and Fill Color fields, as follows:
a. Black for Normal – Value < 60
b. Yellow for Warning – Value < 80
c. Red for Fail – Value >= 80
320
To configure the Text Color dynamic

selected.
Click the Add icon.
2. In the Add Dynamic Update dialog box, choose Text Color and click the
Threshold radio button.
3. The Text Color - Threshold dialog box appears.
Enter the alias name in the Tag field as {C}:{B}.{P} or select it from the pull down
list.
Operator, Value and Text Color fields, as follows:
a. State 1 < 60 – White
b. State 2 < 80 – Black
c. State 3 <= 100 – Yellow
To configure the Fill Blink dynamic

selected.
Click the Add icon.
2. In the Update dialog box, choose Fill Blink and click the Discrete radio but-
ton.
3. The Fill Blink - Discrete dialog box appears.
Enter the alias name in the Tag field as {C}:{B}.{P} or select it from the pull down
list.
Fill Blink field, as follows:
a. State 0 – Slow Blink
b. State 1 – No Blink
To configure the Operator Action

1. Select the Action tab from the Configure Objects dialog box.
Click the Add icon.
2. Select the Display Command Operator Action.
The Display Command Builder dialog box appears.
3. In the Command String field type toggle {C}:{B}.MA.
4. Select OK.
Click Apply on the configuration dialog.
321
To configure the Static Label

1. Add a text object, centered above the textbox object.
Refer to Figure 5-12.
2. Select the Text object tool and place the text object above the textbox object.
Type {B} as the label.
3. Set the Text Color to Black and Centered from the Graphic Attributes dia-
log box.
NOTE
The {B} alias is also part of the configuration tags used on the text content object.
When this library object is used and configured, the {B} alias appears only once
under the alias tab. When the single {B} alias is resolved, all references to {B},
including this text label, is replaced, when viewed in FoxView.
To configure the MA Box

1. Click on the Background Text tool to create an object next to the textbox object.
Enter text (black font) with a grey color background.
2. Select the object and open the Configure Objects dialog box.
Click the General tab, and name the object MA_Box.
3. Click the Update tab with the object selected. Click the Add icon.
4. Select the Text Contents dynamic and check the Bit State radio button.
The Text Contents - Bit State dialog box appears.
5. In the dialog box, enter {C}:{B}.BLKSTA in the Tag Field.
This configuration is common to both the Valve and Pump. It is the same for both
and does not have to be changed later. Do not expose the dynamic.
6. Double-click the first configuration line and set the MA bit to 0.
Set Text Contents to M.
7. Double-click the second configuration line and set the MA bit to 1.
Set Text Contents to A.
NOTE
Aliases could also be used here in place of M or A and defined later when used.
322
To identify the Override state of MA with a white fill color

1. Click the Add button, and from the Add Dynamic Update dialog box click Fill
Color and check the Bit State conversion type.
The Fill Color - Bit State dialog box appears.
2. Enter {C}:{B}.BLKSTA into the Tag Field.
Do not expose the dynamic.
3. Double-click the first configuration line and set the MAO bit to 1.
Set Fill Color to White.
4. Double-click the second configuration line and set the MAO bit to 0.
Set Fill Color to Grey.
5. Select OK and Apply to save the configuration.
Save the object with all the above configurations as Gen_Textbox2.
Using the Useful Library Object in a Display

Linking the library object into a display
Open the previous display and load the Gen_Textbox2 object into it.
Although the Gen_Textbox2 object has 7 different configurations, you have to define the aliases,
{C}, {B}, and {P} only once to re-configure the object.
To configure the Gen_Textbox2 object for a valve

1. The Gen_Textbox2 object was built to meet the specifications for a valve. Only the
aliases, {C}, {B}, and {P} need to be resolved in order to complete a valve
configuration.
 {B} – SINE
 {C} – UC01_LEAD
 {P} – OUT
To configure the Gen_Textbox2 object for a pump

There are several necessary edits needed in order to reconfigure the Gen_Textbox2 object to
meet the specifications for a pump.
1. Cntrl-drag and copy the Gen_Textbox2 object that was configured for a valve.
2. Change the {B} alias from SINE to COSINE.
4. To set the Fill Blink, do the following:
Set the Number of States in the Fill Blink dialog box to 2, and configure them
as follows:
a. State 0 – No Blink
b. State 1 – Slow Blink
c. Click OK to save the configuration.
323
5. To set the Fill Color, do the following:

Set the Number of States in the Fill Color dialog box to 2, and configure them
as follows:
a. State 1 Value < 85 Grey
b. State 2 Value <= 100 Red
6. To set the Text Color, do the following:
Set the Number of States in the Text Color dialog box to 2, and configure them
as follows:
a. State 1, Value < 85, White
b. State 2, Value <= 100, Black
Now you have two objects with ten different configurations that were created from
one object, making only few changes.
The customer also requires a label that identifies the Block connection. As the text
content of the label is in the alias format and uses the same alias as the one being used
for the block configuration, {B}, you do not have to redefine it.
8. Click the FoxView button, to view the display in FoxView and verify the configura-
tions.
Because FoxView applies the aliases only when opening the display, you do not
see the changes until viewed in FoxView.
Optional Configurations and Graphic Attributes

Configurations can be made optional by leaving the Required check box unchecked in the Edit
Text Alias dialog box, as shown in Figure 5-8. An optional unresolved alias is ignored when
viewed in FoxView.
NOTE
It is recommended that you use different alias names for optional and required con-
figurations. If the same aliases are used for both the optional and required configu-
rations, the optional configurations is configured when the required configuration
aliases are resolved.
324
Setting the Optional Configuration

To configure the aliases as optional
1. Open the Gen_textbox2 object and save it as Gen_OpTxtbox.
Make the Fill Color and Text Color dynamic configurations optional by changing
the aliases {C}, {B}, and {P} for these configurations.
This helps in identifying optional aliases, giving you the choice of ignoring them when
using the object later.
2. For the Text Color dynamic, add an o to represent optional.
Change the aliases in the Tag field to {oC}, {oB}, and {oP}.
3. For Fill Color, delete values in the Tag field and leave it blank.
Figure 5-13. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Update Tab
Setting Graphic Attributes

To add graphic attributes
An object can be configured with Graphic attributes.
To change the Text_box object’s Fill Color and Text Color, while it is being used.
1. Select the Text_Box and open the Configure Objects dialog box.
2. Select the Exp. Graphics tab.
3. Click the Add button, and select Fill Color from the Select Graphic Attri-
bute list that appears, as shown in Figure 5-14.
325
Figure 5-14. Select Graphic Attribute Dialog Box
4. The Edit Graphic Attribute Name dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 5-15.
5. Enter FColor in the Name field.
7. Click the Add button, and select Text Color from the Select Graphic Attri-
bute list.
9. The Edit Graphic Attribute Name dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 5-15.
10. Enter TColor in the Name field.
Figure 5-15. Edit Graphic Attribute Name Dialog Box
12. Click Apply.

13. Save the library object.
326
Using Objects with Optional Configurations and Graphical

Attributes in a Display
Linking the object into a base display
1. Open the base display and link the new Gen_OpTxtbox.
Select the object and open the Configure Objects window as shown in
Figure 5-16.
2. Click the Aliases tab.
The display includes {C}, {B}, {P}, {oC}, {oB}, and {oP} aliases, that need to be
defined.
3. Resolve only the required aliases {C}, {B}, and {P}, to UC01_LEAD, SINE and OUT.
Drag/copy the configured object. In this copied object, resolve all the optional aliases.
4. From the Aliases tab select the optional aliases (with an o) and resolve them.
Resolve optional aliases {oC}, {oB}, and {oP}, to values UC01_LEAD, SINE and OUT.
The Fill Color dynamic also needs to be resolved. No aliases were used in the con-
figuration from the original object. The Tag field was left blank, but the configuration
was exposed.
5. To resolve the Fill Color configuration, select the Dynamics tab and edit the Fill
Color configuration.
327
Figure 5-17. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Dynamics Tab
6. In the Fill Color dialog box, as aliases were not used for this configuration, the Tag
field is enabled. Enter UC01_LEAD:SINE.OUT into the Tag field and select OK.
The dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18. Fill Color Dialog Box
7. Quick view the objects in FoxView, by clicking the FoxView button.
328
NOTE
The first object does not use the Fill Color and Text Color configurations and
does not show Out-of-Service.
Complex Objects or Nested Objects

A complex library object comprises of multiple library objects with configured aliases.
Object Specifications
The Object specifications are as follows:
 The object is a simple loop that includes a tank with input flow, tank level and output
flow.
 A customer has 20 of these loops, of various sizes, and does not need the Fill Color
and Text Color configurations.
 Ten of the flow loops have a manual input and do not need an input flow area.
 Blocks for each flow loop are contained in separate compounds for each loop. The
tank color needs to be made changeable. Refer to Figure 5-19 and Figure 5-20 for a
pictorial representation.
Figure 5-19. Tank with Input and Output Flow
Figure 5-20. Tank with Output Flow
329
Creating a Complex or Nested Object

Create a new library object. In this object add a tank, a pipe for inflow and a pipe for outflow.
Add a flow meter to the input and output, and add a fill level bar for the tank.
Configuration assumptions
 All the blocks for a loop reside in one compound.
 The following three blocks are used:
 Input – IN_BLK
 Output – OUT_BLK
 Fill Level – LVL_BLK.
 Each of the blocks reside in the same compound, CMP.
 Use R for the range alias. (The size of the tanks may vary for each use of this object, so
the range cannot be a fixed value. By using aliases for ranges they can be redefined
when used.)
To configure the Fill Level bar

1. Configure the Fill level bar to Fill Level - Continuous.
2. Set the Tag to {CMP}:{LVL_BLK}.MEAS.
3. Set the Fill level dynamic’s Scales option to RunTime.
Check the Range alias check box and enter the alias, R, for the range.
The Fill Level - Continuous dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5-21.
Figure 5-21. Fill Level Dialog Box

5. Click Apply on the configuration dialog.
330
To configure the text readout for Input Flow, Fill Level, and Output Flow
The compound and block names are not known so use aliases for them.
1. Link the Gen_OpTxtBox library object to the display.
2. Select the Gen_OpTxtBox library object, and open the Configure Objects window.
3. Give the object a new name, IN_TXT, under the General tab of the Configure
Objects window.
4. From the Aliases tab, select the {B} alias and open the Edit Text Alias dialog.
In the Expose Alias section, check the Expose and Rename boxes.
Rename {B} to IN_BLK. The dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22. Edit Text Alias Dialog Box
5. From the Aliases tab select the {C} alias and open the Edit Text Alias dialog.
6. In the Expose Alias section, check the Expose and Rename boxes.
Rename {C} to CMP.
331
7. From the Aliases tab select the {P} alias and open the Edit Text Alias dialog.
In the Resolve Alias section, check the Resolve check box and enter the value as
OUT.
The Configure Objects dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 5-23.
The optional configurations are not needed. Do not rename or resolve the optional
aliases. They are however, still exposed. This means that the optional configurations
are available whenever this object is used. To prevent the optional configurations from
appearing or being accidentally resolved, select each alias and edit them. Uncheck the
expose box in the Expose Alias section. This hides the unwanted configurations.
8. Drag/copy the IN_TXT object and re-configure it as follows for Fill Level:
a. Change {C}, {B}, and {P} aliases to {CMP}, {LVL_BLK} and MEAS respectively.
b. Give the object a new name under the General tab of the Configure Objects
window.
Name the object LVL_TXT.
9. Drag/copy the object again and reconfigure it as follows for the output:
a. Change {C}, {B}, and {P} aliases to {CMP}, {OUT_BLK} and OUT respectively.
b. Give the object a new name under the General tab of the Configure Objects
window.
Name the object OUT_TXT.
10. To make the Input Flow area optional, group the input objects together and add the
Visibility graphic attribute.
Name the object VIS_INPUT.
332
To set the Fill Color graphic attribute

Instead of editing each tank component to change the color, you can assign the same Graphic
Attribute alias to all components representing the tank color. This way, they can all be changed by
editing one alias.
1. Select the tank objects and find the components that represent the tank’s color.
For each object, assign an exposed Fill Color graphic attribute and name it fcolor
as shown in Figure 5-24.
Figure 5-24. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Exp. Graphics Tab
2. Click Apply.
3. Save the new object as Flowloop1.
333
Using the Complex or Nested Object in a Display

1. Open the base display and link the Flowloop1 library object.
Select it and open the Configure Objects window as shown in Figure 5-25.
2. Four aliases, CMP, IN_BLK, LVL_BLK, and OUT_BLK are displayed. (If the optional
aliases appear, that is because they were exposed.)
3. Resolve the aliases as follows:

 {CMP} – UC01_LEAD
 {IN_BLK} – SINE
 {LVL_BLK} – COSINE
 {OUT_BLK} – SQUARE.
In the Configure Objects window a new tab, Ranges, appears. This new tab is a
result of adding a range alias. Once the aliases under the Aliases tab have been
resolved, the range aliases can be resolved.
334
4. Select the Ranges tab to resolve the range alias. The Configure Objects dialog
box appears as shown in Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Ranges Tab
NOTE
If the aliases that appear when you click the Aliases tab are not resolved, nothing
appears under the ranges tab.
5. Select the configuration and click the Edit icon to open the Edit Range Alias
dialog box, as shown in Figure 5-27.
Figure 5-27. Edit Range Alias - Dialog Box
From this dialog box, you can resolve the range and change its value.
335
6. From the Configure Objects window, select the Graphics tab.

The screen appears as shown in Figure 5-28.
The display includes eight items, a Tcolor and Fcolor for each of the text boxes,
Visibility for the Input group and Fcolor for the Tank object.
Figure 5-28. Configure Objects Dialog Box - Graphics Tab
7. Select OK.
336
8. Make a second copy of this configured Flowloop1 object and make the Input Flow
Invisible and the tank color red.
The final display appears as shown in Figure 5-29.
Figure 5-29. Display in FoxDraw
In FoxView, the display appears as shown in Figure 5-30.
337
Figure 5-30. Display in FoxView
338
Work with Multiple Objects

Modifying One or More Objects
If object(s) are selected, choosing Graphic Attributes from the Object menu invokes the
Set Selection Attributes dialog box.
To modify all selected objects

 If you have selected more than one object, select Apply to All.
To change only the focused object

 Clear Apply to All.
Selecting an Undetectable Object

To select an undetectable object
 Perform one of these actions:
 Lasso the object.
 From the Edit menu, choose Select All.
NOTE
Although you can select the object, you cannot drag it.
Hiding an Object
To hide an object
You can turn off an object’s visibility.
1. Choose Select All from the Edit menu.
2. Choose Visibility Off from the Objects menu.
Restoring Visibility of a Hidden Object

To restore visibility of hidden objects
1. Choose Select All from the Edit menu.
2. Choose Visibility On from the Object menu.
Ordering Objects
You can order selected objects from front to back.
1. Press and hold the Shift key.
2. Click the objects one by one.
3. From the Order menu, choose By Selection.
339
Spacing Objects Evenly

When you space objects evenly, the center points of all selected objects are placed equidistant
from each other.
The following objects have evenly spaced center points.
Use the layout menu’s Space Evenly command or button to space the selected objects.
Operate on a Point
Adding a Point
To add a point
1. Choose Point from the Draw menu, or click .
2. Select the desired object.
3. Press and hold the Ctrl key, select an existing point and drag.
4. Release the mouse button.
NOTE
When you add a point to a line, the line becomes a polyline.
Deleting a Point
To delete a point
3. Select the point to be deleted.
4. Press the DELETE key.
Moving a Point
To move a point
The object’s points are identified with blue circles.
3. Drag the point with the mouse. All move constraints apply.
340
Setting a Reference Point

Every object has a reference point. By default, the reference point is the center of the object.
You can specify a different location as the reference point.
To set the reference point

2. From the Object menu, choose Set Reference Point.
3. Left-click at the desired location.
4. When a red X appears, drag it to where you want it.
The X disappears, and the new reference point is set.
To reset a reference point

You can restore the default reference point.
2. From the Object menu, choose Set Reference Point.
3. Choose Reset Reference Point.
Changing and Checking a Reference Point

To set a reference point
2. Perform one of the following actions:
 From the Object menu, choose Reference Point, then choose Set Refer-
ence Point.
 Click .
The current reference point appears as a small red X.
3. Click the desired new location.
NOTE
To check the location of the reference point without changing it, click
Set Reference Point and locate the red X. Then click the Select tool.
Identifying an Object’s Points

To identify an object’s points
 Click on the Point tool and select the object. The points are circled.
341
Changing a Reference Point

To change a reference point
1. From the Object menu, choose Reference Point.
2. Choose Reset Reference Point.
Enabling Display Focus Mode

From the Edit Dynamics/tag names dialog box, you can enable/disable display focus mode.
In change focus mode, the focus is on the object of the selected dynamic element in the dynamic
element’s table. This mode provides visual feedback when you select a new dynamic element.
The disadvantage of change focus mode is that each time the dialog box changes display focus, the
change focus action is added to the FoxDraw undo/redo buffer, which has a limited size.
By default, this option is disabled.
To enable display focus mode

 Select Change Focus.
Snapping an Object’s Center to the Nearest Grid Intersection

You can use the following procedure when Snap to Grid is selected.
To snap the center point of an object to the nearest grid intersection

1. From the View menu, choose Point Modes and then choose Center.
Alternatively, click the Center Mode button.
This places the object in Center mode.
2. Drag the object to the intersection.
Snapping an Object’s Point to the Nearest Grid Intersection

NOTE
The Snap to Grid option must be enabled to perform the following procedure.
To snap any point in an object to the nearest grid intersection

1. From the View menu, choose Point Modes and then choose Point.
Alternatively, click the Point Mode button.
This places the object in Point mode.
2. Click the desired point in an object and drag the point to the intersection.
342
Snapping an Object’s Reference Point to the Nearest Grid

Intersection
You can use the following procedure when Snap to Grid is selected.
To snap the reference point of an object to the nearest grid intersection

1. From the View menu, choose Point Modes and then choose Reference.
Alternatively, click the Reference Mode button.
This places the object in Reference mode.
2. Drag the object to the intersection.
Move and Size an Object

Moving an Object
To move an object
1. Click the Select tool.
2. Place the mouse pointer on the object(s) you want to move, and click the left mouse
button.
A selection rectangle encloses the object.
3. While keeping the mouse pointer on the object, hold down the left mouse button and
drag the object to the desired location.
NOTE
Be sure to position the pointer directly on the object. Placing the pointer anywhere
inside the selection rectangle does not work.
Moving Object Points

To move an object’s points
1. Click the Point tool.
2. Click on the desired object.
The object becomes selected and its points are identified with circles.
3. Drag the point with the mouse.
NOTE
Constrain movement horizontally or vertically by pressing and holding the key-
board’s Shift key as you drag.
343
The movable point in each object is listed in Table 5-6.
Table 5-6. Object Types and their Movable Point
Object You can move

Line Either of the end points
Polyline Any point
Rectangle Any corner point (this re-sizes the rectangle)
Polygon Any corner point
Curve and Closed Curve Any point
Circle Any point on the edge (this proportionally scales the circle)
Pie, Sector Either of the end points (this changes the arc or radius)
Background text Any corner point of the rectangle (this re-sizes the rectangle without
changing the text size)
You cannot move points on these objects:

 Text
 Linked library objects
 Linked bitmaps.
Adjusting Arrow Key Precision

You can position objects using the keyboard’s arrow keys.
You can adjust the precision of the keyboard’s arrow keys. The tighter the precision, the more con-
trol you have in positioning objects.
To obtain the highest accuracy

1. From the Layout menu, deselect Fast Arrow Move.
4. Make sure the slow Move Arrow Distance is set less than 0.10.
Moving an Object Horizontally or Vertically

You can move an object horizontally or vertically.
To move an object on a true horizontal or vertical axis with the mouse

1. Press and hold the Shift key while moving the object.
2. Release the Shift key after you release the left mouse button.
NOTE
Releasing the Shift key too soon may move the object involuntarily.
344
Using Snap Gravity

The following procedures apply when Snap Gravity is selected.
To snap any point in an object to the nearest point on a target object

1. From the View menu, choose Point Modes and then Point.
This places the object in Point mode.
2. Click the desired point in an object and drag the point to the target.
To snap the center point of an object to the nearest point on a target object
1. From the View menu, choose Point Modes and then Center.
This places the object in Center mode.
2. Drag the object to the target.
To snap the reference point of an object to the nearest point on a target object
1. From the View menu, choose Point Modes and then Reference.
This places the object in Reference mode.
2. Drag the object to the target.
Rotating an Object
There are many ways to rotate an object.
To rotate an object
Perform one of these action to rotate the selected object.
 Select the object and choose Rotate from the Layout menu. Then choose an angular
rotation of 15, 30, 45, or 90 degrees. Choose Custom to type an integer value to spec-
ify other angular measurements.
 Click a button on the Rotate toolbar or type an integer into the Rotation Entry box
on the Rotate toolbar.
To rotate an object manually

1. From the Draw menu, choose Select tool, or click the button .
3. Press and hold the Ctrl key and drag any of the object’s selection handles.
The object rotates on the point opposite the handle selected for rotation.
4. When you are done rotating the object, release the mouse button and Ctrl key.
345
Scaling an Object
To scale an object horizontally
You can change an object’s width.
 Drag the object’s right or left selection handle.
To scale an object vertically

You can change an object’s height.
 Drag the object’s top or bottom selection handle.
To scale both horizontally and vertically

 Drag one of the object’s corner selection handles.
To proportionally scale an object

You can scale an object proportionally. Doing so maintains the object’s height-to-width ratio.
 Press the Shift key and drag any of the object’s selection handles.
When Point mode is selected (default mode), scaling is relative to the handle opposite the handle
that you select for scaling. For example, if you drag the upper-right selection handle, the lower-left
handle remains anchored.
When you select Center mode, an object grows or shrinks in all directions from its center or
toward its center. The center point is anchored.
When you select Reference mode, an object grows or shrinks from or toward its reference point.
The reference point is anchored.
346
Perform Basic Operations on an Object

Deleting an Object
To delete an object
1. Select the object(s) you wish to delete.
2. Choose Delete or cut from the Edit menu, press DEL, or click .
Copying an Object
To copy an object
1. Select the object(s).
2. Choose Copy from the Edit menu.
TIP
Press Ctrl+C or click .
If desired, you can paste the object(s) elsewhere.
Duplicating an Object
To duplicate an object
1. Select the object(s) you wish to duplicate.
2. Choose Duplicate from the Edit menu or press Ctrl+D.
3. The mouse pointer changes to a frame that indicates the size of the object(s) to be
pasted.
4. Position the frame and left-click the mouse.
Cutting an Object
To cut an object
1. Select the object(s).
2. Choose Cut from the Edit menu.
TIP
Press Ctrl+X or click .
If desired, you can paste the object(s) elsewhere.
347
Pasting an Object
To paste an object
1. Choose Paste from the Edit menu.
TIP
Press Ctrl+V or click .
2. The mouse pointer changes to a frame that indicates the size of the object(s) to be
pasted.
3. Position the frame and click the left mouse button to paste.
NOTE
To cancel the paste operation, click the right mouse button.
Determining Whether an Object is Copied or Linked

To determine whether an object is copied or linked
A copied object is identified with a Group icon:
A linked object is identified with a Link icon:
348
Work with Palettes

Copying an Object from a Palette
You can easily build displays by copying objects from palettes. Palettes are windows that provide
many objects that you can copy and then paste to your display. Some objects are links and some
are copies.
NOTE
Open multiple palettes and move them as desired. By opening a palette, you can
view its contents.
To open a palette
1. From the Object menu, choose Link/Copy from Palette.
The Select Palette dialog box appears, displaying the list of Foxboro supplied pal-
ettes and user-built palettes.
2. Select a palette.
3. Click Load.
The palette opens in your drawing area.
TIP
While you work, keep the Select Palette dialog box open to conveniently access
additional palettes.
To select an object from a palette

1. Click the object.
2. Move the pointer to the drawing area.
The pointer changes to a layout frame the same size as the palette object.
3. Position the frame and left-click.
NOTE
To cancel the operation, right-click the mouse.
To place multiple copies of the object

1. From the Draw menu, choose Multi Create before you select the palette object.
Follow the directions above for selecting an object from a palette.
2. Left-click for each placement.
3. When you are done, right-click the mouse.
NOTE
You may also want to deselect Multi Create.
349
Enabling Support of an External Palette

You can display the name of one directory in the External Palettes portion of the Select
Palette dialog box.
To specify an external palette

1. Choose User Options from the Options menu.
2. Select the External Palettes tab.
3. Select the Use External Palettes check box.
If this check box is not selected, there is no access to External Palettes from the
Select Palettes dialog box.
4. Click Location.
5. Navigate to the directory of interest and click OK.
6. Click OK to exit the dialog box.
Copying a Palette Without Using the Palette Browser

You can copy a palette into the Palettes directory or a directory immediately below this directory.
To copy a palette
 (Windows) From Windows Explorer, copy the palette to
\opt\customer\displib\Palettes.
 (Solaris) From a command window, copy the palette to
/opt/customer/displib/Palettes.
2. If necessary, rename the copied file.
NOTE
FoxDraw recognizes only the first occurrence of a palette filename. Thus, if a simi-
larly named palette is located in more than one location, FoxDraw recognizes only
the first file.
350
Copying a Palette With the Palette Browser

Use the Palette Browser utility to:
 View lists of external palettes.
 Copy (install) an external palette into the /opt/customer/displib/Palettes
directory tree.
NOTE
The Palette Browser utility allows you to view all the palettes and library objects on
the external directory.
To copy an external palette using the Palette Browser utility

1. From the Tools menu, choose Palette Browser.
The Palette Browser dialog box appears.
2. Refer to the Palette Browser on-line Help available from the Palette Browser dia-
log box.
351
Work With Toolbars

Displaying or Hiding Toolbars
You can display or hide FoxDraw toolbars.
NOTE
You can also enable/disable the display of the Status bar and ToolTips.
To display a toolbar
1. From the View menu, choose Toolbars.
2. Select one or more of the following:
 Standard
 Draw
 Layout
 Rotate
 Status.
NOTE
Hide a toolbar by deselecting the option.
Moving and Resizing a Toolbar

You can move a toolbar outside the main FoxDraw window if you like.
To move a toolbar
1. Position the mouse pointer in an empty area on the toolbar.
2. Drag the toolbar to the desired location.
While you drag the toolbar, FoxDraw displays it as a heavy outline.
Displaying ToolTips
If the ToolTips option is enabled, you can pass the mouse pointer over a toolbar button for a sec-
ond or two to view the tooltip.
To display tooltips
1. From the View menu, choose Toolbars.
2. Select Tooltips.
352
Perform Miscellaneous Tasks

Starting FoxDraw
If desired, you can run multiple instances of FoxDraw.
Table 5-7. Starting FoxDraw - Options
To start FoxDraw from Do this

FoxView Choose FoxDraw from the Config menu.
Explorer Double-click a file with an .m1 or .fdf extension. FoxDraw can edit
these file types.
If the message No application associated with this file
appears, choose Associate from the File menu and select FoxDraw
Display. Refer to your Windows documentation for more informa-
tion on associating file types with specific applications.
A command prompt Enter \opt\fox\wp\foxdraw\foxdraw.exe to open the most
window recently used file.
If there has been no previous editing session, FoxDraw opens with a
new base display.
To start FoxDraw with a specific display, enter: \usr\fox\wp\fox-
draw\foxdraw.exe <filename>.fdf
To start with a new base display, enter:
\usr\fox\wp\foxdraw\foxdraw.exe -NEW.
Obtaining Statistics about the Selected Display

You can obtain statistics about the selected display. You can readily view the number of objects,
library objects, trends, bitmaps, tags, passive dynamics, and operator dynamics.
The state of the Recursively option affects this count.
Predicting Display Call-Up Time

FoxDraw provides statistics to help you to predict a display’s call up time, which is composed of
data collection (such as a value or status for each of the object’s process variables) and the time
required to draw each image. This tab’s complexity index field indicates the relative time to draw
the display.
NOTE
FoxView does not display an object until after the object’s data has been collected.
353
To obtain statistics about the selected display

1. From the File menu, choose Display Properties.
2. Click the Statistics tab.
3. Select or deselect Recursively to view additional details.
4. Click one of the More buttons to view detailed data about the item.
Viewing a Display in FoxView

From FoxDraw, you can view how a display looks in FoxView.
NOTE
Each FoxDraw display must first be saved before you can view it in FoxView. You
can speed up the viewing process by selecting the Always save the model option, as
described below. Once this option is selected, FoxDraw automatically saves the dis-
play without additional querying, and the Warning dialog box no longer appears.
To instantly view a display

 Choose FoxView from the View menu.
 Click the FoxView button.
A Warning dialog box appears, requesting that you first save the display.
NOTE
If the Always save the model option has previously been selected, the Warning dia-
log box does not appear, the display is automatically saved, and you can skip Step 2.
2. Click Save to save the display.

The display file is automatically saved. The display appears in FoxView.
3. View the display.
If you are not satisfied with the display, continue building the display in FoxDraw and
retest in FoxView.
Setting Maximum Undo Number

The depth of the undo buffer is determined by a maximum setting. You can change this setting.
To change the maximum number of undo operations

3. In the Maximum Undo Number box, type a number from 1 to 300.
354
NOTE
If you are running on a heavily loaded system with limited resources, limit the size
of the undo buffer to conserve memory.
Configuring Backup Capability

You can configure FoxDraw to permit recovery of display files saved during a system crash.
To configure backup capability

3. Select the Backup check box.
4. In the Interval box, specify a time (in minutes) to perform an automatic save.
5. Choose OK.
Recovering Backup Files

If FoxDraw crashes, you can recover files on which you had been working.
NOTE
The following procedure applies only when there are files to be recovered.
To recover files
1. From the File menu, choose Recover.
The Recover Backup Files dialog box appears.
2. From the list box, select the files you want to recover.
3. Click Recover.
Converting a Display File

Use the Convert utility to convert display files from one type to another.
To convert a display file

 Choose Display Converter from the FoxDraw Tools menu.
The Convert Display Files dialog box appears.
Refer to the Convert Utility On-line Help.
Moving Files
There are three main steps in moving displays between platforms:
 Converting binary .fdf displays and library objects (.m1) to ASCII .g format on the
source workstation.
 Moving the .g files from the source to the destination workstation.
 Converting ASCII .g displays to binary .fdf files on the destination workstation.
355
For information on converting Displays and Library Objects refer to “Converting Display Files
and Library Objects” on page 407.
Moving .g Files
To move the .g files:
1. Copy the converted displays and library objects (the .g files only, not the .fdf or .m1
files) to a diskette, but do not copy them directly. Tar them into a single file and copy
the tar file to the diskette. If you do not do this, the filenames are forced to
MS-DOS® 8.3 format. Refer to “Known Issues in Moving Files Between Platforms”
on page 356 below.
2. Use the tar extract command to extract the displays and library objects into the
/opt directory on the target system. Library objects must go into the directory
/opt/customer/displib/Symbols.
Moving Environment Files

To move the environment files:
1. Copy any customized environments from the Windows workstation. Use tar, and
not copy to avoid MS-DOS 8.3 format filename problems.
2. Since Windows and Solaris environment files may be slightly different, merge the
edits instead of replacing files.
3. Place the files in the /opt/fox/env directory.
Known Issues in Moving Files Between Platforms

1. Solaris allows mounting an MS-DOS (Windows) diskette through the /pcfs file
system. This allows files to be copied to and from diskette on both platforms.
However, Windows allows “long” filenames which are not supported by Solaris.
Solaris forces all filenames to their MS-DOS 8.3 equivalents.
2. If filenames safely fit the MS-DOS 8.3 format naming convention, they can be
transferred to diskette with copy (Windows) or cp (Solaris). If they do not fit the
8.3 convention, they must be tar’d into another file and the resulting tar file copied
onto diskette. It is also possible to tar directly to diskette – the tar utility is shipped
on both Windows and Solaris platforms and the format is compatible.
3. Filenames in Windows are not case sensitive. That means that Windows regards the
filenames TOWER1.fdf, Tower1.fdf, and tower1.fdf as referring to the same file.
On the other hand, Solaris filenames are case sensitive. Solaris regards the above
names as referring to three different files. Be sure that the names of your displays,
library objects, and overlays account for this difference. For instance, if you have a dis-
play which invokes an overlay named Tower1.fdf, the overlay could have the name
TOWER1.fdf on the Windows workstation and the overlay would be displayed cor-
rectly. However, on the Solaris workstation, the overlay would not be found and
would not display.
4. Although font mapping between platforms is relatively good, displays created on one
platform and moved to another have detectable differences in font size and location.
In addition, since fonts are not infinitely scalable, relative size and position vary,
356
depending on the size of the FoxView/FoxDraw window. For best results, create
displays at the size that they are viewed most frequently.
5. If font size and position are extremely important, it may be advisable to use Hershey
fonts. Hershey fonts are created from line segments which can be positioned and
scaled to the nearest pixel. They can also be rotated to arbitrary angles.
6. If you rotated or scaled a display object in FoxDraw and did not specify a reference
point, an invalid reference point is added, making the object appear in the wrong
location after it is moved from Solaris to Windows. If the object also has a move hori-
zontal or move vertical dynamic update, the reference point for the move is incorrect.
To fix this problem, select the object in FoxDraw and specify a reference point at the
center.
Changing the Visibility of Comment Objects

To view comment objects
 Perform one of these actions
 From the View menu, choose Show Comments.
 Click .
A checkmark appears next to the command in the menu.
To not view comment objects

 Perform one of these actions
 From the View menu, choose Show Comments.
 Click .
The checkmark no longer appears next to the command in the menu.
Testing a Generic Overlay

To test a generic overlay
1. In FoxView, open the base display.
2. Select the first valve to make the Relative Pick equal to UC01_LEAD:SINE.
3. Click the pushbutton.
The overlay opens.
4. Verify that the appropriate compound and block data display in the overlay.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to test the other Relative Picks.
Using the FoxDraw Help

From most FoxDraw dialog boxes, you can view the On-line Help by clicking the dialog box’s
Help button.
On Windows workstations, access the On-line Help by pressing F1 at a dialog box. You can high-
light a menu command and press F1 to invoke Help on that command.
In a Help topic, you can click on green underlined text for related information.
357
To view a list of Help topics

 Choose Contents from the Help menu.
 Click the Contents button in a Help topic window.
To browse a sequence of topics

 Click the Previous (<<) and Next (>>) buttons.
 Click the Back button to retrace your path.
 Choose Display History Window from the Help system’s Option menu.
A list of previously displayed topics appears.
To print any topic

 From the Help window’s File menu, choose Print Topic.
Make API Server Connections

FoxDraw can connect to any workstation that has the FoxAPI or AIM*API server software
installed. To install and start the FoxAPI server on an AW51, refer to FoxAPI Installation Guide
(B0193UC). Refer to AIM*AT Installation Guide (B0193YM) for information on setting up cli-
ent connections to AIM*API servers.
Use the API Server Connection Utility to configure connections to remote FoxAPI servers. There
are two methods for connecting:
 Adding workstations using the API Server Connection Utility dialog box. This
method requires that you know the workstation name (letterbug) and TCP/IP address
of each target workstation, and which API server software is installed.
 Enabling the workstation to auto-discover available workstations with the Broadcast
Request feature. This feature, which is enabled or disabled in the API Server Connec-
tion Utility, is applied to all AIM*API and FoxAPI clients on the workstation.
Retrieving a Server’s Address and Letterbug

AW70
To locate the server’s TCP/IP address on an AW70:
1. At the server, select Control Panel and then Network to open the Network Set-
tings dialog box.
2. Highlight TCP/IP Protocol and click Configure to display the TCP/IP Config-
uration dialog.
3. Record the IP address.
4. Click Cancel to close both dialog boxes.
NOTE
Do not click the OK button. If you click OK, a reboot is required.
To locate an AW70’s I/A Series letterbug (GCLBUG)
358
1. At the server, select Control Panel and then System.

The System dialog box appears.
2. Locate GCLBUG in the System Environment Variables list and record the
definition.
3. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
AW51 Procedures
To locate the server’s TCP/IP address on an AW51:
1. In the command tool window, type:
cd /etc
2. Type:
prtconf
3. Locate this line:
le, instance #0
or
le, instance #1
and so on, where <number> is the digit after the pound sign (#).
4. Type:
view <hostname>.le<number>
5. Type:
cat hosts | grep <hostname>
The TCP/IP address appears on your screen.
The letterbug is a system environment variable.
To locate an AW51’s I/A Series letterbug (GCLBUG):
 From any directory, type:
printenv GCLBUG
Configuring Client Connections

To set up client/server connection with an AIM*API or FoxAPI server:
1. Choose Options > Configure Servers from the menu bar to open the API Server
Connection Utility dialog box.
2. Enter the server workstation letterbug in the AW Name field and its TCI/IP address in
IP Address.
3. Click FOXAPI in the Server Port Connection group to identify the type of server
installed.
The utility uses this selection to add the appropriate server-side port number to the
configuration.
4. Click Apply.
The workstation’s letterbug is added to the AW Stations list.
5. Check the Disable Broadcast Request box if you only want to show the config-
ured workstations in the available servers list in the Servers tab of User Options dialog
box.
359
Note this selection is applied to all AIM*API and FoxAPI clients on the FoxDraw
host.
6. Set the Broadcast timeout if FoxDraw if using Broadcast Request to auto-discover
available servers.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box.
8. Choose Options > User Options from the menu bar.
9. Click the Servers tab in the User Options dialog box.
10. Use the pull-down list to select the just configured workstation and test the
connection.
11. If the connection fails, return to the API Server Connection Utility to correct
any errors in the TCP/IP number or server port selection.
Work with Fonts

Adding and Deleting Fonts
To add an individual font
1. Choose the Options > Font Setup from the menu bar to open the Font Setup dia-
log box.
2. Select the font and click Add.
To load all available fonts

log box.
2. Click Add All.
To remove a currently loaded font

You cannot remove FoxDraw default fonts, which include the basic TrueType fonts and all 18
Hershey fonts.
log box.
2. Select the font and click Remove.
NOTE
When you remove a font from the Loaded Fonts list, FoxDraw does not delete the
font from your system. The font becomes unavailable for use in displays. You can
restore the font to the Loaded Fonts list at any time.
Adding or Removing a Font

The fontdef.dat file lists all the fonts and styles available in FoxDraw. This ASCII file is located in
\usr\fox\wp\data.
360
Certain fonts are required for the correct operation of FoxDraw. Other fonts are optional, and can
be added or deleted as desired.
To add or remove a font

1. Copy the font file to your data directory:
\opt\customer\data
Your file takes precedence over the Invensys/Foxboro supplied file.
2. Choose Options > Font Setup from the menu bar.
3. Restart FoxDraw to use the new fonts.
361
362
Appendix A. Display Edit or DEdit
This appendix describes DEdit, a tool used with Foxboro display files. The appendix describes
DEdit reports, file statistics, and properties. It also discusses compound, block, and parameter
name replacements.
Overview of DEdit
DEdit or Display Edit is a tool used to modify or report on the following Foxboro display file
types:
 Foxboro display format (.fdf ) files
 SL archive format (.m1) files.
Replacing References in Display Files

Use DEdit to replace compound, block, and parameter names and/or any arbitrary text strings in
any text object.
Generating Reports on Display Element Files

Use DEdit to:
 Generate Connection reports containing information on the type of display and tag-
names referenced in Foxboro display files.
 Generate Complexity reports that describe all the parts and configurations for a dis-
play file.
 Generate Exception reports which list non-existent tag-names.
 Validate the tag-names configured for a display. The Connection and the Complexity
reports can be created with the validate connection flag.
 Create ASCII dump files of display objects, listing all tag-names and text objects
embedded in objects.
 Upload a modified dump file, replacing the original display file.
 Change the color of object’s edges, fill colors and marker colors using the Dump and
the Upload mechanism.
 Change the Access level for specific objects.
Using DEdit
Whether invoked from FoxDraw or invoked as a stand-alone utility with no arguments, DEdit
displays a graphical user interface called the DEdit window. From this window, you can generate
reports or modify any number of files with a single replacement in one operation.
You can also invoke DEdit in a batch mode, where command line arguments specify the type of
operation or replacement desired and the file to be modified or reported on.
363
B0700BE – Rev F Appendix A. Display Edit or DEdit
Invoking DEdit from FoxDraw

You can invoke DEdit by selecting the Display Edit (DEdit) option from the Tools menu.
Invoking DEdit from a Command Window

You can invoke DEdit from a command window with command line arguments. This allows you
to perform most actions available from the DEdit window. The window does not display when
you use unrecognized command line arguments.
To invoke DEdit from a command window, enter:
c:\opt\fox\wp\FoxDraw\dedit
In all cases, the output of command line operations is placed in a file called dedit.log (by default)
in the current directory.
NOTE
Argument keywords are case sensitive. Do not place spaces between arguments, but
use a space between options. For example, a space is required between option -m
and -c in the following command:
dedit -m -c/MatchString/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
Supported Features and Parameters

Use command line invocation to:
Table A-1. Command Line Arguments
Feature Command Line and Parameter

Replace any combination of com- dedit -c/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
pound, block, and parameter
strings
Replace any combination of com- dedit -c/MatchString/FindString/ReplaceS-
pound, block, and parameter tring/
FileList
strings with matching
Generate a Connection report dedit -R FileList
Generate a Where Used report dedit -where RootDirectory [-wuout File-
Name.txt]
Write DEdit Help information to a dedit -h
file
Change the log file’s path and name dedit -L FileName
Generate a Complexity report dedit -cr FileList
Generate a summary Complexity dedit -crsummary FileList
report
364
Appendix A. Display Edit or DEdit B0700BE – Rev F
Table A-1. Command Line Arguments (Continued)
Feature Command Line and Parameter

Replace any text string dedit -t/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
dedit -t/MatchString/FindString/ReplaceS-
tring/
FileList
Create a dump file dedit -dump FileList
Upload a dump file dedit -upload FileList
Validate points (off by default, and -val
used with -cr and -R)
Disable all dynamics in preparation dedit -disable FileList
for printing
Disable dynamic tag-names dedit -e FileList
Re-enable all dynamics dedit -enable FileList
Edit selected access level IDs dedit -a/[PartName]/[OldID]/NewID/ FileList
Specify group name for operations -gGroupName
Exception Report dedit -x FileList
Detailed exception report dedit -X FileList
Change/Delete Action name dedit -A/SearchString/FindString/ReplaceS-
tring/ FileList
Change the tag-name’s delta value dedit -d[/SearchString/FindString/ReplaceS-
tring/] FileList
Change OM scan rate dedit -SCRATE//0/Replace/ FileList
The “0” in the FindString field is a required but ignored
parameter to this command.
Change OM scan delay dedit -SCDELAY//0/Replace/ FileList
The “0” in the FindString field is a required but ignored
parameter to this command.
Replace Aliases dedit -alias/AliasName/New Resolution/ FileList
Replace Range aliases dedit -range/Tag/RangeName/NewValue/ FileList
Match Whole Find String with -c dedit -m -c/MatchString/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
Match Whole Find String with -t dedit -m -t/MatchString/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
Show Parts List in Complexity dedit -parts -cr FileList
Report
Configured Points only in complex- dedit -points -parts -cr FileList
ity report
Show all aliases (used with -dump) dedit -sa -dump FileList
Read Only dedit -ro FileList
Read-Write dedit -rw FileList
Do not create backup dedit -nb
365
Connection Report
A Connection report for a display file lists configured tag-names and the alias status of each
tag-name in a Foxboro display file. A Connection report can be generated for one display file or
many display files.
You can generate a Connection report using either the DEdit window or the command line
interface. Refer to “Generating a Connection Report” on page 397.
If the -val command line parameter is included or the Validate Points in Reports check box is
selected in the Properties dialog box, then an indication of the validity of each point is included in
the report.
Example Report
The following example report shows tag-names referenced by one display file:
Connection Report
Friday, October 31, 2003, 17:20
D:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf
Connection List - Total 11 Unique 9

1 CALC:AIN.BLKSTA Full_Alias Invalid
2 TREND_LEAD:SINE.MEAS Normal Valid
3 FOXANALYST:AIN.MEAS Part_Alias Invalid
4 TREND_LEAD:COSINE.OUT Part_Alias Valid
5 FOXANALYST:COSINE.OUT Full_Alias Valid
6 TREND_LEAD:SINE.MEAS Normal Valid
7 CALC:AIN.BLKSTA Normal Invalid
8 CALC:AIN.MEAS Normal Invalid
9 CALC:AIN.MA Normal Invalid
10 ALARMDEMO:ALRM_SEQ.INHSTA Normal Invalid
11 ALARMDEMO:21AIC214HT.BIAS Normal Invalid
Complexity Report
The Complexity report for a display file contains:
 A complete list of the display file’s tag-names, Alias status and optionally an indication
of the validity of each tag-name
 A list of all the aliases and the resolutions in the display file and in the library objects
 A list of all the range aliases, tag to which it is resolved, and the resolutions in the
display file and in the library objects
 An index to the graphical part to which the display file is connected
 A list of library objects, bitmaps, and graphics that make up the visible graphic
 Configured dynamic information along with selected information about those
dynamics.
366
The configured dynamic information includes text string for text objects, filenames for actions
such as Open Overlay, and a mnemonic for each configured dynamic.
You can generate a Complexity report using either the GUI or the command line interface. Refer
to “Generating a Complexity Report” on page 396.
Example Report
The following is an example of a complexity report for one display file:
Display File Complexity Report

Connection List - Total 11 Unique 9

1 CALC:AIN.BLKSTA Full_Alias FPCT Part # 4
Invalid
2 TREND_LEAD:SINE.MEAS Normal FCOLOR Part # 4 Valid
3 FOXANALYST:AIN.MEAS Part_Alias FBLINK Part # 4
Invalid
4 TREND_LEAD:COSINE.OUT Part_Alias LOCATION_COL Part # 4 Valid
5 FOXANALYST:COSINE.OUT Full_Alias FPCT Part # 8 Valid
6 TREND_LEAD:SINE.MEAS Normal FCOLOR Part # 8 Valid
7 CALC:AIN.BLKSTA Normal VIS Part #
10 Invalid
8 CALC:AIN.MEAS Normal FPCT Part #
10 Invalid
9 CALC:AIN.MA Normal FBLINK Part #
10 Invalid
10 ALARMDEMO:ALRM_SEQ.INHSTA Normal ECOLOR Part #
10 Invalid
11 ALARMDEMO:21AIC214HT.BIAS Normal LOCATION_COL Part #
10 Invalid
Sub-model instance list - Total 2, Unique 1

1 inner_object LINK1 3 Subparts Part # 2
2 inner_object LINK2 3 Subparts Part # 6
Alias Summary
1 inner_object LINK1 Part#2

Full_Fill_Level CALC:AIN.BLKSTA
inner_static_text Thickness is 10
Cmp_Mov_Horz TREND_LEAD
file_name Overview.fdf
Blk_Fill_Blink AIN
367
Param_Mov_Horz OUT
Full_Fill_Level FOXANALYST:COSINE.OUT
Cmp_Mov_Horz FOXANALYST
Blk_Fill_Blink
Param_Mov_Horz
368
Range Alias Summary

RNG1 CALC:AIN.BLKSTA RO1
T2R1 TREND_LEAD:COSINE.OUT 22.00,55.00
RNG1 FOXANALYST:COSINE.OUT 0.00,100.00
Count of parts by type group.

Count Part Type
6 Rectangle
3 Text
2 Background Text
1 Circle
2 Library Object
Bitmap List
Parts List (14)

...
2 Library Object LINK1 inner_object
3 Background Text InnerBgText GR:inner_object 1 Operator, OPENOVL Level ID 0
1 "{inner_static_text} cms."
disp "\opt\menus\d4\{file_name}"
4 Rectangle InnerRect GR:inner_object 4 Passives, FPCT, FCOLOR,
FBLINK, LOCATION_COL
5 V Rectangle GR:inner_object
6 Library Object LINK2 inner_object
7 Background Text InnerBgText GR:inner_object 1 Operator, OPENOVL Level ID 0
1 "{inner_static_text} cms."
disp "\opt\menus\d4\{file_name}"
8 Rectangle InnerRect GR:inner_object 4 Passives, FPCT, FCOLOR,
FBLINK, LOCATION_COL
9 V Rectangle GR:inner_object
10 Circle 5 Passives, VIS, FPCT, FBLINK, ECOLOR,
LOCATION_COL
11 Text 1 "This is a sample Text"
12 Text 1 "Object1"
13 Text 1 "Object2"
...
369
Display File History

1 10/7/03 5:25 PM -
Summary - File D:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf

Display Size ( 42.145523, 81.575607 )
Total number of parts: 14, 5 unique
Total number of connections: 11, 9 unique
Total number of instance submodels: 2, 1 unique
Total number of bitmaps: 0, 0 unique
Total of 2 Operator Dynamic(s) configured, 13 Passive Dynamic(s)
Total number of fonts: 1
Undectable objects: 0
Invisible objects: 3
Empty groups: 0
Connected Points: 3
Optimize: YES
370
Exception Report
The Exception report contains a list of all non-existent tag-names for the selected display. You can
generate an Exception report using either the GUI or the command line interface. Refer to “Gen-
erating an Exception Report” on page 397.
Example Report
The following is an example of an exception report for one display file:
Exception Report
D:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf
INVALID TAGS:
CALC:AIN.BLKSTA
FOXANALYST:AIN.MEAS
FOXANALYST:{Blk_Fill_Blink}.MEAS
FOXANALYST:COSINE.{Param_Mov_Horz}
CALC:AIN.MEAS
CALC:AIN.MA
ALARMDEMO:ALRM_SEQ.INHSTA
ALARMDEMO:21AIC214HT.BIAS
UNRESOLVED ALIASES:
UNRESOLVED REQUIRED ALIASES:
Blk_Fill_Blink
UNRESOLVED NON-REQUIRED ALIASES:

Param_Mov_Horz
UNRESOLVED MODEL:
Inner_obj
371
Where Used Report

The Where Used report contains a complete list of all tag-names found in all display files located
in a particular set of directories. Each tag-name is preceded by the name and path of the display
file containing it.
NOTE
You can generate a Where Used report only from the command line interface to
DEdit. For example: dedit -where D:\ -wout D:\where_used.txt
Example Report
The following is an example of a Where Used report. Refer to “Generating a Where Used Report”
on page 398.
Friday, October 31, 2004, 19:19 C:opt\menus

C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf CALC:AIN.BLKSTA
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf TREND_LEAD:SINE.MEAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf FOXANALYST:AIN.MEAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf TREND_LEAD:COSINE.OUT
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf FOXANALYST:COSINE.OUT
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf TREND_LEAD:SINE.MEAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf FOXANALYST:{Blk_Fill_Blink}.MEAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf FOXANALYST:COSINE.{Param_Mov_Horz}
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf CALC:AIN.BLKSTA
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf CALC:AIN.MEAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf CALC:AIN.MA
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf ALARMDEMO:ALRM_SEQ.INHSTA
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay.fdf ALARMDEMO:21AIC214HT.BIAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf CALC:AIN.BLKSTA
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf TREND_LEAD:SINE.MEAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf FOXANALYST:AIN.MEAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf TREND_LEAD:COSINE.OUT
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf FOXANALYST:COSINE.OUT
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf TREND_LEAD:SINE.MEAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf FOXANALYST:{Blk_Fill_Blink}.MEAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf FOXANALYST:COSINE.{Param_Mov_Horz}
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf CALC:AIN.BLKSTA
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf CALC:AIN.MEAS
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf CALC:AIN.MA
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf ALARMDEMO:ALRM_SEQ.INHSTA
C:\opt\menus\SampleDisplay_Exp.fdf ALARMDEMO:21AIC214HT.BIAS
372
Dump File
A dump file is an ASCII file that you can modify and upload to replace an existing display file.
A dump file includes the sections listed in Table A-2:
Table A-2. Dump File
Section Description
Connections Each configured tag-name is listed preceded by a number (the
<number>.<number>: fields), identifying it to FoxDraw DEdit. You can
edit the tag-name portion of this record, but do not change the identifier.
Operator Dynamics Contains a record for each configured operator dynamic preceded by an
identifying index.
Static Text Contains a record for each configured text object preceded by an identify-
ing index.
Part List Contains a record for each graphical object in the display file. Where
appropriate, you can change the text color, edge color, fill color, and marker
color.
Alias Summary List aliases and their resolution for each configured object. The report lists
the aliases resolved in the inner object levels if Show all Aliases is selected in
the Properties dialog box, or if the -sa option is used to generate the dump
report via the command line.
Range Alias Sum- List range aliases and their resolution for each configured object. The
mary report lists the range aliases resolved in the inner object levels if Show all
Aliases is selected in the Properties dialog box, or if the -sa option is used to
generate the dump report via the command line.
NOTE
You can delete records that you do not want to update without affecting the display
file upon Upload. However, do not delete the section names or separating blank
lines.
NOTE
Editing the alias names is not permitted in the dump report.
Example File
The following is an example of a dump file.
CONNECTIONS:
InnerRect 001.001:{Full_Fill_Level}
373
InnerRect 002.002:TREND_LEAD:SINE.MEAS
InnerRect 003.003:FOXANALYST:{Blk_Fill_Blink}.MEAS
InnerRect 004.004:{Cmp_Mov_Horz}:COSINE.{Param_Mov_Horz}
InnerRect 006.001:{Full_Fill_Level}
InnerRect 007.002:TREND_LEAD:SINE.MEAS
InnerRect 008.003:FOXANALYST:{Blk_Fill_Blink}.MEAS
InnerRect 009.004:{Cmp_Mov_Horz}:COSINE.{Param_Mov_Horz}
010.001:CALC:AIN.BLKSTA
011.002:CALC:AIN.MEAS
012.003:CALC:AIN.MA
013.004:ALARMDEMO:ALRM_SEQ.INHSTA
014.005:ALARMDEMO:21AIC214HT.BIAS
OPERATOR DYNAMICS:
InnerBgText 000.005: \opt\menus\d4\{file_name}

InnerBgText 005.005: \opt\menus\d4\{file_name}
STATIC TEXT:
InnerBgText 003:{inner_static_text} cms.

InnerBgText 007:{inner_static_text} cms.
011:This is a sample Text
012:Object1
013:Object2
ALIAS SUMMARY:
inner_object 002:LINK1
Full_Fill_Level CALC:AIN.BLKSTA
Cmp_Mov_Horz TREND_LEAD
Blk_Fill_Blink AIN
Param_Mov_Horz OUT
Full_Fill_Level FOXANALYST:COSINE.OUT
Cmp_Mov_Horz FOXANALYST
Blk_Fill_Blink
Param_Mov_Horz
374
RANGE ALIAS SUMMARY:
RNG1 CALC:AIN.BLKSTA RO1
T2R1 TREND_LEAD:COSINE.OUT 22.00,55.00
RNG1 FOXANALYST:COSINE.OUT 0.00,100.00
PART LIST:
FOX_BACKGROUND 001:TextC - EdgeC 16 FillC 23 MarkerC 0

LINK1 002:TextC - EdgeC 0 FillC 22 MarkerC 0
InnerBgText 003:TextC 16 EdgeC 16 FillC 22 MarkerC 0
InnerRect 004:TextC - EdgeC 16 FillC 25 MarkerC 0
005:TextC - EdgeC 7 FillC 4 MarkerC 0
LINK2 006:TextC - EdgeC 0 FillC 22 MarkerC 0
InnerBgText 007:TextC 16 EdgeC 16 FillC 22 MarkerC 0
InnerRect 008:TextC - EdgeC 16 FillC 25 MarkerC 0
011:TextC 16 EdgeC 0 FillC 0 MarkerC 0
NOTE
The display file’s name and path appear at the top of the dump file, and the dump
file creation date appears at the bottom of the file.
Editing Rules for Dump Files

The following rules apply to editing dump files.
 Do not delete any of the titles or section headings.
 Do not edit the number on the left of the colon ( : ).
 You cannot delete the white space separator lines. For example, do not delete the
blank line (white space) between the CONNECTIONS label and the
000.001:E6_F1:PCT_DONE.RO01.
375
CONNECTIONS:
000.001:E6_F1:PCT_DONE.RO01
File Statistics
Using the GUI, you can view these statistics for a selected display file:
 Number of configured tag-names
 Number of unique tag-names. This is the number of configured tag-names with the
duplicates removed.
 Number of library object instances. This is a count of the number library objects
included in the current display.
 Number of unique library objects. This is a count of the number unique library
objects (no duplications) included in the current display.
 Number of parts. This is the number of graphical items comprising the display.
To the right of the number of parts is a list of all the graphical items comprising the display. The
number to the left of the item indicates the part number. This part number is also available in the
Complexity report.
Below this list is a list of the types of objects used in the display and the number of objects used.
DEdit Window and Dialog Boxes

DEdit Window
The DEdit window includes these seven tabs:
Find/Replace Use the elements on this tab to perform replacements of tag-names

associated with configured dynamic attributes. This tab also checks for
faceplate objects in the list of displays for matches to the Find compound
and block. You can also generate reports from this tab.
File Stats This tab provides tag-name and library object information on a selected
file.
Text Replace Use this tab to replace all instances of a particular text string. This tab
allows you to perform text replacement operations of a wider scope com-
pared to using the Find/Replace tab.
Command This tab allows the generation of Connection, Complexity, Dump and
Exception reports for all the files in the Files list. This tab also allows you
to disable and enable all the configured dynamics of the display files.
Access Level This tab provides the ability to update the Access Level for specific objects.
Aliases Use this tab to edit the resolution of object aliases.

Note: You cannot edit aliases of inner objects.
Ranges Use this tab to edit the resolution of range aliases.

Note: You cannot edit range aliases of inner objects.
376
The DEdit windows include these elements:
Table A-3. DEdit Window Elements
Element Description
Files List This read-only list displays the names of FoxDraw (.fdf ) and SL archive (.m1)
display file(s) to be processed. Click Browse to modify the list.
Browse Opens the file browser where you can select files.
About Displays the software version.
Properties Displays the Properties dialog box, which allows you to set up preferences
affecting the use of DEdit.
Help This button calls up the On-line Help for DEdit.
377
Find/Replace Tab
Use the Find Replace tab (Figure A-1) to perform replacements of tag-names associated with con-
figured dynamic attributes. This tab also provides options for checking faceplate objects in the list
of displays for matches to the Find compound and block. Reports can be generated using this tab.
Figure A-1. Find/Replace Tab in DEdit Window
Table A-4 describes the elements of the Find/Replace tab.
Table A-4. Find/Replace Tab Elements
Element Description
Connections This list box shows the compounds, blocks, and parameters in the
selected display files. Clicking an entry in this list copies that entry to
the Find and Replace With text boxes for modification. Duplicated
tag-names are not repeated in this list. Find and replace operations,
however, replace all instances of a matched name. If the Show
Compounds Only check box is selected, only the names of compounds
appear.
378
Table A-4. Find/Replace Tab Elements (Continued)
Element Description
Show Compounds Only Select this check box to display compounds only (not the associated
blocks and parameters) in the Connections list box.
Find Use this box to enter text for a string search. This string can be any
appropriate combination of a compound, block, or parameter.
If you specify a block without a compound, precede the block name
with a colon character (for example, :BLOCK1). If you specify a
parameter without a block, precede it with a period character (for
example, .OUT).
Selecting a string in the Connections list box places that string in this
field. You can modify the string if desired. Replacing values this way
does not affect instances of the same strings in text type objects. Use the
Text Replace tab to replace all instances of a particular text string.
Replace With Use this box to enter text used as a replacement for the contents of the
Find field when the Replace button is selected.
Replace Starts a find and replace operation using the Find and Replace With
entries and the files listed in the Files list. A pop-up dialog box displays
the number of matches found. You may click OK to perform the
find/replace operation or click Cancel to dismiss the operation. Display
files are automatically saved after a find/replace operation.
Replacing values this way does not affect instances of the same strings
in text type objects. Use the Text Replace tab to replace all instances of
a particular text string.
Match Whole Find Select this check box to replace tags and text strings only when the Find
String string matches the entire string being searched on. DEdit will not
match on substrings when this box is selected.
Connection Report Generates a Connection report for the last file in the list that was
selected. Can be created with a validate connection flag.
Complexity Report Generates a Complexity report for the last file in the list that was
selected. Can be created with a validate connection flag.
Dump Generates a dump file (filename.DMP) for the last file in the file list
that was selected. The dump file is created in the same directory as the
selected display file. You can edit and upload this dump file to modify
the original display file. You can also change the color of object’s edges,
their fill colors, and marker colors.
Upload Uploads the dump file corresponding to the last file in the file list that
was selected. If any tag-names or text entries were modified in the
dump file, these changes are applied to the display file.
Exception Report Creates a report containing all non-existent tag-names for the selected
display.
Done Closes DEdit. You need not manually save display files, because DEdit
automatically saves them after each find/replace.
379
File Stats Tab

The File Stats tab (Figure A-2) provides information about the selected file in the Files list.
Select a file in the Files list to view its tagname and library object information. The name of the
selected file (display) appears in the File Name field.
Figure A-2. File Stats Tab in DEdit Window
380
Table A-5 describes the elements of the File Stats tab.
Table A-5. File Stats Tab Elements
Element Description
Number of Connections This is a count of the total number of tag-names in the selected
display.
Unique This is a count of the number of unique tag-names in the
selected display. Duplicate names are not counted.
Number of Instance Submodels This is a count of the number of library objects included in the
current display.
Unique This is a count of the number of unique library objects (no
duplications) included in the current display.
Number of Parts This is a count of the graphical items that make up the display,
including library object parts.
Complexity Report Click this button to generate a Complexity report for the last
file in the Files list that was selected. The filename of the
Complexity report has the same base name as the display file
and has a .txt extension. It resides in the same directory.
381
Text Replace Tab

Use the Text Replace tab (Figure A-3) to perform text replacement operations of a wider scope
than can be performed from the Find/Replace tab. Text Replace operations operate across tag-
names (similar to the Find/Replace tab) and also all text type graphical objects in the display file.
Replacement occurs across the complete list of files in the File list.
Figure A-3. Text Replace Tab in DEdit Window
Table A-6 describes the elements of the Text Replace tab.
Table A-6. Text Replace Tab Elements
Element Description
Find Enter the text to be replaced.
Caution: Be careful of substring replacement. For example, COMP1
matches the first five characters of COMP11.
Replace with Enter the replacement text.
Match Whole Find Select this check box to replace tags and text strings only when the Find
String string matches the entire string being searched on. DEdit will not match on
substrings when this box is selected.
Replace Click this button to perform the replacement operation using the Find and
Replace with strings.
382
Command Tab
Use the Command tab (Figure A-4) to disable or enable configured dynamics within your files.
You can disable or enable all your files at once. You can also generate Connection, Complexity,
Dump and Exception reports for all the files in the Files option box.
Figure A-4. Command Tab in DEdit Window
383
Table A-7 describes the elements of the Command tab.
Table A-7. Command Tab Elements
Element Description
Disable Disables the dynamics configured in displays, so that the Out-Of-Service
rectangles do not appear when printing displays in FoxView.
Note: As this option modifies the displays, it is recommended that you
apply this feature only to copies of the original displays.
Complexity Report Generates a Complexity report for all files in the files list.
Dump Creates ASCII dump files of display objects, listing all tag-names and text
objects embedded in objects.
Enable Enables the configured dynamics.
Connection Report Generates a Connection report for all files in the files list.
Exception Report Generates an Exception report for all the files in the files list.
Make Read-only Makes the file FoxView read-only.
If the file is FoxView read-only, certain data is not written back to the
display file by FoxView; that is, FoxView is not allowed to change (opti-
mize) the *.fdf file. This may make display call up slower and less efficient
for the I/A Series network as a whole. See “FoxView Read-Only” on
page 163.
Make Read-Write Makes the file FoxView read-write.
384
Access Level Tab

Use the Access Level tab (Figure A-5) to update the Access level for specific objects. This allows
modification of configured access levels. You can make replacements selectively based on matches
for part names, group names, and original level value.
Figure A-5. Access Level Tab in DEdit Window
Table A-8 describes the elements of the Access Level tab.
Table A-8. Access Level Tab Elements
Element Description
Part Name Enter the user specified part name to apply the edits to.
Part Group Enter the user specified group name to apply the edits to.
Old Level Enter the old level to be replaced.
New Level Enter the new value for the access level.
Replace Do the indicated replacements.
385
Aliases Tab
Use the Aliases tab (Figure A-6) to edit the resolution of object aliases. Aliases resolved in the
inner object levels are listed only if the Show All Aliases is selected in the Properties dialog box (see
Figure A-8).
NOTE
You cannot edit the aliases of inner objects.
Figure A-6. Aliases Tab in DEdit Window
386
Table A-9 describes the elements of the Aliases tab.
Table A-9. Aliases Tab Elements
Element Description
Part# Displays the item number of the object containing the alias.
Sub Model Displays the sub model file name
Object Name Displays the object name.
Alias Displays the name of the alias.
Resolution Displays the block name, compound, or parameter that the alias resolves to.
Edit Opens the Edit Alias dialog box to edit the selected alias.
Apply Apply the changes.
Reset Resets the contents to original state as it is in the selected display file
Ranges Tab
Use the Ranges tab to edit the resolution of range aliases (see Figure A-7).
NOTE
You cannot edit the range aliases of inner objects.
387
Figure A-7. Ranges Tab in DEdit Window
Table A-10 describes the elements of the Ranges tab.
Table A-10. Ranges Tab Elements
Element Description
Part# Displays the item number of the object containing the alias.
Sub Model Displays the sub model file name.
Object Name Displays the object name.
Tag Tag for which the range is resolved.
Alias Displays the name of the alias.
Resolution Displays the name of the block, compound, or parameter that the alias
resolves to.
Edit Opens the Edit Range Alias dialog box to edit the selected range alias.
Apply Apply the changes.
Reset Resets the contents to original state as it is in the selected display file.
388
Dialog Boxes
Properties Dialog Box
Use the Properties dialog box to customize DEdit’s operation.
Figure A-8. Properties Dialog Box
Table A-11 describes the elements of the Properties dialog box.
Table A-11. Properties Fields
Item Description
Show Parts List in If this check box is selected, the Complexity report lists the
Complexity Report complete list of graphical parts that make up the visible portion
of the display file.
Note: This list can be quite long. If the Show Parts List is
disabled, only a summary of the parts list, along with all other
information, is contained in the report.
Back Up Display Files If this check box is selected, a copy of the display file is created
before any modifications are made. The back-up file’s name has
the same base name as the display file and has a .bak extension.
The back-up file resides in the same directory as the display file.
If a back-up file exists from a previous modification of the file,
it is not overwritten.
Validate Points in Reports When Complexity reports and Connection reports are gener-
ated, the reports indicate either Valid or Invalid for each config-
ured tagname.
389
Table A-11. Properties Fields (Continued)
Item Description
Delay between validates (secs) This feature allows you to set the delay between individual
Object Manager queries. When a Complexity or Connection
report is generated, the load on the Object Manager can occa-
sionally produce false responses to query results. To avoid this
problem, you can specify the program delay (in fractions of a
second) between calls to the Object Manager. This increases the
time required to produce the report but the load on the system
is reduced.
Configured points only in This option provides a filter for the Parts List section of the
complexity report Complexity report. If selected, only parts that have some con-
figuration associated with them get printed. This can reduce the
size of the report significantly, and make it more useful.
Show All Aliases When this box is selected, aliases resolved in the inner object
levels are listed.
OK Saves the settings and closes the Properties dialog box.
Cancel Closes the Properties dialog box, retaining the previous settings.
390
Edit Alias Dialog Box

Use the Edit Alias dialog box (Figure A-9) to edit an alias.
Figure A-9. Edit Alias Dialog Box
Table A-12 describes the elements of the Edit Alias dialog box.
Table A-12. Edit Alias Dialog Box Elements
Element Description
Part# Displays the part number for the selected alias.
Alias Displays the name of the selected alias.
Resolution Type the new resolution for the selected alias.
OK Saves the settings and closes the Edit Alias dialog box.
Cancel Closes the Edit Alias dialog box, retaining the previous settings.
391
Edit Range Alias Dialog Box

Use the Edit Range Alias dialog box (Figure A-10 and Figure A-11) to edit the static or run-time
range aliases.
Figure A-10. Edit Range Alias Dialog Box (1 of 2)
Figure A-11. Edit Range Alias Dialog Box (2 of 2)
392
Table A-13 describes the elements of the Edit Range Alias dialog box.
Table A-13. Edit Range Alias Dialog Box Elements
Element Description
Static Select this option to specify the low and high scale values for a static range
alias.
High Scale Enter the high scale value for a static range alias.
Low Scale Enter the low scale value for a static range alias
Run Time Select this option to specify the range name for a run-time range alias.
Range Name Enter the range name for a run-time range alias.
OK Saves the settings and closes the Edit Range Alias dialog box.
Cancel Closes the Edit Range Alias dialog box, retaining the previous settings.
DEdit Procedures
This section provides procedures for common DEdit functions.
Setting DEdit Properties

You can set up preferences that affect the operation of DEdit.
To set up DEdit properties

1. Click the Properties button
The Properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure A-8.
2. Make the desired selections from the list of options. Options are saved automatically.
See Table A-11 for a complete description of the options.
3. Click OK.
The settings are saved and the Properties dialog box closes.
NOTE
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing any settings.
Selecting Display Files

Before you can edit or generate reports on a file or files, you must select the set of files that DEdit
should process.
To select display files

1. Click the Browse button.
2. Navigate to the directory in which the display files of interest reside.
3. Select all the desired files, then click OK.
The dialog box closes, and the names of the selected files appear in DEdit’s Files list
box.
393
Obtaining Information about a Display File

You can view file statistics (tag-name and library object information) for any display file.
To obtain display file information

1. Select the File Stats tab.
2. From the files list, select the file of interest.
The display file’s statistics appear.
If necessary, scroll the list boxes to view unique tag-name information.
3. Click the Complexity Report button to generate a Complexity report of this
information.
After the report is generated, you are given the option to view the report immediately.
Refer to “File Statistics” on page 376.
Replacing Compound, Block, and Parameter Names

Use DEdit to replace compound, block, and parameter names in any number of display files.
NOTE
You can also use DEdit to replace arbitrary text strings in any text object.
To replace a Compound:Block.Parameter with another Compound:Block.Parameter

1. Place the names of one or more display files in the Files list box.
Refer to “Selecting Display Files” on page 393.
2. Select the Find/Replace tab if it is not currently displayed.
3. From the Connections list box, select a compound:block.parameter name.
The Compound:Block.Parameter appears in both the Find and Replace with
boxes.
or
Type the tag-name (or a part of it) in the Find box.
4. In the Replace with box, type the replacement Compound:Block.Parameter name.
5. To replace tags only when the Find string matches the entire string being searched on,
select the Match Whole Find String check box.
DEdit does not match on substrings when this box is selected.
6. Click the Replace button to perform the find/replace operation.
A pop-up dialog box displays the number of strings found and replaced.
The display files are automatically saved after the find/replace operation.
The Connection list is also automatically updated.
Replacing a Text String

Use DEdit to replace a text string in any number of display files.
To replace a text string with another text string

394
2. Click the Text Replace tab if it is not currently displayed.

3. In the find box, type the search text string.
In the Replace with box, type the replacement text string.
4. To replace text strings only when the Find string matches the entire string being
searched on, select the Match Whole Find String check box.
When this box is selected, DEdit does not match on substrings.
5. Click Replace to perform the text replace operation.
A pop-up dialog box displays the number of replacements made.
The display files are automatically saved after the text replace operation.
Editing Access Level

Use DEdit to update the configured access level for specific objects. You can make replacements
selectively based on matches for part names, group names, and original level value.
To change the access level for specific objects

2. Click the Access Level tab if it is not currently displayed.
3. To replace by part name, type the name in the Part Name box.
4. To replace by part group, type the name in the Part Group box.
5. To replace by old level, type the value in the Old Level box.
6. In the New Level box, type the replacement level value.
7. Click Replace to perform the text replace operation.
A pop-up dialog box displays the number of files updated.
The display files are automatically saved after the level replacement operation.
Editing an Alias
Use DEdit to edit an alias in the Aliases tab.
To edit an alias
2. Click a file in the files list.
3. Click the Aliases tab if it is not currently displayed.
4. In the Alias column, click the desired row.
5. Click Edit
The Edit Alias dialog box opens.
6. In the Resolution box, type the new alias resolution.
7. Click OK.
8. To update the file, click Apply.
395
Editing a Range Alias

Use DEdit to edit a range alias in the Ranges tab.
To edit a range alias

2. Click a file in the files list.
3. Click the Ranges tab if it is not currently displayed.
4. In the Alias column, click the desired row.
5. Click Edit.
The Edit Range Alias dialog box opens.
6. To edit a static range alias:
a. Select the Static option.
b. In the High Scale box, type the high scale value.
c. In the Low Scale box, type the low scale value.
7. To edit a run-time range alias:
a. Select the Run Time option.
b. In the Range Name box, type the range name.
8. Click OK.
9. To update the file, click Apply.
Generating a Complexity Report

A Complexity report lists all the parts and configurations in a display file.
To generate a Complexity report

1. Place the names of one or more files in the Files list box.
2. Click the Complexity Report button.
This button is available on the Find/Replace tab, the File Stats tab and the
Command tab.
Generally, a Complexity report is generated for the last file in the list that was selected.
Multiple Complexity reports are generated using the Command tab.
The filename of the Complexity report has the same base name as the display file and
has a .txt extension. It resides in the same directory.
Refer to “Complexity Report” on page 366.
396
Generating a Connection Report

A Connection report lists all the configured tag-names in a display file.
To generate a Connection report

2. Click the Connection Report button in the Find/Replace tab or Command tab.
The filename of the Connection report has the same base name as the display file with
_conn appended and has a .txt extension. It resides in the same directory.
Refer to “Connection Report” on page 366.
Generating an Exception Report

An Exception report lists all the non-existent tag-names in a display file.
To generate an Exception report

2. Click the Exception Report button in the Find/Replace tab or Command tab.
The filename of the Exception report has the same base name as the display file with a
.exp extension. It resides in the same directory.
Refer to “Exception Report” on page 371.
Dumping and Uploading a Display File

You can create ASCII dump files of display objects, listing all tag-names and text objects
embedded in objects. You can edit these files and upload modified dump files, replacing the
original display files.
The dump report lists the aliases resolved in the inner object levels if the Show All Aliases check
box is selected in the Properties dialog box (see Figure A-8).
To dump and upload a display file

1. Place the names of all the files you want to edit in DEdit window’s file list box.
2. Select the Find/Replace or Command tab.
3. Select a file.
4. Click Dump.
A dump file (filename.DMP) is generated for the last file in the files list that was
selected. The dump file is created in the same directory as the selected display file.
5. Edit the dump file.
Refer to “Editing Rules for Dump Files” on page 375.
6. Click Upload from the Find/Replace tab.
The original display file is replaced with the modified dump file.
397
Command Window
Generating a Where Used Report
DEdit searches the directory tree (the specified directory and all its subdirectories) for all .fdf files
and produces a report of all the tag-names referenced in each .fdf file. The first line of the Where
Used report shows the date the report was produced and the name of the searched root directory.
Indicate the name of the output report file with a -wuout argument.
dedit -where RootDirectory [-wuout FileName.txt]
For example, the following command searches for all .fdf files on drive D: and generates a Where
Used report named where_used.txt in the root directory on drive D:.
dedit -where D:\ -wuout D:\where_used.txt
Refer to “Where Used Report” on page 372.
Generating a Connection Report

The Connection report is named FileName_conn.txt. Multiple files may be listed, and wild char-
acters are supported.
The generated report files are placed in the same directory as the original display file.
dedit -R FileName1.fdf [FileName2.fdf...]
Generating a Complexity Report

The Complexity report is named FileName.txt. Multiple files may be listed, and wild characters
are supported.
dedit -cr FileName1.fdf [FileName2.fdf...]
Generating an Exception Report

The Exception report is named FileName.txt. Multiple files may be listed, and wild characters are
supported.
dedit -x FileName1.fdf [FileName2.fdf...]
For a detailed Exception report:
dedit -X FileName1.fdf [FileName2.fdf...]
398
Replacing any Combination of Compound, Block, and Parameter Strings

You can replace all instances of the FindString with the ReplaceString in the indicated file.
The indicated files are modified and left with the original filename and properties. Complete or
relative paths may be prepended to the filename.
Include name type identifiers when specifying compounds or blocks (that is, use a semicolon
before a block name, and use a period before a parameter name). By default, names are treated as
compounds. Here is an example command string:
dedit -c/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
Validating Connections
When complexity reports and connection reports are generated, the reports indicate Valid or
Invalid for each configured tag-name.
dedit -val -cr FileName1.fdf [FileName2.fdf…]
Replacing any Combination of Compound, Block, and

Parameter Strings with Matching
You may use a third string, a MatchString, to filter replacement operations. In this command, the
software first searches for the MatchString in each of the objects before searching for the Find-
String. Upon finding a MatchString, the FindString is located and replacements are made.
dedit -c/MatchString/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
Writing Command Line Help Information to a File

Use the -h option to obtain a description of the command line arguments and parameters.
By default, the help information is written to the log file, dedit.log.
dedit -h
Changing the Log File’s Path and Name

You can change the log file’s path and name.
dedit -L FilePath\FileName
Replacing Any Text String

Use the -t option to replace all instances of FindString with the ReplaceString in the indicated
files. The indicated files are modified, but retain original filenames and properties. You can pre-
pend complete or relative paths to the filename.
This replace operation is different from the -c option. In addition to tag-names, all text objects are
also checked for replacement. The -c option only checks configured tag-names associated with
dynamic attributes.
dedit -t/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileName.fdf [FileName2.fdf...]
You can use a MatchString for filtering files.
dedit -t/MatchString/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileName.fdf
[FileName2.fdf...]
399
Creating a Dump File

Use a dump file to view and modify a list of all tag-names and text objects embedded in a graphic.
dedit -dump FileName1.fdf [FileName2.fdf...]
After editing the dump file, upload the modified file to apply the changes to the original display
file.
Uploading a Dump File

After editing a dumped display file, upload the modified file to apply the changes to the original
display file.
dedit -upload FileName1.fdf [FileName2.fdf...]
A dump file is an ASCII file that you can modify and upload to apply the changes to an existing
display file.
Showing All Aliases in Dump Report

Use the “show all aliases” option -sa to list in a dump report the aliases resolved in the inner
object levels.
dedit -sa -dump FileList
Showing Parts List in Complexity Report

Use the -parts option to list in a complexity report all the graphical parts that make up the visi-
ble portion of the display file.
dedit -parts -cr FileList]
Listing Configured Points Only in Complexity Report

Use the -points option to list in a complexity report only parts that have some configuration
associated with them.
dedit -points -parts -cr FileList
Matching Whole Find String

Use the -m option to replace tags and text strings only when the find string matches the entire
string being searched on.
dedit -m -c/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
dedit -m -t/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
dedit -m -c/MatchString/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
dedit -m -t/MatchString/FindString/ReplaceString/ FileList
Replacing Aliases
Use the -aliases option to change connection aliases, operator dynamics and the static text alias
values.
dedit -aliases/alias/NewResolution/ FileName
400
Replacing Range Aliases

Use the -range option to change the range alias value.
dedit -range/TAG/range2/10,100/ FileName
dedit -range/TAG/range2/RO1/ FileName
Using Spaces in Match, Find, and Replace Strings

You can use spaces in match, find and replace strings for the search options. You must enclose the
string in quotes (") when it contains spaces.
dedit -m -t/”Find String”/”Replace String”/ FileList
dedit -m -t/”Match String”/”Find String”/”Replace String”/ FileList
401
402
Appendix B. Display Convert
Utility
This appendix explains how to convert a display to a different display type. Additionally, this
appendix provides AutoCAD tips, and information on creating temporary bitmaps, and
describes world coordinates.
Convert Utility
Use FoxDraw’s convert utility to convert a display file from one format to another.
The Convert utility can perform11 different conversions between types of display files.
Output files are created in the same directory as the input files that produced them. Output files
have the same base name (to the left of the dot) as their associated input file, with a different
extension (to the right of the dot). Exceptions to this naming convention are the Upgrade Display
and, .bdf to m1 conversions (refer to Table B-1).
Use conversions to and from the ASCII .g (Global) format to port displays between Windows and
Solaris workstations. You can save .g files directly from the Save As dialog box.
NOTE
Ensure that the same version of FoxDraw/FoxView is loaded on both platforms
(Windows and Solaris).
Conversions
The conversions types are listed in Table B-1.
Table B-1. Conversion Types
Conversion Purpose
.fdf to .g Converts a Foxboro display file (.fdf ) to ASCII (.g or Global format).
For porting displays between Windows and Solaris workstations.
.fdf to .bmp Converts a Foxboro display file (.fdf ) to bitmap:
 .bmp on Windows
 .i on Solaris.
Use this conversion to create icon bitmaps (thumbnails) for buttons on the
FoxView display bar.
Upgrade Display Upgrades a Foxboro display file (.fdf ) or Foxboro library object (.m1) from
version 6 to version 7.
.m1 to .g Converts a Foxboro library object (.m1) to ASCII (.g).
.fdf to wsmfdf Converts the current display file to widescreen format display file. Refer to
(.fdf ) Appendix C “Widescreen Conversion for Displays”.
403
B0700BE – Rev F Appendix B. Display Convert Utility
Table B-1. Conversion Types (Continued)
Conversion Purpose
.pdf to .fdf Converts a packed display file (.pdf, UNIX® based 50 Series display) to a
Foxboro display file (.fdf, FoxDraw, and FoxView format).
.g to .fdf Converts an ASCII (.g or Global format) to Foxboro display file (.fdf ).
For porting display files between Windows and Solaris.
.g to .m1 Converts an ASCII (.g or Global format), to Foxboro library object (.m1).
DXF to G Converts a data exchange format (.dxf ) to ASCII (.g or Global format).
DXF to FDF Converts a data exchange format (.dxf ) to Foxboro display file (.fdf ).
BDF to M1 Converts a bitmapped distribution format (.bdf, 50 Series marker) to a
Foxboro library object (.m1).
10x to 9x Converts a FoxDraw 10.x display file/library object to a FoxDraw 9.x display
file/library object.
AutoCAD Tips
 Explode all blocks in the AutoCAD file before converting.
 Put drawing into one layer before converting.
If there are multiple layers, by default, they are merged after conversion.
 Use polylines in .dxf files instead of rectangles.
Rectangles convert as four separate lines. Polylines convert as polylines and accept
FoxDraw attributes such as Fill Level.
 Perform an RSAVE before exporting .dwg files to .dxf.
RSAVE removes all unused layers.
 On DXFOUT, use an accuracy of 16.
NOTE
Depending on the colors used in AutoCAD, you may not see anything in FoxDraw
until you perform a Select All and choose Graphic Attributes.
404
Appendix B. Display Convert Utility B0700BE – Rev F
Convert Display Files Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to convert a display to a different display type.
NOTE
All input files must be on the same drive on which the I/A Series software is
installed.
Table B-2. Conversion Type - Options
Conversion Purpose Additional notes

.fdf to .g Converts a Foxboro display file The filename can be composed only
(.fdf ) to ASCII (.g or Global for- of letters, numbers, and underscores.
mat). For porting displays between The input file must have an .fdf
Windows and Solaris. extension.
.fdf to .bmp Converts a Foxboro display file The filename must begin with any
(.fdf ) to bitmap: character except a hyphen or space,
 .bmp on Windows and can be followed by any charac-
 .i on Solaris). ters except spaces. The input file
Use this conversion to create icon must have an .fdf extension.
bitmaps (thumbnails) for buttons on
the FoxView display bar.
.fdf to wsmfdf Converts the current display file to Refer to Appendix C “Widescreen
(.fdf ) widescreen format display file. Conversion for Displays” for details.
Upgrade Display Upgrades a Foxboro display file This conversion overwrites the input
(.fdf ) or Foxboro library object file with the output file. The file-
(.m1) from Version 6 to Version 7. name must begin with any character
except a hyphen or space and can be
followed by any characters except
spaces.
.m1 to .g Converts a Foxboro library object The filename must begin with any
(.m1) to ASCII (.g). letter or an underscore, and can be
followed by letters, numbers, or
underscores. The input file must
have an .m1 extension.
.pdf to .fdf Converts a packed display file (.pdf, The filename can be composed only
UNIX based 50 Series display) to a of letters, numbers, and underscores.
Foxboro display file (.fdf, FoxDraw, The input file can have any exten-
and FoxView format). sion, but a file with an extension
other than “.pdf ” will have “.pdf ”
appended to it.
405
Table B-2. Conversion Type - Options (Continued)
Conversion Purpose Additional notes

.g to .fdf Converts an ASCII (.g or Global This conversion accepts a filename
format) to Foxboro display file beginning with a letter or under-
(.fdf ). For porting display files score, followed by letters, numbers,
between Windows and Solaris. and underscores. Note that a file-
name beginning with an underscore
must be followed with at least one
letter. The input file must have a .g
extension.
.g to .m1 Converts an ASCII (.g or Global The filename must begin with any
format), to Foxboro library object letter, and can be followed by letters,
(.m1). For porting display files numbers, or underscores. The input
between Windows and Solaris. file must have a .g extension.
.dxf to .g Converts a data exchange format The filename can be composed of
(.dxf ) to ASCII (.g or Global for- any characters except hyphens or
mat). For porting display files spaces. The input file must have a
between Windows and Solaris. .dxf extension.
.dxf to .fdf Converts a data exchange format This conversion accepts a filename
(.dxf ) to Foxboro display file (.fdf ). beginning with a letter or under-
score, followed by letters, numbers,
and underscores. Note that a file-
name beginning with an underscore
must be followed with at least one
letter. The input file must have a
.dxf extension.
.bdf to .m1 Converts a bitmapped distribution Each marker in the .bdf file is con-
format (.bdf, 50 Series marker) to a verted into a separate .m1 file. Each
Foxboro library object (.m1). input file yields multiple output
files. Output file base names are
composed of the input file’s base
name followed by an underscore and
a number. If a conversion has a
problem, a data file with a name of
type .fdf<##>.dat is generated. The
filename must begin with any letter
or an underscore, and must be fol-
lowed by letters, numbers, or under-
scores. The input file can have any
extension.
10x to 9x Converts a FoxDraw10.x display file This conversion saves the converted
conversion (.fdf ) or library object (.m1) to a file in a 9x folder by default. How-
FoxDraw 9.x display file or library ever, the user can provide a destina-
object. tion path. The filename can be any
alphanumeric characters.
406
Table B-3. Button Options
Button Function
About Displays version information for the Display Convert utility.
Browse Opens the File Open dialog box from which you select one or more files to
convert. Press this button after selecting a conversion.
Convert Converts the selected files from one display format to another. Press this
button after selecting the type of conversion and the files to be converted.
Close Closes the dialog box and ends the convert utility. You can press this button
at any time.
Help Displays the on-line Help system.
Opens the Browse for folder dialog box from which you can select the des-
tination folder to save the FoxDraw 10.x to FoxDraw 9.x converted file.
Converting Display Files and Library Objects

The convert utility allows you to convert many different styles of display file from one version to
another.
To Convert Displays
1. From the FoxDraw Tools menu, choose Display Converter.
The Convert utility’s Convert Display Files dialog box appears.
2. Click an option button (such as .fdf to .g).
3. Click Browse.
The File to Convert dialog box appears.
4. Select one or more files to be converted.
NOTE
All input files must be on the same drive on which the I/A Series software is
installed.
5. Click Convert.
The output files are created in the same directory as the input files and have the same
base name (to the left of the dot) as their associated input file. The output file’s exten-
sion (to the right of the dot) is different from the input file.
Exceptions:
The Upgrade Display conversion overwrites the input file with the output file.
For .bdf to .m1 conversions, each input file yields multiple output files. Output file
base names are composed of the input file’s base name followed by an underscore and
a number.
407
To Convert Library Objects

If you have created any library objects these must also be converted:
1. From FoxDraw’s Tools menu, choose Display Converter.
The Convert utility’s Convert Display Files dialog box appears.
2. Click the .m1 to .g option button, and follow the same procedure as above.
Converting Displays from the Command Line

Ensure that the same version of FoxView/FoxDraw is loaded on both platforms.
Changing Foxboro Display File Format

The display file format can be changed from the command line. There are two versions of file for-
mats as listed in Table B-4:
Table B-4. Versions of Display File Formats
FoxView Version FoxView Version

Display Version (Solaris) (Windows)
6 6.0D 6.0, 6.0.1
7 6.0E or later 6.1 or later
To convert Foxboro display file format to Version 6

Use this procedure to convert displays for use on a Windows platform (I/A Series Release 6.0 and
6.0.1):
1. Type:
cd /opt/menus
This changes the directory to the display file directory or display library directory.
The example command above assumes that the display files are in the /opt/menus
directory. Use the path to the appropriate display or library directory on your system.
2. Type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/fdf_version -v 6 *
This changes the file formats to the older format.
Errors are written to a log file in the working directory. The log file’s name is
FDFxxxxxx.dat, where xxxxxx is a unique value each time the fdf_version utility is
run.
Copying Display Manager Displays

Copy all displays to be converted to a new location on the disk. FoxView displays should be
located in a parallel directory, that is, they should be copied from /usr to /opt.
For example, to copy all displays from /usr/displays to /opt/displays:
 At a command window type:
cd /opt
cp -r /usr/displays
408
This copies all the files and subdirectories in /usr/displays to /opt/displays. Repeat this procedure
for all subdirectories containing display files.
Converting the Displays

To convert the displays
 At a command window, type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/pdf_fdf [arguments] <files>
where [arguments] are as listed in Table B-5.
Table B-5. Command Arguments
Argument Meaning
-r Convert recursively (include subdirectories in the conversion).
-f Convert faceplates.
-h Display on-line Help screen
f1.fdf f2.fdf ... fn.fdf Filenames of the display files to convert
<files> are the name(s) of the displays to be converted.

Wildcards (*) are allowed.
The conversion utility produces the file types as listed in Table B-6.
Table B-6. File Types Produced by the Conversion Utility
File Description
.fdf All converted displays have the .fdf extension.
.pdf All Display Manager displays are renamed with the .pdf extension.
.dat Two log files (a conversion report log and a conversion error log).
Files that could not be converted are reported in the error log.
NOTE
1. Files that are not 50 Series Display Manager display files are not affected by the
conversion utility.
2. 20 Series Display Manager display files are not converted to FoxView format. As
a separate step, you must first convert them to 50 Series files before you can convert
them.
409
Examples
After conversion, use a text editor to check the log files for any errors detected during the conver-
sion process.
To convert the display named “overview” located in the /opt/displays directory

 Type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/pdf_fdf /opt/displays/overview
To convert all of the displays in the /opt/displays directory

 Type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/pdf_fdf /opt/displays/*
To convert all of the displays in the /opt/displays directory and in all of its subdirectories
 Type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/pdf_fdf -r /opt/displays/*
Converting Displays with Bitmaps

To convert displays with bitmaps
1. Copy the bitmap files to /opt/customer/displib/Bitmaps.
2. To convert from Windows (.bmp) format to Solaris (.i) or Solaris(.xwd) format, in a
command window enter the following:
for .i format:
/opt/windu/bin/convert /opt/customer/displib/Bitmaps/<filename>.bmp xwd:
/opt/customer/displib/Bitmaps/<filename>.i
where <filename> is the name of the bitmap to be converted.
for .xwd format:
/usr/sfw/bin/convert /opt/customer/displib/Bitmaps/<filename>.bmp xwd:
/opt/customer/displib/Bitmaps/<filename>.xwd
where <filename> is the name of the bitmap to be converted.
NOTE
Solaris is case sensitive. The .i or .xwd filename must be in the same case as the ref-
erence to the file in the .g display.
410
NOTE
If errors or improper conversion to .xwd format occur, the user can use the GIMP
tool provided by Solaris 10 to convert the file to .xwd format. Proceed as follows:
1. Start the GIMP tool.
2. Click Launch -> Applications -> Graphics -> Image Editor.
3. Open the .bmp file to be converted.
4. Perform a “Save as” operation.
5. In the “Save Image” dialog box, select “XWD” at the “Determine File Type” pick,
and click OK.
Upgrading Displays
NOTE
If Solaris FoxView V6.0E, V6.0F, or V6.1 has been loaded and you have already
upgraded your display files, skip this section.
After installing the software and rebooting the workstation, you must upgrade the display files
and library object files objects (including faceplates) created on all previous FoxView releases
before you can use them.
NOTE
If you do not upgrade user built displays or library objects as part of installing this
software release, the displays do not function correctly.
You can upgrade the displays from FoxDraw or from a command window.
To upgrade displays from FoxDraw

1. Choose Tools.
2. Choose Display Converter.
The Display Convert Files dialog box appears.
3. Choose Upgrade display.
4. Click Browse.
The Files to Convert dialog box appears.
5. Select the .fdf files you want to convert.
6. Click Open.
7. Click Convert.
To upgrade displays from the command line

1. From a command window, type:
cd /opt/menus
This changes the directory to the display file directory.
411
The above example command assumes that the display files are in the /opt/menus
directory. Use the path to the directory on your system.
2. Type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/fdf_version -r *
This converts all the displays in the current directory and all subdirectories.
Errors are written to a log file in the working directory. The log file’s name is FDFxxxxxx.dat,
where xxxxxx is a unique value each time the upgrade utility is run.
To upgrade library objects
1. In a command window, change to the directory containing the user-built library
objects.
cd /opt/customer/displib
2. Type:
This runs the upgrade utility to convert all library elements in the current directory
and in all subdirectories.
Errors are written to a log file in the /opt/customer/displib directory. The log file has the name
FDFxxxxxx.dat, where xxxxxx is a unique value each time the upgrade utility is run.
To handle the misaligned text objects

When displays are converted from .fdf to .g files in Solaris station with FoxView 9.x and con-
verted back from .g to .fdf in Windows stations or Solaris station for FoxView 10.2.3 if the text in
the display shifts upward then -a option should be used while using the g_fdf utility for convert-
ing the .g to .fdf file as.
For Solaris,
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/g_fdf -a <filename>
For Windows,
D:\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools\g_fdf -a <filename>
where <filename> is the .g file with its path.
NOTE
This option has to be used for the first time only, when converting the .g file of Fox-
View 9.x display to .fdf file in FoxView10.2.3. For subsequent conversions of g_fdf
this option should NOT be used.
To upgrade the display and library objects

At a command window, type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/fdf_version [arguments] <files>
where arguments are as listed in Table B-7.
412
Argument Description
-r Convert recursively. The conversion includes the files in the
subdirectories.
-v The final version level of the files. Files should be upgraded to
Version 7. The previous version level is 6. The default is 7.
-h Display help messages.
<files> refers to the name(s) of the displays to be converted.

Wildcards ( * ) are permitted.
The utility produces the files as listed in Table B-8.
Table B-8. Files Produced
Extension Description
.fdf Upgraded display files
.m1 Upgraded library object files
.dat Log file
NOTE
Files that are already at the specified version and files that are not FoxView display
files are left untouched.
To upgrade all the displays in the /opt/menus directory:

 Type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/fdf_version -r /opt/menus/*
To change these same displays back to display version 6:

 Type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/fdf_version -r -v 6 /opt/menus/*
To upgrade all the library objects:

 Type:
Display Convert Utility - Library Objects Having First Character as

Numeric
The g_fdf utility encounters an error when the first character in the file name of a library object is
numeric. Scripts are provided to overcome the issue. When the script is run on the .g files it will
search for all its associated library objects, with names starting with numeric characters and
resolve the names. The modified .g file can then be used for conversion without any issues.
413
For windows the script remnumch_win.sh is available in the location D:\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools\

For Solaris the script remnumch_sol.sh is available in the location /usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/
Running the script
1. Go to the location D:\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools in command prompt.
2. Run the script remnumch_win.sh in shell prompt.
3. This will display a message prompting the user to enter the filename
4. Enter the filename of the .g file along with its path and extension as shown below:
/opt/menus/d2/xxxx.g
5. This will create a back up of the .g file with .bak extension, look for any library objects
present in the .g file with names starting with numeric character, search the presence
of those library objects in all locations from the root directory ( / ), create a back up of
such library objects with extension as .bak and rename the library objects with a non
numeric character in the beginning.
6. Renaming of the library objects is done as below:
For E.g., Library object 1234MyTrend.m1 will be backed up as 1234MyTrend.m1.bak.
Then, it will be renamed as INV_1234Trend.m1.
7. The .g file will further be modified to contain the newly modified library objects. The
modified .g file can now be used for conversion to .fdf file.
8. The script creates a log file g_fdf_script_log containing the logs of modification. The
log is present in the same location as the script. The log indicates if library objects are
found with name starting with numeric characters in the .g file, if such library objects
were renamed and in which all location they got renamed. It also indicates if a .g file
does not contain any such library objects.
NOTE
For Solaris, the above steps can be applied similarly using the script
remnumch_sol.sh.
NOTE
While searching the root directory for the .m1 file, the script may report "Access
Denied" error because the user may not have permissions on all the sub directories
in root. These errors can be ignored.
! CAUTION
The script takes the root directory as the default search directory and renames all
matching instances of associated library objects found. If you do not want to
rename instances in all directories then use the -d option where in you can specify
the search directory.
414
! CAUTION
As the library objects are getting renamed, any other .fdf or .g files using the same
library object may have issues. Ensure that such .fdf files or .g files are updated with
the modified library objects.
Script Options
The script can be run with various options which are described below.
Usage of script: -h option
To view the usage of the script and its available options use the -h option
Example: remnumch_win.sh -h
This will display all available options for the script.
To run the script with a specified search directory for library objects
The default search directory for library objects is '/' (root directory). If you wish to specify a dif-
ferent search directory use the -d option as below.
1. Run the script with the -d option as:
Remnumch_win.sh -d <SearchPath>
where, <SearchPath> is the directory path for the script to search the associated library objects.
E.g., remnumch_win.sh -d /opt/customer/displib
2. This will display a message prompting the user to enter the filename.
3. Enter the filename of the .g file along with its path and extension.
4. This option will run the script on the specified .g files and search the associated library
objects with names starting with numeric character only in the specified search path.
To run the script on multiple .g files
If you wish to modify more than one .g files containing library objects with names starting with
numeric character then use the option -m as below:
1. Create a text file sample.txt to contain the locations of all .g file on which you want to
run the script.
2. Edit the text file to contain the directory paths (one path per line)
e.g:
/opt/menus/d2
/opt/customer/displib
3. Run the script with the command line option -m as:
remnumch_win.sh -m <filename>
where <filename> is the text file with its path and extension which contains the
path of all .g files you wish to modify.
E.g., remnumch_win.sh -m /opt/sample.txt
4. This option will run the script on all .g files found in the path mentioned by the text
file and resolve all the library objects found with numeric names.
415
NOTE
The root directory is taken as default search directory for the Library object. If you
wish to specify a different search path then use the -m option in conjunction with -
d option as explained in next section.
NOTE
The -m option modifies the .g files in all the sub directories of a given directories
To run the script on multiple .g files with a specified search directory for library objects
If you wish to run the script on multiple .g file but restricting the search for library objects to
specified directories only then use the option -m -d as:
remnumch_win.sh -m <filename> -d <SearchPath>
where,
<filename> is the textfile with its path and extension which contains the path of the .g files that
need to be modified.
<SearchPath> is the directory path for the script to search for the associated library objects.
E.g., remnumch_win.sh -m /opt/sample.txt -d /opt/customer/displib
This will run the script on all .g files found in the path mentioned by the text file and search the
associated library objects with names starting with numeric character only in the specified search
path.
Converting Customized Markers

Skip this section if you have not customized the standard I/A Series (usr or usr1) markers.
FoxView does not support 50 Series markers. Converted standard markers have been included in
this release. However, if you customized 50 Series markers, you must convert them to
FoxView library objects.
I/A Series markers (.bdf format files) are located in the /usr/fox/wp/fonts directory.
To convert customized markers:

 From a command window, type:
cd /usr/fox/wp/fonts
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/bdf_m1 -f <markerfile.bdf>
where <markerfile.bdf> is usr_mkr.bdf or usr1_mkr.bdf.
The converted files are placed in the /opt/customer/displib/Markers directory.
416
Creating Bitmap Display Bar Files

The following example procedure shows how to create a display bar bitmap file of the /opt/cus-
tom/Initial_Disp file.
To create a display bar bitmap file on 50 Series stations:

cd /opt/custom
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/fdf_i -f Initial_Disp
The Initial_Disp.i file is created, which can be displayed on a display bar.
To create a display bar bitmap file on 70 Series stations:

fdf_bmp.exe [Directory]:\opt\custom\Initial_Disp
Where [Directory] is the letter of the root directory for \opt\custom, such as D:\
The Initial_Disp.bmp file is created, which can be displayed on a display bar.
If problems are encountered converting display files to bitmaps on the Solaris platform, you can
create the desired bitmaps through FoxView as follows:
1. In FoxView, change to the Operator Environment.
2. Call the display to be converted to into FoxView.
3. Right click over one of the buttons on the display bar, and select Assign->Display.
The .i file is automatically created and added to the display bar.
Converting 10x Displays/Library Objects to 9x

If you want to use the 10x created display files or library objects in 9x version, you have to convert
them to 9x to use in 9x version of FV/FD. For all possible display conversions between different
versions of FoxView, refer to Table .
To convert displays from FoxDraw:

1. Click on Save As 9.x… menu item in File menu.
2. Select the path to save the converted file and click Save.
(OR)
1. Choose Tools > Display Converter.
The Convert Display Files dialog box appears.
2. Choose 10x to 9x.
3. Click Browse.
The “Files to convert” dialog box appears.
4. Select the .fdf or .m1 files you want to convert.
5. Click Open in File to convert dialog box.
417

6. Click to select a different location to place the destination folder if you do not
want to place the converted files at the default location as specified.
Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
7. Click Convert.
To convert displays from the command line:
Type:
cd /opt/menus
This changes the directory to the display file directory or display library directory. The
example command above assumes that the display files are in the /opt/menus directory. Use the
path to the appropriate display or library directory on your system.
Type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/fdf_version -b *.fdf
This will convert the FoxDraw10.x display file to FoxDraw9.x file and save it in 9x
folder which will be created under source folder. Errors and removed objects or key-
words are written to a log file in the working directory. The log file's name is
FDFxxxxxx.dat, where xxxxxx is a unique value each time the fdf_version utility is
run.
To convert library objects from the command line:

1. In a command window, change to the directory containing user-build library objects.
2. Type:
/usr/fox/wpb/bin/tools/fdf_version -b *.m1
This converts all the library elements in the current directory and saves the converted
files in 9x folder.
To upgrade the display and library objects:

At a command window, type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/fdf_version [arguments] <files>
where arguments are as listed in Table B-9.
Argument Description
-r Convert recursively. The conversion includes
files in the subdirectories.
NOTE
<files> refers to the name(s) of the displays to be converted. Wildcards ( * ) are per-
mitted.
418
The utility produces the files as listed in Table B-10.

Table B-10. Files Produced
Extension Description
.fdf Converted display files
.m1 Converted library object files
.dat Log file
To convert all the displays in the /opt/menus directory:

 Type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/fdf_version -b /opt/menus/*
To upgrade all the library objects:

 Type:
/usr/fox/wp/bin/tools/fdf_version -b *
Table B-11. FoxView Version on Source Box
10.1/10.2Win 10.2 SOL10 9.0.2 Win 9.0.2 SOL2/8 DispMgr

Conversion Steps required to use display on Destination box - 10.1/10.2 Win
Display can be On the source Display can be On the source Copy the DM
directly opened on box, do an fdf_g directly opened box, do an fdf_g display (.pdf ) to
destination box on the display on destination on the display destination box
box
Copy the .g file Copy the .g file On destination
to destination to destination box, run pdf_fdf
box. box. utility on the
display
On destination On destination
box, do g_fdf box, do g_fdf
utility on .g file utility on .g file
Conversion Steps required to use display on Destination box - 10.2 SOL10
On the source Display can be On the source Display can be Copy the DM
box, do an fdf_g directly opened box, do an fdf_g directly opened display (.pdf ) to
on the display on destination on the display on destination destination box
box box
Copy the .g file to Copy the .g file On destination
destination box. to destination box, run pdf_fdf
box. utility on the
display
box, do g_fdf util- box, do g_fdf
ity on .g file utility on .g file
419
Table B-11. FoxView Version on Source Box (Continued)
10.1/10.2Win 10.2 SOL10 9.0.2 Win 9.0.2 SOL2/8 DispMgr

Conversion Steps required to use display on Destination box - 9.0.2 Win
Run 10x to 9x in Run 10x to 9x in Display can be On the source Copy the DM
DConvert to con- DConvert to directly opened box, do an fdf_g display (.pdf ) to
vert the existing convert the on destination on the display destination box
10x display to existing 10x dis- box
9x fdf play to 9x fdf
Copy the .fdf file On the source Copy the .g file On destination
to destination box box, convert the to destination box, run pdf_fdf
9x .fdf to .g file box. utility on the
using fdf_g display
Copy the .g file On destination
to destination box, do g_fdf
box. utility on .g file
On destination
box, do g_fdf
utility on .g file
Conversion Steps required to use display on Destination box - 9.0.2 SOL2/8
Run 10x to 9x in Run 10x to 9x in On the source Display can be Copy the DM
DConvert to con- DConvert to box, do an fdf_g directly opened display (.pdf ) to
vert the existing convert the on the display on destination destination box
10x display to existing 10x dis- box
9x fdf play to 9x fdf
On the source On the source Copy the .g file On destination

box, convert the box, convert the to destination box, run pdf_fdf
9x .fdf to .g file 9x .fdf to .g file box. utility on the
using fdf_g using fdf_g display
Copy the .g file to Copy the .g file On destination

destination box. to destination box, do g_fdf
box. utility on .g file
box, do g_fdf util- box, do g_fdf
ity on .g file utility on .g file
420
Appendix C. Widescreen
Conversion for Displays
This appendix explains how to convert user-modified .fdf displays from the standard definition
aspect ratio (4:3) to the widescreen aspect ratio (16:9), which can also increase the canvas size
available to the displays.
Introduction
In FoxView and FoxDraw 10.2.4, you can convert user-modified displays to a widescreen aspect
ratio (16:9) with a resolution of up to 1920x1080, providing a larger area for displays. With this
utility, the new displays’ width and height measurement will be 133.33x75, as compared to their
original size of 100x75 in versions prior to FoxView and FoxDraw 10.2.4.
Figure C-1. Display Canvas in FoxDraw 10.2.3 (or Earlier) As Shown in Widescreen Monitor
(1920x1080 Resolution)
421
B0700BE – Rev F Appendix C. Widescreen Conversion for Displays
As shown in Figure C-2, this conversion process provides additional space for a display in which
additional graphics can be built.
Figure C-2. Display Canvas in FoxDraw 10.2.4 (or Later) Shown in Widescreen Monitor
(1920x1080 Resolution)
After the displays are converted to suit the widescreen format, their contents will remain in the
same relative locations, and may have to be adjusted for better presentation. The display’s con-
tents can be repositioned as shown in Figure C-3 and Figure C-4.
422
Appendix C. Widescreen Conversion for Displays B0700BE – Rev F
Figure C-3. FoxDraw Displays Shown in Widescreen Monitor (Pre-Conversion)
Figure C-4. FoxDraw Display Shown in Widescreen Monitor (After Conversion)
423
The conversion can be performing with one of the following methods:

1. Using the new conversion utility fdf_wsmfdf available with FoxView and FoxDraw
10.2.4, as described in “fdf_wsmfdf Conversion Utility” on page 424.
2. Using the Dconvert utility with a new provision provided to convert legacy displays to
widescreen format.
3. Using the FoxDraw application with Open Display actions and Save Display actions
as described in “Widescreen Preferences for User Options Dialog Box” on page 265.
When converting the legacy format displays, a backup of the original display is created and a log
provides the status of the displays’ conversion. The back-up files can be used to revert the displays
to their original form if needed.
NOTE
Displays created in a FoxView/FoxDraw version prior to 10.2.4 will be addressed as
legacy format displays in this document.
fdf_wsmfdf Conversion Utility

The widescreen conversion utility fdf_wsmfdf can be found in
[rootdrive]\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools along with the other conversion utilities such as fdf_g,
g_fdf, etc.
NOTE
[rootdrive] is either C:\ or D:\ wherever the standalone FoxDraw software is
installed. For FoxView/FoxDraw software, the root drive will always be D:\.
Usage: fdf_wsmfdf f1.fdf f2.fdf ... fn.fdf

Where f1.fdf, f2.fdf, f3.fdf, etc. are the display files to be converted.
To convert the displays to widescreen format:

1. At a command window, type:
[rootdrive]\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools\fdf_wsmfdf [arguments] <files>
 Replace [rootdrive] with the appropriate drive letter C: or D:
 [arguments] are optional and are as listed in Table C-1.
Table C-1. fdf_wsmfdf Command Arguments
Argument Meaning
-r Convert recursively (include subdirectories in the conversion).
-h Display on-line Help screen for fdf_wsmfdf conversion utility
 <files> are the name(s) of the displays to be converted along with the full path.
 Wildcards (*) are allowed.
The conversion utility produces the file types as listed in Table C-2.
424
Table C-2. File Types Produced by the fdf_wsmfdf Conversion Utility
File Types Description

.fdf4_3 Backup of the 4:3 display file.
.fdf Converted display. All converted displays have the .fdf extension.
Backup Files
Before the conversion, the original display file is backed-up with an extension .fdf4_3. The con-
verted display file will have the extension .fdf and will replace the original display file. Both
backed-up display file and the converted display file can be found in the same path as that of the
original display being converted.
Figure C-5. Converted and Backed Up FoxDraw Display Files
NOTE
fdf_wsmfdf conversion utility does not provide backward compatibility. That is, a
converted display file cannot be converted back to legacy format display file using
the conversion utility. However, using the backed-up file with the .fdf4_3 extension
the original display file (in legacy format) can be retrieved.
To retrieve the original display file (in legacy format) from the backed-up file with the .fdf4_3
extension, proceed as follows:
1. Open the FoxDraw application.
2. In FoxDraw, click Open Display.
3. In the File Type field, select All Files.
4. Browse to the location where the backed-up display file is available.
425
5. Select and open the backed-up display file (*.fdf4_3).

6. Save the opened display file with the “.fdf ” extension to replace the converted display
file.
7. Delete the backed-up display file with the extension .fdf4_3.
Viewing Log Files

For each conversion, a log file is generated with the name as:
wsm_conversionlog_ddmmmyyyy_hh-mm.txt
Where ddmmmyyyy_hh-mm is the date and time of conversion.
The log file can be found in the same path as that of the fdf_wsmfdf conversion utility, that is,
[rootdrive]\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools and can be viewed using any text editor.
NOTE
[rootdrive] is either C:\ or D:\ wherever the standalone FoxDraw software is
installed. For FoxView or FoxDraw software, the root drive will always be D:\.
The log file contains information of successful conversion or failed conversion of the display files.
It will also show the backed-up file with its path.
Figure C-6 and Figure C-7 show examples of the contents of conversion logs.
Figure C-6. Conversion Successful Message
Figure C-7. Conversion Failed Message
426
NOTE
If various conversions are done within a single minute, all related log messages are
appended to a single log file. For conversions occurring in the minute after the first
conversion, a new log file will be generated for this next conversion.
Converting Multiple Files

Usage:
rootdrive\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools\fdf_wsmfdf [arguments] files1 files2
files3 ….filen
Where files1 files2 files3 ….filen are the different display files that need to
be converted with their full path.
Example:
D:\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools\fdf_wsmfdf D:\opt\menus\d1\disp1.fdf
D:\opt\menus\d1\disp2.fdf D:\opt\menus\d1\disp3.fdf
Converting Using Folders

To convert all display files within a folder:
rootdrive\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools\fdf_wsmfdf [arguments] [path]
Where [path] contains the location of the folder with a wildcard character *.
Example:
D:\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools\fdf_wsmfdf D:\opt\menus\d1\*
Or
D:\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools\fdf_wsmfdf D:\opt\menus\d1\*.fdf
Or
D:\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools\fdf_wsmfdf D:\opt\menus\d1\disp*.fdf
Converting Files in Subdirectories Recursively

To convert files present in subdirectories, use the argument -r (in lowercase only):
Using this argument it will convert all display files present in various sub directories recursively.
Example:
If D:\opt\menus has some display files and sub directories d1, d2, d3, etc each having display
files to be converted.
D:\usr\fox\wp\bin\tools\fdf_wsmfdf -r D:\opt\menus
This will convert the display files that are present in menus folder and recursively convert all dis-
play files present in subdirectories d1, d2, d3, etc.
Display Files That Do Not Convert Or Cannot Be Converted

Display files are not converted under the following circumstances:
1. If the display file is already converted to widescreen format, the fdf_wsmfdf conversion
utility will not try to convert it again. This aborted conversion will be reported in the
log file as file in WSM format.
2. The display file will not be converted if the names contain a space or special character.
427
3. The display file will not be converted if path of the display file contains space or spe-
cial characters.
4. The display file may not be converted if the display file has certain keywords in its
contents. Refer to Appendix G “Reserved Keywords (Not For Use in Foxboro Display
Files)”.
Converting Files through FoxDraw

Legacy Format Display files can be converted to Widescreen format using FoxDraw by setting the
Widescreen Preferences available in User Options dialog box.
Figure C-8. User Options Dialog Box - Widescreen Preferences
The options provided in this dialog box are described in Table C-3. The options provided vary
depending on the monitor type (widescreen or legacy).
Table C-3. Widescreen Preferences in User Options Dialog Box
Monitor
Setting Type Options Description
Create Widescreen dis- Widescreen Yes Create a new display in widescreen
play by default Monitor format by default.
No Create a Legacy format display by
default.
Prompt on Prompts user to create new display in
every create widescreen format.
Legacy Yes Not selectable - grayed out.
Monitor No Selected by default.
Prompt on Not selectable - grayed out.
every create
428
Table C-3. Widescreen Preferences in User Options Dialog Box (Continued)
Monitor
Setting Type Options Description
Convert 4:3 display to Widescreen Yes Converts the legacy displays to wide-
WSM format on open Monitor screen format displays by default
when the open operation is invoked.
NOTE: If display is in The display will be converted and will
widescreen format re-open after the conversion.
already, the prompt No The legacy displays will open without
shown in Figure C-9 will any conversion.
not appear. Prompt on Prompts user for conversion of the
every open display for every open operation.
Legacy (All options) Not selectable - grayed out.
Monitor
Convert 4:3 display to Widescreen Yes Converts the legacy displays to wide-
WSM format on save Monitor screen format displays by default
when the open operation is invoked.
The display will be converted and will
re-open after the conversion.
No The legacy displays will be saved
without any conversion.
Prompt on Prompts user for conversion of the
every open display for every save operation.
Legacy Yes Legacy files will be converted to wide-
Monitor screen format files on each save opera-
tion.
The display will be converted and will
re-open after the conversion.
No Legacy files will not be converted and
open in the same format.
Prompt on Prompts user for conversion of the
every open display for every save operation.
429
Figure C-9. Conversion Confirmation Dialog Box
NOTE
The file which is opened after conversion will be read-only file and cannot be saved
further if it is attached to a legacy (4:3 aspect ratio) monitor.
NOTE
The “Do not ask me again” check box can be selected to eliminate prompting in
each of the above operations. To see the prompt again, a setting is available in the
Widescreen Preferences in the User Options dialog box which you can set again.
430
Displays After Conversion

The displays, when converted, are left-justified with the remaining canvas area, usable for draw-
ing, on the right side of the display.
Figure C-10. Displays After Conversion
431
Viewing Displays in FoxView

Legacy format displays viewed in FoxView 10.2.4 when viewed on a widescreen monitor would
appear as below:
Figure C-11. Legacy Display Viewed on Widescreen Monitor
The converted widescreen format displays viewed in FoxView v10.2.4 on a widescreen monitor
would appear as below.
432
Figure C-12. Legacy Display Converted and Viewed on a Widescreen Monitor
Conversion of Overlays
Overlay Windows
Overlays do not need to be converted. If they are not converted, they will display in their original
locations, offset from the bottom left 0,0 origin and the legacy width of a base display (100 units
in the x direction).
If they are converted and used in a FoxView application in widescreen format, they are offset
according to the origin and using 133.33 units in the x-axis direction of the screen (that is, the
widescreen width).
There are two types of overlays; standard overlays and custom overlays:
 A standard overlay is defined as a fraction of the base display:
 Horizontal half - This standard overlay size is the full width and one half the
height of a base display.
 Vertical half - This standard overlay size is the full height and one half the width of
a base display.
 Quarter - This standard overlay size is one half the height and one half the width
of a base display (termed Quarter because 4 will fit over a base display).
 One-Eighth (1/8th) - This standard overlay size is one half the height and one
quarter the width of a base display (termed Eighth because 8 will fit in the space of
a base display).
 A custom overlay is any other window size that is not a base display size or standard
overlay size.
433
Standard Overlays
Standard overlays are converted differently than custom overlays by the fdf_wsmfdf conversion
utility. When a standard overlay is converted, the overlay window size changes to the widescreen
standard overlay dimensions. This behavior is consistent with the base display window conver-
sion.
Refer to Table C-4 below to compare the standard overlay window dimensions between legacy
monitor display sizes and widescreen monitor display sizes.
Table C-4. Standard Overlay Window Dimensions Comparison
Size
Units Wide X Units High Units Wide X Units High
Display Type Widescreen (16:9 ratio) Legacy (4:3 ratio)
Base display 133.33 x 75 100 x 75
Library Object 133.33 x 75 100 x 75
Overlay 133.33 x 75 100 x 75
Overlay: ½ horizontal 133.33 x 37.5 100 x 37.50
Overlay: ½ vertical 66.66 x 75 50 x 75
Overlay: 1/4 66.66 x 37.50 50 x 37.50
Overlay: 1/8 33.33 x 37.50 25 x 37.50
NOTE
Custom overlays are treated as standard overlays if their dimensions fall within the
allowed range of standard overlays. The allowance is in the range of +/- 0.5.
As well, the graphics contained on the standard overlay window do not change size. Load the dis-
play in FoxDraw to edit the graphic to use the newly-available space.
Figure C-13 shows a standard 1/8 overlay before and after conversion. Note the additional size of
the overlay window when converted to widescreen dimensions. It is 1/4th the width of the wide-
screen width. This is typical behavior for conversion of all standard-sized overlay windows:
434
1/8 Standard Overlay Before Conversion
1/8 Standard Overlay After Conversion

Figure C-13. 1/8 Standard Overlay Before and After Conversion
435
Custom Overlays
Custom overlay windows do not change their size when converted. This is because the overlay
window dimensions may not retain the 4:3 aspect ratio as well as not having their dimensions
defined as a fractional part of the base display window. The conversion utility marks the .fdf file as
a widescreen overlay, which inform FoxView and FoxDraw that this is a widescreen overlay. Fox-
View offsets this overlay on the screen according to the widescreen dimensions if it is a widescreen
overlay.
Figure C-14 shows an example of unconverted custom overlay windows within a base display that
has been converted but not re-engineered to space the graphic. Note the presence of additional
space on the right side of the base display, but that the custom overlay windows continue to load
according to the legacy base window dimensions.
Figure C-14. Unconverted Custom Overlay Windows
When the custom overlay is converted and shown in FoxView, it uses the width of the widescreen
to space the overlays out. The custom overlay window can be loaded into FoxDraw and sized to
use the additional real estate a widescreen monitor provides. The custom overlay could be wid-
ened to make use of the additional space to tile over the base display, as shown in Figure C-15.
436
Figure C-15. Converted Custom Overlay Windows
Additional Notes on Converting Overlays

Be aware of the following notes:
 When tiling overlays, if the overlay has been converted to a widescreen overlay and
you are using a monitor with a widescreen resolution, the overlay will tile using the
full width of the widescreen to calculate the tiling offset. If either of those two factors
are not true (widescreen file or widescreen monitor), the overlay offset calculation will
use the legacy base display width to calculate its placement offset.
 Overlays, as with base displays, can be loaded into FoxDraw to examine/change the
window size with the Display Properties…dialog box.
 It is recommended that if you are converting base displays that you also check all
scripts and commands that contain overlay placement and that your overlays are
placed accordingly to determine if they should be converted.
 All installed displays are of the legacy dimensions. It is recommended that you do not
convert block detail displays and faceplates unless there are also plans to re-engineer
them by sizing and placing graphics. The scratchpad trends and group list editor/dis-
play remain at their 4:3 aspect ratio dimensions.
437
438
Appendix D. External Palette
Browser
This appendix describes the External Palette Browser.
Overview
External Palettes
An external palette can be located on a CD-ROM, floppy disk, another machine, or the local hard
drive.
After copying an external palette, in FoxDraw you can:
 Load external palettes
 Use objects from external palettes.
You can select the external palette’s location (for example, K:\users\Mike\ExtPalettesLoc). Exter-
nal palettes must be located under the …\ExtPalettesLoc\Palettes directory tree, and the symbols
used by external palettes must be located in the …/ExtPalettesLoc/Symbols_1 directory.
When you enable support for external palettes, FoxDraw lists external palettes in the palette’s tree
of the Select Palette dialog box. Similar to a local palette, an external palette can also be loaded
and any selectable object can be used from an external palette.
NOTE
There is a potential for name conflicts between an existing palette and a palette you
want to copy. Be sure to understand how Palette Browser handles copy operations.
Palette Browser displays various error messages and warning messages to notify you
of potential problems.
Palette Browser Utility

Palette Browser Versus FoxDraw
Unlike FoxDraw, the Palette Browser utility lists all the external palettes. FoxDraw lists an external
palette in the tree control only when the model with the same name does not exist under the
/opt/fox and opt/customer directory trees.
439
B0700BE – Rev F Appendix D. External Palette Browser
Using the Palette Browser

An external palette can be located on a CD-ROM, floppy disk, another machine, or the local hard
drive. Use the Palette Browser utility to:
 View external palettes
 Copy (install) external palettes into the /opt/customer/displib/Palettes directory tree.
The utility requires the external palettes and symbols to be located in a directory named Palettes
and a directory named Symbols_1, respectively. These two directories must be at the same level
relative to the root directory.
The Palette Browser allows you to filter palettes based on palette type and supports two types of
palettes: copy palette and link palette. The utility assumes that palette names with a “_copy” suffix
are copy palettes, and that all other palettes are link palettes. The utility merely filters the palettes
by their file names.
Two Directory Levels

The utility supports two levels of palettes: palettes in the Palettes directory and palettes located in
subdirectories immediately below the Palettes directory.
NOTE
Prior to software Version 99.2, FoxDraw could recognize a palette only when it was
located in the Palettes directory. Subdirectories were not permitted.
Directory Preservation
The utility copies (installs) external palettes into the /opt/customer/displib/Palettes directory tree.
The utility also copies symbols used by the external palette into the
/opt/customer/displib/Symbols_1 directory.
If an external palette is located on the second level (a subdirectory of the Palettes directory),
the utility preserves the palette location (creating a similarly named subdirectory, if one is not
present in the destination Palettes directory).
For example, if an external palette is located in the …/ExtPalettesLoc/Palettes/Pumps directory,
the palette is copied into the /opt/customer/displib/Palettes/Pumps directory. The utility creates
the Pumps directory if it does not exist.
440
Appendix D. External Palette Browser B0700BE – Rev F
How Palette Browser Copies Palettes

When you copy (install) an external palette, Palette Browser copies:
 The palette to the /opt/customer/displib/Palettes directory tree
 Symbols used by the palette to the /opt/customer/displib/Symbols_1 directory.
Copying an External Palette

Before copying an external palette, the Palette Browser utility checks that:
 The /opt/customer/displib directory tree does not contain a library object with the
same name as the external palette.
If conflicting library object(s) are located (except under Palettes directory tree), an
error message displays, listings all the conflicting library objects. You must resolve all
these conflicts before the palette can be copied.
If conflicting library object(s) under the /opt/customer/displib/Palettes directory tree
are located, the utility checks that the library object is different from the external pal-
ette. If there is a difference, a warning displays, listing all the conflicting library
objects. You can continue copying the palette.
 The utility checks that the /opt/fox/displib directory tree does not contain a library
object with the same name as the external palette.
If the utility finds conflicting library object(s), a warning message displays, listing all
 The utility checks that the /opt/customer/displib directory tree does not contain a
library object with the same name as symbols used by the external palette.
If the utility finds conflicting library object(s) (except in Symbols_1 directory), it dis-
plays an error message, which lists all the conflicting library objects. You must resolve
all these conflicts before the palette can be copied.
If the utility finds conflicting library object(s) in the
/opt/customer/displib/Symbols_1 directory, it checks that the library object(s) are dif-
ferent from the external symbol. If it finds a difference, it displays a warning, which
lists all the conflicting library objects. You can continue copying the palette.
 The utility checks that the /opt/fox/displib directory tree does not contain a library
object with the same name as symbols used by the external palette.
If the utility finds conflicting library object(s), a warning message displays, listing all
The Copy Operation

Before FoxDraw copies an external palette, it first copies the symbols used by the external palette
into the /opt/customer/displib/Symbols_1 directory. After the symbols are successfully copied,
FoxDraw then copies the external palette.
441
B0700BE – Rev F Appendix D. External Palette Browser
Directory Structure Preservation

You can preserve the directory structure of the copied palette.
If you preserve the directory structure, when an external palette is located at a second level, Fox-
Draw preserves the palette location.
If, for example, an external palette is located in the …/ExtPalettesLoc/Palettes/Pumps
directory, Palette Browser copies the palette into the /opt/customer/displib/Palettes/Pumps direc-
tory. If the Pumps directory does not exist, Palette Browser creates the directory. Palette Browser
also copies symbols used by the external palette into the
/opt/customer/displib/Symbols_1 directory.
If you choose not to preserve the directory structure, the external palette is copied to the /opt/cus-
tomer/displib/Palettes directory.
Palette Browser Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to copy palettes and related symbols from the source to your local drive.
Palettes Location Box and Browse Button

Use these controls to select an external palette location (for example, J:\sym_pack).
NOTE
The external palette must be located in a subdirectory named Palettes (for
example, J:\sym_pack\Palettes). The symbols used by the external palette must be
located in a subdirectory (for example, J:\sym_pack\Symbols_1).
Palettes
This tree control lists external palettes hierarchically. When you select a palette, it displays in the
preview window on the right side of the dialog box.
Palette Filters
Use these controls to filter palettes based on the palette type. Two types of palettes are supported:
copy palettes and link palettes. Palette names with a “_copy” suffix are copy palettes, and palette
names without this suffix are link palettes.
Preserve Path
Select this check box to copy to a destination subdirectory with the same name as the source
directory. If this check box is not selected, copying a palette located in a subdirectory (second
level) places the palette in the Palettes directory.
For example, if an external palette is located in the J:\sym_pack \Palettes\Pumps directory, the
palette is copied into the \opt\customer\displib\Palettes\Pumps directory. The utility creates the
Pumps directory if it does not exist. The utility also copies symbols used by the external palette
into the /opt/customer/displib/Symbols_1 directory.
Copy
Click this button to copy an external palette and the symbols used by the external palette from the
external palette’s location to the opt/customer/displib directory tree.
442
Appendix E. Frequently Asked
Questions
This appendix lists the answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs).
How do I colorize gray 3D objects?

Three-dimensional (3D) objects are created by multiple polygons of various shades of gray that
are laid on top of one another; for example, the horizontal pipe is made up of ten squares, one
slightly smaller than the other. Each square is a different shade of gray, starting with dark gray and
ending with white. These squares are centered on one another making the pipe look 3D.
There are not enough shades of red, green, blue, yellow, and so on to make 3D objects in these
colors. There is a way, however, to make gray 3D objects appear another color.
For example, you need to create a horizontal pipe. If you create a polygon the same size and shape
of the pipe, you can place it on top of the pipe, make it transparent using the graphic attributes,
and then change the color to any color in the palette. The result appears three dimensional.
Notice colored objects in palettes such as (Link/Copy) pipes, valves, sensors, and 3d shapes.
To change the color of the objects, perform one of these procedures

2. Ungroup and deselect the object.
Now you can select the individual colored pieces and change their colors.
-or-
2. Open the Set Selection Attributes dialog box.
3. Select the piece you want to change color.
4. In the Set Selection Attributes dialog box, shut off the Apply to all check
boxes in the lower left corner.
5. Change the color to the color you want.
NOTE
If you do not shut off the Apply to all feature, all of the objects change to the same
color, losing the 3D effect.
When configuring the pipe to change color, do not apply the configuration to the entire group,
instead, apply it only to the colored polygon. If you apply it to the group, all the objects in the
group change color.
443
B0700BE – Rev F Appendix E. Frequently Asked Questions
How do I import a bitmap?

FoxDraw and FoxView:
 Support only .bmp image format.
 Run in 256 color mode.
 Assign the first 92 colors of the color palette to predefined colors. This leaves 164 col-
ors that are not assigned.
When FoxDraw or FoxView opens a display with linked images, it compares the colors in the
image to the colors in its palette. If a color does not exist in its color palette, each application
assigns one of the 164 unassigned color slots to that color.
Once the slot is assigned, it does not change until either program is restarted.
If all 256 color slots are filled, FoxView/FoxDraw uses the closest color.
The Windows operating system and Solaris operating system control the color palette differently.
On Windows, each separate application has its own 256 color palette. This means that one
program can have all purple colors, and another program can have all green colors without
affecting one another. On Solaris, there is only one palette of 256 colors that is shared by all appli-
cations. If you fill up all the color slots, other applications may be affected.
For best results, reduce the size of the image to what is needed, instead of scaling the image within
FoxDraw. FoxDraw scales the image, but the file size of the image remains the same. The larger
the file, the more time is needed to load the image. By reducing the size of the image with a paint
program, you reduce the file size and the file load time.
Reduce the number of colors in the image to the minimum number of colors possible or use gray-
scale images. This also reduces the file size and load time, but most importantly, it does not fill up
the color palette.
Several paint programs can also save the color palette. By saving the color palette, you can copy it
to all your other images so that they use the same colors and you do not have color conflicts.
A color conflict occurs when you have an image that uses a set of colors (for example, purples) and
you load a second image that has a different set of colors (for example, yellow). If the first image
fills up the color slots with purple, the second image also uses the purple colors, because these are
the only colors available.
On Solaris workstations, FoxDraw converts your bitmap (.bmp file) image to a Solaris format or
.i file image. It also converts the colors in the image’s palette to FoxDraw/FoxView colors (92 pre-
defined colors).
To convert colors
1. Place the .bmp images into the /opt/customer/displib/Bitmap directory.
2. In FoxDraw, select Link Bitmap from the Object menu.
3. Select your image, and FoxDraw starts the conversion program.
4. Once complete, place the image in your display and you are done.
444
Appendix E. Frequently Asked Questions B0700BE – Rev F
Why do some .dfx files not import from the Convert dialog box?
Most .dxf files convert directly from the convert utility in FoxDraw, but some files may not work,
especially if they were not created with Autodesk’s AutoCAD software.
NOTE
Make sure the .dxf file does not begin with a number. For example, a file named
1234b.dxf is not permitted.
Currently, FoxDraw does not support:

 Binary .dxf format (only ASCII format is supported)
 The latest version of AutoCAD by Autodesk (Release 14).
Some formats can be brought into AUTODESK VIEW and re-saved. Some of these can then be
converted by the FoxDraw’s convert tool without errors.
If converting through the Convert dialog box does not work, try converting the file manually as
described in the FoxDraw on-line Help.
What is the difference between copied and linked objects in displays?

There is a library of pre-built objects that resides in the \opt\fox\displib\Symbols or the \opt\cus-
tomer\displib\Symbols directories.
To access these symbols or links, use the Link Objects command under the Object menu. This
provides a list of the approximately 300 objects to page through. You can also use the Link_*****
palettes from the Foxboro palettes option under the Palette menu.
This gives you a graphical representation of the objects. These palettes contain only link and com-
posite symbols.
The Copy_***** palettes provide graphical representations of the same objects as the Link pal-
ettes, but these are actual objects and are copied to your display when placed.
A copied object is an actual object. You can change all the individual pieces of that object. You
edit the points and shape of the object and can configure each individual piece of the object.
Copied objects affect the file size of your display. The more objects in the display, the larger the
display and the longer it takes to load.
A linked object is a graphical representation of the actual object that exists in the symbol directo-
ries. When you move a display to another workstation, the symbols that are linked in that display
must also exist on the new workstation. You can affect only the scale, rotation, orientation, posi-
tion, and visibility of a linked object. Linked objects are not part of the display, only their refer-
ence is. They do not affect the display’s file size. Linked objects are loaded into cache memory.
When you have more than one of the same type symbol in a display, the first symbol loads into
cache, and the second one is copied from cache.
NOTE
If any modifications are made to the library object and if it already exists in the
cache memory of FoxView, then FoxView will not reflect those modifications. You
must restart FoxView to initialize the cache memory with the modifications made.
445
A composite object is a combination of linked and copied objects. Since you can affect only cer-
tain aspects of a linked object, it is sometimes necessary to use copied objects instead, which
increase the size of the file.
For example, if you have a tank object with legs, top, middle, bottom and a fill level that you
made from linked objects, you could not configure the fill level. To overcome this problem, take
the legs, top, middle, and bottom (all the static pieces) and make a link symbol out of it. Next,
group the fill level to the new symbol, yielding a composite object. In this example, the original
object’s file size was 7.5 MB. The composite object is 1.5 MB.
How do I change the background color of trend objects?

To change the background color
1. Copy the trend object from the /opt/fox/displib/Trends directory to the
/opt/customer/displib/Trends directory.
NOTE
Copy it with a new name. Do not use default names such as STND_FWxHH or
TND_UPDATE_RIGHT.
2. Call up the display in FoxDraw.

3. Choose the Select All command from the Edit menu.
This selects all the objects in the trend object.
! CAUTION
Do not ungroup the trend object.
4. Open the Configure Objects dialog box.

5. Locate the group name (for example, FOX_Quad_Trend).
6. Click the + symbol.
The list of group members expands.
7. Choose the member named Rectangle located near the top of the list.
This rectangle is the background for the trend object.
8. Open the Set Selection Attributes dialog box.
9. Select the Fill tab.
10. Choose a new color.
446
Appendix E. Frequently Asked Questions B0700BE – Rev F
I saw the message “Saved in version 6 format” when I saved my display.

What does this mean?
FoxDraw presents this message when it is unable to invoke the fdf_version utility on your display
file after it saves the display on disk. This usually happens after FoxDraw has been running for
some time or swap space is getting low. Closing and reopening FoxDraw will usually resolve this
problem.
If FoxView opens a base display (fdf ) at version 6, it automatically runs fdf_version on it. But if a
library object (submodel) is at version 6, the following error will be displayed when it is referenced
within a display file:
Error: library object not at latest version
The display with the out-of-rev library object will behave as expected, except that no out-of-ser-
vice indication will be shown for any object within the submodel. Users should correct the version
problem by loading the library object into FoxDraw and saving, or by running fdf_version by
hand.
447
448
Appendix F. Glossary
Alias A text string (suitably representing the property) that exposes a dynamic
by replacing the property’s value or part of it.
A text string (suitable name that defines the graphic attribute) that exposes
the graphic attribute.
Arc Length Attribute

This attribute cannot be applied to a circle.
Base Display A display occupies the entire FoxView window (100 units wide by
75 units high in world coordinate units in a legacy display, 133.33 units
wide by 75 units high in a widescreen display). When you open another
base display in FoxView, the previous base display closes.
You can open one or more overlays on top of a base display. When you
open an overlay, the base display does not close. It can, however, be hidden
by a full-screen overlay.
A base display has .fdf format.
Bit Mask (Bit State Conversion)

A 32-bit or 16-bit value that specifies the bits to be compared.
Bit Match (Bit State Conversion)

A bit match is the value (0, 1, or Don’t Care) of each of the 32 (or 16) bits.
Bit State Operator The bit state operator defines the relationship between the bit mask and
the current bit states in the process variable. The bit state operator can be
ANY (logical OR function) or ALL (logical AND function). If the opera-
tor is set to ANY, any of the bit conditions may evaluate to true. If the
operator is set to ALL, all the bit conditions must be true to have the
expression evaluate to true.
Browse Button Click the Browse button to choose a variable name from the Control
Browser dialog box.
Clamped A clamped value displays only within its configured range.

For example, if a temperature reading is 125°C but its high scale is 121,
the reading plots as 121. If the low scale is 10, a reading of 4°C plots as 10.
Detail Display The standard supplied display for a compound or block.

A compound detail display permits you to change modifiable parameters
and turn the compound on or off.
A block detail display permits you to tune loops, perform control tasks,
view and control alarms, and view trend data.
449
B0700BE – Rev F Appendix F. Glossary
Detail Display Overlay

A display that opens on top of a block detail display or compound detail
display.
On block detail displays (sometimes referred to as default detail displays),
overlays generally open on the bottom half of the base display. The trend
overlay, however, opens in the top left-quarter of the display.
You can specify the overlay’s position in the Display Properties dialog box:
full screen, half-screen (horizontal or vertical), quarter-screen, eighth-
screen, or custom.
An overlay has the same .fdf format as a base display.
Display Script (FoxView)

A display script is a file containing commands and nested script files. The
first line, “dmcmd script,” informs FoxView that it is a script file and that
all subsequent commands are to be executed.
Dynamic - Operator
A configured attribute of a graphical object that responds to an operator
press by executing some activity such as opening an overlay or setting a
value.
Dynamic - Passive A configured attribute of a graphical object that causes changes to the
graphical object in response to changes in data value (for example, Fill
level, Fill Color).
Embedded Script An embedded script is a display command script embedded in the display.
FoxView executes this script when the display opens.
Environment File (FoxView)

The environment file specifies the menus, menu items, and displays avail-
able to the user.
FoxView includes four default environments: Initial, Operator, Process
Engineer, and Software Engineer.
Each environment has an environment file (*.env) defining the menu bar,
display bar, and access protection level. You can edit any of these files or
create new ones using the default files as models. Environment files are
stored in \usr\fox\env\ (Windows) or /opt/fox/env (Solaris).
Environment Variable
The environment variable is a string consisting of information such as the
drive, path, or filename associated with a symbolic name (for example,
USR_DIR) that can be used by the operating system.
Expose Make an alias or dynamic visible to upper level library objects, overlays, or
base displays. Only exposed aliases or dynamics can be modified outside
the containing library object.
450
Appendix F. Glossary B0700BE – Rev F
Faceplate A faceplate is a linked display object that shows critical block parameters.
There is a standard 1/8 screen faceplate for each I/A Series block type. You
can create custom faceplates.
Focused Object When multiple objects are selected, the focused object is highlighted with
a dashed outline. This is the object that is acted upon when you choose
Reference Point, Graphic Attributes, and Configure Objects commands.
FoxView FoxView is the real-time application for viewing displays with dynamically
updating connections to the process and operator-triggered actions.
Grid A grid is a matrix of solid or dotted lines that displays as an aid to posi-
tioning and aligning objects in FoxDraw. The grid does not appear when
display files are opened in FoxView.
Hershey Fonts These are 18 supplementary fonts supplied with FoxDraw which are espe-
cially useful for flipping or rotating text.
Unlike standard system fonts, Hershey fonts can be rotated or flipped. You
can configure Hershey fonts with the Rotate dynamic attribute.
Hershey fonts, public domain vector fonts developed by A. V. Hershey, are
distributed by the National Bureau of Standards (now called NIST®).
Hershey fonts are not as sharp and well-defined in appearance as standard
fonts.
To specify a Hershey font, select the text, and then choose

Graphic Attributes from the Object menu.
451
History List Shows previously configured control variables, ranges, or displays. By

default, history lists contain up to 50 entries. You can change the number
of entries with the User Options command in the Options menu.
Library Object A library object is a file linked to a base display. Library objects include
faceplates, trends, symbols, markers, and buttons.
Marker A marker is a commonly used graphic symbol. For example, Foxboro

markers include standard PLC labels and symbols, instrumentation sym-
bols, mathematical operators, indicator marks, and various types of
arrows.
Number of States This field contains the number of states in the state table. The minimum
is 1 and the maximum is 125. Type a value or use the spin boxes. To auto-
matically add a single state, select the area below the last entry in the table.
Optimized Update Select this check box to provide faster fill level updates in FoxView.
Do not select this option for objects that are also configured with move,
rotate and scale attributes.
Optional Alias An exposed alias or dynamic that may be left unresolved without causing
an Out-Of-Service condition when viewed in FoxView.
Out-Of-Service An object in this state is highlighted with a cyan border in FoxView.
Overlay Display A display that opens on top of a base display but does not replace it. An
overlay can be full-screen, half-screen (horizontal or vertical), quarter-
screen, eighth-screen, or a custom size. You can specify the overlay’s posi-
tion in the Display Properties dialog box.
An overlay has the same .fdf format as a base display.
Palette A window containing graphic objects that you can copy into your display.
Point A point is an element of a line, polyline, polygon, curve, or closed curve

created in FoxDraw.
To identify an object’s points, click on the Point tool and select the object.
The points are circled.
Reference Point Point on which an object (or group of objects) moves, around which it
rotates, from which it shrinks and grows, and which snaps to the grid or
snaps to another object.
By default, the reference point is the center of the object, but you can
specify a different location with the Object, Set Reference Point com-
mand.
Required Alias An alias or dynamic that must be resolved or the dynamic associated with
the object is not operational and the object is drawn with an Out-Of-Ser-
vice indication at run-time, in FoxView.
Resolve Text Alias Associate a text value with an alias.
452
Appendix F. Glossary B0700BE – Rev F
Scan Delay A scan delay is the number of seconds before the system begins scanning
at the configured scan rate.
Scan Rate A scan rate is the interval at which the system reads the values at all config-
ured points.
Shared Variable A shared variable is a user-created variable that allows data from outside
the process to be included in a display or library object.
Sticky Overlay A sticky overlay does not close unless you select the overlay’s Close button
or close the base display.
Normally, an overlay closes when another overlay opens on top of it, or
when you close an overlay that was opened before it.
Substitution List A substitution list is a list of keywords in brackets paired with process vari-
able names or text. The list is appended to the “subslist” command. When
the command executes, the keyword definitions are substituted for match-
ing keywords in a display template.
This is an example substitution:
dmcmd subslist \opt\customer\displib\Templates\display-
name
<TTT>=FURNACE PRESSURE
<port>=PY0101
<201>=Furnace Press PT1
<301>=CPO8A01:PT0101.PNT
Tag A string representing an Object Manager object or variable (for example,

HT1: AIN.OUT). A tag may contain one or more text aliases.
Template FoxDraw includes templates for a base display, four overlays, a library
object, and four palettes.
A template determines screen size and position, background color and
grid settings. You can also create your own templates for displays, library
objects, or palettes.
Text Alias A string that takes the place of a tag or portion of the tag. Text aliases are
delimited with curly braces. (for example, {.COMP1})
ToolTips Tooltips are labels that identify toolbar buttons.

If ToolTips is enabled, you can view a button’s information by pointing at
the button with the mouse and waiting one or two seconds.
Tree Control A tree control is a type of list box that shows items arranged in an easily
navigable hierarchy. The tree controls in FoxDraw include small plus (+)
and minus (-) icons that permit you to expand and collapse the display of
groups of files.
Expand the tree as needed by clicking the plus indicator, then select an
item.
Typically, you can double-click an item to execute the default action, such
as opening a file. This shortcut saves the step of clicking the OK button
453
after making a selection. You can also use the arrow keys to move up or
down the tree and the numeric keypad’s + or - keys to expand or collapse
sections.
Trend Graph of real-time or historical data from up to four variables. The data
can be numeric or Boolean. FoxDraw includes seven trend types of differ-
ent sizes and varying information.
World Coordinate System

A screen coordinate system based on floating-point numbers. It originates
at (0,0) and extends both positively and negatively out to limits of (-
32768,-32768) and (32767,32767).
A FoxDraw full-screen base display has its lower-left corner at (0,0) and
extends 100 world coordinate units on the x-axis and 75 units on the y-
axis.
A widescreen base display has its lower-left corner at (0,0) and extends
133.33 world coordinate units on the x-axis and 75 units on the y-axis.
454
Appendix G. Reserved Keywords
(Not For Use in Foxboro Display
Files)
This appendix provides a list of reserved keywords for which objects in converted user-modified
Foxboro display files should not be named.
When converting user-modified Foxboro display files (that is, Foxboro display files which you
have modified), be aware that the conversion tool has a list of reserved keywords that should not
be used when building displays. After conversion, some objects may derive a name which exists in
this list of reserved keywords. Ensure that the objects in your converted Foxboro display files do
not match any of the following keywords.
act align amove amovex amovey

arclength arolz ascale ascalex ascaley
backgrflag batcherase bcol bcolor bitmap
bitmapflag cd center cgmget cgmsave
chdir cir2 circ circle cl
clear clip clone closed closegroup
col color comp constant coordbase
coordlimits coordscale csave cspline ctb
current cwf1ag dbflag deact decomp
deface defaults defu degroup delay
demask detect direction dump dupe
dynarray dyninit dynprop dynswitch dyntext
dynupdale ecolor endc endcomp endf
endface endg endgroup endm endmodel
endv endview estyle etime ewidth
extcenter extent face fcir2 fcirc
fcol fcolor fdir fdirection fgroupflags
fgrouptype filled fillgroup fint finter
font fpercent fpie fpie2 fpoly
fpolygon frect free fsec2 fsec3
fsect fsty fstyle ftrect get
graphaxis graphtrace grid group gsave
height immu input inst inst2
lcol lcolor line lsty lstyle
lwid lwidth m1get m1save m1xget
455
B0700BE – Rev F Appendix G. Reserved Keywords (Not For Use in Foxboro
m2get m2optsave m2save m2xget majorspacing

mark marker mask mcol mcolor
mdelay merge minorspacing model modinst
modinst2 moffset move mrotz mscale
msize msty mstyle mtran mtran0
ndcscale nil noerase offset pan
path pause pcfrect percent pie
pie2 plotdata points poly polygon
port prec preview proj project
quit radius rastop rect rectheight
rectwidth redraw refpoint renamedvars repairflag
reschk resol rfrect rftrect rmove
rmovex rmovey rotz rrect rrotz
rscale rscalex rscaley save scale
sec2 sec3 sect sector segments
set sfgrouptype size spline startangle
status stext stress tcol tcolor
text theight time tran tran0
upd update updd upde userdata
userword valuelimits vfile view vis
vrest vsave wcscale wind workst
wsnum wsport wswind xget xpoints
xtran xvaluelimits yvaluelimits zoom zoomin
zoomout zpr zps
456
Index
.bmp file 10
importing 444
.dxf files 10
converting 15
importing 445
.fdf files 10
.g file
moving between Windows and Solaris 356
.i files 10
.m1 files 10
.pdf files 10
0 Offset 240
1 Offset 240
3-D animation 118
simulating 118
3-D objects 443
A
Access level 242
editing 395
specifying 242
Action 200
adding to a display object 200
operator 78, 79
protecting 306
Add Convention dialog box 197
Add Dynamic Update dialog box 185
Add graphic attributes 325
Add Operator Action dialog box 200
Add script file 122
syntax 122
Adding 360
convention 302, 303
fonts on a Windows workstation 360
point 340
Address 358, 359
retrieving from server 358
Adjusting 344
arrow key precision 344
AIM*API 49
retrieving address and letterbug 358
457
B0700BE – Rev F Index
Alias
editing 395
Alias Tutorial 312
Aliases 21, 96
configuring a library object 313
exposing 98
replacing 400
resolving 98
syntax 96
tutorial 312
Aliases tab 386
Alignment commands 69
ALMOPT 106
bit acronyms 106
ALMSTA 105
bit acronyms 105
an_init.cfg file 49
API Server Connection Utility 50
API Server Connection Utility dialog box 271
Applying 295, 296
convention to an object 296
dynamic to an object 295
Arc length attribute 449
Arc length dynamic 95
Arcs 72
creating 283
drawing a pie arc 283
drawing a sector 285
drawing a three-point sector 285
scaling 95
Arrow keys 344
adjusting precision 344
using for precision 291
Attributes 17, 84
arc length 449
dynamic 17, 84, 185
graphic 16
see also Dynamics 17, 84
AutoCAD 15
converting a .dxf file 15
files 10
B
Background text 286, 301
specifying read file data 301
Backing up 264, 393
displays 264
Backup 355
configuring capability 355
458
Index B0700BE – Rev F
recovering files 355

Base display 9, 307, 449
command script 166
configuring 311
creating 277
directory location 15
Base displays 8
about 8
bdf_m1 utility 416
Bit 192
acronyms 192
numbers 192
Bit acronyms 106
ALMOPT/INHSTA 106
ALMSTA 105
BLKSTA 107
general 105
INHALM 109
Bit extensions 104, 105, 300
about 102
for operator actions 104
Object Manager variable 51
specifying 300
used for trend connections 103
Bit mask 449
Bit match 111, 449
Bit Selection dialog box 192
Bit state 111
conversion 111, 189, 192
table 104
Bit State dialog box 189
Bit state operator 449
Bitmap 20
linking 279
using 20
Bitmap display bar files
creating 417
Bitmaps 10, 76
converting display with bitmaps 410
importing 444
location of 12
Blink attributes 88
Blink rate 297
specifying 297
BLKSTA 107
bit acronyms 107
Block 112
descriptor 112
parameters 54
Blocked text file 112
459
Blocks 399
replacing 394
broadcast request (auto-discover) for making TCP/IP connections to remote AIM*API and FoxAPI
servers 49
Browser 270
Browser selection 393
setting up properties 393
Button
adding to a display 120
Buttons
browse, Browse button 449
C
Center 346
Center mode 64, 65
Change 258, 259, 260, 261
global 258
Changed 261
Changing 364
log file path and name 364
Character coordinates syntax 205
Checking 341
reference point 341
Circle 95, 281
arcs 95
creating 281
scaling 95
Circle Tool 281, 282
Clamped 449
Clamped values 110
client initialization file for AIM*API and FoxAPI connections 49
Clipboard 63
Close display/overlay action 81
Closed Curve 282
creating 282
Closed Curve Tool 282
Color 88
background 163
changing background of trend objects 446
display based on a state table 114
dynamics 88
FoxDraw definition files 19
Command 81
Background Text Tool 286
Circle Tool 152
Closed Curve 282
Curve 282
Curve Tool 152
Cut 347
Delete 347
460
display manager 81
Display Properties 132, 162
Duplicate 347
Exit 132
Line Tool 152
New 132
Open 132
Point Tool 152
Polygon 152
Polygon Tool 152
Polyline 152, 284
Polyline Tool 152
Recover 132, 355
Rectangle 152, 285
Rectangle Tool 152
Sector Tool 285
Select Tool 152
Text Tool 152
Three-Point Sector Tool 152
Toolbars 72
Command line 364
operation of dedit 364
running dedit 364
Command script 166
close display 166
open display 166
Command tab 383
Commands 69
alignment 69
flip 69, 70
GEdit 124
object focus 78
order 339
point modes 64
same size 71
snap 71
zoom 56, 57
Comment 20
Comment object 20, 287
changing graphical attributes 294
changing visibility of 357
creating 287
Comment objects 357
changing visibility of 357
Complexity Report
generating 398
Complexity report 366, 367
generating 396
listing only configured points 400
461
showing parts list 400

Compounds 399
replacing 394
Configuration 86, 181, 231, 243, 254
defaults 54
object 75
shortcuts 273
Configure
aliases as optional 325
Fill Blink dynamic 321
Fill Color graphic attribute 333
MA Box 322
Operator Action 321
Static Label 322
Text Contents dynamic 320
text readout for Input Flow, Fill Level, and Output Flow 331
Configure Object dialog box 190
Configure Objects dialog box 181, 231, 243, 254
aliases tab 225
Configuration tab 230
dynamics tab 266
exp. graphics tab 224
General tab 183, 232, 244
Graphics tab 229
Grid tab 241, 252
Pens tab 234, 246
Plot Area tab 244, 246
Scales/Delta tab 254
Security tab 242
Text Substitutions tab 256
Timing tab 241, 253
Trend Area tab 233
Configure Plot Pen dialog box 249, 251
Configure the Fill Level 330
Configure Trend Pen dialog box 236
Configuring 299, 304
a dynamic to an object 295
a pipe with fill attributes 299
backup capability 355
base display 311
complex objects 327, 329
convention 302
display convention 302
faceplate 309
library object with aliases 313
library object with optional configuration
library object with graphic attributes 324
library object with valve and pump specification 320
momentary contact action 304
462
object action 304

object edge 293
objects 4, 75
operator action 304
overlay 301
read file data for a background text object 301
single block trend 310
text 294
text object 294
trend 309
trends 25
useful library object 315, 319
user preferences 54
X/Y plot 310
Connect variable 83
used with a relative pick 305
Connect Variable dialog box 213
Connecting 17, 84
dynamic to the process 17, 84
connecting toe I/A Series workstations 50
Connection report 366
generating 397, 398
Continuous conversion 110, 185
Continuous dialog box 185
Control processor 87
obtaining values from 87, 88
Conventions 18, 85
adding 303
applying to an object 296
converting to individual dynamic attributes 296
merging 303
use of 18, 85
versus dynamics 17, 84
Conversion 191
threshold 191
Conversions 111, 112
applying to a dynamic 110
bit mask 111
bit state 111
continuous 110
discrete 111
numeric/text 112
read file 112
threshold 111
uses for 110
convert utility 403
Converting 296
convention into individual attributes 296
displays 403
463
dxf files 15
one display type to another type 355
Coordinate systems 123
Coordinates 55
screen 55
Copy or Link
library object 281
Copying 60
existing faceplate to a library object 290
object 347
palette 350
palette with the Palette Browser 351
palettes 60, 61
Copying or Linking
library object 281
CP 87, 88
obtaining values from 87
Creating
background text 286
base display with relative pick and open overlay operator actions 307
circle 281
closed curve 282
curve 282
displays 4
dynamic update horizontal move 298
ellipse 282
library object 291, 292
line 283
new base display 277
new display using a template 278
new library object for use in a generic overlay 278
numeric text update field 115
objects 3, 4
operator action horizontal move 307
palette of another size 292
pie arc 283
polygon 284
polyline 284
rectangle 285
scroll region object 286
sector 285
template 287
text 117
three-point sector 285
user-built faceplate 288
Curve 282
closed 282
creating 282
creating a closed curve 282
464
Curve Tool 152

Custom menus 19, 167
Customized markers, converting 416
Cutting 347
object 347
D
Data
array 47
header 47
string variable 46
Data directories 54
Data Origin 240
Database 54
default 54
local 54, 87, 88
DEdit 281, 363, 364
command 364
invoking from a command window 364
settings 393
using 363
window 376
dedit commands 126
trend and plot 126
Deleting 360
fonts from a Windows workstation 360
object 347
point 340
Detail display 449
overlay 450
Dialog box 249, 251
Add Convention 197
Add Dynamic Update 185
Add Operator Action 200
API Server Connection Utility 271
Bit Selection 192
Bit State 189
Compound Block Browser 198
Configure Object 190
Configure Objects 181, 231, 243, 254
Configure Plot Pen 249, 251
Configure Trend Pen 236
Connect Variable 213
Continuous 185
Discrete State 188
Display Command Builder 169, 209, 223
Display Convention Configurator 257
Display Properties 162
Edge Width 198
465
Edit Alias 391

Edit Convention 197
Edit Dynamics/Connections 258
Edit Graphic Alias 229
Edit graphic alias 228
Edit Range 255
Edit Range Alias 392
Edit range alias 227
Edit Substitution 256
Edit Text 174
Edit text alias 225
Expose dynamic 228
Font Setup 269
Font Style 177
Grid 172
Link Faceplate/Trend 178
Link from Library 178
Momentary Contact 211
Move Horizontal 214
Move Vertical 215
New 159
Numeric/Text Entry 217
Object Browser 270
Open 161
Open Overlay 202
Open Overlay More Attributes 204
Palette Browser 180, 442
Properties 389, 390
Ramp 212, 213
Read File 195
Relative Pick 210
Save As 162
Select Block Type 178
Select Convention File 258
Select Faceplate 178
Select Graphic Attribute 224
Select Palette 179
Set Default Attributes 175
Set Selection Attributes 175
Threshold State 191
Tip Of The Day 158
Unresolved Links 262
User Options 264
Verify Display 262
Verify Selection 262
Direction 89
reversing 110
Directories 54
data 54
466
display library 12, 13

Discrete conversion 111, 188
Discrete State dialog box 188
Display 14, 15
base 14, 449
converting Display Manager displays from a command window 409
detail 449
moving between Windows NT and Solaris 355
overlay 452
Display command action 81
Display Command Builder dialog box 169, 209, 223
Display commands 81
Display Convention Configurator dialog box 257
Dynamic Update tab 258
Display Convert utility 403
Display Edit 363
using 363
Display files 393
backing up 393
converting 408
dumping and uploading 397
Display format, updating 411
Display library directories 12
Display Manager
copying displays 408
Display Manager commands 81
Display Properties dialog box 162
Display History tab 164
Display Script tab 166
Fast Scan option 8, 165
General tab 163
OM Data tab 165
Overlay tab 170
Statistics tab 171
Display script 450
Displayable area 55, 157
Displaying 352
color based on a state table 114
text based on a state table 113
tool tips 352
toolbars 352
Displays 8, 76, 394
about 8
backing up 264
base 9
base display size 55, 157
building tips 76
call-up time 353
commands 81, 169, 209, 223
467
configuring a base display 311

conventions 18, 85
converting 355
copying to another workstation 14
creating 277, 278
creating a new base display 277
creating with a template 278
creation of 3
files 13
full screen size 55
library 14
linking a bitmap 279
linking a single block trend 310
linking a standard faceplate 279
linking a trend 280
linking an XY plot 280
obtaining information about 394
overlay 9, 170
printing 274
properties 8
properties of 162
quarter-screen overlay size 55, 157
scan rate 165
statistics 171, 353, 354
types of 9
using conventions 18, 85
using GEdit to add an item 120
displays 6
Dollar sign 102
substitution 102, 110
Dollar sign substitution 50
Draw toolbar 152
Drawing 72
arcs 72, 73
shortcuts 274
tools 152
Drawing area 55
magnifying 56
dspblock.dat file 54
dsppdef.dat file 54
Dump file 373, 375, 397, 400
creating 400
uploading 400
Dump report
showing all aliases 400
Duplicating 347
object 347
Dynamic attributes 86, 185, 191
about 17, 84
468

arc length 95
blink 88
color 88
edge color 94
edge style 94
edge width 94
fill color 93
fill level 92
fill pattern 93
filled 93
radius 95
rotate 96
scale 91
see also Dynamics 86
table of 86
text color 95
text contents 94
visibility 92
Dynamic element 86, 298
editing 86
resetting 298
Dynamics 86, 185, 295
about 17, 84
applying a conversion 110
arc length 95, 96
blink 89
color 88
conversions 17, 84
edge color 94
edge style 94
edge width 94
editing 295
exposing 17, 84
fill color 93
fill level 92
fill pattern 93
filled 93
minimum and maximum values 88
move horizontal 89
move path percent 90, 91
move path point 91
move vertical 89
radius 95
resolving 84
rotate 96
scale 91, 92
see also Dynamic attributes 86
469
text color 95
text contents 94
visibility 92, 93
E
Edge 76
configuring 293
edge 68
invisible 293
making invisible 293
Edge color dynamic 94
Edge style dynamic 94
Edge Width dialog box 198
Edge width dynamic 94
Edit Alias dialog box 391
Edit Convention dialog box 197
Edit Dynamics/Connections dialog box 258
Edit Range Alias dialog box 392
Edit Range dialog box 255
Edit Substitution dialog box 256
Edit Text dialog box 174
Editing 295
access level 395
alias 395
dynamic elements 86
range alias 396
shortcuts 275
Editing a dynamic 295
Ellipse 282
creating 281, 282
Embedded script 450
Enabling 342
display focus mode 342
Environment files 356, 450
Environment variable 450
Examples 116
creating a numeric text update field 115
creating a ramp pushbutton 116
creating a relative pick 119
creating a rotating needle 115
creating a tank with fill level connection 114
creating a T-bar 117
increasing the size of a pipe 300
simulating 3-D animation 118
threshold conversion 119
using a graphic attribute 16
using state table to display color 114
using state table to display text 113
Exception Report
470
generating 398
Exception report 371
generating 397
Executing 306
script 306
Exit 132
Exposing
aliases 98
dynamics 17, 84
graphic aliases 99
graphic attributes 16
operator actions 79
properties of dynamics 17
range aliases 100
text aliases 98
External palette 350
enabling support of 350
External palette browser 439
External palettes 59
F
Faceplates 23, 451
about 23
as generic overlays 291
configuring 309
copying to a library object 290
creating user-built 288
custom 288
linking to displays 279
location of 12
using text substitution 256
Fast Arrow Move command 344
Fast Scan option 8, 165
fdf_i utility 417
fdf_version utility 412
fdf_wsmfdf Utility 424
Field 115
creating an updating numeric text field 115
File 373
dump 373, 375, 400
obtaining information about 394
statistics 376
File menu 132
File Stats tab 380
Files 112, 393
.bmp 10, 13, 444
.dxf 10
.fdf 10
471
.g 11, 405, 408

.i 10
.m1 10, 13
.pdf 10
base display 12
colordef.dat 54
converting 355
copying 309
creating display bar bitmaps 417
data 19, 54
default locations 14
display 12, 13
displaying 112, 195
dspblock.dat 54
dsppdef.dat 54
fontdef.dat 54, 360
FoxDraw color definition 19
GEdit 120
library object 12
moving 309
recovering 355
selecting 393
types of 10
Fill 293
configuring 293
Fill color dynamic 93
Fill level 110
reversing direction 110
Fill level connection 114
creating 114
Fill level dynamic 92
Fill pattern dynamic 93
Filled dynamic 93
Find Replace tabbed page 378
Find/Replace tab 378
Flip commands 69
Flipping 69
objects 69
shortcuts 276
Floating toolbars 156
Focus 77, 78
object 77, 78
Focused object 451
Font Setup dialog box 269
Font Style dialog box 177
fontdef.dat file 360
Fonts 360, 361
adding and removing on Windows 360
adding or removing 360
472
FoxDraw 65
Hershey 65, 66
hershey 451
specifying Hershey 294
Format 100, 101, 102
numeric 100, 112
FoxAPI 49
FoxDraw 1
colors 19
directories 12
displayable area 55, 56, 157
drawing area 55
fonts 65
integration with IACC 4
invoking 353
menu bar 132
objects 64
overview of 1
running multiple instances 353
settings 54
specifying user preferences 264
starting 353
using Help 357
window 1, 131
FoxView 24, 451
indicating status info within trends 24
Full screen display 55
G
g_edit_fd.cfg File 122
Gedit 120
about 120
capabilities 120
commands 124
coordinates 123
file syntax 122
required files 120
running 121
Generating 398
Complexity report 396
complexity report 398
Connection report 397, 398
Exception report 397
exception report 398
Where Used report 398
Generic overlay 357
testing 357
473
Global change/substitution 258

Graphic aliases
exposing 99
resolving 99
Graphic attribute alias 99, 181, 224, 229
Graphic Attributes 16
exposing 16
text fonts 177
Grid 58, 451
Grid dialog box 172
Grid Files tab 173
Grid Settings tab 172
Grid files 58
Grids 58, 71
location of 12
Group trend 24, 30
Grouped objects 22
H
Help 357
using 357
Hershey fonts 65, 66, 177, 294, 451
specifying 294
Hidden Object 339
restoring visibility of 339
Hiding 339
object 339
toolbars 352
History list 452
Horizontal center alignment 69
Horizontal movement 89
I
IACC 4
Increasing 300
size of a pipe 300
Installation notes 48
Invisible edge 293
Invoking 364
DEdit 364, 365
K
Keyboard 273
shortcuts 273
Known issues, moving files between platforms 356
474
L
Labels 62
making unselectable 62
Lasso 56, 57
Layout 69
alignment 69
flipping 69
order 339
Layout operations 71
Letterbug 358, 359
retrieving from server 358
Library objects 9, 21, 452
creating new 278
linked to other library objects 22
linking 279
upgrading 412
Line 152, 283
creating 283
Line gaps
profile plot 44
Line Tool 152
Link Faceplate/Trend dialog box 178
Link from Library dialog box 178
Linked library objects 21
Linked symbols 22
Linking 279
bitmap 279
library object 279
library object into a display 323
object into a base display 327
single block trend to a display 310
standard faceplate to a display 279
trend to a display 280
X/Y plot 280
Links 262
unresolved 262
Links palettes 61
Local database 54, 87, 88
Logical operator 111
M
Marker 452
Marker files 10
Markers 13
location of 12
Markers, converting 416
Match Whole Find String option 382
Matching whole find string 400
475
Menu 132
File 132
pop-up 158
Menu bar 132
Menu definition file 19
Menu items
adding 19
Menu tab 167
Menus 19
configuring 19
custom 19, 167
shortcut 167
Merging 303
conventions 303
Mode 78
Reference 78
Modifying 339
an object’s graphic attributes 16
dynamic elements 86, 87
one or more objects 339
Momentary contact 51
timed contacts 51
Momentary contact action 82
configuring 304
Momentary Contact dialog box 211
Momentary timed contacts 51
Mouse 273
shortcuts 273
Move action 80
Move dynamics 89
Move Horizontal dialog box 214
Move horizontal dynamic 89
Move horizontal/vertical action 83
Move Path dynamics 90
Move path percent dynamic 90
Move path point dynamic 91
Move Vertical dialog box 215
Move vertical dynamic 89
Movement 214
vertical 215
Moving 89, 343
an object 18
object 343
object horizontally or vertically 344
object points 343
object precisely 77
objects 68
point 340
476
toolbar 352
Moving from Windows NT to Solaris 356
Moving objects 89
Multi Create Tool 152
N
Naming limitations 51
NAN values 44
Nested objects 329
New 132
New dialog box 159
New drop-down menu 147
NT 453
NTERSPEC ii
Number of states 452
Numeric format 100
Numeric text 115
creating an updating field 115
Numeric types 112
Numeric update field 115
creating 115
Numeric/Text conversion 112
Numeric/Text dialog box 194
Numeric/Text Entry dialog box 217
O
Object 296
animation 1
applying a convention 296
applying a dynamic 295
changing the focus 77
configuration 4, 75
configuring edge 293
configuring fill 293
configuring read file data for background text 301
configuring text 294
copying from a palette 349
creation 3
cutting 347
deleting 347
detectability 67
determining whether copied or linked 348
duplicating 347
edge 68
filled 66
flipping 69
focus 77
477
focused 69, 451

following another object 90
graphic attributes 16
grouped 22
hiding 339
identifying its points 341
lassoing 56
library 9, 452
making invisible 299
making visible 299
modifying its graphic attributes 16
movement 18, 68
moving 343
moving horizontally 344
moving horizontally or vertically 89
moving points 343
moving to the back 339
moving vertically 344
pasting 348
restoring visibility of a hidden object 339
rotating 345
rotation 70
scaling 346
selecting 76, 273
selecting an undetectable object 339
selecting from a palette 349
selection shortcuts 273
snapping center to nearest grid intersection 342
snapping point to nearest grid intersection 342
snapping reference point to nearest grid intersection 343
unfilled 66
visibility 67
Object Browser dialog box 270
Object Manager
variables 50
Object manager list variable 46
bit extensions 51
momentary timed contacts 51
naming limitations 51
types of 50
Objects 340
3-D 443
aligning 69
copied verses linked 60
copying from palettes 349
creating multiple 347
drawing 152
in FoxDraw 64
478
layout 71
library 21
modifying one or more 339
moving 89
ordering 339
rotating 64
selecting 273
setting default graphic attributes 16
spacing evenly 340
Obtaining 353
statistics for the display 353
Open 132
Open .g file 161
Open dialog box 161
Open display 166
command script 166
Open display action 81, 200, 207
Open Display dialog box 200, 207
Open drop-down menu 148
Open overlay action 81, 202
Open Overlay dialog box 202
Open Overlay More Attributes dialog box 204
Operator 78
actions 79
logical 111
Operator action 78, 200
adding 200
bit extensions for 104
configuring 304
connect variable 83
creating a horizontal move 307
display command 81
exposing 79
momentary contact 82
move 80
move horizontal/vertical 83
open display 81
open overlay 81
opening a display 200, 207
opening an overlay 202
relative pick 82, 210
Select 79, 80
set text contents 80, 82
Optimized update 452
Optional 98
Ordering 339
objects 339
Overlay 9, 277, 278
configuring 301
creating a generic overlay 291
479
file types 10
opening 202
positioning 170
sticky 453
testing 357
Overlay display 452
Overlays 8
about 8
Overview 1
FoxDraw 1
P
Palette 452
browser utility 180
copying with the Palette Browser 351
creating 289, 292
enabling support of an external palette 350
how FoxDraw copies a palette 60
opening 349
selecting an object 349
tips for building 62
window 9
Palette Browser 439
copying a palette 351
Palette Browser dialog box 442
Palettes 10, 21, 58, 61
about 58
external 59
links palettes 61
location of 12
names in tree control 60
recognized by FoxDraw 59
resolution of objects 62
with red objects 61
Parameter 399
replacing 394, 399
Parameters 364
dedit 364
Parts list
Pasting
object 348
pdf_fdf Utility 409
Pens 236, 237
Percent of full screen coordinates syntax 205
Pie arc 95
creating 283
Pie Tool 152
Pipe 299
480
configuring with fill attributes 299

increasing size of 300
Platforms
known issues when moving files 356
Plots 31
configuring an X/Y plot 310
creating a new X/Y plot 280
linking an X/Y plot to a display 280
X/Y 31
Point 452
Point Mode 65
Point Modes 64, 65, 291, 346
Point modes commands 64
Point Tool 152
Points 340
adding 340
deleting 340
identifying 341
moving 340
reference 64
setting a reference point 341
Polygon 152
creating 284
Polygon Tool 76
Polyline 152
creating 284
Polyline Tool 152
Pop-Up menu 158
Precision 344
adjusting arrow keys 344
Precision movement 77
Preferences 264, 393
dedit 393
specifying 264
user 63
Pre-requisites 312
Problems
moving files between platforms 356
Process 17, 84
connecting a dynamic 17, 84
Process range 110
Profile plot
line gaps 44
Properties 8, 393
display 8
setting for dedit 393
Properties Dialog Box 390
Properties dialog box 389, 390
Properties of dynamics
exposing 17
481
Protecting 306
an action with a protection ID 306
Protection ID 306
protecting an action 306
Pulse 82
momentary contact 82
Pushbutton 116
creating a ramp 116
R
Radius dynamic 95
Ramp 305
Ramp action 83
Ramp dialog box 212
Ramp pushbutton 116
creating 116
Range 227, 237, 238
definitions 54
editing 254
entering 110
name 110
process name 110
selection 87
range 227
Range alias 96, 100, 181, 227
editing 396
replacing 401
Range aliases
exposing 100
resolving 100
Range data 87
retrieval 87
Ranges tab 387
Read file conversion 112
Read File dialog box 195
Recover 132
Recovering
displays 355
Rectangle 285
creating 285
Rectangle Tool 152
Redo 354
Reference 346
Reference mode 64, 65, 78
Reference point 64, 342, 452
changing 342
setting 341
setting or checking 341
Reference points 91
482
rotating on 96
Relative pick 119
creating 119
Relative pick action 82, 210
Relative Pick dialog box 210
Replacing 394
aliases 400
any text string 399
block name 394
compound name 394
parameter name 394
range alias 401
Reports 363
Complexity 366, 367
Connection 366
Exception 371
Where Used 372
Resetting 298
dynamic element 298
Resizing 352
toolbar 352
Resolve exposed properties 315
Resolving
aliases 98
aliases in a library object 315
dynamics 84
graphic aliases 99
range aliases 100
text aliases 98
Restoring 339
visibility of a hidden object 339
Retains 264
Reversing 110
direction 110
Root group 203
Rotate dynamic 96
Rotate toolbar 155
Rotating
object 345
objects 64
Rotating needle 115
creating 115
Rotation 110
reversing direction 110
Rotation commands 70
S
Same size commands 71
Save As dialog box 161
483
Scalar % 91
Scale data 87
retrieval 87
Scale dynamics 91, 92
Scaling 95
arcs 95
circles 95
object 71, 346
sectors 95
shortcuts 275
Scan delay 453
Scan rate 165, 453
Screen 55
coordinates 55
Screen captures 274
Script 306
display 450
embedded 450
executing 306
Script tab 166
Scroll region object 286
creating 286
Sector 95, 285
creating 285
creating a three-point sector 285
scaling 95
Sector Tool 152
Select action 79, 80
Select Block Type dialog box 178
Select Convention File dialog box 258
Select Faceplate dialog box 178
Select Palette dialog box 179, 350
enabling external palette support 350
Select Tool 152
Selecting 76, 393
display files 393
object 76, 77
object from a palette 349
objects 273
undetectable object 339
Server
Set Default Attributes dialog box 175, 180
Edge tab 176
Fill tab 176
Text tab 177
Set Selection Attributes dialog box 175
Edge tab 176
Fill tab 176
Text tab 177
484
Set text contents action 80, 82

Setting 341
maximum undo number 354
reference point 341
user preferences 54
Setting Graphic Attributes 325
Setting Optional Configuration 325
Settings 54
FoxDraw 54
Shared variable 453
Shortcut 19
Shortcut menus 19, 167
Shortcuts 273
aligning objects 276
configuration 273
drawing 274
editing 275
flipping an object 276
mouse and keyboard 273
moving an object 275
object selection 273
rotating an object 275
scaling an object 275
Simulating 118
3-D animation 118
Single block trend 310
linking to a display 310
Size 71
changing 71, 91
Snap commands 71
Snap Gravity 71
using 345
Snap to Grid 58, 291
Snapping 71
object center to nearest grid intersection 342
object point to nearest grid intersection 342
object reference to nearest grid intersection 343
Spaces in match, find and replace strings 401
Special Refresh 137
Specifying 297
access levels 231, 242
bit extension 300
blink rate 297
Hershey font 294
Standard toolbar 147
State table 111
used to display color 114
used to display text 113
States, number of 452
Statistics 171, 376
485
items in a display 171

obtaining counts for the display 353
Status bar 157
Sticky overlay 453
String variables 46, 112
updating 112
Substitution 258, 259, 260, 261
global 258, 259, 261
Substitution list 453
SYMBOL
linked 22
Symbols 10, 21
location of 12
Syntax
character coordinates 205
percent of full screen coordinates 205
virtual coordinates 205
T
Table 104
bit state 104
dynamic attributes 86
dynamics 86
Tank 114
creating with fill level connection 114
T-Bar 117
creating 117
Template 287, 288, 453
Invensys/Foxboro supplied 52
sizes 52
using to create a new display 278
Templates 13
location of 12
Testing 357
generic overlay 357
Text 286
background 286
changing 117
changing based on a discrete state 256
configuring 294
copying to clipboard 63
creating 117
creating background text 286
display based on a state table 113
flipping 69
rotating 96
substitution 256
Text alias 79, 98, 99, 181, 185, 188, 189, 191, 194, 195, 199, 209, 210, 225
486
Text aliases
exposing 98
resolving 98
Text color dynamic 95
Text contents attribute 112
Text contents dynamic 94
Text height dynamic 95
Text object 294
configuring 294
Text Replace tab 382
Text string
replacing 394, 399
Text Tool 152
Text types 112
Text update field 115
creating 115
Three-dimensional objects 443
Three-Point Sector 285
creating 285
Three-Point Sector Tool 152
Threshold conversion 111, 191
Threshold conversion example 119
Threshold State dialog box 191
Time 171
complexity index 171
necessary to call up a display 353
Tip of the Day 146, 158
Tips 62
building a palette 62
building displays 76
Toolbars 72, 147
about 147
commands 72
displaying 352
Draw 152
floating 156
hiding 352
moving or resizing 352
Rotate 155, 156
ToolTips 157
displaying 352
showing 352
viewing 157
Tree control 453
Trend 454
Trend Objects
changing the background color 446
Trend template 266
using a custom trend template 266
Trends 10, 21, 24, 181, 231, 236, 240, 241, 243, 253, 254
487
about 24
access levels 25
area presentation 26
configuration 25, 241, 253
configuring 234, 246
configuring single block trend 310
custom trend template 266
group trend 30
linking a single block trend to a display 310
presentation 25
using bit extensions for connections 103
Trigger 112
connection 46, 112
variable 46
U
Undo 354, 355
Undo buffer 63
Unresolved links 262
Unresolved Links dialog box 262
User options 63
User Options dialog box 264
Dynamics tab 266
General tab 264
Monitor tab 268
Servers tab 267
User preferences 54, 63
User-built faceplate 309
Using
complex objects in a display 334
library object configured with valve and pump specification
a useful library object 323
library object with aliases in a display 315
library object with optional configuration
library object with graphic attributes 327
Using spaces in match, find and replace strings 401
Utility
bdf_m1 416
fdf_i 417
fdf_version 412
fdf_wsmfdf 424
pdf_fdf 409
V
Validating 399
connections 399
Validation 393
488

Values 110
clamped 110
Variable
object manager list 46
Variable types 50
Object Manager 50
Vertical center alignment 69
Vertical movement 89
View 55
about the 55
Viewing 354
display in FoxView 354
Virtual coordinates syntax 205
Visibility 67
object 67
Showing and hiding comment objects 357
Visibility dynamic 92
W
Where Used report 372
generating 398
Widescreen monitor conversion 2, 421
.fdf4_3 files 10
grid sizes 53
Width 94
edge 94
Window 1, 131, 376
DEdit 376, 377
FoxDraw 1, 131
World coordinate system 454
Writing 399
X
X/Y plots 31
about 31
configuring 310
Z
Zoom commands 56
489
Invensys Operations Management
5601 Granite Parkway Suite 1000
Plano, TX 75024
United States of America
http://www.iom.invensys.com
Global Customer Support

Inside U.S.: 1-866-746-6477
Outside U.S.: 1-508-549-2424 or contact your
local Invensys representative.
Website: http://support.ips.invensys.com
green_line.ai

B0700be F PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B0700be F PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B0700be F PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main components of a FoxDraw display?

What are the main components of a FoxDraw display?

What are some of the tools available in FoxDraw?

What are some of the tools available in FoxDraw?

inv_foxboro_brand_reg.

I/A Series® System

Copyright 2004-2012 Invensys Systems, Inc.

SOFTWARE LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION

1. FoxDraw Software Overview ............................................................................................. 1

AutoCAD Versions ........................................................................................................ 15

X/Y Plot Data File Keywords ......................................................................................... 38

2. Drawing and Editing ....................................................................................................... 55

High, Medium, or Low Resolution Objects ....................................................................... 62

3. Object Configuration ...................................................................................................... 75

Use Bitmaps Economically ............................................................................................ 76

Move Path Point Dynamic ................................................................................................. 91

Discrete Conversion ......................................................................................................... 111

4. Window and Dialog Boxes ............................................................................................ 131

Object Menu ............................................................................................................... 141

Select Faceplate Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 178

Configure Objects Dialog Box - Pens Tab ........................................................................ 234

Editing Shortcuts ............................................................................................................. 275

Configuring a Text Object ............................................................................................... 294

Complex Objects or Nested Objects ................................................................................. 329

Displaying ToolTips ........................................................................................................ 352

Appendix A. Display Edit or DEdit ................................................................................... 363

DEdit Window and Dialog Boxes ......................................................................................... 376

Appendix B. Display Convert Utility................................................................................. 403

Appendix C. Widescreen Conversion for Displays............................................................. 421

Appendix D. External Palette Browser .............................................................................. 439

Directory Preservation ................................................................................................. 440

Appendix E. Frequently Asked Questions.......................................................................... 443

Appendix F. Glossary......................................................................................................... 449

Index .................................................................................................................................. 457

4-23. Close Display/Overlay Dialog Box ............................................................................ 207

(1920x1080 Resolution) ........................................................................................... 421

3-23. State Table ................................................................................................................ 113

4-39. Discrete State Dialog Box - Options ......................................................................... 188

4-87. Pens Tab for Trends .................................................................................................. 235

4-135. Options for Scaling or Rotating an Object or Selection ............................................. 276

The FoxDraw Window

Figure 1-1. FoxDraw Window - Standard Definition (4:3 Aspect Ratio)

Figure 1-2. FoxDraw Window - Widescreen (16:9 Aspect Ratio)

Table 1-1. Object Types

Copying a Library Object

Table 1-2. Link Commands

Command Allows you to copy

Table 1-2. Link Commands (Continued)

Command Allows you to copy

Copying Objects Composed of Primitive Objects

Object Configuration Menu

Integration with IACC

Display File Linked Object

By integrating the FoxDraw application, IACC offers the following capabilities:

Synchronizing Displays and IACC

Synchronizing Changes Within IACC

Table 1-3. Display Types

Display type Description

FoxDraw File Types